VFD Documents

GEOIL&GAS ELAP110kVAACTIVEFRONTENDVFDPROJECT JOBINFORMATIONPACKAGE SERVTECH,INC JOB#11615 12/10/12 TableofContents 1.TitlePage 2.ElectricalSchematic 3.EnclosureDetail 4.SubpanelLayout 5.VFDDimensions 6.VFDRatingsChart(SelectionHighlighted) 7.ABBACS800U31HardwareManual 8.
8.ABBACS800FirmwareManual 9.ABBACS800ESP/PCPFirmwareManual
ABB #OS200J03 Fused Disconnect 200A FUSE 200A FUSE 200A FUSE
Marathon #EPBAD71 Distribution Block #2/0 DLO L1 L7 L2 L6 L3 SA1 #6 AWG L8 SA2 #10 AWG SURGE ARRESTOR Citel #DS43-480 Surge Suppresion #10 AWG
GND
L4 L5
L9 #14 THHN CP1 CP2
SA3
L4 #2/0 DLO X21 1 VREF 2 GND 3 AI1+
L5
L6
480 VAC IN U1 V1 W1 PE
Wiring Legend
480V 480V Field 24VDC 24VDC Field 120VAC 120V N Ground
Apollo
I/O Board Terminals
FB-1 4A C3
480 VAC
FB-2 4A C4
Marathon #EPBAD74 Distribution Block TB #2
INPUT
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0.5A 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 G
1 8 8 5 9 6
750 VA
4
#16 THHN 8A 9A 8A 9A 12A (Optional) Field installed E-stop or pressure switch HAND 16A 14A OFF AUTO 19 (Optional) Field installed remote AUTO switch
J119
J129
+ Out 1 - Analog + Out 2
- Analog
- Digital + I/O 1 - Digital + I/O 2 - Digital + I/O 3 - Digital + I/O 4 - Digital + I/O 5 - Digital + I/O 6
5
N1
2
C5
5 6 8 9 10
#16 THHN
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
J115
- +- +
8A
AC IN AC IN
- Digital + I/O 7 - Digital + I/O 8 - Digital + I/O 9 - Digital + I/O 10 - Digital + I/O 11 - Digital + I/O 12
9A
120 VAC TO 120 VAC CONTROL CIRCUIT
7 8 9 10 11 12
16 20
AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2X22 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 +24 +24
ABB ACS800-U31-0120-5
SPEED REFERENCE
GND
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
NL
20A
12A
H4 N4
FB-3 10A
H1
12A 14A 16A 17A
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
17 10 18 14
#14 THHN H3 N3
ARRESTOR L SURGE N
20A H1 H2 H3 H4 N1 N2 N3 N4 F2 FAN N2 Jumper between 19 and 18 must be installed if no remote AUTO switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GND1 10 GND1 11 DI IL 12
NC COM NO
START/STOP HAND EXTERNAL FAULT EXT1/EXT2 SELECTION(SELECTS PID CONTROL) RUN ENABLE START/ STOP PID AUTO
Citel #DS42-120 Surge Suppresion
H1 H2 H3 H4H5 N1 N2 N3 N4 F H6 H7 N5 N6 N7N8 F1
TB #1
X25
RUN
GND
NC
F1 H7 2A T-STAT
NO NC COM NO
X27
FAULT OUTPUT
U2 V 2
U2 V2 W2 TCI #KTRMG160A Line Reactor
W2
#2/0 DLO
PE GND
TCI CAP
COM
X26 FAULT
KCAP10A6B
C1A C1B #6 AWG
C1C
T1 A1
A2 B2 C2
110 kVA
24 + VDC
T2
B1
1 N6
SURGE ARRESTOR
L N
Citel #DS210-24DC Surge Suppresion Marathon #EPBAD71 Distribution Block
H6
N IDEC PS5R-SC24 24 VDC Power Supply L1
T3 C1
GND
GND
ELAP Pump 110 kVA VFD 480VAC 3 PHASE POWER

.
Drawn
11/5/12 12/4/12 1 OF 3
AK AK
DWG#
Approved
Index
Code
REV. 0
Servtech, Inc.
Job No. 11615 A
AAA
FUSED DISCONNECT HANDLE
TOP VIEW
RAIN HOOD
22.94" DOOR
24.00"
24.00"
4.57"
BOTTOM VIEW
RAIN HOOD
13.24" 19.75" 19.75"
1.13
FUSED DISCONNECT HANDLE
12.88"
12.34"
RAIN HOOD
<-- GRAIN -->
11.63"
RAIN HOOD
4.57"
17.56" 1.75" 1.75 3.63"
62.50" Door
3-PT. DOOR HARDWARE
3-PT. DOOR HARDWARE
9.50" 8.75"
RAIN HOOD
4.91"
<-- GRAIN -->
1.13"
4.91"
10.56"
RAIN HOOD
72.00"
60.25"
LEFT VIEW
FRONT VIEW
RIGHT VIEW
BACK VIEW
ELAP Pump 110 kVA VFD NEMA 3 Enclosure Detail
Drawn
11/5/12 12/10/12 2 of 3
AK AK
DWG#
Approved
Index
Code
REV. 0
Servtech, Inc. Job No. 11615 A AAA
SUBPANEL FRONT VIEW 19.94" 18.25"
8.59"
ABB Fused Disconnect #OS200J03
Marathon Dist Block #EPBAD71

6.5"
4.75"
7.15" 11.81"
4.75"
Notes 1. Sides of enclosure will have Panduit attached for cable routing. 2. TCI Line Reactor will sit on the bottom of the mounted on unistrut.
3.40"
ABB VFD ACS800-U31-0120-5
Citel Surge Suppression #DS43-480
4.50"
2.75"
Hammond 750VA CPT

5.00"
59.94"
58.25" 38.19"
TB#1 120VAC Terminal Blocks

2"
4.00"
6.5"
4.00" 7.00"
4.75"
ELAP Pump 110 kVA Subpanel Layout
Drawn
2"
11/5/12 12/10/12 3 OF 3
AK AK
DWG#
Approved
TB#2 24VDC Terminal Blocks
TCI Capacitor #KCAP10A6B Cap hangs behind Line Reactor
8.00"
Index
Code
REV. 0
Servtech, Inc. Job No. 11615 A AAA
US gland/conduit plate Diameters of knockout holes: 63.5 mm [2.50 in.], 22.7 mm [.89 in.]. The unit is UL type 1 when equipped with the US gland plate.
Frame size R6 (IP21, UL type 1)
Dimensional drawings
117
68405726 A
Low voltage AC drives
ABB industrial drives ACS800, single drives 0.55 to 5600 kW Catalog
Wall-mounted low harmonic drives ACS800-31, up to 110 kW
Easy low harmonic solution There is increasing concern among end users and power companies about the harmful effects of harmonics. Harmonic distortion may disturb or even damage sensitive equipment connected in the same environment. Harmonics also cause additional losses in the network. Harmonic standards are thus becoming stricter and there is a growing demand for low harmonic solutions. ABBs low harmonic drives offer an easy low harmonic solution incorporated in the drive. The solution to overcome harmonic issues simply comes with the drive without the need for additional filtering equipment or complicated multi-pulse transformer arrangements. Compact solution The ACS800-31 is low harmonic drive in a single, complete wall-mounted package. It has an active supply unit and low harmonic line filter integrated in the drive resulting in less cabling and installation work on site. This compact drive package itself has extremely low line harmonics and thus meets the strictest harmonic standards without any need for additional filtering equipment. Due to the active supply unit it always operates with power factor 1. The power ratings of the ACS800-31 start from 5.5 kW heavy duty rating and go up to 110 kW continuous load rating. It is available in the IP21 protection degree. In line with the ACS800 series, an extensive range of external options are available including EMC filters and extension modules for additional I/O.
Main standard hardware features Wall-mounting IP21 protection degree Active supply unit inside Low harmonic filter inside Long lifetime cooling fan and capacitors Extensive, programmable I/O with galvanically isolated inputs Three I/O and fieldbus extension slots inside Alphanumeric, multilingual control panel with startup assistant feature Large power terminals allowing the use of a wide range of cable sizes Options for ACS800-31 Built-in options: EMC filter for 1 st environment, restricted distribution according to EN 61800-3 (category C2) EMC filter for 2nd environment, unrestricted distribution according to EN 61800-3 (category C3) Analog and digital I/O extension modules Fieldbus modules Pulse encoder interface module External options: Output filters Brake chopper and resistor Safe torque-off (STO)
18 ABB industrial drives ACS800 single drives | Catalog
Ratings, types and voltages ACS800-31
ACS800
31
XXXX
2 3 5 7
Noise level dBA voltage 70 70 70 70 70 73 73 73 voltage 70 70 70 70 70 70 73 73 73 voltage 70 70 70 70 70 70 73 73 73 voltage 76 76 76
XXXX
Nominal ratings I cont. max A U N = 230 34 47 59 75 88 120 150 169 UN = 400 34 38 47 59 72 86 120 150 165 UN = 500 31 36 47 58 70 82 120 139 156 UN = 690 57 3) 79 93 4) I max A V (Range 52 68 90 118 137 168 234 264 V (Range 52 61 68 90 118 137 168 234 264 V (Range 52 61 68 90 118 130 168 234 264 V (Range 86 120 142
No-overload Light-overload use use P cont. max IN PN kW A kW 208 to 240 V). The power ratings are 7.5 32 7.5 11 45 11 15 56 15 22 69 18.5 22 83 22 37 114 30 45 143 45 45 157 45 380 to 415 V). The power ratings are 15 32 15 18.5 36 18.5 22 45 22 30 56 30 37 69 37 45 83 45 55 114 55 75 143 75 90 157 75 380 to 500 V). The power ratings are 18.5 29 18.5 22 34 22 30 45 30 37 55 37 45 67 45 55 78 45 75 114 75 90 132 90 90 110 148 2) 525 to 690 V). The power ratings are 55 54 45 75 75 55 90 88 75
Heavy-duty use Ihd Phd A kW valid at nominal 26 5.5 38 7.5 45 11 59 15 72 18.5 84 22 117 30 132 37 valid at nominal 26 11 34 15 38 18.5 45 22 59 30 65 30 88 45 117 55 132 75 valid at nominal 25 15 30 18.5 37 22 47 30 57 37 37 62 1) 88 55 114 75 125 75 valid at nominal 43 37 60 55 71 55
Heat dissipation
Air flow
Type designation
Frame size
W 230 V. 505 694 910 1099 1315 1585 2125 2530 400 V. 550 655 760 1000 1210 1450 1750 2350 2800 500 V. 655 760 1000 1210 1450 1750 2350 2800 3400 690 V. 1750 2350 2800
m 3/h 350 350 350 350 350 405 405 405 350 350 350 350 350 350 405 405 405 350 350 350 350 350 350 405 405 405 405 405 405 ACS800-31-0011-2 ACS800-31-0016-2 ACS800-31-0020-2 ACS800-31-0025-2 ACS800-31-0030-2 ACS800-31-0040-2 ACS800-31-0050-2 ACS800-31-0060-2 ACS800-31-0016-3 ACS800-31-0020-3 ACS800-31-0025-3 ACS800-31-0030-3 ACS800-31-0040-3 ACS800-31-0050-3 ACS800-31-0060-3 ACS800-31-0070-3 ACS800-31-0100-3 ACS800-31-0020-5 ACS800-31-0025-5 ACS800-31-0030-5 ACS800-31-0040-5 ACS800-31-0050-5 ACS800-31-0060-5 ACS800-31-0070-5 ACS800-31-0100-5 ACS800-31-0120-5 ACS800-31-0060-7 ACS800-31-0070-7 ACS800-31-0100-7 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R6 R6 R6 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R6 R6 R6 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R6 R6 R6 R6 R6 R6
Notes: 1) 65 A is allowed at 460 V. 2) 156 A is allowed at 460 V. 3) 62 A is allowed at 575 V. 4) 99 A is allowed at 575 V.
Enclosure
Degree of protection: IP21 (Standard) Paint color: NCS 1502-Y (RAL 9002/PMS 420C)
Dimensions
Frame size R5 R6 IP21 Height mm 816 970 Width mm 265 300 Depth mm 390 440 Weight kg 62 100
Nominal ratings Icont.max Rated current available continuously without overloadability at 40 C. Imax Maximum output current. Available for 10 s at start, otherwise as long as allowed by drive temperature. Note: max. motor shaft power is 150% Phd. Typical ratings: No-overload use Pcont.max Typical motor power in no-overload use. Light-overload use Continuous current allowing 110% IN for 1 min / 5 min at 40 C. IN PN Typical motor power in light-overload use. Heavy-duty use Continuous current allowing 150% Ihd for 1 min / 5 min at 40 C. Ihd Typical motor power in heavy-duty use. Phd The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range. The ratings apply at 40 C ambient temperature. At higher temperatures (up to 50 C) the derating is 1% / 1 C. For sine lter selections and ratings, contact ABB.
Catalog | ABB industrial drives ACS800 single drives 19
ACS800
Hardware Manual ACS800-31 Drives (5.5 to 110 kW) ACS800-U31 Drives (7.5 to 125 HP)
ACS800 Single Drive Manuals

HARDWARE MANUALS (appropriate manual is included in the delivery) ACS800-01/U1 Hardware Manual 0.55 to 110 kW (0.75 to 150 HP) 3AFE64382101 (English) ACS800-01/U1 Marine Supplement 3AFE64291275 (English) ACS800-02/U2 Hardware Manual 90 to 500 kW (125 to 600 HP) 3AFE64567373 (English) ACS800-11/U11 Hardware Manual 5.5 to110 kW (7.5 to 125 HP) 3AFE68367883 (English) ACS800-31/U31 Hardware Manual 5.5 to110 kW (7.5 to 125 HP) 3AFE68599954 (English) ACS800-04 Hardware Manual 0.55 to 132 kW 3AFE68372984 (English) ACS800-04/04M/U4 Hardware Manual 45 to 560 kW (60 to 600 HP) 3AFE64671006 (English) ACS800-04/04M/U4 Cabinet Installation 45 to 560 kW (60 to 600 HP) 3AFE68360323 (English) ACS800-07/U7 Hardware Manual 45 to 560 kW (50 to 600 HP) 3AFE64702165 (English) ACS800-07/U7 Dimensional Drawings 45 to 560 kW (50 to 600 HP) 3AFE64775421 ACS800-07 Hardware Manual 500 to 2800 kW 3AFE64731165 (English) ACS800-17 Hardware Manual 75 to 1120 kW 3AFE64681338 (English) ACS800-37 Hardware Manual 160 to 2800 kW (200 to 2700 HP) 3AFE68557925 (English) Safety instructions Electrical installation planning Mechanical and electrical installation Motor control and I/O board (RMIO) Maintenance Technical data Dimensional drawings Resistor braking
FIRMWARE MANUALS, SUPPLEMENTS AND GUIDES (appropriate documents are included in the delivery) Standard Application Program Firmware Manual 3AFE64527592 (English) System Application Program Firmware Manual 3AFE63700177 (English) Application Program Template Firmware Manual 3AFE64616340 (English) Master/Follower 3AFE64590430 (English) Pump Control Application Program Firmware Manual 3AFE68478952 (English) Extruder Control Program Supplement 3AFE64648543 (English) Centrifuge Control Program Supplement 3AFE64667246 (English) Traverse Control Program Supplement 3AFE64618334 (English) Crane Control Program Firmware Manual 3BSE11179 (English) Adaptive Programming Application Guide 3AFE64527274 (English) OPTION MANUALS (delivered with optional equipment) Fieldbus Adapters, I/O Extension Modules etc.
ACS800-31 Drives 5.5 to 110 kW ACS800-U31 Drives 7.5 to 125 HP Hardware Manual
3AFE68599954 Rev A EN EFFECTIVE: 14.10.2005
2005 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.
Update Notice
The notice concerns the following ACS800-31 Drives (5.5 Code: 3AUA0000059448 Rev B to 110 kW) and ACS800-U31 Drives (7.5 to 125 HP) Valid: from 01.09.2010 until the release of the next revision of Hardware Manuals: the manual Code Revision Language Contents: 3AFE68599954 3AFE68626552 3AFE68626561 A A A English German French EN DE FR The headings in this update notice refer to the modified subsections in the original English manual. Each heading also includes a page number and a classifier NEW, CHANGED, or DELETED. The page number refers to the page number in the original English manual. The classifier describes the type of the modification.
NEW (page 6): Safety / Installation and maintenance work

After maintaining or modifying a drive safety circuit or changing circuit boards inside the module, retest the functioning of the safety circuit according to the start-up instructions. Do not change the electrical installations of the drive except for the essential control and power connections. Changes may affect the safety performance or operation of the drive unexpectedly. All customer-made changes are on the customer's responsibility. [...] Note: The Safe torque off function (option +Q967) does not remove the voltage from the main and auxiliary circuits.
NEW (page 10): Safety / Operation

The Safe torque off function (option +Q967) can be used for stopping the drive in emergency stop situations. In the normal operating mode, use the Stop command instead.
NEW (page 20): Contents

Installation of ASTO board (Safe torque off, +Q967) describes the electrical installation of the optional Safe torque off function.
CHANGED (page 22): Installation and commissioning flowchart

See Electrical installation, Motor control and I/O board (RMIO), Installation of AGPS board (Prevention of Unexpected Start, +Q950), Installation of ASTO board (Safe torque off, +Q967) and the optional module manual delivered with the module.
Update Notice
NEW (page 31): Type code

The table below contains the new option code definition for the Safe torque off function.
Code +Q967 Description Safe torque off (STO)
NEW (page 49): Emergency stop

Note: If you add or modify the wiring in the drive safety circuits, ensure that the appropriate standards (e.g. IEC 61800-5-1, EN 62061, EN/ISO 13849-1 and -2) and the ABB guidelines are met. After making the changes, verify the operation of the safety function by testing it.
NEW (page 51): Safe torque off

The drive supports the Safe torque off (STO) function according to standards EN 61800-5-2:2007; EN/ISO 13849-1:2008, IEC 61508, and EN 62061:2005. The function also corresponds to an uncontrolled stop in accordance with category 0 of EN 60204-1 and prevention of unexpected start-up of EN 1037. The STO may be used where power removal is required to prevent an unexpected start. The function disables the control voltage of the power semiconductors of the drive output stage, thus preventing the inverter from generating the voltage required to rotate the motor (see the diagram below). By using this function, short-time operations (like cleaning) and/or maintenance work on non-electrical parts of the machinery can be performed without switching off the power supply to the drive.
Update Notice
Update Notice
WARNING! The Safe torque off function does not disconnect the voltage of the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the drive system from the main supply. Note: The Safe torque off function can be used for stopping the drive in emergency stop situations. In the normal operating mode, use the Stop command instead. If a running drive is stopped by using the function, the drive will trip and stop by coasting. If this is not acceptable, e.g. causes danger, the drive and machinery must be stopped using the appropriate stopping mode before using this function. Note concerning permanent magnet motor drives in case of a multiple IGBT power semiconductor failure: In spite of the activation of the Safe torque off function, the drive system can produce an alignment torque which maximally rotates the motor shaft by 180/p degrees. p denotes the pole pair number. Note: If you add or modify the wiring in the drive safety circuits, ensure that the appropriate standards (e.g. IEC 61800-5-1, EN 62061, EN/ISO 13849-1 and -2) and the ABB guidelines are met. After making the changes, verify the operation of the safety function by testing it.
NEW (page 75): Installation of ASTO board (Safe torque off, +Q967)
What this chapter contains This chapter describes electrical installation of the optional Safe torque off function (+Q967) of the drive. specifications of the board. Safe torque off (+Q967) The optional Safe torque off function includes an ASTO board, which is connected to the drive and an external power supply. See also chapter Planning the electrical installation, page 50. Installation of the ASTO board WARNING! Dangerous voltages can be present at the ASTO board even when the 24 V supply is switched off. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual and the instruction in this chapter when working on the ASTO board. Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the mains (input power) and the 24 V source for the ASTO board is switched off during installation and maintenance. If the drive is already connected to the mains, wait for 5 min after disconnecting mains power.
Update Notice
See page 24 for location of terminal block X41 of the drive page 6 (in this Update Notice) for the circuit diagram page 6 (in this Update Notice) for the dimensions of the ASTO-11C board section ASTO-11C in chapter Technical data for the technical data of the ASTO11C board. Note: Maximum cable length between ASTO terminal block X2 and the drive terminal block is restricted to 3 metres. Connect the ASTO board as follows: Remove the cover of the enclosed ASTO unit by undoing the fixing screws (1). Ground the ASTO unit via the bottom plate of the enclosure or via terminal X1:2 or X1:4 of the ASTO board. Connect the cable delivered with the kit between terminal block X2 of the ASTO board (2) and drive terminal block X41. Connect a cable between connector X1 of the ASTO board (3) and the 24 V source. Fasten the cover of the ASTO unit back with screws.
X2
X1
24 V
Update Notice
Circuit diagram The diagram below shows the connection between the ASTO board and the drive when it is ready. For an example diagram of a complete Safe torque off circuit, see page 3 (in this Update Notice).
3AUA0000069101
Dimensions The dimensions of the ASTO board are the same as the dimensions of the AGPS board. See Dimensional drawing on page 74.
NEW (page 111): ASTO-11C

Nominal input voltage Nominal input current X1 terminal sizes Nominal output current X2 terminal block type Ambient temperature Relative humidity Dimensions (with enclosure) Weight (with enclosure) 24 V DC 40 mA (20mA per channel) 4 x 2.5 mm2 0.4 A JST B4P-VH 0...50C Max. 90%, no condensation allowed 167 x 128 x 52 mm (Height x Weight x Depth) 0.75 kg
Update Notice
NEW (page 111): Ambient conditions

Modules with option +Q967: the installation site altitude in operation is 0 to 2000 m.
Operation installed for stationary use Installation site altitude
[...]
Modules with option +Q967 : 0 to 2000 m
Update Notice
Update Notice
Safety instructions
What this chapter contains
This chapter contains the safety instructions which you must follow when installing, operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or damage may occur to the drive, motor or driven equipment. Read the safety instructions before you work on the unit.
To which products this chapter applies

This chapter applies to the ACS800-01/U1, ACS800-11/U11, ACS800-31/U31, ACS800-02/U2 and ACS800-04/04M/U4 of frame sizes R7 and R8.
Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual: warnings and notes. Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger. Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a subject. The warning symbols are used as follows: Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and/or damage to the equipment. General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment. Electrostatic discharge warning warns of electrostatic discharge which can damage the equipment.
Safety instructions
Installation and maintenance work

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor. WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment:
Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive. Never work on the drive, motor cable or motor when main power is applied. After disconnecting the input power, always wait for 5 min to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive, motor or motor cable. Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm) that: 1. voltage between drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and the frame is close to 0 V. 2. voltage between terminals UDC+ and UDC- and the frame is close to 0 V.
Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may cause dangerous voltages inside the drive even when the main power on the drive is switched off. Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive or drive modules. When reconnecting the motor cable, always check that the phase order is correct.
Note:
The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high voltage when the input power is on, regardless of whether the motor is running or not. The brake control terminals (UDC+, UDC-, R+ and R- terminals) carry a dangerous DC voltage (over 500 V). Depending on the external wiring, dangerous voltages (115 V, 220 V or 230 V) may be present on the terminals of relay outputs RO1 to RO3. ACS800-02 with enclosure extension: The main switch on the cabinet door does not remove the voltage from the input busbars of the drive. Before working on the drive, isolate the whole drive from the supply. ACS800-04M, ACS800-07: The Prevention of Unexpected Start function does not remove the voltage from the main and auxiliary circuits. At installation sites above 2000 m (6562 ft), the terminals of the RMIO board and optional modules attached to the board do not fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178.
Safety instructions
Grounding These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the grounding of the drive. WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury, death, increased electromagnetic interference and equipment malfunction:
Ground the drive, motor and adjoining equipment to ensure personnel safety in all circumstances, and to reduce electromagnetic emission and pick-up. Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations. In a multiple-drive installation, connect each drive separately to protective earth (PE). ACS800-01, ACS800-11, ACS800-31: In European CE compliant installations and in other installations where EMC emissions must be minimized, make a 360 high frequency grounding of cable entries in order to suppress electromagnetic disturbances. In addition, connect the cable shields to protective earth (PE) in order to meet safety regulations. ACS800-04 (45 to 560 kW) and ACS800-02 in first environment: make a 360 high frequency grounding of motor cable entries at the cabinet lead-through.
Do not install a drive with EMC filter option +E202 or +E200 (available for ACS800-01 and ACS800-11, ACS800-31 only) on an ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power system.
Note:
Power cable shields are suitable for equipment grounding conductors only when adequately sized to meet safety regulations. As the normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA DC (stated by EN 50178, 5.2.11.1), a fixed protective earth connection is required.
Safety instructions
Mechanical installation and maintenance These instructions are intended for all who install and service the drive. WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment:
Handle the unit carefully. ACS800-01, ACS800-11, ACS800-31: The drive is heavy. Do not lift it alone. Do not lift the unit by the front cover. Place the unit only on its back. ACS800-02, ACS800-04: The drive is heavy. Lift the drive by the lifting lugs only. Do not tilt the unit. The unit will overturn from a tilt of about 6 degrees. Use extreme caution when manoeuvring a drive that runs on wheels. An overturning unit can cause physical injury.
Do not tilt!
Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such as heatsinks of power semiconductors, remain hot for a while after disconnection of the electrical supply. Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive when installing. Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause damage or malfunctioning. Ensure sufficient cooling. Do not fasten the drive by riveting or welding.
Safety instructions
Printed circuit boards WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause damage to the printed circuit boards:
The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Wear a grounding wrist band when handling the boards. Do not touch the boards unnecessarily.
Fibre optic cables WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause equipment malfunction and damage to the fibre optic cables:
Handle the fibre optic cables with care. When unplugging optic cables, always grab the connector, not the cable itself. Do not touch the ends of the fibres with bare hands as the fibre is extremely sensitive to dirt. The minimum allowed bend radius is 35 mm (1.4 in.).
Safety instructions
10
Operation
These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive or operate the drive. WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment:
Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the power line. Do not activate automatic fault reset functions of the Standard Application Program if dangerous situations can occur. When activated, these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a fault. Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device (disconnecting means); instead, use the control panel keys and , or commands via the I/O board of the drive. The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors (i.e. power-ups by applying power) is five in ten minutes. ACS800-04M, ACS800-07: Do not use the optional Prevention of Unexpected Start function for stopping the drive when the drive is running. Give a Stop command instead.
Note:
If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive (with Standard Application Program) will start immediately after fault reset unless the drive is configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop. When the control location is not set to Local (L not shown in the status row of the display), the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive. To stop the drive using the control panel, press the LOC/REM key and then the stop key .
Safety instructions
11
Permanent magnet motor

These are additional warnings concerning permanent magnet motor drives. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment. Installation and maintenance work WARNING! Do not work on the drive when the permanent magnet motor is rotating. Also, when the supply power is switched off and the inverter is stopped, a rotating permanent magnet motor feeds power to the intermediate circuit of the drive and the supply connections become live. Before installation and maintenance work on the drive: Stop the motor. Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work. Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals: Alternative 1) Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other means. Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC-). Alternative 2) Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC-). Ground the drive output terminals temporarily by connecting them together as well as to the PE. Alternative 3) If possible, both of the above. Start-up and operation WARNING! Do not run the motor over the rated speed. Motor overspeed leads to overvoltage which may damage or explode the capacitors in the intermediate circuit of the drive. Controlling a permanent magnet motor is only allowed using the ACS800 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor Drive Application Program, or other application programs in scalar control mode.
Safety instructions
12
Safety instructions
13
Table of contents
ACS800 Single Drive Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Safety instructions What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 To which products this chapter applies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Use of warnings and notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Mechanical installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Permanent magnet motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Table of contents About this manual What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common chapters for several products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categorization according to the frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categorization according to the plus code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation and commissioning flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ACS800-31/U31 What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ACS800-31/U31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC voltage and current waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDCS communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main circuit and control interfaces diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fieldbus control of the line-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection diagram of the RMIO board in the line-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 23 25 25 25 25 26 27 27 28 29 29 30 19 19 19 19 19 20 21 22
Table of contents
14
Type code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Mechanical installation Unpacking the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free space around the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the drive on the wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units without vibration dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units with vibration dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preventing cooling air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit above another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning the electrical installation What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 To which products this chapter applies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Motor selection and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Protecting the motor insulation and bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Requirements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Permanent magnet synchronous motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Supply connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Disconnecting device (disconnecting means) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 ACS800-01, ACS800-U1, ACS800-11, ACS800-U11, ACS800-31, ACS800-U31, ACS800-02 and ACS800-U2 without enclosure extension, ACS800-04, ACS800-U4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 ACS800-02 and ACS800-U2 with enclosure extension, ACS800-07 and ACS800-U7 . . . . 45 EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Thermal overload and short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Thermal overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Ground fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Emergency stop devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 ACS800-02/U2 with enclosure extension and ACS800-07/U7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Restarting after an emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Prevention of Unexpected Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Motor cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Armored cable / shielded power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 33 33 34 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 37 38
Table of contents
15
Power factor compensation capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment connected to the motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of safety switches, contactors, connection boxes, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before opening a contactor (DTC control mode selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case of inductive loads . . . . Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control panel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical installation What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the insulation of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IT (ungrounded) systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting the EMC filter capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conductor stripping lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allowed wire sizes, tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall installed units (European version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cable installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall installed units (US version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet installed units (IP 00, UL type open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 degrees grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the outer surface of the shield is covered with non-conductive material . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the shield wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling of I/O and fieldbus modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse encoder module cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fastening the control cables and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of optional modules and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of AGPS board (Prevention of Unexpected Start, +Q950) What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prevention of Unexpected Start (+Q950) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of the AGPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53 54 54 54 54 55 56 56 56 57 57 57 58
59 59 59 59 59 60 60 61 61 62 62 62 62 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 68 69 69 70 70
71 71 71 73 74
Table of contents
16
Motor control and I/O board (RMIO) What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To which products this chapter applies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note for the ACS800-02 with enclosure extension and the ACS800-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note on terminal labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note on external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External control connections (non-US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External control connections (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMIO board specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant voltage output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDCS fibre optic link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 VDC power input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation checklist What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Installation checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Start-up and use What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-up and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To control the line-side converter... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To control the motor-side converter... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line-side converter actual signals and parameters in the motor-side converter application program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 HARDWARE SPECIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACS800-31/U31 specific parameters in the IGBT Supply Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed parameters with the ACS800-31 and ACS800-U31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 89 89 89 89 90 90 91 91 91 91 92 93 85 85 86 86 87 75 75 75 75 76 76 77 78 79 79 79 79 79 79 80 80 80
Table of contents
17
Maintenance What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan replacement (R5, R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement (R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement (R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault tracing What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faults and warnings displayed by the CDP-312R Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning/Fault message from unit not being monitored by control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conflicting ID numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IEC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Altitude derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mains cable fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions, weights and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEMA data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input cable fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions, weights and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGPS-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 102 102 103 103 103 103 103 104 105 105 105 106 106 106 107 108 108 108 109 110 110 110 110 110 111 99 99 99 99 95 95 95 96 96 97 97 97 98 98 98 98
Table of contents
18
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compliance with the EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compliance with the EN 61800-3 (2004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First environment (drive of category C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second environment (drive of category C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second environment (drive of category C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compliance with IEC 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First environment (drive of category C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second environment (drive of category C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second environment (drive of category C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL/CSA markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment warranty and liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawings
112 112 113 113 113 113 113 114 114 114 115 115 115 115 116 116 117 117 117
Frame size R5 (IP21, UL type open, UL type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Frame size R6 (IP21, UL type open, UL type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Resistor braking What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to select the correct drive/chopper/resistor combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External brake chopper and resistor(s) for the ACS800-31/U31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake chopper and resistor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake circuit commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External +24 V power supply for the RMIO boards via terminal X34 What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting +24 V external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMIO board of the motor-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMIO board of the line-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame size R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 127 128 128 130 130 130 123 123 124 125 125 126
Table of contents
19
About this manual

This chapter describes the intended audience and contents of this manual. It contains a flowchart of steps in checking the delivery, installing and commissioning the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in this manual and other manuals.
Intended audience
This manual is intended for people who plan the installation, install, commission, use and service the drive. Read the manual before working on the drive. The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and electrical schematic symbols. This manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown. Special US instructions for installations within the United States that must be installed per the National Electrical Code and local codes are marked with (US).
Common chapters for several products

Chapters Safety instructions, Planning the electrical installation and Motor control and I/O board (RMIO) apply to several ACS800 products which are listed at the beginning of the chapters.
Categorization according to the frame size

Some instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size R2, R3, ... or R8. The frame size is not marked on the drive designation label. To identify the frame size of your drive, see the rating tables in chapter Technical data. The ACS800-31/U31 is manufactured in frame sizes R5 and R6.
Categorization according to the plus code

The instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only certain optional selections are marked with plus codes, e.g. +E202. The options included in the drive can be identified from the plus codes visible on the type designation label of the drive. The plus code selections are listed in chapter The ACS800-31/U31 under Type code.
About this manual
20
Contents
The chapters of this manual are briefly described below. Safety instructions give safety instructions for the installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the drive. About this manual lists the steps in checking the delivery and installing and commissioning the drive and refers to chapters/sections in this manual and other manuals for particular tasks. The ACS800-31/U31 describes the drive. Mechanical installation instructs in how to place and mount the drive. Planning the electrical installation instructs in the motor and cable selection, protections and cable routing. Electrical installation shows how to wire the drive. Installation of AGPS board (Prevention of Unexpected Start, +Q950) describes the electrical installation of the optional Prevention of Unexpected Start function (+Q950). Motor control and I/O board (RMIO) shows the external control connections to the I/O board. Installation checklist contains a list for checking the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive. Start-up and use describes the start-up procedure and use of the drive. Actual signals and parameters contains listings of parameters specific to the ACS800-31 and ACS800-U31. Maintenance contains preventive maintenance instructions. Fault tracing contains guide lines for fault tracing. Technical data contains the technical specifications of the drive, e.g. the ratings, sizes and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other markings and warranty policy. Dimensional drawings contains the dimensional drawings of the drive. Resistor braking describes how to select, protect and wire external brake choppers and resistors for the drive. The chapter also contains installation instructions and the technical data. External +24 V power supply for the RMIO boards via terminal X34 describes how to connect an external +24 V power supply for the RMIO board using terminal X34.
About this manual
21
Installation and commissioning flowchart

Task Identify the frame size of your drive: R5 or R6. See Technical data / IEC data or NEMA data
Plan the installation.
Technical data
Check the ambient conditions, ratings, required Planning the electrical installation cooling air flow, input power connection, compatibility For compliance with the European Union EMC of the motor, motor connection, and other technical Directive, see Technical data: CE marking. data. Option manual (if optional equipment is Select the cables. included)
Unpack and check the units. Check that all necessary optional modules and equipment are present and correct. Only intact units may be started up.
Mechanical installation: Unpacking the unit. If the converter has been non-operational for more than one year, the converter DC link capacitors need to be reformed. Ask ABB for instructions.
If the drive is about to be connected to an IT (ungrounded) system, check that the drive is not equipped with EMC filtering intended for grounded systems.
The ACS800-31/U31: Type code; Electrical installation: IT (ungrounded) systems.
Check the installation site.
Mechanical installation: Before installation Technical data
Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet.
Mechanical installation
Route the cables.
Planning the electrical installation: Routing the cables For compliance with the European Union EMC Directive, see Technical data: CE marking.
About this manual
22
Task Check the insulation of the motor and the motor cable.
See Electrical installation: Checking the insulation of the installation
Connect the power cables.
Electrical installation
Connect the control and auxiliary control cables.
Electrical installation, Motor control and I/O board (RMIO), Installation of AGPS board (Prevention of Unexpected Start, +Q950) and the optional module manual delivered with the module.
Check the installation.
Installation checklist
Commission the drive.
Start-up and use, appropriate application program firmware manual
Inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to the local ABB representative, quoting the type code and serial number of the unit. If the local ABB representative cannot be contacted, address inquiries to the manufacturing facility.
About this manual
23
The ACS800-31/U31
This chapter describes the operating principle and construction of the drive in short.
The ACS800-31/U31
The ACS800-31/U31 is wall mountable, low-harmonic drive for controlling AC motors.
IP21 (UL type 1) Cooling fan IP20 (UL type open)
Top cover Control panel CDP312R Heat sink
Front cover
Clear plastic shroud
Connection box cover
Frame size R6
The ACS800-31/U31
24
UDC-
X41
I/O terminals
UDC+
U1 V1 W1
U2 V2 W2
U1 V1 W1X41
UDC+ UDC-
U2 V2 W2
PE
Power cable terminals
PE
Frame size R5 without front and connection box covers Location of the line-side converter RMIO board
Frame size R6 without front and connection box covers
Location of the motor-side converter RMIO board
The ACS800-31/U31
25
Terms
Line-side converter: A converter that is connected to the supply network and is capable of transferring energy from the network to the DC link. Motor-side converter: A converter that is connected to the motor and controls the motor operation.
Operation principle
The line-side and motor-side converters consist of six insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT) with free wheeling diodes. The converters have their own control programs. The parameters of both programs can be viewed and changed using one control panel. The control panel can be switched between the converters as described on page 86. Line-side converter The IGBT supply module rectifies three phase AC current to direct current for the intermediate DC link of the drive. The intermediate DC link is further supplying the motor-side converter that runs the motor. The line filter suppresses the AC voltage and current harmonics. By default, the converter controls the DC link voltage to the peak value of the line-toline voltage. The DC voltage reference can be set also higher by a parameter. The control of the IGBT power semiconductors is based on the Direct Torque Control (DTC) method also used in the motor control of the drive. Two line currents and the DC link voltage are measured and used for the control. Motor-side converter The motor control is based on the Direct Torque Control (DTC) method. Two phase currents and DC link voltage are measured and used for the control. The third phase current is measured for earth fault protection.
The ACS800-31/U31
26
AC voltage and current waveforms

The AC line current of the drive is sinusoidal with power factor equal to 1. The IGBT supply unit does not generate characteristic current or voltage overtones like a traditional 6- or 12-pulse bridge does. The Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in current is given in chapter Technical data / Input power connection. The THD in voltage depends slightly on the Short Circuit Ratio in the Point of Common Coupling (PCC). The high frequency switching and high du/dt slightly distort the voltage waveform at the input of the converter. Typical line current (i) and voltage (u) waveforms are shown below.
u (V)
t (ms) i (A)
t (ms)
Example spectra of the current and voltage distortion at the output of the transformer are shown below. Each harmonic is presented as compared to fundamental voltage (reference value = 1). n denotes the ordinal number of the harmonic.
Phase current (A)
1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0
2 5 8 14 17 26 29 32 38 41 44 50 11 20 23 35 47
Test 13
Line-to-line voltage (%)

1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0
IL1 [A]
Test 13
0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0
UL12 [%]
17
20
23
32
35
44
47
11
14
29
The ACS800-31/U31
50
26
38
41
27
Printed circuit boards

The drive contains the following printed circuit boards as standard: main circuit board (GINT) motor control and I/O board (RMIO), 2 pcs EMC filter unit (GRFCU) when EMC equipment is selected filter boards (GRFC or RRFC) varistor board (GVAR) control panel (CDP 312R) current measurement board (GCUR, in frame size R5 only) charging diode board (GDIO).
DDCS communication modules

The drive includes an RDCO-03 module in the line-side converter and another RDCO module in the motor-side converter.
The ACS800-31/U31
28
Input power
~
=
Line-side converter control program DDCS RDCO-03 CH0 CH1 Application specific program and motor control program
=
Output power
ID number 2
ID number 1
The ACS800-31/U31
External control via analogue/ digital inputs and outputs X39 RMIO board of the line-side converter RMIO board of the motor-side converter X39 Optional module 1: RMBA, RAIO, RDIO, RDNA, RLON, RIBA, RPBA, RCAN, RCNA, RMBP, RETA, RRIA or RTAC Optional module 2: RTAC, RAIO, RRIA or RDIO DDCS communication module: RDCO-03 (default), RDCO-01 or RDCO-02 LCL filter U2 V2 W2
UDC+ UDC-
Main circuit and control interfaces diagram
Simplified main circuit
Optional EMC filter
U1
V1
K1
W1
M 3~
Varistor connection
Line-side converter
Motor-side converter UDC+ UDC-
29
Fieldbus control of the line-side converter

Fieldbus control of the line-side converter can only be performed via the motor-side converter RMIO board. The control signal dataset receive and actual signal dataset transmit addresses are shown in section Control block diagram below.
Control block diagram

The figure below shows the parameters for DC and reactive power reference selection of the line-side converter control program. The AMC table contains actual values and parameters of the line-side converter. The control and actual signal interchange between the line-side and motor-side converters is also shown.
11.02 Q REF SELECT
Motor-side converter RMIO

112.04 SUPPLY CTRL MODE = LINE CONV Dataset 121 (CH1) MCW 95.06 LCU Q POW REF 95.07 LCU DC REF (V)
Line-side converter RMIO board

98.02 COMM. MODULE = INVERTER Dataset 121 (CH0) MCW (fixed) Q-REF(fixed) DC REF(fixed) 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL PERCENT kVAr PHI COSPHI
PARAM 24.01 AI1 AI2 AI3 24.02 + + PARAM 24.02 24.01 Q POWER REF
Dataset 122 (CH1) MSW 9.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 9.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 Dataset 123 (CH1) 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL
Dataset 122 (CH0) MSW (fixed) 106 (value) 110 (value)
24.04 11.01 DC REF SELECT
Dataset 123 (CH0) 106 110
PARAM 23.01
AMC table
AI1 AI2 AI3 FIELD BUS
DC VOLT REF 23.01
MCW = Main Control Word MSW = Main Status Word
The ACS800-31/U31
30
Connection diagram of the RMIO board in the line-side converter

Internal connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 IGBT Supply Control Program are shown below. Do not change the connections.
Terminal block size: cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm (22 to 12 AWG) Tightening torque: 0.2 to 0.4 Nm (2 to 4 lbf in.)
2
1) 2)
non-programmable I/O
External earth (ground) fault indication via digital input DI4: See parameter 30.04 EXT EARTH FAULT. External alarm/fault indication via digital input DI5: See parameter 30.05 EXT EVENT.
3)
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3
VREFGND VREF+ GND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 +24V +24V DGND DGND DI7(DIIL) +24V GND RO11 RO12 RO13 RO21 RO22 RO23 RO31 RO32 RO33
Reference voltage -10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Reference voltage 10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm By default, not in use. 0(2)...10 V, Rin > 200 kohm By default, not in use. 0(4)...20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4)...20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4)...20 mA, RL < 700 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4)...20 mA, RL < 700 ohm Acknowledgement of converter fan 1) By default not in use. Acknowledgement from main contactor 1) By default not in use. 2) By default not in use. 3) By default not in use. +24 VDC max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Stop/Start Auxiliary voltage output or input, nonisolated, 24 VDC 250 mA Relay output 1: By default not in use.
Relay output 2: By default not in use.
Relay output 3: Main contactor control 1)
+ 24 VDC
-
The ACS800-31/U31
31
Type code
The type code contains information on the specifications and configuration of the drive. The first digits from left express the basic configuration (e.g. ACS800-310030-5). The optional selections are given thereafter, separated by plus signs (e.g. +E202). The main selections are described below. Not all selections are available for all types. For more information, refer to ACS800 Ordering Information (EN code: 64556568, available on request).
Selection Product series Type Alternatives ACS800 product series 31 wall mounted. When no options are selected: IP21, Control Panel CDP312R, DDCS communication option module RDCO-03, no EMC filter, Standard Application Program, cable connection box (cabling from below), boards with coating, one set of manuals. U31 wall mounted (USA). When no options are selected: UL type 1, Control Panel CDP312R, DDCS communication option module RDCO-03, no EMC filter, US version of the Standard Application Program (three-wire start/stop as default setting), US gland/conduit plate, boards with coating, one set of English manuals. Refer to Technical data: IEC data or NEMA data. 2 208/220/230/240 VAC 3 380/400/415 VAC 5 380/400/415/440/460/480/500 VAC 7 525/575/600/690 VAC IP20 (UL type open) EMC/RFI filter for second environment TN (grounded) system, unrestricted distribution, drive category C3 E202 EMC/RFI filter for first environment TN (grounded) system, restricted distribution, drive category C2 H357 European lead-through plate for the ACS800-U31 H358 US/UK gland/conduit plate for the ACS800-31 0J400 no control panel K... Refer to ACS800 Ordering Information (EN code: 64556568). L... N... R... Q950 Prevention of Unexpected Start B051 E200
Size Voltage range (nominal rating in bold)
+ options Degree of protection Filter
Cabling Control panel Fieldbus I/O Application program Manual language Safety features
The ACS800-31/U31
32
The ACS800-31/U31
33
Unpacking the unit
The drive is delivered in a box that also contains: plastic bag containing: screws (M3), clamps and cable lugs (2 mm2, M3) for grounding the control cable screens residual voltage warning stickers hardware manual appropriate firmware manuals and guides optional module manuals delivery documents.
Delivery check Check that there are no signs of damage. Before attempting installation and operation, check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify that the unit is of the correct type. The label includes an IEC and NEMA rating, C-UL, CSA and CE markings, a type code and a serial number, which allow individual recognition of each unit. The first digit of the serial number refers to the manufacturing plant. The next four digits refer to the units manufacturing year and week, respectively. The remaining digits complete the serial number so that there are no two units with the same serial number.
34
The type designation label is attached to the heat sink and the serial number label to the lower part of the back plate of the unit. Example labels are shown below.
Type designation label
Serial number label
Moving the unit

Lift the unit using the lifting holes at the top and bottom.
Lifting a unit of frame size R6
35
Before installation
The drive must be installed in an upright position with the cooling section facing a wall. Check the installation site according to the requirements below. Refer to chapter Dimensional drawings for frame details. Requirements for the installation site See chapter Technical data for the allowed operation conditions of the drive. Wall The wall should be as close to vertical as possible, of non-flammable material and strong enough to carry the weight of the unit. Check that there is nothing on the wall to inhibit the installation. Floor The floor/material below the installation should be non-flammable. Free space around the unit Required free space around the drive to enable cooling air flow, service and maintenance is shown below in millimetres and [inches].
200 [7.9]
50 [2.0]
50 [2.0]
200 [7.9]
IP21 (UL 1)
Cooling air flow
36
Mounting the drive on the wall

Units without vibration dampers 1. Mark the locations for the four holes. The mounting points are shown in chapter Dimensional drawings. 2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations. 3. Position the drive onto the screws on the wall. Note: Lift the drive by its lifting holes, not by its cover. 4. Tighten the screws in the wall securely. Units with vibration dampers In applications with considerable vibration in the frequency range of 50 Hz to 100 Hz, vibration dampers can be used. For units of frame size R5, see ACS800-01/ U1 Vibration Damper Installation Guide [3AFE68295351 (English)]. For units of frame size R6, contact ABB for installation instructions.
Cabinet installation
The drive can be installed in a cabinet without the plastic front, top and connection box covers and without the lead-through plate. Vibration dampers are not needed. The required distance between parallel units is 50 millimetres (1.97 in.) in installations without the front cover. The cooling air entering the unit must not exceed +40C (+104F). Contact ABB, if two units are to be installed side by side at a distance smaller than 50 millimetres (1.97 in.), i.e. the side air holes will be covered at one side.
37
Preventing cooling air recirculation Prevent air recirculation inside and outside the cabinet. Example
HOT AREA
Main air flow out
Air baffle plates
COOL
AREA
Main air flow in
38
Unit above another Lead the out-coming hot cooling air away from the air input of the drive above. Example
max.+40C (+104F)
39
Planning the electrical installation

This chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when selecting the motor, cables, protections, cable routing and way of operation for the drive system. Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover.

This chapter applies to the ACS800-01/U1, ACS800-11/U11, ACS800-31/U31, ACS800-02/U2, ACS800-04/U4, and ACS800-07/U7 types up to -0610-x. Note: All options described in this chapter are not available for all products. Check the availability from section Type code on page 31.
Motor selection and compatibility

1. Select the motor according to the rating tables in chapter Technical Data. Use the DriveSize PC tool if the default load cycles are not applicable. 2. Check that the motor ratings lie within the allowed ranges of the drive control program: motor nominal voltage is 1/2 ... 2 UN of the drive motor nominal current is 1/6 ... 2 I2hd of the drive in DTC control and 0 ... 2 I2hd in scalar control. The control mode is selected by a drive parameter.
40
3. Check that the motor voltage rating meets the application requirements:
If the drive is equipped with and then the motor voltage rating should be UN UACeq1 UN UACeq2
diode supply no resistor braking is in use ACS800-01, -U1, -02, -U2, frequent or long term brake cycles will -04, -04M, -U4 -07, -U7 be used IGBT supply ACS800-11, -U11, -31, U31, -17, -37 DC link voltage will not be increased from nominal (parameter setting) DC link voltage will be increased from nominal (parameter setting)
UN
= Rated input voltage of the drive
UACeq1 = UDC/1.35 UACeq2 = UDC/1.41 UACeq is the equivalent AC power source voltage of the drive in VAC. UDC is the maximum DC link voltage of the drive in VDC. For resistor braking: UDC= 1.21 nominal DC link voltage. For units with IGBT supply: See the parameter value. (Note: Nominal DC link voltage is UN 1.35 or UN 1.41 in VDC.)
See notes 6 and 7 below the Requirements table, pages 43 and 44. 4. Consult the motor manufacturer before using a motor in a drive system where the motor nominal voltage differs from the AC power source voltage. 5. Ensure that the motor insulation system withstands the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals. See the Requirements table below for the required motor insulation system and drive filtering. Example 1: When the supply voltage is 440 V and a drive with a diode supply is operating in motor mode only, the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals can be approximated as follows: 440 V 1.35 2 = 1190 V. Check that the motor insulation system withstands this voltage. Example 2: When the supply voltage is 440 V and the drive is equipped with an IGBT supply, the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals can be approximated as follows: 440 V 1.41 2 = 1241 V. Check that the motor insulation system withstands this voltage.
41
Protecting the motor insulation and bearings The output of the drive comprises regardless of output frequency pulses of approximately 1.35 times the equivalent mains network voltage with a very short rise time. This is the case with all drives employing modern IGBT inverter technology. The voltage of the pulses can be almost double at the motor terminals, depending on the attenuation and reflection properties of the motor cable and the terminals. This in turn can cause additional stress on the motor and motor cable insulation. Modern variable speed drives with their fast rising voltage pulses and high switching frequencies can generate current pulses that flow through the motor bearings, which can gradually erode the bearing races and rolling elements. The stress on motor insulation can be avoided by using optional ABB du/dt filters. du/dt filters also reduce bearing currents. To avoid damage to motor bearings, the cables must be selected and installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual. In addition, insulated Nend (non-driven end) bearings and output filters from ABB must be used according to the following table. Two types of filters are used individually or in combinations: optional du/dt filter (protects motor insulation system and reduces bearing currents). common mode filter (mainly reduces bearing currents).
42
Requirements table
The following table shows how to select the motor insulation system and when an optional ABB du/dt filter, insulated N-end (non-driven end) motor bearings and ABB common mode filters are required. The motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor insulation and additional requirements for explosion-safe (EX) motors. Failure of the motor to fulfil the following requirements or improper installation may shorten motor life or damage the motor bearings.
Motor type Manufacturer Nominal mains voltage (AC line voltage) Requirement for Motor insulation system ABB du/dt filter, insulated N-end bearing and ABB common mode filter PN < 100 kW and frame size < IEC 315 PN < 134 HP and frame size < NEMA 500 A B B Randomwound M2_ and M3_ UN < 500 V Standard or Reinforced 600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced Form-wound HX_ and AM_ 380 V < UN < 690 V Standard + du/dt n.a. +N + du/dt + N + N + CMF + N + CMF + du/dt + N + CMF PN < 500 kW: + N + CMF PN > 500 kW: + N + CMF + du/dt Old* formwound HX_ and modular Randomwound HX_ and AM_ ** N O N A B B or Reinforced: LL = 1600 V, 0.2 microsecond rise time 500 V < UN < 600 V Reinforced: LL = + du/dt 1600 V + N or CMF + N + CMF Randomwound and form-wound 380 V < UN < 690 V Check with the motor manufacturer. Enamelled wire with fibre glass 500 V < UN < 690 V taping UN < 420 V Standard: LL = 1300 V 0 V < UN < 500 V + du/dt with voltages over 500 V + N + CMF + du/dt +N + du/dt + N 500 V < UN < 600 V Standard 100 kW < PN < 350 kW or frame size > IEC 315 134 HP < PN < 469 HP or frame size > NEMA 500 PN > 350 kW or frame size > IEC 400 PN > 469 HP or frame size > NEMA 580 + N + CMF + du/dt + N + CMF
+ N + CMF + du/dt + N + CMF + du/dt + N or CMF + du/dt + N or + du/dt + CMF + N + CMF + du/dt + N + CMF
420 V < UN < 500 V Standard: LL = 1300 V
+ du/dt + N or + du/dt + CMF
+ du/dt + N + CMF
or Reinforced: LL = 1800 V 600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced: LL = + du/dt 1800 V Reinforced: LL = 2000 V, 0.3 microsecond rise time *** + N or CMF + du/dt + N N + CMF + N + CMF + du/dt + N + CMF N + CMF
43
* ** manufactured before 1.1.1998 For motors manufactured before 1.1.1998, check for additional instructions with the motor manufacturer.
*** If the intermediate DC circuit voltage of the drive is increased from the nominal level by resistor braking or by the IGBT supply unit control program (parameter selectable function), check with the motor manufacturer if additional output filters are needed in the applied drive operation range.
Note 1: The abbreviations used in the table are defined below.

Abbreviation UN LL PN du/dt CMF N n.a. Definition nominal voltage of the supply network peak line-to-line voltage at motor terminals which the motor insulation must withstand motor nominal power du/dt filter at the output of the drive +E205 common mode filter +E208 N-end bearing: insulated motor non-driven end bearing Motors of this power range are not available as standard units. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Note 2: Explosion-safe (EX) motors The motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor insulation and additional requirements for explosion-safe (EX) motors. Note 3: High-output motors and IP 23 motors For motors with higher rated output than what is stated for the particular frame size in EN 50347 (2001) and for IP 23 motors, the requirements of ABB random-wound motor series M3AA, M3AP, M3BP are given below. For other motor types, see the Requirements table above. Apply the requirements of range 100 kW < PN < 350 kW to motors with PN < 100 kW. Apply the requirements of range PN > 350 kW to motors within the range 100 kW < PN < 350 kW. In other cases, consult the motor manufacturer.
Manufacturer Motor type Nominal mains voltage (AC line voltage) Requirement for Motor insulation system ABB du/dt filter, insulated N-end bearing and ABB common mode filter PN < 55 kW PN < 74 HP A B B Randomwound M3AA, M3AP, M3BP UN < 500 V Standard or Reinforced 600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced + du/dt +N + du/dt + N + N + CMF + du/dt + N + CMF + du/dt 55 kW < PN < 200 kW 74 HP < PN < 268 HP +N + du/dt + N PN > 200 kW PN > 268 HP + N + CMF + du/dt + N + CMF
500 V < UN < 600 V Standard
Note 4: HXR and AMA motors All AMA machines (manufactured in Helsinki) for drive systems have form-wound windings. All HXR machines manufactured in Helsinki starting 1.1.1998 have form-wound windings. Note 5: ABB motors of types other than M2_, M3_, HX_ and AM_ Use the selection criteria given for non-ABB motors. Note 6: Resistor braking of the drive When the drive is in braking mode for a large part of its operation time, the intermediate circuit DC voltage of the drive increases, the effect being similar to increasing the supply voltage by up to 20 percent. The voltage increase should be taken into consideration when determining the motor insulation requirement. Example: Motor insulation requirement for a 400 V application must be selected as if the drive were supplied with 480 V.
44
Note 7: Drives with an IGBT supply unit If voltage is raised by the drive (this is a parameter selectable function), select the motor insulation system according to the increased intermediate circuit DC voltage level, especially in the 500 V supply voltage range. Note 8: Calculating the rise time and the peak line-to-line voltage The peak line-to-line voltage at the motor terminals generated by the drive as well as the voltage rise time depend on the cable length. The requirements for the motor insulation system given in the table are worst case requirements covering installations with 30 metre and longer cables. The rise time can be calculated as follows: t = 0.8 LL/(du/dt). Read LL and du/dt from the diagrams below. Multiply the values of the graph by the supply voltage (UN). In case of drives with an IGBT supply unit or resistor braking, the LL and du/dt values are approximately 20 % higher. 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.0 100 200 300 Cable length (m) With du/dt Filter du/dt ------------ (1/ s) UN LL/UN 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 100 200 300 Cable length (m) Without du/dt Filter LL/UN du/dt ------------ (1/ s) UN
Note 9: Sine filters protect the motor insulation system. Therefore, du/dt filter can be replaced with a sine filter. The peak phase-to-phase voltage with the sine filter is approximately 1.5 UN.
Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Only one permanent magnet motor can be connected to the inverter output. It is recommended to install a safety switch between the permanent magnet synchronous motor and the drive output. The switch is needed to isolate the motor during any maintenance work on the drive.
45
Supply connection
Disconnecting device (disconnecting means) ACS800-01, ACS800-U1, ACS800-11, ACS800-U11, ACS800-31, ACS800-U31, ACS800-02 and ACS800-U2 without enclosure extension, ACS800-04, ACS800-U4 Install a hand-operated input disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work. ACS800-02 and ACS800-U2 with enclosure extension, ACS800-07 and ACS800-U7 These units are equipped with a hand-operated input disconnecting device (disconnecting means) which isolates the drive and the motor from the AC power as standard. The disconnecting device does not, however, isolate the input busbars from the AC power. Therefore, during installation and maintenance work on the drive, the input cables and busbars must be isolated from the input power with a disconnector at the distribution board or at the supplying transformer. EU To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard EN 60204-1, Safety of Machinery, the disconnecting device must be one of the following types: switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3) disconnector that has an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector (EN 60947-3) circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2. US The disconnecting means must conform to the applicable safety regulations. Fuses See section Thermal overload and short-circuit protection.
46
Thermal overload and short-circuit protection

Thermal overload protection The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No additional thermal protection devices are needed. WARNING! If the drive is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor. These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current. The drive protects the motor cable and motor in a short-circuit situation when the motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive.
47
Short-circuit protection Protect the input cable and drive against short-circuit according to the following guide lines.
Circuit diagram Drive type Short-circuit protection
Distribution board 1)
DRIVE IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH INPUT FUSES ACS800-01 Drive or drive ACS800-U1 module Input cable ACS800-02
M 3~
Protect the drive and input cable with fuses or a circuit breaker. See footnotes 1) and ACS800-U2+0C111 2). ACS800-11 ACS800-U11 ACS800-31 ACS800-U31
I>
2)
M 3~
ACS800-04 ACS800-U4
Distribution board 3)
DRIVE IS EQUIPPED WITH INPUT FUSES ACS800-02+C111 Input cable 4) Drive ACS800-U2 ACS800-07
~
Drive 4) I>
M 3~
ACS800-U7
Protect the input cable with fuses or a circuit breaker according to local regulations. See footnotes 3) and 4).
M 3~
1) Size the fuses according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the rated current of the drive (see Technical data). Standard gG fuses (US: CC or T for the ACS800-U1, ACS800-U11 and ACS800-U31; T or L for the ACS800-U2 and ACS800-U4) will protect the input cable in short-circuit situations, restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short-circuit inside the drive. Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.5 seconds (0.1 seconds with ACS800-11/ U11, ACS800-31/U31). The operating time depends on the fuse type (gG or aR), supply network impedance and the cross-sectional area, material and length of the supply cable. In case the 0.5 seconds (0.1 seconds with ACS800-11/U11 and ACS800-31/U31) operating time is exceeded with gG fuses (US: CC/T/L), ultrarapid (aR) fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level. The US fuses must be of the non-time delay type. For fuse ratings, see Technical data.
48
2) Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS800 can be used. Fuses must be used with other circuit breakers. Contact your local ABB representative for approved breaker types and supply network characteristics. The protective characteristics of circuit breakers depend on the type, construction and settings of the breakers. There are also limitations pertaining to the short-circuit capacity of the supply network. WARNING! Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers, independent of the manufacturer, hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short-circuit. To ensure safe use, special attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers. Follow the manufacturers instructions. Note: Circuit breakers without fuses are not recommended in the USA. 3) Size the fuses according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the rated current of the drive (see Technical data). 4) ACS800-07/U7 units and ACS800-02/U2 units with enclosure extension are equipped with standard gG (US: T/L) or optional aR fuses listed in Technical data. The fuses restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short-circuit inside the drive. Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.5 seconds. The operating time depends on the fuse type (gG or aR), supply network impedance and the cross-sectional area, material and length of the supply cable. In case the 0.5 seconds operating time is exceeded with gG fuses (US: CC/T/L), ultrarapid (aR) fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level. The US fuses must be of the non-time delay type. For fuse ratings, see Technical data.
49
Ground fault protection

The drive is equipped with an internal ground fault protective function to protect the unit against ground faults in the motor and motor cable. This is not a personal safety or a fire protection feature. The ground fault protective function can be disabled with a parameter, refer to the appropriate ACS800 Firmware Manual. The EMC filter of the drive includes capacitors connected between the main circuit and the frame. These capacitors and long motor cables increase the ground leakage current and may cause fault current circuit breakers to function.
Emergency stop devices

For safety reasons, install the emergency stop devices at each operator control station and at other operating stations where emergency stop may be needed. Note: Pressing the stop key ( ) on the control panel of the drive does not generate an emergency stop of the motor or separate the drive from dangerous potential. ACS800-02/U2 with enclosure extension and ACS800-07/U7 An emergency stop function is optionally available for stopping and switching off the whole drive. Two stop categories according to IEC/EN 60204-1 (1997) are available: immediate removal of power (Category 0 for ACS800-02/U2 and ACS800-07/U7) and controlled emergency stop (Category 1 for ACS800-07/U7). Restarting after an emergency stop After an emergency stop, the emergency stop button must be released and the drive started by turning the operating switch of the drive from position ON to START.
50
Prevention of Unexpected Start

The ACS800-04, ACS800-31/U31 and ACS800-07/U7 can be equipped with an optional Prevention of Unexpected Start function according to standards IEC/ EN 60204-1: 1997; ISO/DIS 14118: 2000 and EN 1037: 1996. The Prevention of Unexpected Start function disables the control voltage of the power semiconductors, thus preventing the inverter from generating the AC voltage required to rotate the motor. By using this function, short-time operations (like cleaning) and/or maintenance work on non-electrical parts of the machinery can be performed without switching off the AC power supply to the drive. The operator activates the Prevention of Unexpected Start function by opening a switch on a control desk. An indicating lamp on the control desk will light, signalling that the prevention is active. The switch can be locked out. The user must install on a control desk near the machinery: switching/disconnecting device for the circuitry. Means shall be provided to prevent inadvertent, and/or mistaken closure of the disconnecting device. EN 60204-1: 1997. indicating lamp; on = starting the drive is prevented, off = drive is operative. For connections to the drive, see the circuit diagram delivered with the drive. WARNING! The Prevention of Unexpected Start function does not disconnect the voltage of the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the drive system from the main supply. Note: The Prevention of Unexpected Start function is not intended for stopping the drive. If a running drive is stopped by using the Prevention of Unexpected Start function, the drive will cut off the motor supply voltage and the motor will coast to stop.
51
Selecting the power cables

General rules Dimension the mains (input power) and motor cables according to local regulations: The cable must be able to carry the drive load current. See chapter Technical data for the rated currents. The cable must be rated for at least 70 C maximum permissible temperature of conductor in continuous use. For US, see Additional US requirements. The inductance and impedance of the PE conductor/cable (grounding wire) must be rated according to permissible touch voltage appearing under fault conditions (so that the fault point voltage will not rise excessively when a ground fault occurs). 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 VAC. 750 VAC cable is accepted for up to 600 VAC. For 690 VAC rated equipment, the rated voltage between the conductors of the cable should be at least 1 kV. For drive frame size R5 and larger, or motors larger than 30 kW (40 HP), symmetrical shielded motor cable must be used (figure below). A four-conductor system can be used up to frame size R4 with up to 30 kW (40 HP) motors, but shielded symmetrical motor cable is recommended. Note: When continuous conduit is employed, shielded cable is not required. A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but shielded symmetrical cable is recommended. To operate as a protective conductor, the shield conductivity must be as follows when the protective conductor is made of the same metal as the phase conductors:
Cross-sectional area of the phase conductors S (mm2) S < 16 16 < S < 35 35 < S Minimum cross-sectional area of the corresponding protective conductor Sp (mm2) S 16 S/2
Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing currents and wear. The motor cable and its PE pigtail (twisted shield) should be kept as short as possible in order to reduce electromagnetic emission.
52
Alternative power cable types Power cable types that can be used with the drive are represented below.
Recommended Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase conductors and a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed PE conductor, and a shield PE conductor and shield Shield A separate PE conductor is required if the conductivity of the cable shield is < 50 % of the conductivity of the phase conductor. Shield
PE
PE
A four-conductor system: three phase conductors and a protective conductor
PE
Shield
Not allowed for motor cables
Not allowed for motor cables with phase conductor cross section larger than 10 mm2 [motors > 30 kW (40 HP)].
Motor cable shield To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the shield conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield. The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires with an open helix of copper tape. The better and tighter the shield, the lower the emission level and bearing currents.
Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Helix of copper tape Inner insulation
Cable core
53
Additional US requirements Type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds or shielded power cable must be used for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not used. For the North American market, 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 VAC. 1000 VAC cable is required above 500 VAC (below 600 VAC). For drives rated over 100 amperes, the power cables must be rated for 75 C (167 F). Conduit Where conduits must be coupled together, bridge the joint with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Bond the conduits also to the drive enclosure. Use separate conduits for input power, motor, brake resistor, and control wiring. When conduit is employed, type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable or shielded cable is not required. A dedicated ground cable is always required. Note: Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit. Armored cable / shielded power cable Six conductor (3 phases and 3 ground) type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers (trade names in parentheses): Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath) BICC General Corp (Philsheath) Rockbestos Co. (Gardex) Oaknite (CLX). Shielded power cables are available from Belden, LAPPKABEL (LFLEX) and Pirelli.
Power factor compensation capacitors

Power factor compensation is not needed with AC drives. However, if a drive is to be connected in a system with compensation capacitors installed, note the following restrictions. WARNING! Do not connect power factor compensation capacitors to the motor cables (between the drive and the motor). They are not meant to be used with AC drives and can cause permanent damage to the drive or themselves.
54
If there are power factor compensation capacitors in parallel with the three phase input of the drive: 1. Do not connect a high-power capacitor to the power line while the drive is connected. The connection will cause voltage transients that may trip or even damage the drive. 2. If capacitor load is increased/decreased step by step when the AC drive is connected to the power line: Ensure that the connection steps are low enough not to cause voltage transients that would trip the drive. 3. Check that the power factor compensation unit is suitable for use in systems with AC drives i.e. harmonic generating loads. In such systems, the compensation unit should typically be equipped with a blocking reactor or harmonic filter.
Equipment connected to the motor cable

Installation of safety switches, contactors, connection boxes, etc. To minimize the emission level when safety switches, contactors, connection boxes or similar equipment are installed in the motor cable between the drive and the motor: EU: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure with 360 degrees grounding for the shields of both the incoming and outgoing cable, or connect the shields of the cables otherwise together. US: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure in a way that the conduit or motor cable shielding runs consistently without breaks from the drive to the motor. Bypass connection WARNING! Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2. If frequent bypassing is required, employ mechanically connected switches or contactors. Mains (line) voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the unit. Before opening a contactor (DTC control mode selected) Stop the drive and wait for the motor to stop before opening a contactor between the output of the drive and the motor when the DTC control mode is selected. See the appropriate ACS800 application program firmware manual for the required parameter settings. Otherwise, the contactor will be damaged. In scalar control, the contactor can be opened with the drive running.
55
Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case of inductive loads
Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched off. The relay contacts on the RMIO board are protected with varistors (250 V) against overvoltage peaks. In spite of this, it is highly recommended to equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits [varistors, RC filters (AC) or diodes (DC)] in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed, the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system. Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible. Do not install protective components at the RMIO board terminal block.
RMIO
Relay outputs Varistor

X25
1 230 VAC RC filter 2 3

X26
RO1 RO1 RO1 RO2 RO2 RO2 RO3 RO3 RO3
1 230 VAC Diode 2 3

X27
1 24 VDC 2 3
56
Selecting the control cables

All control cables must be shielded. Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a, e.g. JAMAK by NK Cables, Finland) for analogue signals. This type of cable is recommended for the pulse encoder signals also. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do not use common return for different analogue signals. A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals but single-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure b) is also usable.
a A double-shielded twisted pair cable
b A single-shielded twisted pair cable
Run analogue and digital signals in separate, shielded cables. Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in the same cables as digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled signals be run as twisted pairs. Never mix 24 VDC and 115/230 VAC signals in the same cable. Relay cable The cable type with braided metallic screen (e.g. LFLEX by LAPPKABEL, Germany) has been tested and approved by ABB. Control panel cable In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3 metres (10 ft). The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel option kits.
57
Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I/O

WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either nonconductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth. To fulfil this requirement, the connection of a thermistor (and other similar components) to the digital inputs of the drive can be implemented in three alternate ways: 1. There is double or reinforced insulation between the thermistor and live parts of the motor. 2. Circuits connected to all digital and analogue inputs of the drive are protected against contact and insulated with basic insulation (the same voltage level as the drive main circuit) from other low voltage circuits. 3. An external thermistor relay is used. The insulation of the relay must be rated for the same voltage level as the main circuit of the drive. For connection, see ACS800 Firmware Manual.
Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet)

WARNING! Protect against direct contact when installing, operating and servicing the RMIO board wiring and optional modules attached to the board. The Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 are not fulfilled at altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft).
Routing the cables

Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor cable, input power cable and control cables be installed on separate trays. Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables in order to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage. Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible. Do not run extra cables through the drive. The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding electrodes. Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential.
58
A diagram of the cable routing is shown below.
Motor cable Drive Power cable min 300 mm (12 in.)
Input power cable min 200 mm (8 in.) 90 Control cables
Motor cable min 500 mm (20 in.)
Control cable ducts
230 V 24 V (120 V)
230 V 24 V (120 V)
Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is insulated for 230 V (120 V) or insulated with an insulation sleeving for 230 V (120 V).
Lead 24 V and 230 V (120 V) control cables in separate ducts inside the cabinet.
59
This chapter describes the electrical installation procedure of the drive. WARNING! The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified electrician. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death. Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the mains (input power) during the installation. If the drive is already connected to the mains, wait for 5 min after disconnecting mains power.
Checking the insulation of the installation

Drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis (2500 V rms 50 Hz for 1 second) at the factory. Therefore, do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests (e.g. hi-pot or megger) on any part of the drive. Input cable Check the insulation of the input cable according to local regulations before connecting it to the drive. Motor and motor cable Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows: 1. Check that the motor cable is disconnected from the drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2.
ohm
M PE
2. Measure the insulation resistances of the motor cable and motor between each phase and the Protective Earth by using a measuring voltage of 1 kV DC. The insulation resistance must be higher than 1 Mohm.
60
IT (ungrounded) systems
In units with EMC filter options (+E202 and +E200 in the type code), disconnect the filter capacitors before connecting the drive to an ungrounded system. WARNING! If a drive with EMC filter selection +E202 or +E200 is installed on an IT system [an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power system], the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive. This may cause danger or damage the unit. Disconnecting the EMC filter capacitors Remove the two screws shown below.
View of frame size R5
Note concerning units of frame size R5: When the capacitors of EMC filter +E202 or +E200 are disconnected, the EMC Directive requirements in second environment will not be fulfilled.
Note concerning units of frame size R6: When the capacitors of EMC filter +E202 are disconnected, the EMC Directive requirements may not be fulfilled in first environment, but are fulfilled in second environment. When the capacitors of EMC filter +E200 are disconnected, the EMC Directive requirements in second environment are still fulfilled. See chapter Technical data / CE marking.
61
Connecting the power cables

Diagram
Drive PE 1) 2) 3) (PE) PE (PE) U1 For alternatives, see Planning the electrical installation: Disconnecting device (disconnecting means) 1), 2) If shielded cable is used (not required but recommended), use a separate PE cable (1) or a cable with a grounding conductor (2) if the conductivity of the input cable shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the phase conductor. Ground the other end of the input cable shield or PE conductor at the distribution board. 3) 360 degrees grounding recommended if shielded cable is used 4) 360 degrees grounding required V1 W1 INPUT U1 V1 W1 UDC+ UDCOUTPUT U2 V2 W2
4) 5)
3
L1 L2 L3
Motor
Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end For minimum radio frequency interference: ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead-through of the motor terminal box
360 degrees grounding
Conductive gaskets or ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows: flattened width > 1/5 length.
b > 1/5 a 5) Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the phase conductor and there is no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable (see Planning the electrical installation / Selecting the power cables). Note: If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends. Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable for motors > 30 kW (40 HP). Connecting its fourth conductor at the motor end increases bearing currents and causes extra wear. a b
62
Conductor stripping lengths Strip the conductor ends as follows to fit them inside the power cable connection terminals.
Frame size R5 R6 Stripping length mm 16 28 in. 0.63 1.10
Allowed wire sizes, tightening torques See Technical data: Cable entries. Wall installed units (European version) Power cable installation procedure 1. Remove the connection box cover. 2. Remove the front cover by releasing the retaining clip with a screw driver and lifting the cover from the bottom outwards. 3. Remove the clear plastic shroud of the phase conductor terminals. 4. Cut adequate holes into the rubber grommets and slide the grommets onto the cables. Slide the cables through the holes of the bottom plate. 5. Strip off the outer sheathing of the cables under the 360 degrees grounding clamps. Fasten the clamps onto the stripped parts of the cables. 6. Tighten the grounding clamps onto the twisted shields of the cables. 7. Connect the phase conductors of the mains cable to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals and the phase conductors of the motor cable to the U2, V2 and W2 terminals. 8. Cut holes to the clear plastic shroud for the conductors in frame size R5 and in cable lug installations of frame size R6. 9. Press the clear plastic shroud onto the phase conductor terminals. 10. Secure the cables outside the unit mechanically. Connect the control cables as described in section Connecting the control cables on page 67. Fasten the covers, see Fastening the control cables and covers on page 70.
63
Views of frame size R5
2 9 1 8
U1
V1
W1
UDC+ UDC- U2
V2
W2
PE 6 6
64
Frame sizes R6: Cable lug installation [16 to 70 mm2 (6 to 2/0 AWG) cables]
Remove the screw terminals. Fasten the cable lugs to the remaining bolts with M10 nuts. PE 6 Isolate the ends of the cable lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing.
Shroud on the conductor terminals (screw terminal installation)
Frame size R6: Screw terminal installation [95 to 185 mm2 (3/0 to 350 AWG)] cables
PE 6
a a. Connect the cable to the terminal. b. Connect the terminal to the drive. WARNING! If the wire size is less than 95 mm2 (3/0 AWG), a cable lug must be used. A cable of wire size less than 95 mm2 (3/0 AWG) connected to this terminal will loosen and may damage the drive.
65
Wall installed units (US version) 1. Remove the connection box cover. 2. Remove the front cover by releasing the retaining clip with a screw driver and lifting the cover from the bottom outwards.
3. Remove the gland plate by undoing the fastening screws. 4. Make the cable entry holes in the gland plate by breaking off the suitable knockout plates with a screw driver. 5. Fasten the cable glands to the opened holes of the gland plate. 6. Lead the cables through the glands. 7. Fasten the gland plate (3). 8. Connect the grounding conductors of the input and motor cables to the grounding clamps. 9. Remove the clear plastic shroud as shown in section Power cable installation procedure on page 62. 10. Connect the phase conductors of the input cable to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals and the phase conductors of the motor cable to the U2, V2 and W2 terminals. See Wall installed units (European version) for cabling figures. In case of a cable lug installation, use UL listed cable lugs and tools given below or corresponding to meet UL requirements.
66
Wire size kcmil/AWG 4 2
Compression lug Manufacturer Burndy Ilsco Burndy Ilsco Ilsco Type YA4C-L4BOX CCL-4-38 YA2C-L4BOX CRC-2 CCL-2-38 YA1C-L4BOX CRA-1-38 CCL-1-38 54148 YA25-L4BOX CRB-0 CCL-1/0-38 54109 YAL26T38 CRA-2/0 CCL-2/0-38 54110 Manufacturer Burndy Ilsco Burndy Ilsco Ilsco Burndy Ilsco Ilsco Thomas & Betts Burndy Ilsco Ilsco Thomas & Betts Burndy Ilsco Ilsco Thomas & Betts
Crimping tool Type MY29-3 MT-25 MY29-3 IDT-12 MT-25 MY29-3 IDT-12 MT-25 TBM-8 MY29-3 IDT-12 MT-25 TBM-8 MY29-3 IDT-12 MT-25 TBM-8 No. of crimps 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 3
Burndy Ilsco Ilsco Thomas & Betts
1/0
2/0
11. Tighten the clamping nuts of the cable glands. After connecting the control cables, fasten the clear plastic shroud and front covers. Warning sticker There are warning stickers in different languages inside the packing box of the drive. Attach a warning sticker in the language of your choice onto the plastic skeleton above the power cable terminals. Cabinet installed units (IP 00, UL type open) The drive can be installed in a cabinet without the plastic front, top and connection box covers and without the lead-through plate. It is recommended: to ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the cabinet entry. Grounding with the 360 degrees grounding clamps at the connection box back plate is then not needed. to lead the cable unstripped as close to the terminals as possible. Ground the twisted shields of the power cables under the PE and grounding clamps. Secure the cables mechanically. Protect the RMIO board terminals X25 to X27 against contact when input voltage exceeds 50 VAC. Cover the power cable terminals with the clear plastic shroud as shown in section Power cable installation procedure on page 62.
67
Connecting the control cables

Lead the cable through the control cable entry (1). Connect the control cables as described below. Connect the conductors to the appropriate detachable terminals of the RMIO board [refer to chapter Motor control and I/O board (RMIO)]. Tighten the screws to secure the connection. Terminals
View of frame size R6
Control panel
Optional module 2 Optional module 1 DDCS communication module: RDCO. Channel CH1 is used for the internal communication between the line-side and motor-side converters.
Control cable grounding: see section 360 degrees grounding
Detachable connection terminals (pull up)
68
360 degrees grounding

Insulation
Double-shielded cable
3 4
Single-shielded cable
When the outer surface of the shield is covered with non-conductive material Strip the cable carefully (do not cut the grounding wire and the shield) Turn the shield inside out to expose the conductive surface. Wrap the grounding wire around the conductive surface. Slide a conductive clamp onto the conductive part. Fasten the clamp to the grounding plate with a screw as close as possible to the terminals where the wires are about to be connected. Connecting the shield wires Single-shielded cables: Twist the grounding wires of the outer shield and connect them through the shortest possible route to the nearest grounding hole with a cable lug and a screw. Double-shielded cables: Connect each pair cable shield (twisted grounding wires) with other pair cable shields of the same cable to the nearest grounding hole with a cable lug and a screw. Do not connect shields of different cables to the same cable lug and grounding screw. Leave the other end of the shield unconnected or ground it indirectly via a few nanofarads high-frequency capacitor (e.g. 3.3 nF / 630 V). The shield can also be grounded directly at both ends if they are in the same ground line with no significant voltage drop between the end points. Keep the signal wire pairs twisted as close to the terminals as possible. Twisting the wire with its return wire reduces disturbances caused by inductive coupling.
69
Cabling of I/O and fieldbus modules
Module As short as possible
Shield
1 2 3 4
Note: The RDIO module does not include a terminal for cable shield grounding. Ground the pair cable shields here.
Pulse encoder module cabling
As short as possible
RTAC
Note1: If the encoder is of unisolated type, ground the encoder cable at the drive end only. If the encoder is galvanically isolated from the motor shaft and the stator frame, ground the encoder cable shield at the drive and the encoder end. Note 2: Twist the pair cable wires.
3 4
Shield
Wrap copper tape around the stripped part of the cable under the clamp. Be careful. Do not cut the grounding wire. Clamp as close to the terminals as possible.
70
Fastening the control cables and covers When all control cables are connected, fasten them together with cable ties. Units with a connection box: fasten the cables to the entry plate with cable ties. Units with a gland box: tighten the clamping nuts of the cable glands.
Fasten the connection box cover.
Replace the front cover.
Installation of optional modules and PC

The optional module (such as fieldbus adapter, I/O extension module and the pulse encoder interface) is inserted in the optional module slot of the RMIO board (see Connecting the control cables) and fixed with two screws. See the appropriate optional module manual for cable connections. Note: Two RDCO modules are provided for the DDCS fibre optic link between the RMIO boards of the line-side and motor-side converters. Channel CH0 of the RDCO-03 module in the line-side converter and channel CH1 of the RDCO module in the motor-side converter are used for the internal communication. In case multiple devices are to be connected to one channel, they must be connected in a ring.
71
Installation of AGPS board (Prevention of Unexpected Start, +Q950)

This chapter describes the electrical installation of the optional Prevention of Unexpected Start function (+Q950) of the drive.
Prevention of Unexpected Start (+Q950)

The optional Prevention of Unexpected Start function includes an AGPS board which is connected to the drive and an external power supply. See also chapter Planning the electrical installation, page 50.
Installation of the AGPS board

WARNING! Dangerous voltages can be present on the AGPS board even when the 115...230 V supply is switched off. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual and the instruction in this chapter when working on the AGPS board. Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the mains (input power) and the 115...230 V source for the AGPS board is switched off during installation and maintenance. If the drive is already connected to the mains, wait for 5 min after disconnecting mains power. See page 24 for location of terminal block X41 of the drive page 73 for the circuit diagram page 74 for the dimensions of the AGPS board section AGPS-11C in chapter Technical data for the technical data of the board. Note: Maximum cable length between AGPS terminal block X2 and the drive terminal block is restricted to 10 metres.
72
Connect the AGPS board as follows: Remove the enclosure cover by undoing the fixing screws (1). Ground the bottom plate of the enclosure or via terminal X1:1 of the AGPS board. Connect the cable delivered with the kit between terminal block X2 of the AGPS board (2) and drive terminal block X41. Connect a cable between connector X1 of the AGPS board (3) and the 115...230 V source. Fasten the enclosure cover back with screws.
X2
X1
115...230 V
73
Circuit diagram This circuit diagram shows how the AGPS-11 kit is installed.
Drive
115/230 VAC N
3AFE00374994
74
Dimensional drawing The dimensional drawing of the AGPS board is shown below.
3AFE68293898
75
Motor control and I/O board (RMIO)

This chapter shows external control connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard Application Program (Factory Macro) specifications of the inputs and outputs of the board.

This chapter applies to ACS800 units which employ RMIO-01 board from revision J onwards and RMIO-02 board from revision H onwards.
Note for the ACS800-02 with enclosure extension and the ACS800-07
The connections for the RMIO board shown below apply also to optional terminal block X2 available for the ACS800-02 and ACS800-07. The terminals of the RMIO board are wired to terminal block X2 internally. Terminals of X2 accept cables from 0.5 to 4.0 mm2 (22 to 12 AWG). Tightening torque for screw terminals is 0.4 to 0.8 Nm (0.3 to 0.6 lbf ft). For disconnecting wires from spring terminals, use a screw driver with a blade thickness of 0.6 mm (0.024 in.) and width of 3.5 mm (0.138 in.), e.g. PHOENIX CONTACT SZF 10,6X3,5.
Note on terminal labelling

Optional modules (Rxxx) may have identical terminal designations with the RMIO board.
76
Note on external power supply

External +24 V power supply for the RMIO board is recommended if the application requires a fast start after connecting the input power supply fieldbus communication is required when the input power supply is disconnected. The RMIO board can be supplied from an external power source via terminal X23 or X34 or via both X23 and X34. The internal power supply to terminal X34 can be left connected when using terminal X23. WARNING! If the RMIO board is supplied from an external power source via terminal X34, the loose end of the cable removed from the RMIO board terminal must be secured mechanically to a location where it cannot come into contact with electrical parts. If the screw terminal plug of the cable is removed, the wire ends must be individually insulated. Parameter settings In Standard Application Program, set parameter 16.9 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to EXTERNAL 24V if the RMIO board is powered from an external supply.
77
External control connections (non-US) External control cable connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard Application Program (Factory Macro) are shown below. For external control connections of other application macros and programs, see the appropriate Firmware Manual.
RMIO Terminal block size: cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm2 (22 to 12 AWG) Tightening torque: 0.2 to 0.4 Nm (0.2 to 0.3 lbf ft) X2* X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3 RMIO X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3
VREFAGND VREF+ AGND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 +24VD +24VD DGND1 DGND2 DIIL +24V GND RO1 RO1 RO1 RO2 RO2 RO2 RO3 RO3 RO3
Reference voltage -10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Reference voltage 10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Speed reference 0(2) ... 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm By default, not in use. 0(4) ... 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4) ... 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm Motor speed 0(4)...20 mA speed, RL < 700 ohm
=
rpm
0...motor nom.
Output current 0(4)...20 mA = 0...motor nom. current, RL < 700 ohm Stop/Start Forward/Reverse 1) Not in use Acceleration & deceleration select 2) Constant speed select 3) Constant speed select 3) +24 VDC max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Start interlock (0 = stop) 4) Auxiliary voltage output and input, nonisolated, 24 VDC 250 mA 5) Relay output 1: ready
* optional terminal block in ACS800-02 and ACS800-07 1)
Only effective if par. 10.03 is set to REQUEST by the user. 0 = open, 1 = closed parameters 22.02 and 22.03 parameters 22.04 and 22.05 See par. group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS. 0 0 1 1 Set speed through AI1 Constant speed 1 Constant speed 2 Constant speed 3
2)
DI4 Ramp times according to 0 1

3)
DI5 DI6 Operation 0 1 0 1
4) See parameter 21.09 START INTRL
FUNC.
5) Total maximum current shared
between this output and optional modules installed on the board.
Relay output 2: running
Relay output 3: fault (-1)
Fault
78
External control connections (US) External control cable connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard Application Program (Factory Macro US version) are shown below. For external control connections of other application macros and programs, see the appropriate Firmware Manual.
RMIO Terminal block size: cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm (22 to 12 AWG) Tightening torque: 0.2 to 0.4 Nm (0.2 to 0.3 lbf ft)
2
rpm
* optional terminal block in ACS800-U2 and ACS800-U7 1) Only effective if par. 10.03 is set to
REQUEST by the user.

2)
0 = open, 1 = closed parameters 22.02 and 22.03 parameters 22.04 and 22.05 See par. group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS. 0 0 1 1 Set speed through AI1 Constant speed 1 Constant speed 2 Constant speed 3
DI4 Ramp times according to 0 1

3)
DI5 DI6 Operation 0 1 0 1
4) See parameter 21.09 START INTRL
FUNC.
5) Total maximum current shared
between this output and optional modules installed on the board.
Fault
X2* X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3
RMIO X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3
VREF- Reference voltage -10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL < AGND 10 kohm VREF+ AGND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 +24VD +24VD DGND1 DGND2 DIIL +24V GND RO1 RO1 RO1 RO2 RO2 RO2 RO3 RO3 RO3 Reference voltage 10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Speed reference 0(2) ... 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm By default, not in use. 0(4) ... 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4) ... 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm Motor speed 0(4)...20 mA speed, RL < 700 ohm
=
0...motor nom.
Output current 0(4)...20 mA = 0...motor nom. current, RL < 700 ohm Start ( ) Stop ( ) Forward/Reverse 1) Acceleration & deceleration select 2) Constant speed select 3) Constant speed select 3) +24 VDC max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Start interlock (0 = stop) 4) Auxiliary voltage output and input, nonisolated, 24 VDC 250 mA 5) Relay output 1: ready
Relay output 2: running
Relay output 3: fault (-1)
79
RMIO board specifications

Analogue inputs
With Standard Application Program two programmable differential current inputs (0 mA / 4 mA ... 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm) and one programmable differential voltage input (-10 V / 0 V / 2 V ... +10 V, Rin > 200 kohm). Isolation test voltage Max. common mode voltage between the channels Common mode rejection ratio Resolution Inaccuracy The analogue inputs are galvanically isolated as a group. 500 VAC, 1 min 15 VDC > 60 dB at 50 Hz 0.025 % (12 bit) for the -10 V ... +10 V input. 0.5 % (11 bit) for the 0 ... +10 V and 0 ... 20 mA inputs. 0.5 % (Full Scale Range) at 25 C (77 F). Temperature coefficient: 100 ppm/C ( 56 ppm/F), max.
Constant voltage output

Voltage Maximum load Applicable potentiometer +10 VDC, 0, -10 VDC 0.5 % (Full Scale Range) at 25 C (77 F). Temperature coefficient: 100 ppm/C ( 56 ppm/F) max. 10 mA 1 kohm to 10 kohm
Auxiliary power output

Voltage Maximum current 24 VDC 10 %, short circuit proof 250 mA (shared between this output and optional modules installed on the RMIO)
Analogue outputs
Resolution Inaccuracy Two programmable current outputs: 0 (4) to 20 mA, RL < 700 ohm 0.1 % (10 bit) 1 % (Full Scale Range) at 25 C (77 F). Temperature coefficient: 200 ppm/C ( 111 ppm/F) max.
Digital inputs
With Standard Application Program six programmable digital inputs (common ground: 24 VDC, -15 % to +20 %) and a start interlock input. Group isolated, can be divided in two isolated groups (see Isolation and grounding diagram below). Thermistor input: 5 mA, < 1.5 kohm 1 (normal temperature), > 4 kohm (high temperature), open circuit 0 (high temperature). 0
Isolation test voltage Logical thresholds Input current Filtering time constant
Internal supply for digital inputs (+24 VDC): short-circuit proof. An external 24 VDC supply can be used instead of the internal supply. 500 VAC, 1 min < 8 VDC 0, > 12 VDC 1 DI1 to DI 5: 10 mA, DI6: 5 mA 1 ms
80
Relay outputs
Switching capacity Minimum continuous current Maximum continuous current Isolation test voltage Three programmable relay outputs 8 A at 24 VDC or 250 VAC, 0.4 A at 120 VDC 5 mA rms at 24 VDC 2 A rms 4 kVAC, 1 minute
DDCS fibre optic link

With optional communication adapter module RDCO. Protocol: DDCS (ABB Distributed Drives Communication System)
24 VDC power input

Voltage Typical current consumption (without optional modules) Maximum current consumption 24 VDC 10 % 250 mA 1200 mA (with optional modules inserted)
The terminals on the RMIO board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m (6562 ft). Above 2000 m (6562 ft), see page 57.
81
Isolation and grounding diagram

(Test voltage: 500 V AC) VREFAGND VREF+ AGND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DGND1 DI5 DI6 +24VD +24VD DIIL DGND2 +24 V GND RO1 RO1 RO1 RO2 RO2 RO2 RO3 RO3 RO3 (Test voltage: 4 kV AC) or Grounds of input groups DI1DI4 and DI5/DI6/DIIL are separate (isolation voltage 50 V). J1 All digital inputs share a common ground. This is the default setting. Jumper J1 settings: Common mode voltage between channels 15 V
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 11 10 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3 Ground
82
83
This chapter contains an installation checklist.
Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go through the checklist below together with another person. WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to commission the drive. Read and follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Check... MECHANICAL INSTALLATION The ambient operating conditions are allowed. (See Mechanical installation, Technical data) The unit is fixed properly on a vertical non-flammable wall. (See Mechanical installation.) The cooling air will flow freely. The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start. (See Planning the electrical installation: Motor selection and compatibility, Technical data: Motor connection.) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (See Planning the electrical installation, Electrical installation.) The +E202 and +E200 EMC filter capacitors are disconnected if the drive is connected to an IT (ungrounded) system. The capacitors are reformed if stored over one year (refer to ACS 600/800 Capacitor Reforming Guide [64059629 (English)]. The drive is grounded properly. The mains (input power) voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage. The mains (input power) connections at U1, V1 and W1 and their tightening torques are OK. Appropriate mains (input power) fuses and disconnector are installed.
84
Check... The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 and their tightening torques are OK. The motor cable is routed away from other cables. There are no power factor compensation capacitors in the motor cable. The external control connections inside the drive are OK. There are no tools, foreign objects or dust from drilling inside the drive. Mains (input power) voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive (with bypass connection). Drive, motor connection box and other covers are in place.
85
Start-up and use

This chapter describes the start-up procedure and use of the drive.
Start-up and use

WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to commission the drive. Read and follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death. Perform the start-up procedure as described in the appropriate application program firmware manual. The parameters of the line-side converter control program need not be set in a normal start-up procedure or in normal use. However, it is recommended to set parameter 16.15 I/O START MODE to DI2 LEVEL: if the motor is started and stopped frequently. This prolongs the lifespan of the charging contactor. when starting the motor without start delay is required. if the drive is connected to other drives via a common DC bus. Otherwise, the charging resistor may be damaged. For setting of parameter 16.15 I/O START MODE, change the control panel to control the line-side converter as shown on page 86. Note In normal use, have the control panel control the RMIO board of the motor-side converter (default, ID number 1). If the control panel is set to control the RMIO board of the line-side converter (ID number 2), the drive does not stop by pressing the control panel Stop key. Do not change the ID numbers of the converters from the default settings. If the ID numbers of the line-side and motor side converters are set equal, the control panel stops communicating. Keep parameter 20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL set to ON (default) when no brake chopper and resistor are installed. The parameter index is valid for Standard Application Program. For other application programs, see the appropriate firmware manual. For parameter settings with a brake chopper and resistor, see chapter Resistor braking.
Start-up and use
86
Control panel
The drive is equipped with a control panel (type CDP-312R). The CDP-312R is the user interface of the line-side converter and the motor-side converter of the drive, providing the essential controls such as Start/Stop/Direction/Reset/Reference, and the parameter settings for the units application programs. More information on using the panel can be found in the Firmware Manual delivered with the drive. The control panel is wired to both the line-side converter and the motor-side converter using a Y-splitter. The converter that is currently being controlled is indicated by the converter name on the drive display; the suffix MR denotes motorside converter, LR denotes line-side converter. The control is switched between the converters as follows: To control the line-side converter...
Step 1. Action Enter the Drive Selection Mode. Note: In local control mode, the motor-side converter trips if parameter 30.02 PANEL LOSS is set to FAULT. Refer to the appropriate application program firmware manual. 2. Scroll to ID number 2. ACS 800 0050_5LR IXXR7xxx ID-NUMBER 2 3. Verify the change to the line-side converter and display the warning or fault text .
ACT
Press key
Display (example) ACS 800 0050_5MR
DRIVE
ASXR7xxx ID-NUMBER 1
2 -> 380.0 V ACS 800 0050_5LR ** FAULT ** DC OVERVOLT (3210)
WARNING! The drive does not stop by pressing the control panel Stop key in local control mode.
Start-up and use
87
To control the motor-side converter...

Step 1. Action Enter the Drive Selection Mode. ACS 800 0050_5LR
DRIVE
Press key
Display (example)
IXXR7xxx ID-NUMBER 2 ACS 800 0050_5MR ACXR7xxx ID-NUMBER 1
2.
Scroll to ID number 1.
3.
Verify the change to the motor-side converter.

ACT
1 L -> 0.0 rpm I FREQ 0.00 Hz CURRENT 0.00 A POWER 0.00 %
Start-up and use
88
Start-up and use
89
Actual signals and parameters

This chapter contains listings of parameters specific to the ACS800-31 and ACS800U31.
Line-side converter actual signals and parameters in the motor-side converter application program
This section describes the actual signals and parameters of the line-side converter control program which are copied to the motor-side converter application program. The user can view two actual signals (by default, measured line current and intermediate circuit DC voltage) and change the values of the copied parameters without changing the control panel between two control boards and programs. In normal use, there is no need to set these or other parameters of the line-side converter control program. For more information on the parameters, refer to IGBT Supply Control Program Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735 (English)], available on request from ABB. Terms and abbreviations
Term Actual signal Def. FbEq Parameter Definition Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user. No user setting possible. Default value Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the control panel and the integer used in serial communication. A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.
Actual signals
No. 09.12 09.13 Name/Value LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 Description Signals from the line converter. Line converter signal selected by par. 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL. Line converter signal selected by par. 95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL. 1=1 1=1 106 110 FbEq Def.
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
90
Parameters
No. 95.06 Name/Value LCU Q POW REF Description Line converter references and actual signal selections. Reactive power reference for the line converter i.e. the value for par. 24.02 Q POWER REF2 in the IGBT Supply Control Program. Scaling example 1: 10000 equals to a value of 10000 of parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 and 100% of par. 24.01 Q POWER REF (i.e. 100% of the converter nominal power given in par. 04.06 CONV NOM POWER) when par. 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PERCENT. Scaling example 2: Par. 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to kVAr. A value of 1000 of par. 95.06 equals to 1000 kVAr of par. 24.02 Q POWER REF2. Value of par. 24.01 Q POWER REF is then 100 (1000 kVAr divided by converter nominal power in kVAr)%. Scaling example 3: Par. 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PHI. A value of 10000 of par. 95.06 equals to a value of 100 deg of parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 which is limited to 30 deg. The value of par. 24.01 Q POWER REF will be determined approximately according to the following equation where P is read from actual signal 1.06 POWER: S 30 deg 0 FbEq Def.
95 HARDWARE SPECIF
P Positive reference 30 deg denotes capacitive load. Negative reference 30 deg denotes inductive load.
P P - = ----------------------cos 30 = -S 2 2 P +Q
Par. 24.02 -30 Par. 95.06 -10000 -10000 ... +10000 95.07 LCU DC REF (V) 0 1100 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 0 10000 95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL 0 10000 Setting range. -3000
-10
0 10
30 (deg)
-1000 0 1000
3000
+10000 1=1 0 1=1V 106 1=1 110 1=1
DC voltage reference for line converter i.e. the value for par. 23.01 DC VOLT REF. Setting range in volts. Selects the line-side converter address from which actual signal 09.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 is read. Parameter index. Selects the line-side converter address from which actual signal 09.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 is read. Parameter index.
91
ACS800-31/U31 specific parameters in the IGBT Supply Control Program

The signals and parameters of the IGBT Supply Control Program which are specific to the ACS800-31 and ACS800-U31 are described in the tables below. These parameters need not be set in a normal start-up. For more information on parameters of the IGBT Supply Control Program, refer to IGBT Supply Control Program Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. Terms and abbreviations
Term B C Def. FbEq I R T. Definition Boolean data type Character string data type Default value data type Fieldbus equivalent: the scaling between the value shown on the control panel and the integer used in serial communication Integer data type Real data type Data type (see B, C, I, R)
Parameters
No. Name/Value Description Parameter lock, parameter back-up etc. Selects I/O control start mode when par. 98.01 COMMAND SEL is set B to I/O. Starts the line converter by digital input DI2 rising edge. The line converter starts to modulate and the charging resistors will be bypassed when the motor-side converter is started. Starts the line converter by the level of digital input DI2. The line converter starts to modulate and the charging resistors will be bypassed when the line converter RMIO board is powered, its digital input DI2 is ON and there are no faults. Note: This selection changes the value of par. 98.01 COMMAND SEL from the default setting MCW to I/O on the next RMIO board powerup. 0 DI2 EDGE T./FbEq Def.
16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS

16.15 I/O START MODE DI2 EDGE
DI2 LEVEL
92
No.
Name/Value
Description Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is activated for that fault type. The automatic reset function is not operational if the drive is in local control (L visible on the first row of the control panel display). WARNING! If the start command is selected and it is ON, the line converter may restart immediately after automatic fault reset. Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause danger. WARNING! Do not use these parameters when the drive is connected to a common DC bus. The charging resistors may be damaged in an automatic reset.
T./FbEq
Def.
31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic fault reset.
31.01
NUMBER OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within I the time defined by parameter 31.02 TRIAL TIME. 05 Number of the automatic resets 0 TRIAL TIME 1.0 180.0 s Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See parameter R 31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS. Allowed resetting time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS. Resetting delay Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the line converter overcurrent fault. Inactive Active Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link overvoltage fault. Inactive Active Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link undervoltage fault. Inactive Active 100 18000 R 0 300 B 0 65535 B 0 65535 B 0 65535
31.02
30 s
31.03
DELAY TIME 0.0 3.0 s
0s
31.04
OVERCURRENT NO YES
NO
31.05
OVERVOLTAGE NO YES
NO
31.06
UNDERVOLTAGE NO YES
NO
93
Fixed parameters with the ACS800-31 and ACS800-U31 When the IGBT Supply Control Program is loaded into the ACS800-31 or ACS800U31, the following parameters are set to the default values given in the table below.
Parameter 11.01 11.02 98.01 DC REF SELECT Q REF SELECT COMMAND SEL Default value FIELDBUS PARAM 24.02 MCW. Note: If par. 16.15 I/O START MODE is set to DI2 LEVEL, the default value is changed to I/O on the next RMIO board power-up. INVERTER FAULT. Note: The ACS800-31/U31 line converter is not equipped with internal earth fault supervision. 70.01 70.19 70.20 71.01 CH0 NODE ADDR 120 CH0 HW CONNECTION RING CH3 HW CONNECTION RING CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE NO the default values will not be restored on the next power-up. Do not change. If the default values are changed, the drive will not operate. If changed, the default values will be restored on the next powerup.
98.02 30.02
COMM. MODULE EARTH FAULT
94
95
Maintenance
This chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions.
Safety
WARNING! Read the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual before performing any maintenance on the equipment. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance. This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Maintenance Capacitor reforming Heatsink temperature check and cleaning Change of additional cooling fan Main cooling fan change Capacitor change Interval Every year when stored Depends on the dustiness of the environment (every 6 to 12 months) Every three years Every six years Every ten years Instruction See Reforming. See Heatsink.
See Additional fan. See Main cooling fan. See Capacitors.
Maintenance
96
Heatsink
The heatsink fins pick up dust from the cooling air. The drive runs into overtemperature warnings and faults if the heatsink is not clean. In a normal environment (not dusty, not clean) the heatsink should be checked annually, in a dusty environment more often. Clean the heatsink as follows (when necessary): 1. Remove the cooling fan (see section Main cooling fan). 2. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust. Note: If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning in another room. 3. Replace the cooling fan.
Main cooling fan

The cooling fan lifespan of the drive is about 50 000 operating hours. The actual lifespan depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature. See the appropriate ACS800 firmware manual for an actual signal which indicates the hours of usage of the fan. For resetting the running time signal after a fan replacement, please contact ABB. Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning. If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts.
Maintenance
97
Fan replacement (R5, R6) 1. Loosen the fastening screws of the top plate. 2. Push the top plate backwards. 3. Lift the top plate up. 4. Disconnect the fan supply wires (detachable connector). 5. Lift the fan up. 6. Install the new fan in reverse order.
1 4
Additional fan
Replacement (R5) Remove the front cover. The fan is located on the right-hand side of the control panel (R5). Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable. Install the new fan in reverse order.
Maintenance
98
Replacement (R6) Remove the top cover by lifting it by the rear edge. To remove the fan, release the retaining clips by pulling the back edge (1) of the fan upwards. Disconnect the cable (2, detachable terminal). Install the new fan in reverse order.
View from above when top cover is removed
Air flow upwards Rotation direction
1 2
Capacitors
The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors. Their lifespan is from 45 000 to 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature. Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature. It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure. Capacitor failure is usually followed by a mains fuse failure or a fault trip. Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected. Replacements are available from ABB. Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts. Reforming Reform (re-age) spare part capacitors once a year according to ACS 600/800 Capacitor Reforming Guide (code: 3AFE64059629).
LEDs
This table describes LEDs of the drive.
Where RMIO board * Red Green Control panel mounting platform Red Green * The LEDs are not visible LED Drive in fault state The power supply on the board is OK. Drive in fault state The main +24 V power supply for the control panel and the RMIO board is OK. When the LED is lit
Maintenance
99
Fault tracing
This chapter describes the fault tracing of the line-side converter. For motor-side converter fault tracing, see the appropriate application program firmware manual.
Faults and warnings displayed by the CDP-312R Control Panel

The control panel will display the warnings and faults of the unit (i.e. line-side converter or motor-side converter) the panel is currently controlling. Information on warnings and faults concerning the line-side converter are contained within the IGBT Supply Control Program Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. The warnings and faults concerning the motor-side converter are dealt with in the application program (e.g. Standard Application Program) Firmware Manual. Warning/Fault message from unit not being monitored by control panel Flashing messages WARNING, ID:2 or FAULT, ID:2 on the control panel display indicate a warning or fault state in the line-side converter when the panel is controlling the motor-side converter:
FAULT, ID:2 ACS 800 0490_3MR *** FAULT *** LINE CONV (FF51)
To display the warning or fault identification text, switch the control panel to view the line-side converter as described in section Control panel on page 86. Conflicting ID numbers If the ID numbers of the line-side and the motor-side converters are set equal, the control panel stops functioning. To clear the situation: Disconnect the panel cable from the RMIO board of the motor-side converter. Set the ID number of the line-side converter RMIO board to 2. For the setting procedure, see the application program (e.g. Standard Application Program) Firmware Manual. Connect the disconnected cable to the RMIO board of the motor-side converter again and set the ID number to 1.
Fault tracing
100
Fault tracing
101
Technical data
This chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive, e.g. the ratings, sizes and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other markings and warranty policy.
Technical data
102
IEC data
Ratings The IEC ratings for the ACS800-31 with 50 Hz and 60 Hz supplies are given below. The symbols are described below the table.
ACS800-31 size Nominal ratings
Icont.max Nooverload use Pcont.max kW
Light-overload use I2N PN
Heavy-duty use I2hd Phd
Frame size
Air flow
Heat dissipation W 505 694 910 1099 1315 1585 2125 2530 550 655 760 1000 1210 1450 1750 2350 2800 655 760 1000 1210 1450 1750 2350 2800 3400 1750 2350 2800
A A kW A kW Three-phase supply voltage 208 V, 220 V, 230 V or 240 V -0011-2 34 52 7.5 32 7.5 26 5.5 -0016-2 47 68 11 45 11 38 7.5 -0020-2 59 90 15 56 15 45 11 -0025-2 75 118 22 69 18.5 59 15 -0030-2 88 144 22 83 22 72 18.5 -0040-2 120 168 37 114 30 84 22 -0050-2 150 234 45 143 45 117 30 -0060-2 169 264 45 157 45 132 37 Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V or 415 V -0016-3 34 52 15 32 15 26 11 -0020-3 38 61 18.5 36 18.5 34 15 -0025-3 47 68 22 45 22 38 18.5 -0030-3 59 90 30 56 30 45 22 -0040-3 72 118 37 69 37 59 30 -0050-3 86 144 45 83 45 65 30 -0060-3 120 168 55 114 55 88 45 -0070-3 150 234 75 143 75 117 55 -0100-3 165 264 90 157 75 132 75 Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V, 460 V, 480 V or 500 V -0020-5 31 52 18.5 29 18.5 25 15 -0025-5 36 61 22 34 22 30 18.5 -0030-5 47 68 30 45 30 37 22 -0040-5 58 90 37 55 37 47 30 -0050-5 70 118 45 67 45 57 37 -0060-5 82 144 55 78 45 62 37 -0070-5 120 168 75 114 75 88 55 -0100-5 139 234 90 132 90 114 75 -0120-5 156 264 110 148 90 125 75 Three-phase supply voltage 525 V, 550 V, 575 V, 600 V, 660 V or 690 V -0060-7 57 86 55 54 45 43 37 -0070-7 79 120 75 75 55 60 55 -0100-7 93 142 90 88 75 71 55
Imax
m3/h R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R6 R6 R6 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R6 R6 R6 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R6 R6 R6 R6 R6 R6 350 350 350 350 350 405 405 405 350 350 350 350 350 350 405 405 405 350 350 350 350 350 350 405 405 405 405 405 405
PDM code: 00184674-G
Technical data
103
Symbols
Nominal ratings Icont.max continuous rms output current. No overload capability at 40C. Imax maximum output current. Available for 10 s at start, otherwise as long as allowed by drive temperature. Typical ratings: No-overload use Pcont.max typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 34 motors at the nominal voltage, 230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V. Light-overload use (10% overload capability) I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes. typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 34 motors at the nominal voltage, PN 230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V. Heavy-duty use (50% overload capability) I2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes. Phd typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 34 motors at the nominal voltage, 230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range. To achieve the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current. Note 1: The maximum allowed momentary motor shaft power is limited to approximately 1.3 Pcont.max. If the limit is exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function protects the input bridge and LCL filter of the drive against overload. Note 2: The ratings apply at an ambient temperature of 40C (104F). At lower temperatures the ratings are higher (except Imax). Note 3: Use the DriveSize PC tool for a more accurate dimensioning if the ambient temperature is below 40C (104F) or the drive is loaded cyclically.
Derating
The load capacity (current and power) decreases if the installation site altitude exceeds 1000 metres (3300 ft), or if the ambient temperature exceeds 40C (104F). Temperature derating In the temperature range +40C (+104F) to +50C (+122F) the rated output current is decreased 1% for every additional 1C (1.8F). The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor. Example If the ambient temperature is 50C (+122F), the derating factor is 100% - 1 % 10C = C 90 % or 0.90. The output current is then 0.90 I or 0.90 I .
2N 2hd
Altitude derating In altitudes from 1000 to 4000 m (3300 to 13123 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1% for every 100 m (328 ft). For a more accurate derating, use the DriveSize PC tool.
Technical data
104
Mains cable fuses Fuses for short-circuit protection of the mains cable are listed below. The fuses also protect the adjoining equipment of the drive in case of a short-circuit. Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.1 seconds. The operating time depends on the supply network impedance and the cross-sectional area and length of the supply cable. See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and shortcircuit protection. For UL recognized fuses, see NEMA data.
Note 1: In multicable installations, install only one fuse per phase (not one fuse per conductor). Note 2: Larger fuses must not be used. Note 3: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings.
Fuse V Manufacturer A A2s * Three-phase supply voltage 208 V, 220 V, 230 V or 240 V -0011-2 32 40 9140 500 ABB Control -0016-2 44 50 15400 500 ABB Control -0020-2 55 63 21300 500 ABB Control -0025-2 70 80 34500 500 ABB Control -0030-2 82 100 63600 500 ABB Control -0040-2 112 125 103000 500 ABB Control -0050-2 140 160 200000 500 ABB Control -0060-2 157 200 350000 500 ABB Control Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V or 415 V -0016-3 32 40 9140 500 ABB Control -0020-3 35 40 9140 500 ABB Control -0025-3 44 50 15400 500 ABB Control -0030-3 55 63 21300 500 ABB Control -0040-3 67 80 34500 500 ABB Control -0050-3 80 100 63600 500 ABB Control -0060-3 112 125 103000 500 ABB Control -0070-3 140 160 200000 500 ABB Control -0100-3 153 200 350000 500 ABB Control Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V, 460 V, 480 V or 500 V -0020-5 29 40 9140 500 ABB Control -0025-5 33 40 9140 500 ABB Control -0030-5 44 50 15400 500 ABB Control -0040-5 54 63 21300 500 ABB Control -0050-5 65 80 34500 500 ABB Control -0060-5 76 100 63600 500 ABB Control -0070-5 112 125 103000 500 ABB Control -0100-5 129 160 200000 500 ABB Control -0120-5 145 200 350000 500 ABB Control Three-phase supply voltage 525 V, 550 V, 575 V, 600 V, 660 V or 690 V -0060-7 53 63 28600 690 ABB Control -0070-7 73 80 52200 690 ABB Control -0100-7 86 100 93000 690 ABB Control ACS800-31 size Input current Type OFAF000H40 OFAF000H50 OFAF000H63 OFAF000H80 OFAF000H100 OFAF00H125 OFAF00H160 OFAF1H200 OFAF000H40 OFAF000H40 OFAF000H50 OFAF000H63 OFAF000H80 OFAF000H100 OFAF00H125 OFAF00H160 OFAF1H200 OFAF000H40 OFAF000H40 OFAF000H50 OFAF000H63 OFAF000H80 OFAF000H100 OFAF00H125 OFAF00H160 OFAF1H200 OFAA0GG63 OFAA0GG80 OFAA1GG100 IEC size 000 000 000 000 000 00 00 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 00 00 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 00 00 1 0 0 1
* maximum total I
2t
value for 550 V
Technical data
105
Cable types The table below gives copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents. Cable sizing is based on max. 9 cables laid on a cable ladder side by side, ambient temperature 30C, PVC insulation, surface temperature 70C (EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-2/2001). For other conditions, size the cables according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the load current of the drive.
Copper cables with concentric copper shield Max. load current A 34 47 62 79 98 119 153 186 215 249 284 Cable type mm2 3x6 3x10 3x16 3x25 3x35 3x50 3x70 3x95 3x120 3x150 3x185
PDM code: 00096931-C
Aluminium cables with concentric copper shield Max. load current A 61 75 91 117 143 165 191 Cable type mm2 3x25 3x35 3x50 3x70 3x95 3x120 3x150
Cable entries Mains, DC link and motor cable terminal sizes (per phase), accepted cable diameters and tightening torques are given below.
Frame size U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+,UDCWire size Max. cable Tightening torque IP21 mm2 670 95...185 * mm 35 53 Nm 10 2040 Earthing PE Wire size Tightening torque mm2 670 16...95 Nm 15 8
R5 R6
* with cable lugs 16...70 mm2, tightening torque 20...40 Nm
Dimensions, weights and noise

Frame size Height mm 816 970 Width mm 265 300 IP21 Depth mm 390 439 Weight kg 65 100 Noise dB 70 73
R5 R6
Technical data
106
NEMA data
Ratings The NEMA ratings for the ACS800-U31 and ACS800-31 with 60 Hz supplies are given below. The symbols are described below the table. For sizing, derating and 50 Hz supplies, see IEC data on page 102.
ACS800-U31 size ACS800-31 size I2N PN I2hd Phd ft3/min 206 206 206 206 206 238 238 238 206 206 206 206 206 206 238 238 238 238 238 238 BTU/Hr 1730 2380 3110 3760 4500 5420 7260 8650 2240 2600 3420 4140 4960 5980 8030 9570 11620 5980 8030 9570
Imax
Normal use
Heavy-duty use
Frame size
Air flow
Heat dissipation
A HP A HP A Three-phase supply voltage 208 V, 220 V, 230 V or 240 V -0011-2 52 32 10 26 7.5 R5 -0016-2 68 45 15 38 10 R5 -0020-2 90 56 20 45 10 R5 -0025-2 118 69 25 59 15 R5 -0030-2 144 83 30 72 20 R5 -0040-2 168 114 40 84 25 R6 -0050-2 234 143 50 117 30 R6 -0060-2 264 157 60 132 40 R6 Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V, 460 V or 480 V -0020-5 52 29 20 25 15 R5 -0025-5 61 34 25 30 20 R5 -0030-5 68 45 30 37 25 R5 -0040-5 90 55 40 47 30 R5 -0050-5 118 67 50 57 40 R5 -0060-5 144 78 60 65** 50 R5 -0070-5 168 114 75 88 60 R6 -0100-5 234 132 100 114 75 R6 -0120-5 264 156* 125 125 100 R6 Three-phase supply voltage 525 V, 575 V, 600 V -0060-7 62 54 40 43 30 R6 -0070-7 79 75 50 60 40 R6 -0100-7 99 88 75 71 50 R6
* **
allowed with motor power < 125 HP and a reactive power reference of 0 allowed with motor power < 50 HP and a reactive power reference of 0
Symbols
Nominal ratings Imax maximum output current. Available for 10 s at start, otherwise as long as allowed by drive temperature. Normal use (10% overload capability) I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is typically allowed for one minute every 5 minutes. PN typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA rated motors (230 V, 460 Vor 575 V). Heavy-duty use (50% overload capability) I2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is typically allowed for one minute every 5 minutes. Phd typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA rated motors (230 V, 460 Vor 575 V). Note 1: The ratings apply at an ambient temperature of 40C (104F). At lower temperatures the ratings are higher (except Imax).
Technical data
107
Input cable fuses The ratings of UL listed fuses for branch circuit protection are listed below. The fuses also prevent damage to the adjoining equipment of the drive in case of a short-circuit inside the drive. Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.1 seconds. The operating time depends on the supply network impedance and the crosssectional area and length of the supply cable. The fuses must be of the non-time delay type. See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and short-circuit protection.
Note 1: In multicable installations, install only one fuse per phase (not one fuse per conductor). Note 2: Larger fuses must not be used. Note 3: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings. Input Fuse current ACS800-31 type A A V Manufacturer Type Three-phase supply voltage 208 V, 220 V, 230 V or 240 V -0011-2 32 40 600 Bussmann JJS-40 -0016-2 44 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 -0020-2 55 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 -0025-2 70 90 600 Bussmann JJS-90 -0030-2 82 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 -0040-2 112 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 -0050-2 140 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 -0060-2 157 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V, 460 V, 480 V or 500 V -0020-5 29 40 600 Bussmann JJS-40 -0025-5 33 50 600 Bussmann JJS-50 -0030-5 44 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 -0040-5 54 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 -0050-5 65 90 600 Bussmann JJS-90 -0060-5 76 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 -0070-5 112 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 -0100-5 129 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 -0120-5 145 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 Three-phase supply voltage 525 V, 575 V, 600 V -0060-7 53 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 -0070-7 73 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 -0100-7 86 125 600 Bussmann JJS-125 ACS800-U31 type
UL class T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
Technical data
108
Cable types
Cable sizing is based on NEC Table 310-16 for copper wires, 75C (167F) wire insulation at 40C (104F) ambient temperature. Not more than three current-carrying conductors in raceway or cable or earth (directly buried). For other conditions, dimension the cables according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the load current of the drive.
Copper cables with concentric copper shield Max. load current A 31 44 57 75 88 101 114 132 154 176 202 224 251 273 Cable type AWG/kcmil 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 MCM or 2 x 1 300 MCM or 2 x 1/0 350 MCM or 2 x 2/0
PDM code: 00096931-C
Cable Entries Input, DC link and motor cable (per phase) terminal sizes, accepted cable diameters and tightening torques are given below.
Frame size U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDCWire size Wire Tightening (UL type 1) torque AWG in. lbf ft 10...2/0 1.39 11.1 3/0 ... 350 MCM * 2.09 14.8...29.5 * with cable lugs 6...2/0 AWG, tightening torque 14.8...29.5 lbf ft Grounding PE Wire size Tightening torque AWG lbf ft 10...2/0 11.1 5...4/0 5.9
R5 R6
Dimensions, weights and noise

Frame size Height in. 32.03 38.19 Width in. 10.43 11.81 UL type 1 Depth in. 15.35 17.28 Weight lb 143 220 Noise dB 70 73
R5 R6
Technical data
109
Input power connection

Voltage (U1) 208/220/230/240 VAC 3-phase 10% for 230 VAC units 380/400/415 VAC 3-phase 10% for 400 VAC units 380/400/415/440/460/480/500 VAC 3-phase 10% for 500 VAC units Prospective short-circuit current (IEC 60439-1, UL 508C) 525/550/575/600/660/690 VAC 3-phase 10% for 690 VAC units Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current in the supply is 65 kA in a second providing that the mains cable of the drive is protected with appropriate fuses. US and Canada: The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive nominal voltage when protected by T class fuses. 48 to 63 Hz, maximum rate of change 17%/s Max. 3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage Max. 25% 1.00 (fundamental at nominal load) Harmonics are below the limits defined in IEEE519 for all Isc/IL. Each individual harmonic current fulfils IEEE519 table 10-3 for Isc/IL > 20. Current THD and each individual current harmonic fulfil IEC 61000-3-4 table 5.2 for Rsce > 66. The values will be met if the supply network voltage is not distorted by other loads. THD voltage (%) THD current (%) Rsc 20 4 4 100 0.8 5
Frequency Imbalance Voltage dips Fundamental power factor (cos phi1) Harmonic distortion
THD =
2 In ------------------- I1con t max 50 2
THD = Total Harmonic Distortion (THD). The voltage THD depends on the short-circuit ratio (Rsc). The spectrum of the distortion also contains interharmonics. In = nth harmonic component Rsc = Rsce = Isc/IN Isc = short-circuit current at point of common coupling (PCC) I1contmax = continuous maximum input current of the IGBT supply unit IL = maximum demand load current
Technical data
110
Motor connection
Voltage (U2) Frequency 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point DTC mode: 0 to 3.2 ffwp. Maximum frequency 300 Hz. ffwp = UNmains UNmotor fNmotor
Frequency resolution Current Power limit Field weakening point Switching frequency Maximum recommended motor cable length
ffwp: frequency at field weakening point; UNmains: mains (input power) voltage; UNmotor: rated motor voltage; fNmotor: rated motor frequency 0.01 Hz See section IEC data or NEMA data. Approximately 1.3 Pcont.max 8 to 300 Hz 3 kHz (average). 300 m (984 ft). Additional restriction for units with EMC filtering (type code selections +E202 and +E200): max. motor cable length is 100 m (328 ft). With longer cables the EMC Directive requirements may not be fulfilled.
Efficiency
Approximately 97% at nominal power level
Cooling
Method Free space around the unit Internal fan, flow direction from bottom to top. See chapter Mechanical installation.
Degrees of protection
IP20 (UL type open) and IP21 (UL type 1). IPXXD from above. Without front cover, the unit must be protected against contact according to IP2x [see chapter Electrical installation: Cabinet installed units (IP 00, UL type open)].
AGPS-11C
Nominal input voltage Nominal input current Nominal frequency Max. external fuse X1 terminal sizes Output voltage Nominal output current X2 terminal block type Ambient temperature Relative humidity Dimensions (with enclosure) Weight (with enclosure) Approvals 115...230 VAC 10% 0.1 A (230 V) / 0.2 A (115 V) 50/60 Hz 16 A 3 x 2.5 mm2 15 VDC 0.5 V 0.4 A JST B4P-VH 0...50C Max. 90%, no condensation allowed 167 x 128 x 52 mm (Height x Weight x Depth) 0.75 kg C-UL, US listed
Technical data
111
Ambient conditions
Environmental limits for the drive are given below. The drive is to be used in a heated, indoor, controlled environment. Operation Storage Transportation installed for stationary use in the protective package in the protective package Installation site altitude 0 to 4000 m (13123 ft) above sea level [above 1000 m (3281 ft), see section Derating] Air temperature -15 to +50C (5 to 122F). No -40 to +70C (-40 to +158F) -40 to +70C (-40 to +158F) frost allowed. See section Derating. Relative humidity 5 to 95% Max. 95% Max. 95% No condensation allowed. Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60% in the presence of corrosive gases. Contamination levels No conductive dust allowed. (IEC 60721-3-3, IEC 60721-3- Boards with coating: Boards with coating: Boards with coating: 2, IEC 60721-3-1) Chemical gases: Class 3C2 Chemical gases: Class 1C2 Chemical gases: Class 2C2 Solid particles: Class 3S2 Solid particles: Class 1S3 Solid particles: Class 2S2 Atmospheric pressure 70 to 106 kPa 70 to 106 kPa 60 to 106 kPa 0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres 0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres 0.6 to 1.05 atmospheres Max. 1 mm (0.04 in.) Max. 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) Vibration (IEC 60068-2) Max. 1 mm (0.04 in.) (5 to 13.2 Hz), (2 to 9 Hz), (5 to 13.2 Hz), max. 7 m/s2 (23 ft/s2) max. 15 m/s2 (49 ft/s2) max. 7 m/s2 (23 ft/s2) (13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal (13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal (9 to 200 Hz) sinusoidal Max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2), Shock (IEC 60068-2-29) Not allowed Max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2), 11 ms 11 ms Free fall Not allowed 250 mm (10 in.) for weight 250 mm (10 in.) for weight under 100 kg (220 lb) under 100 kg (220 lb) 100 mm (4 in.) for weight 100 mm (4 in.) for weight over 100 kg (220 lb) over 100 kg (220 lb)
Technical data
112
Materials
Drive enclosure PC/ABS 2.5 mm, colour NCS 1502-Y (RAL 90021 / PMS 420 C) hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5 to 2 mm, thickness of coating 100 micrometres Package Disposal extruded aluminium AlSi Plywood, bands PP or steel The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources. The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable. All metal parts can be recycled. The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances, according to local regulations. Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks. If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors (C1-1 to C1-x) contain electrolyte and the printed circuit boards contain lead, both of which are classified as hazardous waste within the EU. They must be removed and handled according to local regulations. For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions, please contact your local ABB distributor.
Applicable standards
EN 50178 (1997) EN 60204-1 (1997) The drive complies with the following standards. The compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive is verified according to standards EN 50178 and EN 60204-1. Electronic equipment for use in power installations Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1: General requirements. Provisions for compliance: The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing - an emergency-stop device - a supply disconnecting device. Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems. Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests. Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, second edition Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) Industrial control equipment
EN 60529: 1991 (IEC 60529) IEC 60664-1 (1992) EN 61800-3 (2004) UL 508C NEMA 250 (2003) CSA C22.2 No. 14-95
Technical data
113
CE marking
A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the unit follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives (Directive 73/23/EEC, as amended by 93/68/EEC and Directive 89/336/ EEC, as amended by 93/68/EEC).
Definitions
EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment. Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality. First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes. Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not supplying domestic premises. Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment. Note: A professional is a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects. Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment. Drive of category C4: drive of rated voltage equal to or above 1000 V, or rated current equal to or above 400 A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment.
Compliance with the EMC Directive

The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard [EN 61800-3 (2004)] covers requirements stated for drives.
Compliance with the EN 61800-3 (2004) First environment (drive of category C2)
The drive complies with the standard with the following provisions: 1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E202. 2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual. 3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual. 4. Maximum cable length is 100 metres. WARNING! The drive may cause radio interference if used in a residential or domestic environment. The user is required to take measures to prevent interference, in addition to the requirements for CE compliance listed above, if necessary. Note: It is not allowed to install a drive equipped with EMC filter +E202 on IT (unearthed) systems. The supply network becomes connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the unit.
Technical data
114
Second environment (drive of category C3)

The drive complies with the standard with the following provisions: 1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E200. See also page 60. 2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual. 3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual. 4. Maximum cable length is 100 metres. WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network.

If the provisions under Second environment (drive of category C3) cannot be met, e.g. the drive cannot be equipped with EMC filter +E200 when installed to an IT (unearthed) network, the requirements of the EMC Directive can be met as follows: 1. It is ensured that no excessive emission is propagated to neighbouring low-voltage networks. In some cases, the inherent suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings can be used.
Medium voltage network Supply transformer Neighbouring network
Static screen
Point of measurement Low voltage Equipment (victim) Equipment Equipment Low voltage Drive
2. An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation. A template is available from the local ABB representative. 3. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual. 4. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual. WARNING! A drive of category C4 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network.
Machinery Directive
The drive complies with the European Union Machinery Directive (98/37/EC) requirements for an equipment intended to be incorporated into machinery.
Technical data
115
C-tick marking
C-tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. A C-tick mark is attached to each drive in order to verify compliance with the relevant standard (IEC 61800-3 (2004) Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods), mandated by the TransTasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme.
Definitions
EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment. Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality. The Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme (EMCS) was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority (ACA) and the Radio Spectrum Management Group (RSM) of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development (NZMED) in November 2001. The aim of the scheme is to protect the radiofrequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical/ electronic products. First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes. Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not supplying domestic premises. Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment. Note: A professional is a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects. Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment. Drive of category C4: drive of rated voltage equal to or above 1000 V, or rated current equal to or above 400 A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment.
Compliance with IEC 61800-3 First environment (drive of category C2)

The drive complies with the limits of IEC 61800-3 with the following provisions: 1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E202. 2. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual. 3. The motor and control cables used are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual. 4. Maximum cable length is 100 metres. Note: The drive must not be equipped with EMC filter +E202 when installed to IT (unearthed) systems. The mains becomes connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors. In IT systems this may cause danger or damage the unit.
Technical data
116

The drive complies with the standard with the following provisions: 1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E200. See also page 60. 2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual. 3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual. 4. Maximum cable length is 100 metres. WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network.

If the provisions under Second environment (drive of category C3) cannot be met, e.g. the drive cannot be equipped with EMC filter +E200 when installed to an IT (unearthed) network, the requirements of the EMC Directive can be met as follows: 1. It is ensured that no excessive emission is propagated to neighbouring low-voltage networks. In some cases, the inherent suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings can be used.
Medium voltage network Supply transformer Neighbouring network
Static screen
Point of measurement Low voltage Equipment (victim) Equipment Equipment Low voltage Drive
2. An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation. A template is available from the local ABB representative. 3. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual. 4. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual. WARNING! A drive of category C4 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network.
Technical data
117
UL/CSA markings
The ACS800-U31 and ACS800-31 are C-UL US listed. CSA marking is pending.
UL
The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive nominal voltage (600 V maximum for 690 V units) when protected by T class fuses. The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical Code (US). See ACS800 Firmware Manual for setting. Default setting is off, must be activated at start-up. The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment. See section Ambient conditions for specific limits.
Equipment warranty and liability

The manufacturer warrants the equipment supplied against defects in design, materials and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months after installation or twenty-four (24) months from date of manufacturing, whichever first occurs. The local ABB office or distributor may grant a warranty period different to the above and refer to local terms of liability as defined in the supply contract. The manufacturer is not responsible for any costs resulting from a failure if the installation, commissioning, repair, alternation, or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation. units subjected to misuse, negligence or accident units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser.
In no event shall the manufacturer, its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses or penalties. This is the sole and exclusive warranty given by the manufacturer with respect to the equipment and is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, express or implied, arising by operation of law or otherwise, including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive, please contact the local distributor or ABB office. The technical data, information and specifications are valid at the time of printing. The manufacturer reserves the right to modifications without prior notice.
Technical data
118
Technical data
119
The dimensions are given in millimetres and [inches].
120
US gland/conduit plate Diameters of knock-out holes: 50 mm [1.97 in.], 22.7 mm [.89 in.]. The unit is UL type 1 when equipped with the US gland plate.
Frame size R5 (IP21, UL type open, UL type 1)
68406200 A
US gland/conduit plate Diameters of knockout holes: 63.5 mm [2.50 in.], 22.7 mm [.89 in.]. The unit is UL type 1 when equipped with the US gland plate.
Frame size R6 (IP21, UL type open, UL type 1)
121
68405726 A
122
123
Resistor braking
This chapter describes how to select, protect and wire external brake choppers and resistors for the drive. The chapter also contains installation instructions and the technical data.
How to select the correct drive/chopper/resistor combination

Refer to NBRA-6xx Braking Choppers Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58920541 (English)]. WARNING! Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the value specified for the particular drive / brake chopper / resistor combination. The drive and the chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance.
Resistor braking
124
External brake chopper and resistor(s) for the ACS800-31/U31

The nominal ratings for dimensioning the brake resistors for the ACS800-31 and ACS800-U31 are given below at an ambient temperature of 40C (104F).
ACS800-31 Chopper ACS800-U31 type type Brake resistor Type R ohm SACE15RE22 SACE15RE13 SACE15RE13 SAFUR90F575 SAFUR90F575 SAFUR90F575 SAFUR80F500 SAFUR125F500 SAFUR125F500 SACE15RE22 SACE15RE13 SACE15RE13 SAFUR90F575 SAFUR90F575 SAFUR90F575 SAFUR80F500 SAFUR80F500 SAFUR125F500 22 13 13 8 8 8 6 4 4 22 13 13 8 8 8 6 6 4 ER kJ 420 435 435 1800 1800 1800 2400 3600 3600 420 435 435 1800 1800 1800 2400 2400 3600 PRcont kW 2 2 2 4.5 4.5 4.5 6 9 9 2 2 2 4.5 4.5 4.5 6 6 9 No. of elements Cable mm 3x6+6 3x6+6 3x6+6 3x25+16 3x25+16 3x25+16 3x35+16 3x35+16 3x70+35 3x6+6 3x6+6 3x6+6 3x25+16 3x25+16 3x25+16 3x35+16 3x35+16 3x70+16
2
Pbrmax Degree of protection Chopper kW 14.4 26.9 26.9 52.8 52.8 52.8 65.6 94.2 94.2 18.5 31.4 31.4 62.6 62.6 62.6 88.4 88.4 122.1 IP54 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP54 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP21 IP21 IP21 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP21 IP21 IP21 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
00184674 E
Resistor
Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V or 415 V -0016-3 -0020-3 -0025-3 -0030-3 -0040-3 -0050-3 -0060-3 -0070-3 -0100-3 -0020-5 -0025-5 -0030-5 -0040-5 -0050-5 -0060-5 -0070-5 -0100-5 -0120-5 NBRA-653 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-657 NBRA-653 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-656 NBRA-657 4 4 4 9 9 9 12 18 18 4 4 4 9 9 9 12 12 18
Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V, 460 V, 480 V or 500 V
R ER
Resistance value for the listed resistor assembly. Note: This is also the minimum allowed resistance for the brake resistor. Short energy pulse that the resistor assembly withstands every 400 seconds. This energy will heat the resistor element from 40 C (104 F) to the maximum allowable temperature.
PRcont Continuous power (heat) dissipation of the resistor when placed correctly. Energy ER dissipates in 400 seconds. Pbrmax Maximum braking power of the drive equipped with the standard chopper and resistor. The drive and the chopper will withstand this braking power for one minute every ten minutes. Note: The braking energy transmitted to the resistor during any period shorter than 400 seconds may not exceed ER. All braking choppers and resistors must be installed outside the converter module. Note: The SACE and SAFUR resistors are not UL listed.
Resistor braking
125
Brake chopper and resistor installation

The installation instructions for the chopper and resistor are given in NBRA-6xx Braking Choppers Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58920541 (English)]. All choppers and resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they will cool. WARNING! The materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable. The surface temperature of the resistor is high. Air flowing from the resistor is hundreds of degrees Celsius. Protect the resistor against contact. Use the cable type used for drive input cabling (refer to chapter Technical data) to ensure the input fuses will also protect the resistor cable. Alternatively, twoconductor shielded cable with the same cross-sectional area can be used. The maximum length of the resistor cable(s) is 10 m (33 ft).
Protection
It is highly recommended to equip the drive with a main contactor for safety reasons. Wire the contactor so that it opens in case the resistor overheats. This is essential for safety since the drive will not otherwise be able to interrupt the main supply if the chopper remains conductive in a fault situation. Below is a simple example wiring diagram.
L1 L2 L3
1
Fuses
OFF
2
13
ON
2 4 6 14 4
ACS800 U1 V1 W1 K1 Thermal switch (standard in ABB resistors)
Resistor braking
126
Brake circuit commissioning

For Standard Application Program: Switch off the overvoltage control of the drive (parameter 20.05). Frame size R6: Check the setting of parameter 21.09. If stop by coasting is required, select OFF2 STOP. For the use of the brake resistor overload protection (parameters 27.02...27.05), consult an ABB representative. WARNING! If the drive is equipped with a brake chopper but the chopper is not enabled by parameter setting, the brake resistor must be disconnected because the protection against resistor overheating is then not in use.
WARNING! Parameter 95.07 LCU DC REF (V) must be set to the minimum value (default) with brake resistors. Otherwise energy from the supply network can flow to the brake resistor causing overheating of the resistor and damage to the equipment. For settings of other application programs, see the appropriate firmware manual.
Resistor braking
127
External +24 V power supply for the RMIO boards via terminal X34
This chapter describes how to connect an external +24 V power supply for the RMIO boards of the motor-side and line-side converters via terminal X34. For current consumption of the RMIO board, see chapter Motor control and I/O board (RMIO). Note: For the motor-side converter RMIO board, external power is easier to supply via terminal X23, see chapter Motor control and I/O board (RMIO).
Parameter settings
In Standard Application Program, set parameter 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to EXTERNAL 24V if the RMIO board is powered from an external supply.
128
Connecting +24 V external power supply

RMIO board of the motor-side converter 1. Break off the tab covering the +24 VDC power input connector with pliers. 2. Pull the connector outwards. 3. Disconnect the wires from the connector (keep the connector for later use). 4. Isolate the ends of the wires individually with insulating tape. 5. Cover the isolated ends of the wires with insulating tape. 6. Push the wires into the inside of the skeleton. 7. Connect the wires of the +24 V external power supply to the disconnected connector: if a two-way connector, + wire to terminal 1 and - wire to terminal 2 if a three-way connector, + wire to terminal 2 and - wire to terminal 3. 8. Plug the connector in.
2 1 X34 3
4 6
129
RMIO board 1 2 3 X34
8 1 2
Connection of a two-way connector
RMIO board 1 2 3 X34
2 3
Connection of a three-way connector
130
RMIO board of the line-side converter Frame size R5 The location of terminal X34 in the line-side converter is shown below. Connect the external +24 V supply to the board as described in steps 2 to 8 in section RMIO board of the motor-side converter.
Terminal X34
Frame size R6 1. Remove the top cover by releasing the retaining clip with a screw driver and lifting the cover upwards. 2. Disconnect the DDCS communication module by undoing the fastening screws and disconnecting the fibre optic cables. Disconnect other optional modules if present. 3. Disconnect the control panel cable. 4. Disconnect the additional fan cable (detachable terminal) and release the strain relief. 5. Remove the I/O terminal blocks. 6. Undo the fastening screws of the upper plastic cover. 7. Lift the cover carefully upwards by the lower sides. 8. Disconnect the control panel cable from the RMIO board.
131
9. Lift the upper plastic cover off. 10. Connect the external +24 V supply to the board as described in steps 2 to 5, 7 and 8 in section RMIO board of the motor-side converter. 11. Reconnect all disconnected cables and fasten the covers in reverse order.
1 4 4
2 3 5 5 5 8 7 7
132
ABB Oy AC Drives P.O. Box 184 FI-00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone +358 10 22 11 Fax +358 10 22 22681 Internet http://www.abb.com
ABB Inc. Automation Technologies Drives & Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin, WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785-3200 800-HELP-365 Fax 262 780-5135
Dimensional drawings: 14.10.2005
3AFE68599954 Rev A EN EFFECTIVE: 14.10.2005
ACS800
Firmware Manual ACS800 Standard Control Program 7.x
ACS800 Standard Control Program 7.x Firmware Manual
3AFE64527592 REV L EN EFFECTIVE: 2011-08-25
2011 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.
Table of contents
Table of contents Introduction to the manual Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-up and control through the I/O Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start-up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to perform the ID Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control panel Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel operation mode keys and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive control with the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start, stop and change direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to set speed reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signal display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to select actual signals to the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display the full name of the actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to view and reset the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display and reset an active fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to select a parameter and change the value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to enter an assistant, browse and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to upload data from a drive to the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 34 35 36 15 15 15 17 21 22 22 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14
Table of contents
How to download data from the panel to a drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to set the contrast of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program features Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-up Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default order of the tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents of the assistant displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37 38 39 39 40
41 41 41 41 42 43 43 44 44 44 44 45 45 46 46 46 47 47 48 49 49 49 49 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 51 52 52 52 52 53 53 53 53 53 54 54
Table of contents
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe torque off (STO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prevention of unexpected start-up (POUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safely-limited speed (SLS) (AS7R firmware version only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Magnetising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flux Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flux Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scalar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hexagonal motor flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI<Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor temperature thermal model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of the motor thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54 55 55 55 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 57 58 58 58 59 59 59 59 59 59 60 60 60 61 61 62 62 62 62 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 65 65 65 66
Table of contents
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supervision of optional IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preprogrammed faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800, frame sizes R7 and R8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control board temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sleep function for the process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive Programming using the function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DriveAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control of a mechanical brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation time scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 67 67 67 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 70 70 71 71 71 72 72 72 73 74 74 75 76 76 76 76 77 77 78 79 80 80
Table of contents
Master/Follower use of several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced Run function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application macros Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note on external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PID Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection example, 24 VDC / 420 mA two-wire sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequential Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals and parameters
80 80 81 82 82 82 82 83 83 84 84
85 85 86 86 87 88 89 90 91 91 92 93 94 95 95 96 97
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 01 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 03 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 04 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 09 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 16 SYST CTRL INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Table of contents
10
22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SPEED CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 TORQUE CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 MOTOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 BRAKE CHOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 PROCESS VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 MOT TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 PID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 BRAKE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 ENERGY OPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ENCODER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 COMM MODULE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 STANDARD MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 MASTER/FOLLOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 DDCS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 USER LOAD CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 ADAPT PROG CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 USER CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 D SET REC ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 D SET TR ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 HARDWARE SPECIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 EXTERNAL AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 OPTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fieldbus control Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modbus addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up communication through Advant controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fieldbus reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used . Block diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used .
135 138 140 140 141 143 144 150 151 152 153 155 157 162 164 165 166 166 166 168 169 171 172 173 174 175 175 178 181 186
191 191 192 193 195 196 197 199 202 203 203 203 204 205 206 207 208
Table of contents
11
Block Diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABB Drives communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Drive communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive commands supported by the Generic Drive communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTROL WORD for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUS WORD for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diverse status, fault, alarm and limit words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.03 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.05 FAULT WORD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.06 FAULT WORD 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.08 ALARM WORD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.09 ALARM WORD 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.13 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.14 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.15 FAULT WORD 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.16 ALARM WORD 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.17 FAULT WORD 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.18 ALARM WORD 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.19 INT INIT FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.30 LIMIT WORD INV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.31 ALARM WORD 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.32 EXT IO STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03.33 FAULT WORD 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04.01 FAULTED INT INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04.02 INT SC INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault tracing Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning messages generated by the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analogue Extension Module
209 210 210 211 212 214 215 216 217 218 218 218 219 219 220 220 221 222 222 223 223 224 224 225 225 226 226 227 227 228 228 229 230
231 231 231 231 231 232 239 240
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Speed control through the analogue extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Basic checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Table of contents
12
Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Parameter settings: bipolar input in basic speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Parameter settings: bipolar input in joystick mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Additional data: actual signals and parameters Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIBA-01 InterBus-S Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMBP-01 ModbusPlus Adapter and NMBA-01 Modbus Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control block diagrams Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference control chain, sheet 1: FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL and T CTRL macros (continued on the next page ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference control chain sheet 1: PID CTRL macro (continued on the next page ) . . . . . . . . . Reference control chain sheet 2: All macros (continued on the next page ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling of Reset and On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index 267 268 270 272 274 275 253 253 253 253 253 253 254 254 255 258
Table of contents
13
Introduction to the manual
Chapter overview
The chapter includes a description of the contents of the manual. In addition it contains information about the compatibility, safety and intended audience.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with Standard Control Program versions ASXR7360 and AS7R7363. See parameter 33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION.
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive. Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the Hardware Manual. Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are given in this manual in the section describing the related user-adjustable parameters.
Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.
Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters: Start-up and control through the I/O instructs in setting up the application program, and how to start, stop and regulate the speed of the drive. Control panel gives instructions for using the panel. Program features contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the user settings and diagnostic signals. Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a connection diagram. Actual signals and parameters describes the actual signals and parameters of the drive. Fieldbus control describes the communication through the serial communication links.
14
Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and remedies. Analogue Extension Module, describes the communication between the drive and the analogue I/O extension (optional). Additional data: actual signals and parameters contains more information on the actual signals and parameters. Control block diagrams contains block diagrams concerning reference control chains and handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock.
Product and service inquiries

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type code and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and selecting Sales, Support and Service network.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select Training courses.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form (LV AC drives).
15
Start-up and control through the I/O
Chapter overview
The chapter instructs how to: do the start-up start, stop, change the direction of rotation, and adjust the speed of the motor through the I/O interface perform an Identification Run for the drive.
How to start-up the drive

There are two start-up methods between which the user can select: Run the Start-up Assistant, or perform a limited start-up. The Assistant guides the user through all essential settings to be done. In the limited start-up, the drive gives no guidance: The user goes through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in the manual. If you want to run the Assistant, follow the instructions given in section How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings) on page 15. If you want to perform the limited start-up, follow the instructions given in section How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings) on page 17. How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings) Before you start, ensure you have the motor nameplate data on hand. SAFETY The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician. The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions. Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation manual. Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger. De-couple the driven machine if: - there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or - a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential only in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)
16
POWER-UP Apply the main power. The control panel first shows the panel identification data then the Identification Display of the drive then the Actual Signal Display
CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx ....... ACS800 ID NUMBER 1 1 -> 0.0 rpm O 0.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 0.00 A POWER 0.00 % 1 -> 0.0 rpm O *** INFORMATION *** Press FUNC to start Language Selection
after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection.

(If no key is pressed for a few seconds, the display starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on selecting the language.)
The drive is now ready for the start-up. SELECTING THE LANGUAGE Press the FUNC key.
Language Selection 1/1
LANGUAGE ? [ENGLISH] ENTER:OK ACT:EXIT
Scroll to the desired language by the arrow keys ( press ENTER to accept.
or
) and
(The drive loads the selected language into use, shifts back to the Actual Signal Display and starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on starting the guided motor set-up.)
1 -> 0.0 rpm O *** INFORMATION *** Press FUNC to start guided Motor Setup
STARTING THE GUIDED MOTOR SET-UP Press FUNC to start the guided motor set-up.
(The display shows which general command keys to use when stepping through the assistant.) Motor Setup 1/10 ENTER: Ok/Continue ACT: Exit FUNC: More Info Motor Setup 2/10 MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA AVAILABLE? ENTER:Yes FUNC:Info
Press ENTER to step forward. Follow the instructions given on the display.
17
How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings) Before you start, ensure you have the motor nameplate data at your hand. SAFETY The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician. The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions. Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation manual. Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger. De-couple the driven machine if: - there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or - a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential only in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.) POWER-UP Apply the main power. The control panel first shows the panel identification data then the Identification Display of the drive then the Actual Signal Display
CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx ....... ACS800 ID NUMBER 1 1 -> 0.0 rpm O 0.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 0.00 A POWER 0.00 % 1 -> 0.0 rpm O *** INFORMATION *** Press FUNC to start Language Selection 1 -> 0.0 rpm O FREQ 0.00 Hz CURRENT 0.00 A POWER 0.00 %
after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection.

(If no key is pressed for a few seconds, the display starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on starting the Language Selection.)
Press ACT to remove the suggestion on starting the language selection. The drive is now ready for the limited start-up.
MANUAL START-UP DATA ENTERING (parameter group 99) Select the language. The general parameter setting procedure is described below.
The general parameter setting procedure: - Press PAR to select the Parameter Mode of the panel. - Press the double-arrow keys ( - Press the arrow keys ( or or ) to scroll the parameter groups. 1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 01 LANGUAGE [ENGLISH] O ) to scroll parameters within a group. or ), fast change by the double1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH O
- Activate the setting of a new value by ENTER. - Change the value by the arrow keys ( arrow keys ( or ).
- Press ENTER to accept the new value (brackets disappear).
18
Select the Application Macro. The general parameter setting procedure is given above.
The default value FACTORY is suitable in most cases.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 02 APPLICATION MACRO [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 04 MOTOR CTRL MODE [DTC]
Select the motor control mode. The general parameter setting procedure is given above.
DTC is suitable in most cases. The SCALAR control mode is recommended - for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable - when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of the inverter - when the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate:
ABB Motors
3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 IEC 200 M/L 55 No Ins.cl. F IP 55 Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s 30 1475 32.5 0.83 50 56 50 0.83 1475 30 50 0.83 1470 34 30 30 0.83 1470 59 50 1475 50 0.83 54 30 35 1770 0.83 59 60 3GAA 202 001 - ADA 6210/C3 IEC 34-1 180
V 690 Y 400 D 660 Y 380 D 415 D 440 D Cat. no
380 V input voltage
Note: Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate. For example, if the motor nominal speed is 1440 rpm on the nameplate, setting the value of parameter 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the wrong operation of the drive.
6312/C3
- motor nominal voltage Allowed range: 1/2 UN 2 UN of ACS800. (UN refers to the highest voltage in
each of the nominal voltage ranges: 415 VAC for 400 VAC units, 500 VAC for 500 VAC units and 690 VAC for 600 VAC units.)
1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 07 MOTOR NOM FREQ [ ] O
- motor nominal current

Allowed range: approx. 1/6 I2hd 99.04 = SCALAR))
2 I2hd of ACS800 (0 2 I2hd if parameter
- motor nominal frequency Range: 8 300 Hz - motor nominal speed Range: 1 18000 rpm -motor nominal power Range: 0 9000 kW
1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 08 MOTOR NOM SPEED [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 09 MOTOR NOM POWER [ ]
19
When the motor data has been entered, two displays (warning and information) start to alternate. Move to next step without pressing any key. Note: If you select STANDARD ID Run, the brake is opened when the Start command is given from the control panel and the brake remains open until the STANDARD ID Run is completed. If you select ID MAGN, the brake is kept closed during the ID Run sequence.
1 -> 0.0 rpm ACS800 ** WARNING ** ID MAGN REQ
1 -> 0.0 rpm I *** Information *** Press green button to start ID MAGN
Select the motor identification method. The default value ID MAGN (ID Magnetisation) is suitable for most applications. It is applied in this basic start-up procedure. If your selection is ID Magnetisation, move to next step without pressing any key. The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected if: - The operation point is near zero speed constantly, and/or - Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required. If your selection is ID Run, continue by following the separate instructions given a few pages ahead in section How to perform the ID Run on page 22. IDENTIFICATION MAGNETISATION (with Motor ID Run selection ID MAGN) Press the LOC/REM key to change to local control (L shown on the first row). Press to start the Identification Magnetisation. The motor is magnetised at zero speed for 20 to 60 s. Three warnings are displayed: The first warning is displayed when the magnetisation starts. The second warning is displayed while the magnetisation is on. The third warning is displayed after the magnetisation is completed.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ** WARNING ** MOTOR STARTS 1 L-> 0.0 rpm ** WARNING ** ID MAGN 1 L-> 0.0 rpm ** WARNING ** ID DONE I
20
DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR Check the direction of rotation of the motor. - Press ACT to get the status row visible. - Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value by pressing REF and then the arrow keys ( , , or ). - Press to start the motor. - Check that the motor is running in the desired direction. - Stop the motor by pressing . To change the direction of rotation of the motor: - Disconnect the main power from the drive, and wait 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure the voltage between each input terminal (U1, V1 and W1) and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the frequency converter is discharged. - Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the motor terminals or at the motor connection box. - Verify your work by applying the main power and repeating the check as described above. SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES Set the minimum speed.
1 L-> 0.0 rpm 20 LIMITS 01 MINIMUM SPEED [ ] 1 L-> 0.0 rpm 20 LIMITS 02 MAXIMUM SPEED [ ] 1 L-> 0.0 rpm 22 ACCEL/DECEL 02 ACCELER TIME 1 [ ] 1 L-> 0.0 rpm 22 ACCEL/DECEL 03 DECELER TIME 1 [ ] O 1 L->[xxx] rpm I FREQ xxx Hz CURRENT xx A POWER xx %
forward direction
reverse direction
Set the maximum speed.
Set the acceleration time 1. Note: Check also acceleration time 2, if two acceleration times will be used in the application. Set the deceleration time 1. Note: Set also deceleration time 2, if two deceleration times will be used in the application. The drive is now ready for use.
21
How to control the drive through the I/O interface

The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analogue inputs, when: the motor start-up is performed, and the default (factory) parameter settings are valid. PRELIMINARY SETTINGS Ensure the Factory macro is active. If you need to change the direction of rotation, change the setting of parameter 10.03 to REQUEST. Ensure the control connections are wired according to the connection diagram given for the Factory macro. Ensure the drive is in external control mode. Press the LOC/REM key to change between external and local control.
See chapter Application macros. In External control, there is no L visible on the first row of the panel display. See parameter 99.02.
STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR Start by switching digital input DI1 on.
1 -> FREQ CURRENT POWER 0.0 rpm I 0.00 Hz 0.00 A 0.00 %
Regulate the speed by adjusting the voltage of analogue input AI1.
1 -> 500.0 rpm I 16.66 Hz FREQ CURRENT 12.66 A POWER 8.33 %
CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off.
1 -> 500.0 rpm I FREQ 16.66 Hz CURRENT 12.66 A POWER 8.33 % 1 <- 500.0 rpm I 16.66 Hz FREQ CURRENT 12.66 A POWER 8.33 %
Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on.
STOPPING THE MOTOR Switch off digital input DI1.

1 -> 500.0 rpm O 0.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 0.00 A POWER 0.00 %
22
How to perform the ID Run

The drive performs the ID Magnetisation automatically at the first start. In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run. The ID Run (Standard or Reduced) should be selected if: The operation point is near zero speed, and/or Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required. The Reduced ID Run is to be performed instead of the Standard if it is not possible to disengage the driven machine from the motor. Note: If you select STANDARD ID Run, the brake is opened when the Start command is given from the control panel and the brake remains open until the STANDARD ID Run is completed. If you select ID MAGN, the brake is kept closed during the ID Run sequence.
ID Run Procedure Note: If parameter values (Group 10 to 98) are changed before the ID Run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions: 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of motor rated speed 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT > 100% Ihd 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE > 50% Ensure that the panel is in the local control mode (L displayed on the status row). Press the LOC/REM key to switch between modes. Change the ID Run selection to STANDARD or REDUCED.
1 L ->1242.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 10 MOTOR ID RUN [STANDARD] O
Press ENTER to verify selection. The following message will be displayed:

1 L ->1242.0 rpm ACS800 **WARNING** ID RUN SEL O
23
To start the ID Run, press the key. The Start Interlock (digital input DI_IL) and Run Enable signals (parameter 16.01 RUN ENABLE) must be active.
Warning when the ID Run is started 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS800 **WARNING** MOTOR STARTS I Warning during the ID Run Warning after a successfully completed ID Run 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS800 **WARNING** ID DONE I
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS800 **WARNING** ID RUN
In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run. However: The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the control panel stop key ( ). After the ID Run is started with the start key ( ), it is possible to monitor the actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then a double-arrow key ( ).
24
25
Control panel
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how to use the control panel CDP 312R. The same control panel is used with all ACS800 series drives, so the instructions given apply to all ACS800 types. The display examples shown are based on the Standard Control Program; displays produced by other application programs may differ slightly.
Overview of the panel
The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters. The language is selected at start-up (parameter 99.01). The control panel has four operation modes: - Actual Signal Display Mode (ACT key)
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
- Parameter Mode (PAR key) - Function Mode (FUNC key) - Drive Selection Mode (DRIVE key) The use of single arrow keys, double arrow keys and ENTER depend on the operation mode of the panel.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
The drive control keys are: No. 1 Use Start Stop Activate reference setting Forward direction of rotation Reverse direction of rotation Fault reset Change between Local / Remote (external) control
ENTER
2 3 7
LOC REM
6
RESET
3
REF
1 4 5
I
4
0
5 2
6 7
Control panel
26
Panel operation mode keys and displays The figure below shows the mode selection keys of the panel, and the basic operations and displays in each mode.
Actual Signal Display Mode ACT
Act. signal / Fault history selection Act. signal / Fault message scrolling
1 L -> FREQ CURRENT POWER
1242.0 rpm O 45.00 Hz 80.00 A 75.00 %
Status row Actual signal names and values
ENTER Parameter Mode PAR
Enter selection mode Accept new signal
Group selection Fast value change Parameter selection Slow value change
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 10 START/STOP/DIR 01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2
Status row Parameter group Parameter Parameter value
ENTER Function Mode FUNC
Enter change mode Accept new value
Row selection Page selection
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control EXT1
Status row List of functions
ENTER Drive Selection Mode DRIVE ENTER
Function start
Drive selection ID number change Enter change mode Accept new value
ACS800 ASXR7260 xxxxxx ID NUMBER 1
Device type SW loading package name and ID number
Status row The figure below describes the status row digits.
Drive ID number Drive control status L = Local control R = Remote control = External control
1 L ->
1242.0 rpm I
Drive reference
Direction of rotation -> = Forward <- = Reverse
Drive status I = Running O = Stopped = Run disabled
Control panel
27
Drive control with the panel

The user can control the drive with the panel as follows: start, stop, and change direction of the motor give the motor speed reference or torque reference give a process reference (when the process PID control is active) reset the fault and warning messages change between local and external drive control. The panel can be used for control of the drive control always when the drive is under local control and the status row is visible on the display. How to start, stop and change direction
Step 1. Action To show the status row.
ACT PAR
Press Key
Display 1 ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
FUNC
2.
To switch to local control. (only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L on the first row of the display.)
LOC REM
3.
To stop
4.
To start
5.
To change the direction to reverse.
1 L <-1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
6.
To change the direction to forward.
Control panel
28
How to set speed reference

ACT PAR
Press Key
Display 1 ->1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->[1242.0 rpm]I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->[1325.0 rpm]I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
FUNC
2.
To switch to local control. (Only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L on the first row of the display.)
LOC REM
3.
To enter the Reference Setting function.
REF
4.
To change the reference. (slow change) (fast change)
5.
To save the reference. (The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is restored automatically after power switch-off.)
ENTER
Control panel
29
Actual signal display mode

In the Actual Signal Display Mode, the user can: show three actual signals on the display at a time select the actual signals to display view the fault history reset the fault history. The panel enters the Actual Signal Display Mode when the user presses the ACT key, or if he does not press any key within one minute. How to select actual signals to the display
Step 1. Action To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode.
ACT
Press key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz 80.00 A CURRENT POWER 75.00 %
2.
To select a row (a blinking cursor indicates the selected row).
3.
To enter the actual signal selection function.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 CURRENT 80.00 A 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS 05 TORQUE 70.00 %
4.
To select an actual signal. To change the actual signal group.
5.a
To accept the selection and to return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz 70.00 % TORQUE POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
5.b
To cancel the selection and keep the original selection.

ACT PAR
The selected keypad mode is entered.

FUNC DRIVE
Control panel
30
How to display the full name of the actual signals

Step 1. Action To display the full name of the three actual signals. Press key Hold
ACT
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQUENCY CURRENT POWER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
2.
To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.
Release
ACT
How to view and reset the fault history Note: The fault history cannot be reset if there are active faults or warnings.
Step 1. Action To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode.
ACT
Press key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 LAST FAULT +OVERCURRENT 6451 H 21 MIN 23 S 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT +OVERVOLTAGE 1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
2.
To enter the Fault History Display.
3.
To select the previous (UP) or the next fault/warning (DOWN).
To clear the Fault History.
RESET
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT H MIN S 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
4.
Control panel
31
How to display and reset an active fault WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive will start immediately after fault reset. If the cause of the fault has not been removed, the drive will trip again.
Step 1. Action To display an active fault.
ACT
Press Key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS800 ** FAULT ** ACS800 TEMP 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
2.
To reset the fault.
RESET
About the fault history The fault history restores information on the latest events (faults, warnings and resets) of the drive. The table below shows how the events are stored in the fault history.
Event A Fault History View Sign Sequential number (1 is the most recent event) 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT +DC OVERVOLT (3210) 1121 H 1 MIN 23 S Name and code Poweron time User resets the fault message. Drive detects a fault and generates a fault message
Information on display Sequential number of the event and LAST FAULT text. Name of the fault and a + sign in front of the name. Total power-on time. Sequential number of the event and LAST FAULT text. -RESET FAULT text. Total power-on time.
Drive generates a warning message.
Sequential number of the event and LAST WARNING text. Name of the warning and a + sign in front of the name. Total power-on time.
Drive deactivates the warning message.
Sequential number of the event and LAST WARNING text. Name of the warning and a - sign in front of the name. Total power-on time.
Control panel
32
Parameter mode
In the Parameter Mode, the user can: view the parameter values change the parameter settings. The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key. How to select a parameter and change the value
Step 1. Action To enter the Parameter Mode.
PAR
Press key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 10 START/STOP/DIR 01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm) 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1
2.
To select a group.
3.
To select a parameter within a group.
4.
To enter the parameter setting function.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT [AI1] 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT [AI2]
5.
To change the parameter value. - (slow change for numbers and text) - (fast change for numbers only)
6a.
To save the new value.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI2 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1
6b.
To cancel the new setting and keep the original value, press any of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
Control panel
33
How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter Most parameters define values that are used directly in the drive application program. Source selection (pointer) parameters are exceptions: They point to the value of another parameter. The parameter setting procedure differs somewhat from that of the other parameters.
Step 1. Action See the table above to - enter the Parameter Mode - select the correct parameter group and parameter - enter the parameter setting mode
PAR
Press Key
Display 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [000.000.00]
ENTER
2.
To scroll between the inversion, group, index and bit fields.1)
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [000.000.00] 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [000.018.00]
ENTER
3.
To adjust the value of a field.
4.
To accept the value.

1)
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [001.018.00] Inversion field Group field Index field Bit field
Inversion field inverts the selected parameter value. Plus sign (+): no inversion, minus (-) sign: inversion. Bit field selects the bit number (relevant only if the parameter value is a packed boolean word). Index field selects the parameter index. Group field selects the parameter group.
Note: Instead of pointing to another parameter, it is also possible to define a constant by the source selection parameter. Proceed as follows: - Change the inversion field to C. The appearance of the row changes. The rest of the line is now a constant setting field. - Give the constant value to the constant setting field. - Press Enter to accept.
Control panel
34
Function mode
In the Function Mode, the user can: start a guided procedure for adjusting the drive settings (assistants) upload the drive parameter values and motor data from the drive to the panel. download group 1 to 97 parameter values from the panel to the drive. 1) adjust the contrast of the display. The panel enters the Function Mode when the user presses the FUNC key.
The parameter groups 98, 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included by default. The restriction prevents downloading of unfit motor data. In special cases it is, however, possible to download all. For more information, please contact your local ABB representative.
1)
Control panel
35
How to enter an assistant, browse and exit The table below shows the operation of the basic keys which lead the user through an assistant. The Motor Setup task of the Start-up Assistant is used as an example. The Start-up Assistant is not available in Scalar mode or when the parameter lock is on. (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE = SCALAR or 16.02 PARAMETER LOCK = LOCKED or 16.10 ASSIST SEL = OFF)
Step 1. Action To enter the Function Mode.
FUNC
Press Key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control EXT1 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control EXT 1
2.
To select a task or function from the list (a flashing cursor indicates the selection). Double arrows: To change page to see more assistants/ functions.
3.
To enter the task.
ENTER
Motor Setup 1/10 ENTER: Ok/Continue ACT: Exit FUNC: More Info Motor Setup 2/10 MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA AVAILABLE? ENTER:Yes FUNC:Info Motor Setup 3/10 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE? [0 V] ENTER:Ok RESET:Back Motor Setup 3/10 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE? [415 V] ENTER:Ok RESET:back
4.
To accept and continue.
ENTER
5.
To accept and continue.
ENTER
6.
a. To adjust the requested drive parameter.
b. To ask for information on the requested value. (To scroll the information displays and return to the task).
FUNC
FUNC, ACT ENTER
INFO P99.05 Set as given on the motor nameplate.
7.
a. To accept a value and step forward.
Motor Setup 4/10 MOTOR NOM CURRENT? [0.0 A] ENTER:Ok RESET:Back Motor Setup 3/10 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE? [415 V] ENTER:Ok RESET:back
b. To cancel the setting and take one step back.
RESET
Control panel
36
Step 8.
Action To cancel and exit. Note: 1 x ACT returns to the first display of the task.
Press Key
2 x ACT
Display 1 L -> 0.0 rpm FREQ 0.00 CURRENT 0.00 POWER 0.00 O Hz A %
How to upload data from a drive to the panel Note: Upload before downloading. Ensure the firmware of the destination drive is the same (e.g. standard firmware). Before removing the panel from a drive, ensure the panel is in remote operating mode (change with the LOC/REM key). Stop the drive before downloading. Before upload, repeat the following steps in each drive: Setup the motors. Activate the communication to the optional equipment. (See parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES.) Before upload, do the following in the drive from which the copies are to be taken: Set the parameters in groups 10 to 97 as preferred. Proceed to the upload sequence (below).
Step 1. Action Enter the Function Mode.
FUNC
Press Key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control EXT1 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O <=<= UPLOAD DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4
2.
Enter the page that contains the upload, download and contrast functions.
3.
Select the upload function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).
4.
Enter the upload function.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<=
5.
Switch to external control. (No L on the first row of the display.)
LOC REM
1 -> 1242.0 rpm O <=<= UPLOAD DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4
Control panel
37
Step 6.
Action Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the drive into which the data will be downloaded.
Press Key
Display
How to download data from the panel to a drive Consider the notes in section How to upload data from a drive to the panel on page 36.
Step 1. 2. Action Connect the panel containing the uploaded data to the drive. Ensure the drive is in local control (L shown on the first row of the display). If necessary, press the LOC/REM key to change to local control.
LOC REM
Press Key
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control EXT1 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4
3.
Enter the Function Mode.

FUNC
4.
5.
Select the download function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).
6.
Start the download.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O DOWNLOAD =>=>
Control panel
38
How to set the contrast of the display

FUNC
Press Key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Motor Setup Application Macro Speed Control EXT1 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O <=<= UPLOAD DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> 4 CONTRAST
2.
3.
Select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).
4. 5.
Enter the contrast setting function. Adjust the contrast.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O CONTRAST [4] 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm CONTRAST [6] 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> 6 CONTRAST 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
6.a
Accept the selected value.
ENTER
6.b
Cancel the new setting and retain the original value by pressing any of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
Control panel
39
Drive selection mode

In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed; the features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one panel link. (For more information, see the Installation and Start-up Guide for the Panel Bus Connection Interface Module, NBCI, [3AFY58919748 (English)]. In the Drive Selection Mode, the user can: Select the drive with which the panel communicates through the panel link. Change the identification number of a drive connected to the panel link. View the status of the drives connected on the panel link. The panel enters the Drive Selection Mode when the user presses the DRIVE key. Each on-line station must have an individual identification number (ID). By default, the ID number of the drive is 1. Note: The default ID number setting of the drive should not be changed unless the drive is to be connected to the panel link with other drives on-line.
How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number

Step 1. Action To enter the Drive Selection Mode.
DRIVE
Press key ACS800
Display
ASAAA5000 xxxxxx ID NUMBER 1 2. To select the next drive/view. The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing ENTER (the brackets round the ID number appear) and then adjusting the value with arrow buttons. The new value is accepted with ENTER. The power of the drive must be switched off to validate its new ID number setting. The status display of all devices connected to the Panel Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations do not fit on the display at once, press the double-arrow up to view the rest of them. ACS800 ASAAA5000 xxxxxx ID NUMBER 1
1o Status Display Symbols: o = Drive stopped, direction forward = Drive running, direction reverse F = Drive tripped on a fault
ACT PAR
3.
To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another mode, press one of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.
FUNC
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
40
Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display

Some actual values and parameters are packed boolean, i.e. each individual bit has a defined meaning (explained at the corresponding signal or parameter). On the control panel, packed boolean values are read and entered in hexadecimal format. In this example, bits 1, 3 and 4 of the packed boolean value are ON:
Bit 15 Bit 0
Boolean Hex
0000 0000 0001 1010 0 0 1 A
Control panel
41
Program features
Chapter overview
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related user settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages.
Start-up Assistant
Introduction The assistant guides the user through the start-up procedure, helping the user to feed the requested data (parameter values) to the drive. The assistant also check that the entered values are valid, i.e. within the allowed range. At the first start, the drive suggests entering the first task of the assistant, Language Select, automatically. The Start-up Assistant is divided into tasks. The user may activate the tasks either one after the other as the Start-up Assistant suggests, or independently. The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the assistant at all. See chapter Control panel on how to start the assistant, browse and exit. Note: Option modules assistant is not supported from firmware version AS7R7363 onwards. The default order of the tasks Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 99.02), the Start-up Assistant decide which consequent tasks it suggests. The default tasks are shown in the table below.
Application Selection FACTORY, SEQ CTRL HAND/AUTO T CTRL PID CTRL Default Tasks Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT1, Start/Stop Control, Protections, Output Signals Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT2, Start/Stop Control, Speed Control 1, Protections, Output Signals Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Torque Control, Start/Stop Control, Speed Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, PID Control, Start/Stop Control, Speed Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals
Program features
42
List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters

Name Language Select Motor Set-up Description Selecting the language Setting the motor data Set parameters 99.01 99.05, 99.06, 99.09, 99.07, 99.08, 99.04
Performing the motor identification. (If the speed limits are not in 99.10 (20.8, 20.07) the allowed range: Setting the limits). Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Selecting the application macro Activating the option modules Selecting the source for the speed reference (If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, inversion) Setting the reference limits Setting the speed (frequency) limits Setting acceleration and deceleration times (Setting up the brake chopper if activated by parameter 27.01) (If 99.02 is not SEQ CTRL: Setting constant speeds) Speed Control EXT2 Setting the source for the speed reference (If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, inversion) Setting the reference limits Torque Control Selecting the source for the torque reference (If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, inversion) Setting the reference limits Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times PID Control Selecting the source for the process reference (If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, inversion) Setting the reference limits Setting the speed (reference) limits Setting the source and limits for the process actual value Start/Stop Control 99.02, parameters associated to the macro Group 98, 35, 52 11.03 (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04, 13.05, 30.01) 11.04, 11.05 20.02, 20.01, (20.08, 20.07) 22.02, 22.03 (Group 27, 20.05, 14.01) (Group 12) 11.06 (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04, 13.05, 30.01) 11.08, 11.07 11.06 (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04, 13.05, 30.01) 11.08, 11.07 24.01, 24.02 11.06 (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04, 13.05, 30.01) 11.08, 11.07 20.02, 20.01 (20.08, 20.07) 40.07, 40.09, 40.10
Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external 10.01, 10.02 control locations, EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 Defining the direction control Defining the start and stop modes Selecting the use of Run Enable signal Setting the ramp time for the Run Enable function 11.02 10.03 21.01, 21.02, 21.03 16.01, 21.07 22.07 20.03, 20.04 Group 14 15.01, 15.02, 15.03, 15.04, 15.05, (Group 96)
Protections Output Signals
Setting the torque and current limits Selecting the signals indicated through the relay outputs RO1, RO2, RO3 and optional ROs (if installed) Selecting the signals indicated through the analogue output AO1, AO2 and optional AOs (if installed). Setting the minimum, maximum, scaling and inversion.
Program features
43
Contents of the assistant displays There are two types of displays in the Start-up Assistant: The main displays and the information displays. The main displays prompt the user to feed in information or answer a question. The assistant steps through the main displays. The information displays contain help texts for the main displays. The figure below shows a typical example of both and explanations of the contents.
Main Display 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Motor Setup 3/10 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE? [0 V] ENTER:Ok RESET:Back Name of the assistant, step number / total number of steps Request/question Feed-in field Commands: accept value and step forward or cancel and step backwards Information Display INFO P99.05 Set as given on the motor nameplate.
Text INFO, index of parameter to be set Help text help text continued double arrow symbol (indicates that the text continues)
Local control vs. external control

The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analogue inputs. An optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped with DriveWindow can also control the drive.
Local control
ACS800
External control
Standard I/O
Control panel
Fieldbus adapter
Slot 1
RTAC/RDIO/RAIO Slot 1 or Slot 2 module RDCO module CH0 (DDCS) Fieldbus adapter Nxxx or Advant controller (e.g. AC 80, AC 800M) CH1 (DDCS)
CH3 DriveWindow (DDCS)
AIMA-01 I/O adapter module
RTAC/RDIO/RAIO module
Program features
44
Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control. L indicates local control on the panel display.
1 L ->1242 rpm
The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local mode. External control When the drive is in external control, the commands are given through the standard I/O terminals (digital and analogue inputs), optional I/O extension modules and/or the fieldbus interface. In addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control. External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display or with an R in those special cases when the panel is defined as a source for external control.
->1242 rpm
1 R ->1242 rpm
External Control by control panel
External Control through the Input/ Output terminals, or through the fieldbus interfaces
The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time. This function operates on a 12 ms time level. Settings
Panel key LOC/REM Parameter 11.02 10.01 11.03 10.02 11.06 Group 98 OPTION MODULES Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 Start, stop, direction source for EXT1 Reference source for EXT1 Start, stop, direction source for EXT2 Reference source for EXT2 Activation of the optional I/O and serial communication Additional information Selection between local and external control
Diagnostics
Actual signals 01.11, 01.12 03.02 Additional information EXT1 reference, EXT2 reference EXT1/EXT2 selection bit in a packed boolean word
Program features
45
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and direction for external control location EXT1.
DI1 DI6 DI7 to DI9 DI1 / DIO ext 1 DI2 / DIO ext 1 DI1 / DIO ext 2 DI2 / DIO ext 2 Fieldbus adapter slot 1 CH0 / RDCO board Standard Modbus Link Control panel 10.01
I/O Extensions See group 98 OPTION MODULES. Fb. selection See chapter Fieldbus control.
Select EXT1 Start/stop/ direction
DI1 / Std IO DI6 / Std IO
COMM. CW KEYPAD
DI1 / Std IO = Digital input DI1 on the standard I/O terminal block DI1 / DIO ext 1 = Digital input DI1 on the digital I/O extension module 1
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT1.
AI1 / Std IO AI2 / Std IO AI3 / Std IO DI3 / Std IO DI4 / Std IO AI1 / AIO ext AI2 / AIO ext DI1 / DIO ext 3 DI2 / DIO ext 3 Fieldbus adapter slot 1 CH0 / RDCO board Standard Modbus Link Control panel Select EXT1 Reference REF1 (rpm)
AI1, AI2, AI3, DI3, DI4 AI5, AI6 DI11, DI12
11.03
I/O Extensions See parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES. Fb. selection See chapter Fieldbus control.
COMM. REF KEYPAD
AI1 / Std IO = Analogue input AI1 on the standard I/O terminal block AI1 / AIO ext = Analogue input AI1 on the analogue I/O extension module
Program features
46
Reference types and processing

The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analogue input signal and control panel signals. The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs: One digital input increases the speed, the other decreases it. The drive accepts a bipolar analogue speed reference. This feature allows both the speed and direction to be controlled with a single analogue input. The minimum signal is full speed reversed and the maximum signal is full speed forward. The drive can form a reference out of two analogue input signals by using mathematical functions: Addition, subtraction, multiplication, minimum selection, and maximum selection. The drive can form a reference out of an analogue input signal and a signal received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions: addition and multiplication. It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits. Settings
Parameter Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 20 LIMITS Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Group 24 TORQUE CTRL Group 32 SUPERVISION Additional information External reference source, type and scaling Operating limits Speed reference acceleration and deceleration ramps Torque reference ramp times Reference supervision
Diagnostics
Actual signal 01.11, 01.12 Additional information Values of external references
Group 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS The reference values in different stages of the reference processing chain. Parameter Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Active reference / reference loss through a relay output Reference value
Program features
47
Reference trimming
In reference trimming, the external %-reference (External reference REF2) is corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable. The block diagram below illustrates the function.
Switch
max.freq
Select Select
DIRECT (3) max.torque %ref PROPOR. (2) OFF (1)
max.speed
Select
AI1 AI2 ... 40.16
99.04 (DTC)
40.18
1
Add Mul.
%ref %ref
40.14 40.15 Actual Values

40.01 40.02 40.03
PID
tref k ti td i dFiltT errVInv rInt oh1 ol1
Mul.
40.17
40.05 . . . 40.07 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 IMOT
Filter
40.04 40.05 40.13 PIDmax PIDmin
40.19
%ref= The drive reference before trimming %ref = The drive reference after trimming max. speed= Par. 20.02 (or 20.01 if the absolute value is greater) max. freq = Par. 20.08 (or 20.07 if the absolute value is greater) max. torq = Par. 20.14 (or 20.13 if the absolute value is greater)
Settings
Parameter 40.1440.18 40.0140.13, 40.19 Group 20 LIMITS Additional information Trimming function settings PID control block settings Drive operation limits
Program features
48
Example The drive runs a conveyor line. It is speed-controlled but the line tension also needs to be taken into account: If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint, the speed will be slightly decreased, and vice versa. To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user: activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the measured tension to it tunes the trimming to a suitable level.
Speed controlled conveyor line
Drive rollers (pull) Tension measurement Simplified block diagram Add Speed reference Tension measurement Tension setpoint PID Trimmed speed reference
Program features
49
Programmable analogue inputs

The drive has three programmable analogue inputs: one voltage input (0/2 to 10 V or -10 to 10 V) and two current inputs (0/4 to 20 mA). Two extra inputs are available if an optional analogue I/O extension module is used. Each input can be inverted and filtered, and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. Update cycles in the Standard Control Program
Input AI / standard AI / extension
1)
Cycle 6 ms 6 ms (100 ms 1))
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Parameter Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE AI as a reference source SELECT Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS 30.01 Group 40 PID CONTROL 35.01 40.15 42.07 98.06 98.13 98.14 Processing of the standard inputs Supervision of AI loss AI as a PID process control reference or actual values AI in a motor temperature measurement AI in a drive reference trimming AI in a mechanical brake control function Activation of optional analogue inputs Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar) Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar)
Diagnostics
Actual value 01.18, 01.19, 01.20 01.38, 01.39 Group 09 ACTUAL SIGNALS Additional information Values of standard inputs Value of optional inputs Scaled analogue input values (integer values for function block programming)
Program features
50
Programmable analogue outputs

Two programmable current outputs (0/4 to 20 mA) are available as standard, and two outputs can be added by using an optional analogue I/O extension module. Analogue output signals can be inverted and filtered. The analogue output signals can be proportional to motor speed, process speed (scaled motor speed), output frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power, etc. It is possible to write a value to an analogue output through a serial communication link. Update cycles in the Standard Control Program
Output AO / standard AO / extension
1)
Cycle 24 ms 24 ms (1000 ms 1) )
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Parameter Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS 30.20 30.22 Group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS Group 96 EXTERNAL AO Group 98 OPTION MODULES Additional information AO value selection and processing (standard outputs) Operation of an externally controlled AO in a communication break Supervision of the use of optional AO AO in motor temperature measurement Optional AO value selection and processing Activation of optional I/O
Diagnostics
Actual value 01.22, 01.23 01.28, 01.29 Warning IO CONFIG (FF8B) Improper use of optional I/O Additional information Values of the standard outputs Values of the optional outputs
Program features
51
Programmable digital inputs

The drive has six programmable digital inputs as a standard. Six extra inputs are available if optional digital I/O extension modules are used. Update cycles in the Standard Control Program
Input DI / standard DI / extension Cycle 6 ms 12 ms
Settings
Parameter Group 10 START/STOP/ DIR Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Group 16 SYST CTRL INPUTS 22.01 30.03 30.05 30.22 40.20 42.02 98.0396.05 98.0998.11 Additional information DI as start, stop, direction DI in reference selection, or reference source DI in constant speed selection DI as external Run Enable, fault reset or user macro change signal DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal DI as external fault source DI in motor overtemperature supervision function Supervision of optional I/O use DI as sleep function activation signal (in PID process control) DI as mechanical brake acknowledgement signal Activation of the optional digital I/O extension modules Naming of the optional digital inputs in the application program
Diagnostics
Actual value 01.17 01.40 Warning IO CONFIG (FF8B) Fault I/O COMM ERR (7000) Communication loss to I/O Improper use of optional I/O Additional information Values of the standard digital inputs Values of the optional digital inputs
Program features
52
Programmable relay outputs

As standard there are three programmable relay outputs. Six outputs can be added by using the optional digital I/O extension modules. By means of a parameter setting it is possible to choose which information to indicate through the relay output: ready, running, fault, warning, motor stall, etc. It is possible to write a value to a relay output through a serial communication link. Update cycles in the Standard Control Program
Output RO / standard RO / extension Cycle 100 ms 100 ms
Settings
Parameter Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS 30.20 Group 42 BRAKE CONTROL Group 98 OPTION MODULES Additional information RO value selections and operation times Operation of an externally controlled relay output on a communication break RO in a mechanical brake control Activation of optional relay outputs
Diagnostics
Actual value 01.21 01.41 Additional information Standard relay output states Optional relays output states
Program features
53
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available: Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power Motor speed and torque Supply voltage and intermediate circuit DC voltage Active control location (Local, EXT1 or EXT2) Reference values Drive temperature Operating time counter (h), kWh counter Digital I/O and Analogue I/O status PID controller actual values (if the PID Control macro is selected) Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display. It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analogue outputs. Settings
Parameter Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Group 92 D SET TR ADDR Additional information Selection of an actual signal to an analogue output Selection of an actual signal to a data set (serial communication)
Diagnostics
Actual value Group 01 ACTUAL SIGNALS 09 ACTUAL SIGNALS Additional information Lists of actual signals
Motor identification
The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start-up. A motor Identification Magnetisation is automatically done the first time the start command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetised at zero speed for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification method is suitable for most applications. In demanding applications a separate Identification Run can be performed. Settings Parameter 99.10.
Program features
54
Power loss ride-through

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilising the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Uin fout UDC TM (Nm) (Hz) (V d.c.) 160 120 80 40 80 60 40 20 520 390 260 130 fout TM UDC
t(s) 1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4 UDC= Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive, TM = Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the supply voltage is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
Note: Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option have a hold circuit that keeps the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break. The allowed duration of the break is adjustable. The factory setting is five seconds.
Automatic Start
Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds, the starting is immediate under all conditions. There is no restart delay. E.g. the starting of turbining pumps or windmilling fans is easy. Settings Parameter 21.01.
Program features
55
Safe torque off (STO)

Safe torque off function disconnects the control voltage from the inverter power semiconductors, i.e. the drive output voltage is cut off. See the circuit diagrams delivered with the drive for the wirings to be made by the user. WARNING! The Safe torque off function does not disconnect the voltage of the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore, maintenance work on electrical parts may only be carried out after disconnecting the drive system from the input power line. The Safe torque off function operates as follows: The operator gives an STO function activation command (for example, with a switch mounted on the control desk). The voltage supply of the ASTO-x1C board is disconnected. The drive application program receives an internal signal from the AINT board that an STO function activation command has been given. If the STO function activation command was given during run, the drive coasts to stop. The Safe torque off function is activated. Alarm START INHIBI is activated (03.08 Alarm Word 1 bit 0 value is 1). 03.03 AUX STATUS WORD bit 8 value is set to 1 (= Safe torque off function is active) within 3 seconds. Note: Fault START INHIBI is generated (03.03 AUX STATUS WORD bit 8 value is 1) if the Safe torque off function is activated during motor run or if motor start command is given when the Safe torque off function is already active. Diagnostics
Actual value Additional information 03.03 AUX STATUS WORD, bit 8 Safe torque off function activation status 03.08 ALARM WORD 1, bit 0 / Safe torque off function alarm/fault 03.03 AUX STATUS WORD, bit 8
Prevention of unexpected start-up (POUS)

The Prevention of unexpected start-up functions as Safe torque off described above, with the following exceptions: POUS must not be activated during run. POUS requires an AGPS-x1C board (not ASTO-x1C).
Program features
56
Safely-limited speed (SLS) (AS7R firmware version only)

The SLS function limits the motor speed to a safe value. Note: If used without a safety PLC, the SLS function does not fulfill the requirements for SIL classification as defined in EN IEC 61800-5-2. When the SLS function is activated, speed limits are ramped from the values of 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED to the value of 20.22 SLS SPEED LIMIT and its additive inverse, respectively. The ramping begins at the absolute value of the actual speed. If the actual speed is already below the SLS limit, the limit comes into effect immediately without ramping. When the SLS function is deactivated, the speed limits are ramped up back to the values defined by 20.01 and 20.02, and the actual speed returns to the reference value if it was limited by this function.
22.11 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED Actual speed 0 20.22 SLS SPEED LIMIT 22.10
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED SLS activated
Settings
Parameter 10.09 SLS ACTIVE 20.22 SLS SPEED LIMIT 22.10 SLS ACCELER TIME 22.11 SLS DECELER TIME Additional information Selection of DI source Safely-limited speed limit Time required for speed limit to ramp up from SLS to normal Time required for speed limit to ramp down from current actual speed to SLS
Diagnostics and control

Actual value 03.04 FREQ_LIMIT, bit 15 Additional information SLS activation status
See also Safe speed functions for ACS800 cabinet-installed drives (+Q965/+Q966) Application guide [3AUA0000090742 (English)]. Note: When SLS function is active, critical speed settings in parameter group 25 are not in effect.
Program features
57
DC Magnetising
When DC Magnetising is activated, the drive automatically magnetises the motor before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up to 200% of motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetising time, it is possible to synchronise the motor start and e.g. a mechanical brake release. The Automatic Start feature and DC Magnetising cannot be activated at the same time. Settings Parameters 21.01 and 21.02.
DC Hold
By activating the motor DC Hold feature it is possible to lock the rotor at zero speed. When both the reference and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold speed, the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC into the motor. When the reference speed again exceeds the DC hold speed, the normal drive operation resumes. Settings Parameters 21.04, 21.05, and 21.06.
DC hold speed t Motor Speed DC Hold DC hold speed Speed Reference
Flux Braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. This feature is useful in motor power ranges below 15 kW.
Motor Speed No Flux Braking TBr TN (%) 60 40 20 Flux Braking t (s) No Flux Braking f (Hz) 50 HZ / 60 Hz
TBr = Braking Torque TN = 100 Nm Flux Braking
Program features
58
Braking Torque (%) 120

1
80 Rated Motor Power

1 2 3 4 5
No Flux Braking
40
2 4
2.2 kW 15 kW 37 kW 75 kW 250 kW
0 5 120 80
3 5
10
20
30
40
f (Hz) 50
Flux Braking
40 0 5
3 4 5
10
20
30
40
f (Hz) 50
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during the Flux Braking. Therefore, Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed. The other benefits of Flux Braking are: The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking. The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases during the Flux Braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor. Settings Parameter 26.02.
Flux Optimisation
Flux Optimisation reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive) can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed. Settings Parameter 26.01.
Program features
59
Acceleration and deceleration ramps

Two user-selectable acceleration and deceleration ramps are available. It is possible to adjust the acceleration/deceleration times and the ramp shape. Switching between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input. The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S-curve. Linear: Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow acceleration/deceleration. S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed. Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
2 t (s) Motor speed
Linear S-curve
Critical speeds
A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed bands because of e.g. mechanical resonance problems. Settings Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS.
Constant speeds
It is possible to predefine 15 constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference. This function operates on a 6 ms time level. Settings Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS.
Program features
60
Speed controller tuning

During the motor identification, the speed controller is automatically tuned. It is, however, possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and derivation time, or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune Run. In Autotune Run, the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine. The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step (typically, 1 to 20%).
n nN
A: Undercompensated B: Normally tuned (autotuning) C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B D: Overcompensated speed controller
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller output is the reference for the torque controller.
Derivative acceleration compensation
Speed reference
+ -
Error value
Proportional, integral
+ Torque + reference
Derivative Actual speed
Settings Parameter group 23 SPEED CTRL and 20 LIMITS. Diagnostics Actual signal 01.02.
Program features
61
Speed control performance figures

The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control when Direct Torque Control is used.
T (%) TN Speed Control No Pulse Encoder With Pulse Encoder + 0.01% t (s) 0.1 - 0.4 %sec 100 Tload
Static speed error, + 0.1 to 0.5% % of nN (10% of nominal slip) Dynamic speed error 0.4 %sec.*
0.1 %sec.*
nact-nref nN
*Dynamic speed error depends on speed controller tuning.
TN = rated motor torque nN = rated motor speed nact = actual speed nref = speed reference
Torque control performance figures

The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control, when Direct Torque Control is used.
Torque Control Linearity error Repeatability error Torque rise time No Pulse Encoder + 4%* + 3%* 1 to 5 ms With Pulse Encoder + 3% + 1% 1 to 5 ms T (%) TN 100 90 Tref Tact
*When operated around zero frequency, the error may be greater. 10 < 5 ms TN = rated motor torque Tref = torque reference Tact = actual torque t(s)
Program features
62
Scalar control
It is possible to select Scalar Control as the motor control method instead of Direct Torque Control (DTC). In the Scalar Control mode, the drive is controlled with a frequency reference. The outstanding performance of the default motor control method, Direct Torque Control, is not achieved in Scalar Control. It is recommended to activate the Scalar Control mode in the following special applications: In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive If the drive is used without a motor connected (e.g. for test purposes) The drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step-up transformer. In the Scalar Control mode, some standard features are not available. Settings Parameter 99.04.
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive

IR Compensation is active only when the motor Motor Voltage control mode is Scalar (see section Scalar control IR Compensation on page 62). When IR Compensation is activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. IR Compensation is useful in applications that require high breakaway No compensation torque. In Direct Torque Control, no IR Compensation is possible/needed. Settings Parameter 26.03.
f (Hz)
Program features
63
Hexagonal motor flux

Typically the drive controls the motor flux in such a way that the rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern. This is ideal in most applications. When operated above the field weakening point (FWP, typically 50 or 60 Hz), it is, however, not possible to reach 100% of the output voltage. The peak load capacity of the drive is lower than with the full voltage. If hexagonal flux control is selected, the motor flux is controlled along a circular pattern below the field weakening point, and along a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range. The applied pattern is changed gradually as the frequency increases from 100% to 120% of the FWP. Using the hexagonal flux pattern, the maximum output voltage can be reached; The peak load capacity is higher than with the circular flux pattern but the continuous load capacity is lower in the frequency range of FWP to 1.6 FWP, due to increased losses. Settings Parameter 26.05.
Programmable protection functions

AI<Min AI<Min function defines the drive operation if an analogue input signal falls below the preset minimum limit. Settings Parameter 30.01. Panel Loss Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as control location for the drive stops communicating. Settings Parameter 30.02. External Fault External Faults can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal. Settings Parameter 30.03.
Program features
64
Motor Thermal Protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal Protection function and by selecting one of the motor thermal protection modes available. The Motor Thermal Protection modes are based either on a motor temperature thermal model or on an overtemperature indication from a motor thermistor. Motor temperature thermal model The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions: 1) The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when power is applied to the drive. When power is applied for the first time, the motor is at the ambient temperature (30C). 2) Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time and motor load curve (see the figures below). The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30C.
Motor Load 100% Motor Current 150 (%) 100 50 Temp. Rise 100% 63% t t Zero speed load Speed
Break point Motor load curve
Motor thermal time
Use of the motor thermistor It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor thermistor (PTC) between the +24 VDC voltage supply offered by the drive and digital input DI6. In normal motor operation temperature, the thermistor resistance should be less than 1.5 kohm (current 5 mA). The drive stops the motor and gives a fault indication if the thermistor resistance exceeds 4 kohm. The installation must meet the regulations for protecting against contact. Settings Parameters 30.04 to 30.09. Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See sections Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 73 and Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension on page 75.
Program features
65
Stall Protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision limits (torque, frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition (warning indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction). The torque and current limits, which define the stall limit, must be set according to the maximum load of the used application. Note: Stall limit is restricted by internal current limit 03.04 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM. When the application reaches the stall limit and the output frequency of the drive is below the stall frequency: Fault is activated after the stall time delay. Settings Parameters 30.10 to 30.12. Parameters 20.03, 20.13 and 20.14 (Define the stall limit.) Underload Protection Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive provides an underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be chosen as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (warning indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction). Settings Parameters 30.13 to 30.15. Motor Phase Loss The Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connection. The function is useful especially during the motor start: the drive detects if any of the motor phases is not connected and refuses to start. The Phase Loss function also supervises the motor connection status during normal operation. Settings Parameter 30.16.
Program features
66
Earth Fault Protection The earth fault protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable. The protection is based on sum current measurement. An earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection. In an earthed (grounded) supply, the protection activates in 200 microseconds. In an unearthed (ungrounded) supply, the supply capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more. The capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 metres do not activate the protection. Earth fault protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped. Note: With parallel connected inverter modules, the earth fault indication is CUR UNBAL xx. See chapter Fault tracing. Settings Parameter 30.17. Communication Fault The Communication Fault function supervises the communication between the drive and an external control device (e.g. a fieldbus adapter module). Settings Parameters 30.18 to 30.21. Supervision of optional IO The function supervises the use of the optional analogue and digital inputs and outputs in the application program, and warns if the communication to the input/ output is not operational. Settings Parameter 30.22.
Preprogrammed faults
Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 1.65 to 2.17 Imax depending on the drive type. DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 1.35 U1max, where U1max is the maximum value of the supply voltage range. For 400 V units, U1max is 415 V. For 500 V units, U1max is 500 V. For 690 V units, U1max is 690 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the supply voltage trip level is 728 V DC for 400 V units, 877 V DC for 500 V units, and 1210 V DC for 690 V units.
Program features
67
DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.6 1.35 U1min, where U1min is the minimum value of the supply voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V. For 690 V units, U1min is 525 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the supply voltage trip level is 307 V DC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 425 V DC for 690 V units. Drive temperature The drive supervises the inverter module temperature. There are two supervision limits: warning limit and fault trip limit. Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800, frame sizes R7 and R8 Traditionally, drive temperature monitoring is based on the power semiconductor (IGBT) temperature measurement which is compared with a fixed maximum IGBT temperature limit. However, certain abnormal conditions such as cooling fan failure, insufficient cooling air flow or excessive ambient temperature might cause overheating inside the converter module, which the traditional temperature monitoring alone does not detect. The Enhanced drive temperature monitoring improves the protection in these situations. The function monitors the converter module temperature by checking cyclically that the measured IGBT temperature is not excessive considering the load current, ambient temperature, and other factors that affect the temperature rise inside the converter module. The calculation uses an experimentally defined equation that simulates the normal temperature changes in the module depending on the load. Drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the limit, and trips when temperature exceeds the limit by 5C. Note: The monitoring is available for ACS800-02, -04 and -07, frame sizes R7 and R8 with Standard Control Program version ASXR7360 (and later versions). For ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7 and R8, the monitoring is available with Standard Control Program version ASXR730U (and later versions). Types to which the enhanced drive temperature monitoring is available: ACS800-XX -0080-2 -0100-2 -0120-2 -0140-2/3/7 -0170-2/3/5/7 -0210-2/3/5/7 -0230-2 -0260-2/3/5/7 -0270-5 -0300-2/5 -0320-3/5/7 -0400-3/5/7
Program features
68
-0440-3/5/7 -0490-3/5/7 -0550-5/7 -0610-5/7 Settings

Parameter 95.10 TEMP INV AMBIENT Additional information Ambient temperature
Diagnostics
Warning/Fault INV OVERTEMP Additional information Excessive converter module temperature
Short circuit There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the inverter short circuits. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault indication is given. Input phase loss Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the supply cable connection status by detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases. The drive is stopped and a fault indication is given if the ripple exceeds 13%. Control board temperature The drive supervises the control board temperature. A fault indication CTRL B TEMP is given, if the temperature exceeds 88C. Overfrequency If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given. The preset level is 50 Hz over the operating range absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar Control active). Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given.
Operation limits
ACS800 has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and DC voltage. Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS.
Program features
69
Power limit
Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit. If the maximum allowed power is exceeded, the drive torque is automatically limited. Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware. For specific values refer to the appropriate hardware manual.
Automatic resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage and analogue input below a minimum faults. The Automatic Resets must be activated by the user. Settings Parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET.
Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the userdefined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc. The supervision functions operate on a 100 ms time level. Settings Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION. Diagnostics
Actual Signals 03.02 03.04 03.14 Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Additional information Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word Supervision limit indication through a relay output
Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock. Settings Parameters 16.02 and 16.03.
Program features
70
Process PID control

There is a built-in PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used to control process variables such as pressure, flow or fluid level. When the process PID control is activated, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also brought back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity (actual value) at the desired level (reference). The control operates on a 24 ms time level. Block diagrams The block diagram below right illustrates the process PID control. The figure on the left shows an application example: The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference.
Example: Pressure boost pump

A C S 6 0 0
PID Control Block Diagram PID

%ref 40.01 40.02 40.03 ref k ti td i dFiltT errVInv rInt oh1 ol1
ACS800
A C T P A R F U N C D R IV E
Actual Values
40.06 . . . 40.12 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 IMOT
Switch
E N T E R
L O C R E M
R E S E T
R E F
Frequency reference Speed reference
3 2 0 ...1 0 b a r 4 ...2 0 m A
Filter
40.04 40.05 40.13 PIDmax PIDmin
40.19
99.04 = 0 (DTC)
%ref = external reference EXT REF2 (see parameter 11.06)
Program features
71
Settings
Parameter 99.02 40.01...40.13, 40.19, 40.25...40.27 32.13...32.18 Purpose Process PID control activation The settings of the process PID controller The supervision limits for the process reference REF2 and the variables ACT1 and ACT2
Diagnostics
Actual Signals 01.12, 01.24, 01.25, 01.26 and 01.34 Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Group 96 EXTERNAL AO Purpose PID process controller reference, actual values and error value Supervision limit exceeded indication through a relay output PID process controller values through standard analogue outputs PID process controller values through optional analogue outputs
Sleep function for the process PID control

The sleep function operates on a 100 ms time level. The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic. The sleep function can be put into use only when the process PID control is active.
Compare
Mot.speed 1
Select
1<2
40.21 2
0 INTERNAL DI1 . . . %refActive PIDCtrlActive modulating
And
Delay Set/Reset t 40.22

R S
&
40.20
S/R
Or
1)
03.02 (B1)
<1
03.02 (B2)
Or
Compare
01.34 1
StartRq
<1
1<2
40.23 2
0 INTERNAL DI1 . . .
Select
Delay t
1) 1 = Activate sleeping 0 = Deactivate sleeping
40.20 Mot.speed: Actual speed of the motor
40.24
%refActive: The % reference (EXT REF2) is in use. See parameter 11.02. PIDCtrlActive: 99.02 is PID CTRL modulating: The inverter IGBT control is operating
Program features
72
Example The time scheme below visualises the operation of the sleep function.
Motor Speed
td = Sleep delay, parameter 40.22 t<td td
Sleep level Par. 40.21
Text on display
SLEEP MODE
Time Actual Value STOP No inversion, i.e. par. 40.05 is NO.

twd
START
Wake-up level Parameter 42.23
Time twd = Wake-up delay, parameter 40.24
Actual Value
Inverted, i.e. par. 40.05 is YES. Parameter 42.23 Wake-up level

twd
Time
Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump: The water consumption falls at night. As a consequence, the PID process controller decreases the motor speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor does not stop but keeps rotating. The sleep function detects the slow rotation, and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake-up delay has passed. Settings
Parameter 99.02 40.05 40.20...40.24 Additional information Process PID control activation Inversion Sleep function settings
Diagnostics Warning SLEEP MODE on the panel display.
Program features
73
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O

This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive control board RMIO is used as the connection interface.
One sensor Motor
RMIO board AI1+ AI1-
T AO1+ AO110 nF (> 630 VAC) Three sensors RMIO board AI1+ Motor T T T AI1-
The minimum voltage of the capacitor must be 630 VAC.
AO1+ AO1-
10 nF (> 630 VAC)
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor to the RMIO board, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement: The RMIO board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment. Or The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RMIO board terminals. See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 64.
Program features
74
Settings
Parameter 15.01 35.0135.03 Other Parameters 13.01 to 13.05 (AI1 processing) and 15.02 to 15.05 (AO1 processing) are not effective. At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected. Additional information Analogue output in a motor 1 temperature measurement. Set to M1 TEMP MEAS. Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement
Diagnostics
Actual values 01.35 Warnings MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set alarm limit. T MEAS ALM (FF91) Faults MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set fault limit. Motor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range. Additional information Temperature value
Program features
75
Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension

This section describes the motor temperature measurement of one motor when an optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used as the connection interface.
One sensor Motor T AO1+ 10 nF (> 630 VAC) AO1RAIO module
AI1+ AI1-
SHLD
Three sensors
RAIO module
AI1+ Motor T T T AI1-
The minimum voltage of the capacitor must be 630 VAC.
AO1+ AO1-
10 nF (> 630 VAC) SHLD
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor to the RAIO module, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement: The RAIO module terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment. Or The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RAIO module terminals. See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 64.
Program features
76
Settings
Parameter 35.01 35.03 98.12 Other Parameters 13.16 to 13.20 (AI1 processing) and 96.01 to 96.05 (AO1 signal selection and processing) are not effective. At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected. Additional information Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement Activation of optional analogue I/O for motor temperature measurement
Diagnostics
Actual values 01.35 Warnings MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set alarm limit T MEAS ALM (FF91) Faults MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set fault limit Motor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range. Additional information Temperature value
Adaptive Programming using the function blocks

Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. Each parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range. The parameters make the programming easy, but the choices are limited. The user cannot customise the operation any further. The Adaptive Program makes freer customising possible without the need of a special programming tool or language: The program is built of standard function blocks included in the drive application program. The control panel is the programming tool. The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template sheets. The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 15 function blocks. The program may consist of several separate functions. For more information, see the Application Guide for Adaptive Program [3AFE64527274 (English)]. DriveAP DriveAP is a Windows based tool for Adaptive Programming. With DriveAP it is possible to upload the Adaptive Program from the drive and edit it with PC. For more information, see the DriveAP Users Manual [3AFE64540998 (English)].
Program features
77
Control of a mechanical brake

The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered. Example The figure below shows a brake control application example. WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake control function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations. Note that the frequency converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as defined in IEC 61800-2), is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards. Thus, the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be implemented as defined in the application specific regulations.
Brake control logic is integrated in the drive application program. The brake control hardware and wirings needs to be done by the user. - Brake on/off control through relay output RO1. - Brake supervision through digital input DI5 (optional). - Emergency brake switch in the brake control circuit. Emergency brake
Brake control hardware 230 VAC
RMIO board X25 1 2 3 RO1 RO1 RO1
X22 5 7 DI5 +24 V
M Motor Mechanical brake
Program features
78
Operation time scheme The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. See also the state machine on the following page.
Start command External speed reference
Inverter modulating Motor magnetised Open brake command 4 Internal speed reference (actual motor speed) Torque reference Ts tod 3 6 tmd 2
tcd
ncs
time
Ts tmd tod ncs tcd
Start torque at brake release (Parameter 42.07 and 42.08) Motor magnetising delay Brake open delay (Parameter 42.03) Brake close speed (Parameter 42.05) Brake close delay (Parameter 42.04)
Program features
79
State shifts
From any state
1) NO MODULATION 2) OPEN BRAKE 3)
(rising edge)
0/0/1
1/1/1 A
RELEASE RFG INPUT 4) RFG INPUT TO ZERO 7) 10) 11) CLOSE BRAKE 12) 13) 8) BRAKE ACK FAULT 9)
5)
1/1/0
1/1/1
6)
0/1/1 A
RFG = Ramp Function Generator in the speed control loop (reference handling).
0/0/1
State (Symbol
NN
X/Y/Z
- NN: State name - X/Y/Z: State outputs/operations X=1 Open the brake. The relay output set to brake on/off control energises. Y=1 Forced start. The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in spite of the status of the external Start signal. Z=1 Ramp in zero. Forces the used speed reference (internal) to zero along a ramp.
State change conditions (Symbol
1) Brake control active 0 -> 1 OR Inverter is modulating = 0 2) Motor magnetised = 1 AND Drive running = 1 3) Brake acknowledgement = 1 AND Brake open delay passed AND Start = 1 4) Start = 0 5) Start = 0 6) Start = 1 7) Actual motor speed < Brake close speed AND Start = 0 8) Start = 1 9) Brake acknowledgement = 0 AND Brake close delay passed = 1 AND Start = 0 Only if parameter 42.02 = OFF: 10) Brake acknowledgement = 0 AND Brake open delay passed =1 11) Brake acknowledgement = 0 12) Brake acknowledgement = 0 13) Brake acknowledgement = 1 AND Brake close delay passed = 1
Program features
80
Settings
Parameter 14.01 Additional information Relay output for the brake control (set to BRAKE CTRL)
Group 42 BRAKE CONTROL Brake function settings
Diagnostics
Actual value 03.01 03.13 Warnings BRAKE ACKN (FF74) Faults BRAKE ACKN (FF74) Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal Additional information Ramp in zero bit The state of bit brake open/close command
Master/Follower use of several drives

In a Master/Follower application, the system is run by several drives, the motor shafts of which are coupled to each other. The master and follower drives communicate via a fibre optic link. The figures below illustrate two basic application types. M/F Application, Overview
Solidly coupled motor shafts: - Speed-controlled Master - Follower follows the torque reference of the Master Flexibly coupled motor shafts: - Speed-controlled Master - Follower follows the speed reference of the Master
External control signals
External control signals
3
Supply Master/
n 3
Follower fault 2 supervision
3 2 Master/Follower
Link
Supply
3 2 Follower Link
Follower fault 2 supervision
Supply
3 3
Supply
3 3
Settings and diagnostics

Parameter Group 60 MASTER/ FOLLOWER Other Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)] explains the functionality in further detail. Additional information Master/Follower parameters
Program features
81
Jogging
The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine section. One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle: When it is on, the drive starts, accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate. When it is off, the drive decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate. The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive. They also represent how the drive shifts to normal operation (= jogging inactive) when the drive start command is switched on. Jog cmd = State of the jogging input, Start cmd = State of the drive start command. The function operates on a 100 ms time level.
Speed
10 11
12 13 14 15 16 Time
Phase 1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5 5-6 6-7 7-8 8-9 9-10 10-11 11-12 12-13 13-14 14-15 15-16
Jog cmd 1 1 0 0 1 1 x x 0 0 x x 1 1 0
Start cmd 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Description Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function. Drive runs at the jogging speed. Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function. Drive is stopped. Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function. Drive runs at the jogging speed. Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp. Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the speed reference. Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp. Drive is stopped. Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp. Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows he speed reference. Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function. Drive runs at the jogging speed. Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
x = State can be either 1 or 0.
Program features
82
Note: The jogging is not operational when: the drive start command is on, or the drive is in local control (L visible on the first row of the panel display). Note: The jogging speed overrides the constant speeds. Note: The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging. Settings
Parameter 10.06 12.15 21.10 22.04, 22.05 22.06 Additional information Input for the on/off control of the jogging. Jogging speed Switch off delay for the inverter IGBT control. A delay keeps the inverter modulation live over a short standstill period enabling a smooth restart. Acceleration and deceleration times used during the jogging. Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time: Set to zero during the jogging.
Reduced Run function

Reduced Run function is available for parallel connected inverters. Reduced Run function makes it possible to continue the operation with limited current if an inverter module(s) is out of order. If one of the modules is broken, it must be removed. Parameter change is needed to continue the run with reduced current (95.03 INT CONFIG USER). For instructions on how to remove and reconnect an inverter module, see the appropriate drive hardware manual. Settings
Parameter 95.03 INT CONFIG USER Additional information Number of existing parallel connected inverters
Diagnostics
Actual value 04.01 Faults INT CONFIG Number of inverter modules is not equal to original number of inverters. Additional information INT board fault
Program features
83
User load curve

Motor temperature rise can be limited by limiting the drive output current. The user can define a load curve (output current as a function of frequency). The load curve is defined by eight points by parameters 72.02...72.17. If the load curve is exceeded, a fault / warning / current limitation is activated.
T/Tn Normal motor load capacity
User load curve Frequency 0 Hz 50 Hz 100 Hz
Overload Overload supervision can be applied to the user load curve by setting parameters 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT... 72.20 COOLING TIME according to the overload values defined by the motor manufacturer. The supervision is based on an integrator, I2dt. Whenever the drive output current exceeds the user load curve, the integrator is started. When the integrator has reached the overload limit defined by parameters 72.18 and 72.19, the drive reacts as defined by parameter 72.01 OVERLOAD FUNC. The output of the integrator is set to zero if the current stays continuously below the user load curve for the cooling time defined by parameter 72.20 COOLING TIME. If the overload time 72.19 LOAD THERMAL TIME is set to zero, the drive output current is limited to the user load curve.
Current 72.20 COOLING TIME
Overload
Iuser curve
Ioutput
Frequency / Time
Program features
84
Settings
Parameter Group 72 USER LOAD CURVE Additional information User load curve
Diagnostics
Actual value 02.20 Warnings USER L CURVE Faults USER L CURVE Integrated motor current has exceeded load curve. Integrated motor current has exceeded load curve. Additional information Measured motor current in percent of the user load curve current
Program features
85
Application macros
Chapter overview
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and the default control connections of the standard application macros. It also describes how to save a user macro, and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting up the drive, the user typically selects one of the macros - the one that is best suited to his needs - by parameter 99.02, makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user macro. There are five standard macros and two user macros. The table below contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications.
Macro Factory Suitable Applications Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds are used: - Conveyors - Speed-controlled pumps and fans - Test benches with predefined constant speeds Hand/Auto PID Control Speed control applications. Switching between two external control devices is possible. Process control applications e.g. different closed loop control systems such as pressure control, level control, and flow control. For example: - pressure boost pumps of municipal water supply systems - level controlling pumps of water reservoirs - pressure boost pumps of district heating systems - material flow control on a conveyor line. It is also possible to switch between process and speed control. Torque Control Sequential Control User Torque control applications. Switching between torque and speed control is possible. Speed control applications in which speed reference, seven constant speeds and two acceleration and deceleration ramps can be used. The user can save the customised standard macro i.e. the parameter settings including group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory, and recall the data at a later time. Two user macros are essential when switching between two different motors is required
Application macros
86
Note on external power supply

External +24 V power supply for the RMIO board is recommended if the application requires a fast start after connecting the input power supply fieldbus communication is required when the input power supply is disconnected. The RMIO board can be supplied from an external power source via terminal X23 or X34 or via both X23 and X34. The internal power supply to terminal X34 can be left connected when using terminal X23. WARNING! If the RMIO board is supplied from an external power source via terminal X34, the loose end of the cable removed from the RMIO board terminal must be secured mechanically to a location where it cannot come into contact with electrical parts. If the screw terminal plug of the cable is removed, the wire ends must be individually insulated.
Parameter settings In Standard Control Program, set parameter 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to EXTERNAL 24V if the RMIO board is powered from an external supply.
Application macros
87
Factory macro
All drive commands and reference settings can be given from the control panel or from an external control location. The active control location is selected with the LOC/REM key of the panel. The drive is speed-controlled. In external control, the control location is EXT1. The reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1 and Start/Stop and Direction signals are connected to digital inputs DI1 and DI2. By default, the direction is fixed to FORWARD (parameter 10.03). DI2 does not control the direction of rotation unless parameter 10.03 is changed to REQUEST. Three constant speeds are selected by digital inputs DI5 and DI6. Two acceleration/ deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are used according to the state of digital input DI4. Two analogue signals (speed and current) and three relay output signals (ready, running and inverted fault) are available. The default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and POWER.
Application macros
88
Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Factory macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)
Effective only if parameter 10.03 is switched to REQUEST by the user.
2) The US default settings differ as follows:
DI1 Start (Pulse: 0->1) DI2 Stop (Pulse: 1->0) DI3 Forward/Reverse
3)
0 = ramp times according to par. 22.02 and 22.03. 1 = ramp times according to par. 22.04 and 22.05. See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS: DI5 0 1 0 1
5) 4)
rpm
DI6 0 0 1 1
Operation Set speed through AI1 Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3
See parameter 21.09.
Total maximum current shared between this output and optional modules installed on the board.
6)
Fault
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3
VREF GND VREF GND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 +24 V +24 V DGND1 DGND2 DI IL +24 V GND RO11 RO12 RO13 RO21 RO22 RO23 R031 R032 R033
Reference voltage -10 VDC 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Reference voltage 10 VDC 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Speed reference 0(2) 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm By default, not in use. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm Motor speed 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. speed, RL < 700 ohm Output current 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. current, RL < 700 ohm Stop/Start 2) Forward/reverse 1, 2) By default, not in use. 2) Acceleration & deceleration select 3) Constant speed select 4) Constant speed select 4) +24 VDC, max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Start interlock (0 = stop) 5) Auxiliary voltage output and input, nonisolated, 24 V DC 250 mA 6) Relay output 1 Ready
Relay output 2 Running
Relay output 3 Inverted fault
Application macros
89
Hand/Auto macro
Start/Stop and Direction commands and reference settings can be given from one of two external control locations, EXT1 (Hand) or EXT2 (Auto). The Start/Stop/Direction commands of EXT1 (Hand) are connected to digital inputs DI1 and DI2, and the reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1. The Start/Stop/Direction commands of EXT2 (Auto) are connected to digital inputs DI5 and DI6, and the reference signal is connected to analogue input AI2. The selection between EXT1 and EXT2 is dependent on the status of digital input DI3. The drive is speed controlled. Speed reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands can be given from the control panel keypad also. One constant speed can be selected through digital input DI4. Speed reference in Auto Control (EXT2) is given as a percentage of the maximum speed of the drive. Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. The default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and CTRL LOC.
Application macros
90
Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Hand/Auto macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)
Selection between two external control locations, EXT1 and EXT2. See parameter 21.09.
2)
3)
rpm
Fault
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3
Reference voltage -10 VDC 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Reference voltage 10 VDC, kohm < RL < 10 kohm Speed reference (Hand control). 0(2) 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm Speed reference (Auto control). 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm. Motor speed 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. speed, RL < 700 ohm Output current 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. current, RL < 700 ohm Stop/Start (Hand control) Forward/Reverse (Hand control) Hand/Auto control select 1) Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05 Forward/Reverse (Auto control) Stop/Start (Auto control) +24 VDC, max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Start interlock (0 = stop) 2) Auxiliary voltage output and input, nonisolated, 24 V DC 250 mA 3) Relay output 1 Ready
Application macros
91
PID Control macro

The PID Control macro is used for controlling a process variable such as pressure or flow by controlling the speed of the driven motor. Process reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1 and process feedback signal to analogue input AI2. Alternatively, a direct speed reference can be given to the drive through analogue input AI1. Then the PID controller is bypassed and the drive no longer controls the process variable. Selection between the direct speed control and the process variable control is done with digital input DI3. Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. The default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED, ACTUAL VALUE1 and CONTROL DEVIATION. Connection example, 24 VDC / 420 mA two-wire sensor
P I
420 mA
X21 / RMIO board 5 AI2+ Process actual value measurement. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm 6 AI2 X23 / RMIO board 1 +24 V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated, 24 VDC, 250 mA 2 GND
Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output. Thus the output signal must be 420 mA, not 020 mA.
Application macros
92
Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the PID Control macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
Selection between two external control locations, EXT1 and EXT2 In use only when the speed control is active (DI3 = 0)
3) Off = Run Enable off. Drive will not start or stops. On = Run Enable on. Normal operation. 4) 2) 1)
PT
5)

rpm
The sensor needs to be powered. See the manufacturers instructions. A connection example of a two-wire 24 VDC / 420 mA sensor is shown on previous page. Total maximum current shared between this output and optional modules installed on the board.
6)
5)
Fault
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3
Reference voltage -10 VDC 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Reference voltage 10 VDC 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Speed ref. (speed cntrl) or process ref. (process cntrl). 0(2) 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm Process actual value measurement. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm. Motor speed 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. speed, RL < 700 ohm Output current 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. current, RL < 700 ohm Stop/Start (speed control) By default, not in use. Speed / process control select 1) Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05 2) Run Enable. 3) Stop/Start (process control) +24 VDC, max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Start interlock (0 = stop) 4) Auxiliary voltage output and input, nonisolated, 24 V DC 250 mA 6) Relay output 1 Ready
Application macros
93
Torque Control macro

Torque Control macro is used in applications in which torque control of the motor is required. Torque reference is given through analogue input AI2 as a current signal. By default, 0 mA corresponds to 0 %, and 20 mA to 100 % of the rated motor torque. The Start/Stop/Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2. The Run Enable signal is connected to DI6. Through digital input DI3 it is possible to select speed control instead of torque control. It is also possible to change the external control location to local (i.e. to control panel) by pressing the LOC/REM key. The panel controls the speed by default. If torque control with panel is required, the value of parameter 11.01 should be changed to REF2 (%). Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. The default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED, TORQUE and CTRL LOC.
Application macros
94
Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Torque Control macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)
Selection between external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 In use only when the speed control is active (DI3 = 0) Off = Ramp times according to par. 22.02 and 22.03. On = Ramp times according to par. 22.04 and 22.05. Off = Run Enable off. Drive will not start or stops. On = Run Enable on. Normal operation. See parameter 21.09.
2)
3)
4)
rpm
5)
6)
Fault
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3
Reference voltage -10 VDC 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Reference voltage 10 VDC 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Speed reference. 0(2) 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm Torque reference. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm Motor speed 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. speed, RL < 700 ohm Output current 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. current, RL < 700 ohm Stop/Start Forward/Reverse Speed / torque control select 1) Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05 2) Acceleration & deceleration select 3) Run Enable 4) +24 VDC, max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Start interlock (0 = stop) 5) Auxiliary voltage output and input, nonisolated, 24 V DC 250 mA 6) Relay output 1 Ready
Application macros
95
Sequential Control macro

This macro offers seven preset constant speeds which can be activated by digital inputs DI4 to DI6. Two acceleration/deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are applied according to the state of digital input DI3. The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2. External speed reference can be given through analogue input AI1. The reference is active only when all of the digital inputs DI4 to DI6 are 0 VDC. Giving operational commands and setting reference is possible also from the control panel. Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. Default stop mode is ramp. The default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and POWER. Operation diagram The figure below shows an example of the use of the macro.
Speed Speed 3 Speed 2 Stop with deceleration ramp
Speed 1
Time Accel1 Start/Stop Accel1/Decel1 Speed 1 Speed 2 Accel2/Decel2 Speed 3 Accel1 Accel2 Decel2
Application macros
96
Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Sequential Control macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1) Off =
Ramp times according to par. 22.02 and 22.03. On = Ramp times according to par. 22.04 and 22.05. See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS: DI4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 DI5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 DI6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Operation Set speed through AI1 Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed 4 Speed 5 Speed 6 Speed 7
2)
rpm
3)
4)
Fault
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3
Reference voltage -10 VDC 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm Reference voltage 10 VDC 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm External speed reference 0(2) 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm By default, not in use. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm By default, not in use. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm Motor speed 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. speed, RL < 700 ohm Output current 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. current, RL < 700 ohm Stop/Start Forward/Reverse Acceleration & deceleration selection 1) Constant speed select 2) Constant speed select 2) Constant speed select 2) +24 VDC, max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Start interlock (0 = stop) 3) Auxiliary voltage output and input, nonisolated, 24 V DC 250 mA 4) Relay output 1 Ready
Application macros
97
User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create two user macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including Group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory, and recall the data at a later time. The panel reference is also saved, if the macro is saved and loaded in Local control mode. Remote control location setting is saved into the user macro, but Local control location setting is not. To create User Macro 1: Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if not performed yet. Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by changing parameter 99.02 to USER 1 SAVE (press ENTER). The storing takes 20 s to 1 min. Note: If user macro save function is executed several times, drive memory fills up and file compression starts. File compression can last up to 10 minutes. Macro saving will be completed after the file compression. (Operation is indicated on the last row of the control panel display by blinking dots). To recall the user macro: Change parameter 99.02 to USER 1 LOAD. Press ENTER to load. The user macro can also be switched via digital inputs (see parameter 16.05). Note: User macro load restores also the motor settings in group 99 START-UP DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used. Example: The user can switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for both motors and then to save the data as two user macros. When the motor is changed, only the corresponding User macro needs to be loaded, and the drive is ready to operate.
Application macros
98
Application macros
99

Chapter overview The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus equivalent values for each signal/parameter. More data is given in chapter Additional data: actual signals and parameters. Terms and abbreviations
Term Absolute Maximum Frequency Absolute Maximum Speed Actual signal FbEq Parameter Definition Value of 20.08, or 20.07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit. Value of parameter 20.02, or 20.01 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit. Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user. No user setting possible. Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication. A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.
100
No.
Name/Value
Description Basic signals for monitoring of the drive. Process variable based on settings in parameter group 34 PROCESS VARIABLE. Calculated motor speed in rpm. Filter time setting by parameter 34.04.
FbEq
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01.01 01.02 PROCESS VARIABLE SPEED
1=1 -20000 = -100% 20000 = 100% of motor abs. max. speed -100 = -1 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 10 = 1 A -10000 = -100% 10000 = 100% of motor nom. torque -1000 = -100% 1000 = 100% of motor nom. power 1=1V 1=1V 1=1V 10 = 1% 1 = 1 rpm
01.03 01.04 01.05
FREQUENCY CURRENT TORQUE
Calculated drive output frequency. Measured motor current. Calculated motor torque. 100 is the motor nominal torque. Filter time setting by parameter 34.05.
01.06
POWER
Motor power. 100 is the nominal power.
01.07 01.08 01.09 01.10 01.11 01.12 01.13 01.14 01.15 01.16 01.17 01.18 01.19 01.20 01.21 01.22
DC BUS VOLTAGE V MAINS VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE ACS800 TEMP EXTERNAL REF 1 EXTERNAL REF 2 CTRL LOCATION OP HOUR COUNTER KILOWATT HOURS APPL BLOCK OUTPUT DI6-1 STATUS AI1 [V] AI2 [mA] AI3 [mA] RO3-1 STATUS AO1 [mA]
Measured intermediate circuit voltage. Calculated supply voltage. Calculated motor voltage. Calculated IGBT temperature. External reference REF1 in rpm. (Hz if value of parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.)
External reference REF2. Depending on the use, 100% is the motor 0 = 0% 10000 maximum speed, motor nominal torque, or maximum process reference. = 100% 1) Active control location. (1,2) LOCAL; (3) EXT1; (4) EXT2. See section Local control vs. external control on page 43. Elapsed time counter. Runs when the control board is powered. kWh counter. Counts inverter output kWh during operation (motor side generator side). Application block output signal. E.g. the process PID controller output when the PID Control macro is active. Status of digital inputs. Example: 0000001 = DI1 is on, DI2 to DI6 are off. Value of analogue input AI1. Value of analogue input AI2. Value of analogue input AI3. Status of relay outputs. Example: 001 = RO1 is energised, RO2 and RO3 are de-energised. Value of analogue output AO1. 1 =0.001 mA 1 = 0.001 V 1 = 0.001 mA 1 = 0.001 mA See descr. 1=1h 1 = 100 kWh 0 = 0% 10000 = 100%
101
No. 01.23 01.24 01.25 01.26
Name/Value AO2 [mA] ACTUAL VALUE 1 ACTUAL VALUE 2 CONTROL DEVIATION
Description Value of analogue output AO2. Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when parameter 99.02 = PD CTRL Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. Deviation of the process PID controller, i.e. the difference between the reference value and the actual value. Updated only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. Active application macro (value of parameter 99.02). Value of output 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional). Value of output 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional). Measured heatsink temperature in inverter no. 1.
FbEq 1 = 0.001 mA 0 = 0% 10000 = 100% 0 = 0% 10000 = 100% -10000 = -100% 10000 = 100% See 99.02 1 = 0.001 mA 1 = 0.001 mA 1 = 1C
01.27 01.28 01.29 01.30 01.31 01.32 01.33 01.34 01.35 01.36 01.37 01.38 01.39 01.40 01.41
APPLICATION MACRO EXT AO1 [mA] EXT AO2 [mA] PP 1 TEMP PP 2 TEMP PP 3 TEMP PP 4 TEMP ACTUAL VALUE MOTOR 1 TEMP MOTOR 2 TEMP MOTOR TEMP EST AI5 [mA] AI6 [mA] DI7-12 STATUS EXT RO STATUS
Measured heatsink temperature in inverter no. 2 (used only in high power 1 = 1C units with parallel inverters). Measured heatsink temperature in inverter no. 3 (used only in high power 1 = 1C units with parallel inverters). Measured heatsink temperature in inverter no. 4 (used only in high power 1 = 1C units with parallel inverters). Process PID controller actual value. See parameter 40.06. Measured temperature of motor 1. See parameter 35.01. Measured temperature of motor 2. See parameter 35.04. Estimated motor temperature. Signal value is saved at power switch off. 0 = 0% 10000 = 100% 1 = 1C/ohm 1 = 1C/ohm 1 = 1C
Value of analogue input AI5 read from AI1 of the analogue I/O extension 1 = 0.001 mA module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA (instead of V). Value of analogue input AI6 read from AI2 of the analogue I/O extension 1 = 0.001 mA module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA (instead of V). Status of digital inputs DI7 to DI12 read from the digital I/O extension modules (optional). E.g. value 000001: DI7 is on, DI8 to DI12 are off. 1=1
Status of the relay outputs on the digital I/O extension modules (optional). 1 = 1 E.g. value 0000001: RO1 of module 1 is energised. Other relay outputs are de-energised. Motor actual speed in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed. If parameter 99.04 is SCALAR, the value is the relative actual output frequency. Motor run time counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates. Can be reset by parameter 34.06. Running time of the drive cooling fan. Note: Resetting of the counter is recommended when the fan is replaced. For more information, contact your local ABB representative. 1=1
01.42
PROCESS SPEED REL
01.43 01.44
MOTOR RUN TIME FAN ON-TIME
1 = 10 h 1 = 10 h
01.45 01.46 01.47
CTRL BOARD TEMP SAVED KWH SAVED GWH
Control board temperature. Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. See parameter group 45 ENERGY OPT on page 164. Energy saved in GWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection.
1 = 1C 1 = 100 kWh 1 = 1 GWh
102
No. 01.48
Name/Value SAVED AMOUNT
Description Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is a multiplication of parameters 01.46 SAVED KWH and 45.02 ENERGY TARIFF1. See parameter group 45 ENERGY OPT on page 164. Monetary savings in millions compared to direct-on-line motor connection.
FbEq 1 = 100 cur
01.49 01.50
SAVED AMOUNT M SAVED CO2
1 = 1 Mcur
1 = 100 kg Reduction in CO2 emissions in kilograms compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated by multiplying saved energy in megawatt-hours by 500 kg/MWh. See parameter group 45 ENERGY OPT on page 164. Reduction in CO2 emissions in kilotons compared to direct-on-line motor 1 = 1 kton connection. Speed and torque reference monitoring signals. Limited speed reference. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor. 0 = 0% 20000 = 100% of motor absolute max. speed 20000 = 100%
01.51
SAVED CO2 KTON
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
02.01 SPEED REF 2
02.02 02.09
SPEED REF 3 TORQUE REF 2
Ramped and shaped speed reference. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
Speed controller output. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. 0 = 0% 10000 = 100% of motor nominal torque Torque reference. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Torque reference after frequency, voltage and torque limiters. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Flux reference in percent. Estimated motor speed. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor. Measured motor actual speed (zero when no encoder is used). 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor. Measured motor current in percent of the user load curve current. User load curve current is defined by parameters 72.02...72.09. See section User load curve on page 83. 10000 = 100% 10000 = 100% 10000 = 100% 20000 = 100% 20000 = 100% 1=1 rpm/s. 10 = 1%
02.10 02.13 02.14 02.17 02.18 02.19 02.20
TORQUE REF 3 TORQ USED REF FLUX REF SPEED ESTIMATED SPEED MEASURED
MOTOR ACCELERATIO Calculated motor acceleration from signal 01.02 MOTOR SPEED. USER CURRENT
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS
03.01 03.02 03.03 03.04 03.05 03.06 MAIN CTRL WORD MAIN STATUS WORD AUX STATUS WORD LIMIT WORD 1 FAULT WORD 1 FAULT WORD 2
Data words for monitoring of fieldbus communication (each signal is a 16- 2) bit data word). A 16-bit data word. See section 03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD on page 211. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD on page 212. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.03 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD on page 219. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 on page 220. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.05 FAULT WORD 1 on page 220. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.06 FAULT WORD 2 on page 221.
103
No. 03.07 03.08 03.09 03.11 03.13 03.14 03.15 03.16 03.17 03.18 03.19 03.20 03.21 03.22 03.23 03.24 03.25 03.26 03.27 03.28 03.29 03.30 03.31 03.32 03.33
Name/Value SYSTEM FAULT ALARM WORD 1 ALARM WORD 2 FOLLOWER MCW AUX STATUS WORD 3 AUX STATUS WORD 4 FAULT WORD 4 ALARM WORD 4 FAULT WORD 5 ALARM WORD 5 INT INIT FAULT LATEST FAULT 2.LATEST FAULT 3.LATEST FAULT 4.LATEST FAULT 5.LATEST FAULT LATEST WARNING 2.LATEST WARNING 3.LATEST WARNING 4.LATEST WARNING 5.LATEST WARNING LIMIT WORD INV ALARM WORD 6 EXT IO STATUS FAULT WORD 6
Description A 16-bit data word. See section 03.07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD on page 222. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.08 ALARM WORD 1 on page 222. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.09 ALARM WORD 2 on page 223. A 16-bit data word. For the contents, see Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)]. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.13 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 on page 223. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.14 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 on page 224. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.15 FAULT WORD 4 on page 224. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.16 ALARM WORD 4 on page 225. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.17 FAULT WORD 5 on page 225. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.18 ALARM WORD 5 on page 226. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.19 INT INIT FAULT on page 226. Fieldbus code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing for the codes. Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest fault. Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest fault. Fieldbus code of the 4th latest fault. Fieldbus code of the 5th latest fault. Fieldbus code of the latest warning. Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest warning. Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest warning. Fieldbus code of the 4th latest warning. Fieldbus code of the 5th latest warning. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.30 LIMIT WORD INV on page 227. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.31 ALARM WORD 6 on page 227. Status of emergency stop and step up modules. See section 03.32 EXT IO STATUS on page 228. A 16-bit data word. See section 03.33 FAULT WORD 6 on page 228. Signals for parallel connected inverters A 16-bit data word. See section 04.01 FAULTED INT INFO on page 229. A 16-bit data word. See section 04.02 INT SC INFO on page 230. Signals for the Adaptive Program Value of analogue input AI1 scaled to an integer value. Value of analogue input AI2 scaled to an integer value. Value of analogue input AI3 scaled to an integer value. Value of analogue input AI5 scaled to an integer value. Value of analogue input AI6 scaled to an integer value.
FbEq
04 ACTUAL SIGNALS
04.01 04.02 FAULTED INT INFO INT SC INFO
2)
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
09.01 09.02 09.03 09.04 09.05 AI1 SCALED AI2 SCALED AI3 SCALED AI5 SCALED AI6 SCALED
20000 = 10 V 20000 = 20 mA 20000 = 20 mA 20000 = 20 mA 20000 = 20 mA
104
No. 09.06 09.07 09.08 09.09 09.10 09.11 09.12 09.13
Name/Value DS MCW MASTER REF1 MASTER REF2 AUX DS VAL1 AUX DS VAL2 AUX DS VAL3 LCU ACT SIGNAL1 LCU ACT SIGNAL2
Description Control Word (CW) of the Main Reference data set received from the master station through the fieldbus interface Reference 1 (REF1) of the Main Reference data set received from the master station through the fieldbus interface Reference 2 (REF2) of the Main Reference data set received from the master station through the fieldbus interface Auxiliary data set value 1 received from the master station through the fieldbus interface Auxiliary data set value 2 received from the master station through the fieldbus interface Auxiliary data set value 3 received from the master station through the fieldbus interface Line-side converter signal selected by parameter 95.08. A 16-bit data word. Line-side converter signal selected by parameter 95.09. A 16-bit data word.
FbEq 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) -32768 32767 -32768 32767 -32768 32767 -32768 32767 -32768 32767
1) Percent of motor maximum speed / nominal torque / maximum process reference (depending on the ACS800 macro selected). 2) The contents of these data words are detailed in chapter Fieldbus control.
105
Index
Name/Selection
Description The sources for external start, stop and direction control Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction commands for external control location 1 (EXT1). No start, stop and direction command source. Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop; 1 = start. Direction is fixed according to parameter 10.3 DIRECTION. WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is on.
FbEq
10 START/STOP/DIR
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR NOT SEL DI1
1 2
DI1,2
Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. Direction through 3 digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST. WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is on.
DI1P,2P
Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter 10.03 DIRECTION. Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST. Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start forward. Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1: Start reverse. Pulse stop through digital input DI3. 1 -> 0: stop. To control the direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST. See selection DI1. See selection DI1,2. DI6: Start/stop, DI5: direction. Control panel. To control the direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST. Fieldbus Control Word. See selection DI1. See selection DI1,2. DI7: start/stop, DI8: direction. See selection DI1P,2P. See selection DI1P,2P,3. See selection DI1P,2P,3P. Source selected by 10.04. Start, stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2. DI1 0 1 0 1 DI2 0 0 1 1 Operation Stop Start forward Start reverse Stop
DI1P,2P,3
DI1P,2P,3P
DI6 DI6,5 KEYPAD COMM.CW DI7 DI7,8 DI7P,8P DI7P,8P,9 DI7P,8P,9P PARAM 10.04 DI1 F, DI2 R
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Note: Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST. 10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR NOT SEL Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction commands for external control location 2 (EXT2). See parameter 10.01. 1
106
Index
Name/Selection DI1 DI1,2 DI1P,2P DI1P,2P,3 DI1P,2P,3P DI6 DI6,5 KEYPAD COMM.CW DI7 DI7,8 DI7P,8P DI7P,8P,9 DI7P,8P,9P PARAM 10.05 DI1 F, DI2 R
Description See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. See parameter 10.01. Source selected by 10.05. See parameter 10.01. Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor, or fixes the direction. Fixed to forward Fixed to reverse Direction of rotation control allowed Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.04 of parameter 10.01. Parameter index or a constant value: - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting.
FbEq 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 -
10.03
REF DIRECTION FORWARD REVERSE REQUEST
10.04
EXT 1 STRT PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
10.05
EXT 2 STRT PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.05 of parameter 10.02. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. -
10.06
JOG SPEED SELECT Defines the signal that activates jogging function. The operation of the jogging is explained in section Jogging on page 81. NOT SEL DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 Not selected. Digital input DI3. 0 = Jogging is inactive. 1 = Jogging is active. See selection DI3. See selection DI3. See selection DI3. See selection DI3. See selection DI3. See selection DI3. See selection DI3. See selection DI3. See selection DI3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
107
Index 10.07
Name/Selection NET CONTROL
Description When active, fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 10.01. Fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11) is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active control location. Note: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected (98.07). Note: The setting is not saved in the permanent memory (will reset to zero when power is switched off).
FbEq
0 1 10.08 NET REFERENCE
Inactive Active When active, fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 11.03. Fieldbus reference REF1 is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active control location. Note: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected (98.07). Note: The setting is not saved in the permanent memory (will reset to zero when power is switched off).
0 1
0 1 10.09 SLS ACTIVE NO DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12
Inactive Active Selects the source for the SLS (safely-limited speed) command. Note: This parameter is available in AS7R firmware version only. No DI selected for the SLS function. The SLS function is activated by a falling edge of DI1, i.e. when the value of DI1 becomes 0. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Panel reference type, external control location selection and external reference sources and limits Selects the type of the reference given from panel. Speed reference in rpm. (Frequency reference (Hz) if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.) %-reference. The use of REF2 vary depending on the application macro. For example, if the Torque Control macro is selected, REF2 is the torque reference. Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between the two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2. Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1 = EXT2. See selection DI1.
0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
11 REFERENCE SELECT
11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm) REF2 (%)
1 2
11.02
EXT1/EXT2 SELECT DI1 DI2
1 2
108
Index
Name/Selection DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 EXT1 EXT2 COMM.CW DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 PARAM 11.09
Description See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.01 and 11.03. EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.02 and 11.06. Fieldbus Control Word, bit 11. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Source selected by parameter 11.09. Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 Control panel. The first line on the display shows the reference value. Analogue input AI1. Note: If the signal is bipolar (10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. (The selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range.)
FbEq 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2
11.03
EXT REF1 SELECT KEYPAD AI1
AI2 AI3
Analogue input AI2. Analogue input AI3.
3 4
109
Index
Name/Selection AI1/JOYST
Description
FbEq
Unipolar analogue input AI1 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs the 5 motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction, the maximum input at the maximum reference in the forward direction. Note: Parameter 10.03 must have the value REQUEST. WARNING! Minimum reference for joystick must be higher than 0.5 V. Set parameter 13.01 to 2 V or to a value higher than 0.5 V and analogue signal loss detection parameter 30.01 to FAULT. The drive will stop in case the control signal is lost. Speed Reference (REF1)
11.05 11.04 0 AI1 -11.04 -11.05 2 6 10 Par. 13.01 = 2 V, Par 13.02 = 10 V
Note: If the signal is bipolar (10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The selection AI1/JOYST ignores the negative signal range. AI2/JOYST AI1+AI3 AI2+AI3 AI1-AI3 AI2-AI3 AI1*AI3 AI2*AI3 MIN(AI1,AI3) MIN(AI2,AI3) MAX(AI1,AI3) MAX(AI2,AI3) DI3U,4D(R) See selection AI1/JOYST. Summation of analogue input AI1 and AI3 Summation of analogue input AI2 and AI3 Subtraction of analogue input AI1 and AI3 Subtraction of analogue input AI2 and AI3 Multiplication of analogue input AI1 and AI3 Multiplication of analogue input AI2 and AI3 Minimum of analogue input AI1 and AI3 Minimum of analogue input AI2 and AI3 Maximum of analogue input AI1 and AI3 Maximum of analogue input AI2 and AI3 Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: Reference decrease. Stop command or power switch off resets the reference to zero. Parameter 22.04 defines the rate of the reference change. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
DI3U,4D
Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: Reference decrease. The 18 program stores the active speed reference (not reset by a stop command or power switch-off). Parameter 22.04 defines the rate of the reference change. See selection DI3U,4D. Fieldbus reference REF1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input AI1 19 20 21 22
DI5U,6D COMM. REF COM.REF1+AI1 COM.REF1*AI1
110
Index
Name/Selection FAST COMM
Description As with the selection COMM. REF, except the following differences: - shorter communication cycle time when transferring the reference to the core motor control program (6 ms -> 2 ms) - the direction cannot be controlled through interfaces defined by parameters 10.01 or 10.02, nor with the control panel - parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS is not effective Note: If any of the following selections is true, the selection is not effective. Instead, the operation is according to COMM. REF. - parameter 99.02 is PID - parameter 99.04 is SCALAR - parameter 40.14 has value PROPORTIONAL or DIRECT
FbEq 23
COM.REF1+AI5 COM.REF1*AI5 AI5 AI6 AI5/JOYST AI6/JOYST AI5+AI6 AI5-AI6 AI5*AI6 MIN(AI5,AI6) MAX(AI5,AI6) DI11U,12D(R) DI11U,12D PARAM 11.10
See selection COM.REF1+AI1 (AI5 used instead of AI1). See selection COM.REF1*AI1 (AI5 used instead of AI1). Analogue input AI5 Analogue input AI6 See selection AI1/JOYST. See selection AI1/JOYST. Summation of analogue input AI5 and AI6. Subtraction of analogue input AI5 and AI6. Multiplication of analogue input AI5 and AI6. Lower of analogue input AI5 and AI6. Higher of analogue input AI5 and AI6. See selection DI3U,4D(R). See selection DI3U,4D. Source selected by 11.10.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
111
Index
Name/Selection AI1 BIPOLAR
Description
FbEq
Bipolar analogue input AI1 (-10 10 V). The figure below illustrates the use of 38 the input as the speed reference.
scaled maxREF1
Operation Range
10.03 DIRECTION = FORWARD or REQUEST
Speed Reference
minREF1
-minREF1 10.03 DIRECTION = REVERSE or REQUEST -scaled maxREF1 -maxAI1
-minAI1
minAI1
maxAI1
Analogue Input Signal minAI1 maxAI1 scaled maxREF1 minREF1 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 0 18000 rpm = = = = 13.01 MINIMUM AI1 13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 13.03 SCALE AI1 x 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM
Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value). Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used. Setting range in rpm. (Hz if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.) Example: Analogue input AI1 is selected as the reference source (value of parameter 11.03 is AI1). The reference minimum and maximum correspond the AI minimum and maximum settings as follows: EXT REF1 Range 2 1 18000
1 2 1 2
parameter 13.01 parameter 13.02 parameter 11.04 parameter 11.05
1 AI1 Range 1 2 Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. See chapter Fieldbus control for more information.
112
Index 11.05
Name/Selection
Description Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal.
FbEq
EXT REF1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value). 0 18000 rpm Setting range. (Hz if value of parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.) See parameter 11.04. Selects the signal source for external reference REF2. REF2 is a - speed reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed if parameter 99.02 = FACTORY, HAND/AUTO or SEQ CTRL. - torque reference in percent of the motor nominal torque if parameter 99.02 = TORQUE. - process reference in percent of the maximum process quantity if parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. - frequency reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Frequency if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. KEYPAD AI1 See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. Note: If the signal is bipolar (10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range. AI2 AI3 AI1/JOYST AI2/JOYST AI1+AI3 AI2+AI3 AI1-AI3 AI2-AI3 AI1*AI3 AI2*AI3 MIN(AI1,AI3) MIN(AI2,AI3) MAX(AI1,AI3) MAX(AI2,AI3) DI3U,4D(R) DI3U,4D DI5U,6D COMM. REF COM.REF2+AI1 COM.REF2*AI1 FAST COMM COM.REF2+AI5 COM.REF2*AI5 AI5 AI6 AI5/JOYST AI6/JOYST See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 1 2 1 18000
11.06
EXT REF2 SELECT
113
Index
Name/Selection AI5+AI6 AI5-AI6 AI5*AI6 MIN(AI5,AI6) MAX(AI5,AI6) DI11U,12D(R) DI11U,12D PARAM 11.11 AI1 BIPOLAR
Description See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. See parameter 11.03. Source selected by 11.11. See parameter 11.03. Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value). Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used. Setting range in percent. Correspondence to the source signal limits: - Source is an analogue input: See example for parameter 11.04. - Source is a serial link: See chapter Fieldbus control.
FbEq 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
11.07
EXT REF2 MINIMUM 0 100%
0 10000
11.08
EXT REF2 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value). Corresponds to the maximum setting of the source signal used. 0 600% Setting range. Correspondence to the source signal limits: - Source is an analogue input: See parameter 11.04. - Source is a serial link: See chapter Fieldbus control. 0 6000
11.09
EXT 1/2 SEL PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.09 of parameter 11.02. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.10 of parameter 11.03. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.11 of parameter 11.06. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. -
11.10
EXT 1 REF PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
11.11
EXT 2 REF PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed selection and values. An active constant speed overrides the
drive speed reference. See section Constant speeds on page 59. Note: If parameter 99.04 is SCALAR, only speeds 1 to 5 and speed 15 are in use. 12.01 CONST SPEED SEL NOT SEL DI1(SPEED1) DI2(SPEED2) DI3(SPEED3) DI4(SPEED4) Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation signal. No constant speeds in use Speed defined by parameter 12.02 is activated through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. Speed defined by parameter 12.03 is activated through digital input DI2. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. Speed defined by parameter 12.04 is activated through digital input DI3. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. Speed defined by parameter 12.05 is activated through digital input DI4. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1 2 3 4 5
114
Index
Name/Selection DI5(SPEED5) DI6(SPEED6) DI1,2
Description Speed defined by parameter 12.06 is activated through digital input DI5. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. Speed defined by parameter 12.07 is activated through digital input DI6. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. Constant speed selection through digital input DI1 and DI2. DI1 0 1 0 1 DI2 0 0 1 1 Constant speed in use No constant speed Speed defined by parameter 12.02 Speed defined by parameter 12.03 Speed defined by parameter 12.04
FbEq 6 7 8
DI3,4 DI5,6 DI1,2,3
See selection DI1,2. See selection DI1,2. Constant speed selection through digital input DI1, DI2 and DI3. DI1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 DI2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 DI3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Constant speed in use No constant speed Speed defined by parameter 12.02 Speed defined by parameter 12.03 Speed defined by parameter 12.04 Speed defined by parameter 12.05 Speed defined by parameter 12.06 Speed defined by parameter 12.07 Speed defined by parameter 12.08
9 10 11
DI3,4,5 DI4,5,6 DI3,4,5,6
See selection DI1,2,3. See selection DI1,2,3. Constant speed selection through digital input DI3, 4, 5 and 6 DI1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 DI2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 DI3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 DI4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Constant speed in use No constant speed Speed defined by parameter 12.02 Speed defined by parameter 12.03 Speed defined by parameter 12.04 Speed defined by parameter 12.05 Speed defined by parameter 12.06 Speed defined by parameter 12.07 Speed defined by parameter 12.08 Speed defined by parameter 12.09 Speed defined by parameter 12.10 Speed defined by parameter 12.11 Speed defined by parameter 12.12 Speed defined by parameter 12.13 Speed defined by parameter 12.14 Speed defined by parameter 12.15 Speed defined by parameter 12.16
12 13 14
DI7(SPEED1) DI8(SPEED2)
Speed defined by parameter 12.02 is activated through digital input DI7. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. Speed defined by parameter 12.03 is activated through digital input DI8. 1 = active, 0 = inactive.
15 16
115
Index
Name/Selection DI9(SPEED3) DI10(SPEED4) DI11(SPEED5) DI12 (SPEED6) DI7,8 DI9,10 DI11,12
Description Speed defined by parameter 12.04 is activated through digital input DI9. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. Speed defined by parameter 12.05 is activated through digital input DI10. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. Speed defined by parameter 12.06 is activated through digital input DI11. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. Speed defined by parameter 12.07 is activated through digital input DI12. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. See selection DI1,2. See selection DI1,2. See selection DI1,2. Defines speed 1. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 2. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 3. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 4. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 5. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 6. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 7. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 8. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 9. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 10. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 11. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Setting range Defines speed 12. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 1 speed. The sign is taken into account. See chapter Fieldbus control.
FbEq 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 18000 0 18000 0 18000 0 18000 0 18000 0 18000 0 18000 0 18000 0 18000
12.02 12.03 12.04 12.05 12.06 12.07 12.08 12.09 12.10 12.11
CONST SPEED 1 0 18000 rpm CONST SPEED 2 0 18000 rpm CONST SPEED 3 0 18000 rpm CONST SPEED 4 0 18000 rpm CONST SPEED 5 0 18000 rpm CONST SPEED 6 0 18000 rpm CONST SPEED 7 0 18000 rpm CONST SPEED 8 0 18000 rpm CONST SPEED 9 0 18000 rpm CONST SPEED 10 0 18000 rpm
0 18000
12.12
CONST SPEED 11 0 18000 rpm
0 18000
12.13
CONST SPEED 12
-18000 18000 rpm
Setting range
-18000 18000
116
Index 12.14
Name/Selection CONST SPEED 13
Description Defines speed 13. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 2 speed. The sign is taken into account. See chapter Fieldbus control.
FbEq
-18000 18000 rpm 12.15 CONST SPEED 14
Setting range Defines speed 14. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information. Note: If the jogging function is in use, the parameter defines the jogging speed. The sign is not taken into account. See section Jogging on page 81.
-18000 18000
0 18000 rpm 12.16 CONST SPEED 15 -18000 18000 rpm
Setting range Defines speed 15 or Fault speed. The program considers the sign when used as a fault speed by parameter 30.01 and 30.02. Setting range The analogue input signal processing. See section Programmable analogue inputs on page 49. Defines the minimum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting. Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.04.
0 18000
-18000 18000
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
13.01 MINIMUM AI1
0V 2V TUNED VALUE TUNE
Zero volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analogue input signal. Two volts The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. The value measurement triggering. Procedure: - Connect the minimum signal to input. - Set the parameter to TUNE. Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 10 V.
1 2 3 4
13.02
MAXIMUM AI1
Defines the maximum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting. Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.05.
10 V TUNED VALUE TUNE
Ten volts (DC). The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. Triggering of the tuning function. Procedure: - Connect the maximum signal to input. - Set the parameter to TUNE. Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 10 V.
1 2 3
117
Index 13.03
Name/Selection SCALE AI1
Description Scales analogue input AI1. Example: The effect on speed reference REF1 when: - REF1 source selection (parameter 11.03) = AI1+AI3 - REF1 maximum value setting (parameter 11.05) = 1500 rpm - Actual AI1 value = 4 V (40% of the full scale value) - Actual AI3 value = 12 mA (60% of the full scale value) - AI1 scaling = 100%, AI3 scaling = 10% AI1 10 V 1500 rpm 20 mA AI3 150 rpm AI1 + AI3 1500 rpm
FbEq
60% 40% 600 rpm
90 rpm 690 rpm
0V 0 1000% 13.04 FILTER AI1 Scaling range
0 mA
0 rpm 0 32767
Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI1. % 100 63 Filtered Signal t T Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (10 ms time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter. I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant Unfiltered Signal O = I (1 - e-t/T)
0.00 10.00 s 13.05 INVERT AI1 NO YES 13.06 MINIMUM AI2 0 mA 4 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE 13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 20 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE
Filter time constant Activates/deactivates the inversion of analogue input AI1. No inversion
0 1000 0
Inversion active. The maximum value of the analogue input signal corresponds 65535 to the minimum reference and vice versa. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
118
Index 13.08 13.09 13.10
Name/Selection SCALE AI2 0 1000% FILTER AI2 0.00 10.00 s INVERT AI2 NO YES
Description See parameter 13.03. See parameter 13.03. See parameter 13.04. See parameter 13.04. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.03. See parameter 13.03. See parameter 13.04. See parameter 13.04. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.01. Note: If RAIO-01 is used with voltage input signal, 20 mA corresponds to 10 V. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.02. Note: If RAIO-01 is used with voltage input signal, 20 mA corresponds to 10 V. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.03. See parameter 13.03. See parameter 13.04. See parameter 13.04.
FbEq 0 32767 0 1000 0 65535 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 0 32767 0 1000 0 65535
13.11
MINIMUM AI3 0 mA 4 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE
13.12
MAXIMUM AI3 20 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE
13.13 13.14 13.15
SCALE AI3 0 1000% FILTER AI3 0.00 10.00 s INVERT AI3 NO YES
13.16
1 2 3 4
13.17
1 2 3
13.18 13.19
SCALE AI5 0 1000% FILTER AI5 0.00 10.00 s
0 32767 0 1000
119
Index 13.20
Name/Selection INVERT AI5 NO YES
Description See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.01. Note: If RAIO-01 is used with voltage input signal, 20 mA corresponds to 10 V. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.01. See parameter 13.02. Note: If RAIO-01 is used with voltage input signal, 20 mA corresponds to 10 V. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.02. See parameter 13.03. See parameter 13.03. See parameter 13.04. See parameter 13.04. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.05. See parameter 13.05. Status information indicated through the relay outputs, and the relay operating delays. See section Programmable relay outputs on page 52.
FbEq 0 65535
13.21
1 2 3 4
13.22
1 2 3 0 32767 0 1000 0 65535
13.23 13.24 13.25
SCALE AI6 0 1000% FILTER AI6 0.00 10.00 s INVERT AI6 NO YES
14 RELAY OUTPUTS
14.01
RELAY RO1 OUTPUT Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO1. The relay energises when the status meets the setting. NOT USED READY RUNNING FAULT FAULT(-1) FAULT(RST) STALL WARN STALL FLT MOT TEMP WRN MOT TEMP FLT ACS TEMP WRN ACS TEMP FLT FAULT/WARN WARNING REVERSED Not used. Ready to function: Run Enable signal on, no fault. Running: Start signal on, Run Enable signal on, no active fault. Fault Inverted fault. Relay is de-energised on a fault trip. Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET. Warning by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10. Fault trip by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10. Warning trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter 30.04. Warning by the drive temperature supervision function. The warning limit depends on the used inverter type. Fault trip by the drive temperature supervision function. Trip limit is 100%. Fault or warning active Warning active Motor rotates in reverse direction. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fault trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter 30.04. 10 11 12 13 14 15
120
Index
Name/Selection EXT CTRL REF 2 SEL CONST SPEED DC OVERVOLT DC UNDERVOLT SPEED 1 LIM SPEED 2 LIM CURRENT LIM REF 1 LIM REF 2 LIM TORQUE 1 LIM TORQUE 2 LIM STARTED LOSS OF REF AT SPEED ACT 1 LIM ACT 2 LIM COMM.REF3(13) PARAM 14.16 BRAKE CTRL BC SHORT CIR
Description Drive is under external control. External reference REF 2 is in use. A constant speed is in use. See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS. The intermediate circuit DC voltage has exceeded the overvoltage limit. The intermediate circuit DC voltage has fallen below the undervoltage limit. Motor speed at supervision limit 1. See parameters 32.01 and 32.02. Motor speed at supervision limit 2. See parameters 32.03 and 32.04. Motor current at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.05 and 32.06. External reference REF1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.11 and 32.12. External reference REF2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.13 and 32.14. Motor torque at supervision limit 1. See parameters 32.07 and 32.08. Motor torque at supervision limit 2. See parameters 32.09 and 32.10. The drive has received the start command. The drive has no reference.
FbEq 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
The actual value has reached the reference value. In speed control, the speed 30 error is less or equal to 10% of the nominal motor speed. Process PID controller variable ACT1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 31 32.15 and 32.16. Process PID controller variable ACT2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32 32.17 and 32.18. The relay is controlled by fieldbus reference REF3. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by parameter 14.16. On/Off control of a mechanical brake. See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL and section Control of a mechanical brake on page 77. Drive trips on a brake chopper fault. See chapter Fault tracing. 33 34 35 36
14.02
RELAY RO2 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO2. The relay energises when the status meets the setting. NOT USED READY RUNNING FAULT FAULT(-1) FAULT(RST) STALL WARN STALL FLT MOT TEMP WRN MOT TEMP FLT ACS TEMP WRN ACS TEMP FLT FAULT/WARN WARNING See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
121
Index
Name/Selection REVERSED EXT CTRL REF 2 SEL CONST SPEED DC OVERVOLT DC UNDERVOLT SPEED 1 LIM SPEED 2 LIM CURRENT LIM REF 1 LIM REF 2 LIM TORQUE 1 LIM TORQUE 2 LIM STARTED LOSS OF REF AT SPEED ACT 1 LIM ACT 2 LIM COMM. REF3(14) PARAM 14.17 BRAKE CTRL BC SHORT CIR
Description See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. Source selected by parameter 14.17. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01.
FbEq 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
14.03
RELAY RO3 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO3. The relay energises when the status meets the setting. NOT USED READY RUNNING FAULT FAULT(-1) FAULT(RST) STALL WARN STALL FLT MOT TEMP WRN MOT TEMP FLT ACS TEMP WRN ACS TEMP FLT FAULT/WARN WARNING REVERSED EXT CTRL REF 2 SEL CONST SPEED See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
122
Index
Name/Selection DC OVERVOLT DC UNDERVOLT SPEED 1 LIM SPEED 2 LIM CURRENT LIM REF 1 LIM REF 2 LIM TORQUE 1 LIM TORQUE 2 LIM STARTED LOSS OF REF AT SPEED MAGN READY USER 2 SEL COMM. REF3(15) PARAM 14.18 BRAKE CTRL BC SHORT CIR
Description See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. The motor is magnetised and ready to give nominal torque (nominal magnetising of the motor has been reached). User Macro 2 is in use. See parameter 14.01. Source selected by parameter 14.18. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. Defines the operation delay for the relay RO1. Setting range. The figure below illustrates the operation (on) and release (off) delays for relay output RO1. Drive status 1 0 RO1 status 1 0
FbEq 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 0 36000
14.04
RO1 TON DELAY 0.0 3600.0 s
tOn tOn tOff 14.05 14.06 14.07 14.08 14.09 RO1 TOFF DELAY 0.0 3600.0 s RO2 TON DELAY 0.0 3600.0 s RO2 TOFF DELAY 0.0 3600.0 s RO3 TON DELAY 0.0 3600.0 s RO3 TOFF DELAY 0.0 3600.0 s
tOff 14.04 14.05
tOn
tOff
time
Defines the release delay for relay output RO1. See parameter 14.04. Defines the operation delay for relay output RO2. See parameter 14.04. Defines the release delay for relay output RO2. See parameter 14.04. Defines the operation delay for relay output RO3. See parameter 14.04. Defines the release delay of relay output RO3. See parameter 14.04. 0 36000 0 36000 0 36000 0 36000 0 36000
123
Index 14.10
Name/Selection DIO MOD1 RO1 READY RUNNING FAULT WARNING REF 2 SEL AT SPEED PARAM 14.19
Description Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O extension module 1 (optional, see parameter 98.03). See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. Source selected by parameter 14.19. Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I/O extension module 1 (optional, see parameter 98.03). See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. Source selected by parameter 14.20. Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O extension module 2 (optional, see parameter 98.04). See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. Source selected by parameter 14.21. Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I/O extension module 2 (optional, see parameter 98.04). See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. Source selected by parameter 14.22. Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O extension module 3 (optional, see parameter 98.05). See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01.
FbEq
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14.11
DIO MOD1 RO2 READY RUNNING FAULT WARNING REF 2 SEL AT SPEED PARAM 14.20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14.12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14.13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14.14
DIO MOD3 RO1 READY RUNNING FAULT WARNING REF 2 SEL
1 2 3 4 5
124
Index
Name/Selection AT SPEED PARAM 14.23
Description See parameter 14.01. Source selected by parameter 14.23. Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I/O extension module no. 3 (optional, see parameter 98.05). See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. See parameter 14.01. Source selected by parameter 14.24. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.16 of parameter 14.01. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.17 of parameter 14.02. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.18 of parameter 14.03. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.19 of parameter 14.10. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.20 of parameter 14.11. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.21 of parameter 14.12. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.22 of parameter 14.13. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.23 of parameter 14.14. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.24 of parameter 14.15. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
FbEq 6 7
14.15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 -
14.16
RO PTR1 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
14.17
RO PTR2 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
14.18
RO PTR3 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
14.19
RO PTR4 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
14.20
RO PTR5 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
14.21
RO PTR6 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
14.22
RO PTR7 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
14.23
RO PTR8 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
14.24
RO PTR9 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
125
Index
Name/Selection
Description Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through the analogue outputs. Output signal processing. See section Programmable analogue outputs on page 50. Connects a drive signal to analogue output AO1. Not in use Value of a user-defined process quantity derived from the motor speed. See parameter group 34 PROCESS VARIABLE for scaling and unit selection (%; m/s; rpm). The updating interval is 100 ms. Motor speed (signal 01.02 SPEED). 20 mA = motor nominal speed. The updating interval is 24 ms. The value is filtered with the filter time constant defined by parameter 34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM. Output frequency. 20 mA = motor nominal frequency. The updating interval is 24 ms. Motor torque. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is 24 ms. Motor power. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is 100 ms.
FbEq
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 NOT USED P SPEED
1 2
SPEED
FREQUENCY CURRENT TORQUE POWER DC BUS VOLT
Output current. 20 mA = motor nominal current. The updating interval is 24 ms. 5 6 7
DC bus voltage. 20 mA = 100% of the reference value. The reference value is 8 540 VDC. (= 1.35 400 V) for 380...415 VAC supply voltage rating and 675 VDC (= 1.35 500 V) for 380...500 VAC supply. The updating interval is 24 ms. Motor voltage. 20 mA = motor rated voltage. The updating interval is 100 ms. 9 The reference which is given as an output from the application. For example, if 10 the PID Control macro is in use, this is the output of the process PID controller. The updating interval is 24 ms. Active reference that the drive is currently following. 20 mA = 100 % of the active reference. The updating interval is 24 ms. The difference between the reference and the actual value of the process PID controller. 0/4 mA = -100%, 10/12 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%. The updating interval is 24 ms. Value of variable ACT1 used in the process PID control. 20 mA = value of parameter 40.10. The updating interval is 24 ms. Value of variable ACT2 used in the process PID control. 20 mA = value of parameter 40.12. The updating interval is 24 ms. 11 12
OUTPUT VOLT APPL OUTPUT
REFERENCE CONTROL DEV
ACTUAL 1 ACTUAL 2 COMM.REF4 M1 TEMP MEAS
13 14
The value is read from fieldbus reference REF4. See chapter Fieldbus control. 15 Analogue output is a current source in a motor temperature measuring circuit. 16 Depending on the sensor type, the output is 9.1 mA (Pt 100) or 1.6 mA (PTC). For more information, see parameter 35.01 and section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 73. Note: The settings of parameters 15.02 to 15.05 are not effective. Source selected by 15.11 Inverts the analogue output AO1 signal. The analogue signal is at the minimum level when the indicated drive signal is at its maximum level and vice versa. Inversion off Inversion on 0 65535 17
PARAM 15.11 15.02 INVERT AO1 NO YES
126
Index 15.03
Name/Selection MINIMUM AO1 0 mA 4 mA
Description Defines the minimum value of the analogue output signal AO1. Zero mA Four mA Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1. Filter time constant % 100 63 Filtered Signal t T Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot be changed by any parameters. I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant Unfiltered Signal O = I (1 - e-t/T)
FbEq 1 2 0 1000
15.04
FILTER AO1 0.00 10.00 s
15.05
SCALE AO1 10 1000%
Scales the analogue output AO1 signal. Scaling factor. If the value is 100%, the reference value of the drive signal corresponds to 20 mA. Example: The nominal motor current is 7.5 A and the measured maximum current at maximum load 5 A. The motor current 0 to 5 A needs to be read as 0 to 20 mA analogue signal through AO1. The required settings are: 1. AO1 is set to CURRENT by parameter 15.01. 2. AO1 minimum is set to 0 mA by parameter 15.03. 3. The measured maximum motor current is scaled to correspond to 20 mA analogue output signal by setting the scaling factor (k) to 150%. The value is defined as follows: The reference value of the output signal CURRENT is the motor nominal current i.e. 7.5 A (see parameter 15.01). To make the measured maximum motor current correspond to 20 mA, it should be scaled equal to the reference value before it is converted to an analogue output signal. Equation: k 5 A = 7.5 A => k = 1.5 = 150% 100 10000
15.06
ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 NOT USED P SPEED SPEED FREQUENCY CURRENT TORQUE POWER DC BUS VOLT OUTPUT VOLT APPL OUTPUT REFERENCE CONTROL DEV ACTUAL 1
See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
127
Index
Name/Selection ACTUAL 2 COMM.REF5 PARAM 15.12
Description See parameter 15.01. Source selected by 15.12 See parameter 15.02. See parameter 15.02. See parameter 15.02. See parameter 15.03. See parameter 15.03. See parameter 15.03. See parameter 15.04. See parameter 15.04. See parameter 15.05. See parameter 15.05. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.11 of parameter 15.01. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.12 of parameter 15.06. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Run Enable, parameter lock etc. Sets the Run Enable signal on, or selects a source for the external Run Enable signal. If Run Enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start or stops if it is running. The stop mode is set by parameter 21.07. Run Enable signal is on. External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Run Enable. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. External signal required through the Fieldbus Control Word (bit 3). See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Source selected by parameter 16.08.
FbEq 14 16 0 65535 1 2 0 1000 100 10000 1000 = 1 mA
The value is read from fieldbus reference REF5. See chapter Fieldbus control. 15
15.07
INVERT AO2 NO YES
15.08
MINIMUM AO2 0 mA 4 mA
15.09 15.10
FILTER AO2 0.00 10.00 s SCALE AO2 10 1000%
15.11
AO1 PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
15.12
AO2 PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
1000 = 1 mA
16 SYST CTRL INPUTS

16.01 RUN ENABLE
YES DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 COMM.CW DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 PARAM 16.08
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128
Index 16.02
Name/Selection PARAMETER LOCK OPEN LOCKED
Description Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing. The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed.
FbEq 0
Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel. The lock 65535 can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 16.03. Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see parameter 16.02). Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts back to 0 automatically. Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists. Fault reset only from the control panel keypad (RESET key). Reset through digital input DI1 or by control panel: - If the drive is in external control mode: Reset by a rising edge of DI1. - If the drive is in local control mode: Reset by the RESET key of the control panel. 1 2 0 30000
16.03 16.04
PASS CODE 0 30000 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL DI1
DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 COMM.CW
See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Reset through the fieldbus Control Word (bit 7), or by the RESET key of the control panel. Note: Reset through fieldbus Control Word (bit 7) is enabled automatically and it is independent of parameter 16.04 setting if parameter 10.01 or 10.02 is set to COMM.CW.
3 4 5 6 7 8
ON STOP DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 PARAM 16.11 16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG
Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input, or by the RESET key of the control panel. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Source selected by parameter 16.11. Enables the change of the User Macro through a digital input. See parameter 99.02. The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During the change, the drive will not start. Note: Always save the User Macro by parameter 99.02 after changing any parameter settings, or reperforming the motor identification. The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again or the macro is changed. Any unsaved changes will be lost. Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. A setting once made remains despite the User Macro change. Note: Selection of User Macro 2 can be supervised via relay output RO3. See parameter 14.03 for more information.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOT SEL DI1
User macro change is not possible through a digital input. Falling edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 1 is loaded into use. Rising edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 2 is loaded into use.
1 2
129
Index
Name/Selection DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12
Description See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Disables entering local control mode (LOC/REM key of the panel). WARNING! Before activating, ensure that the control panel is not needed for stopping the drive!
FbEq 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
16.06
LOCAL LOCK
OFF ON 16.07 PARAMETER SAVE
Local control allowed. Local control disabled. Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory. Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection.
0 65535
DONE SAVE.. 16.08 RUN ENA PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY INTERNAL 24V EXTERNAL 24V 16.10 ASSIST SEL OFF ON 16.11 FAULT RESET PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767 16.12 RESET COUNTER NO FAN ON-TIME kWh
Saving completed Saving in progress Defines the source or constant for value PAR 16.08 of parameter 16.01 Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source of the control board power supply. Note: If an external supply is used but this parameter has value INTERNAL, the drive trips on a fault at power switch off. Internal (default). External. The control board is powered from an external supply. Enables the Start-up Assistant. Assistant disabled. Assistant enabled. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 16.11 of parameter 16.04. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Resets the cooling fan running time counter or kWh counter. No reset. Resets the running time counter of the drive cooling fan indicated with 01.44 FAN ON-TIME. kWh counter reset. See parameter 01.15 KILOWATT HOURS.
0 1 -
1 2 0 65535 -
0 1 2
130
Index
Name/Selection
Description Drive operation limits. See also section Speed controller tuning on page 60. Defines the allowed minimum speed. The limit cannot be set if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e. parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also change.
FbEq
20 LIMITS
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED
-18000 / (no. of pole pairs) par. 20.02 rpm 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED
Minimum speed limit. Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction. Defines the allowed maximum speed. The value cannot be set if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e. parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also change.
1 = 1 rpm
par. 20.01 18000 / Maximum speed limit (no. of pole pairs) rpm 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT Defines the allowed maximum motor current. 0.0 x.x A 20.04 20.05 TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0 600.0% OVERVOLTAGE CTRL Current limit Defines the maximum torque limit 1 for the drive. Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque. Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link. Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque. Note: If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the drive, the controller must be off (selection NO) to allow chopper operation. OFF ON 20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL Overvoltage control deactivated. Overvoltage control activated. Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link. If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan. Undervoltage control deactivated. Undervoltage control activated. Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set only parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. Minimum frequency limit. Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction. 20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ -50 300.00 Hz Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set only if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR Maximum frequency limit
1 = 1 rpm
0 10x.x
0 60000
0 65535
OFF ON 20.07 MINIMUM FREQ -300.00 50 Hz
0 65535
-30000 5000
-5000 30000
131
Index 20.11 20.12 20.13
Name/Selection P MOTORING LIM 0 600% P GENERATING LIM -600 0% MIN TORQ SEL MIN LIM1 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 PARAM 20.18 NEG MAX TORQ
Description Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the inverter to the motor. Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the motor to the inverter. Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive. The update interval is 100 ms. Value of parameter 20.15. Digital input DI1. 0: Value of parameter 20.15. 1: Value of parameter 20.16. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a torque limit. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. Limit given by 20.18 Inverted maximum torque limit defined by parameter 20.14 Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive. The update interval is 100 ms. Value of parameter 20.04. Digital input DI1. 0: Value of parameter 20.04. 1: Value of parameter 20.17. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a torque limit.
FbEq 0 60000 -60000 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
20.14
MAX TORQ SEL MAX LIM1 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 AI1
132
Index
Name/Selection AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 PARAM 20.19
Description See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. Limit given by 20.19 Defines the minimum torque limit 1 for the drive. Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque Defines the minimum torque limit 2 for the drive. Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque Defines the maximum torque limit 2 for the drive. Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.18 of parameter 20.13 Parameter index or a constant value.
FbEq 15 16 17 18 19 -60000 0 -60000 0 0 60000 100 = 1%
20.15 20.16 20.17 20.18
TORQ MIN LIM1 -600.0 0.0% TORQ MIN LIM2 -600.0 0.0% TORQ MAX LIM2 0.0 600.0% TORQ MIN PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
20.19
TORQ MAX PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.19 of parameter 20.14 Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. FbEq for the torque value is 100 = 1%. Defines how an analogue signal (mA or V) is converted to a torque minimum or maximum limit (%). The figure below illustrate the converting, when analogue input AI1 has been set the source for a torque limit by parameter 20.13 or 20.14. Torque limit 20.21 13.01 13.02 20.20 20.20 13.01 13.02 Analogue signal 20.21 Minimum setting for AI1 Maximum setting for AI1 Minimum torque Maximum torque 100 = 1%
20.20
MIN AI SCALE
0.0 600.0% 20.21 20.22 MAX AI SCALE 0.0 600.0% SLS SPEED LIMIT
%-value that corresponds to the minimum setting of the analogue input. See parameter 20.20. %-value that corresponds to the maximum setting of the analogue input.
100 = 1% 100 = 1%
Defines the safely-limited speed limit (SLS). When the SLS function is 20000 = activated the speed limits are ramped to 20.22 SLS SPEED LIMIT. The speed 1500 rpm of the deceleration to SLS is defined by parameter 22.11 and acceleration from SLS to the original speed is defined by parameter 22.10. Note: This parameter is available in AS7R firmware version only.
09000 rpm (04 times sync speed)
21 START/STOP
21.01 START FUNCTION
Start and stop modes of the motor. Selects the motor starting method. See also section Automatic Start on page 54.
133
Index
Name/Selection AUTO
Description
FbEq
Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the 1 flying start function (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart function (stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions. Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default. The flying start feature needs to be activated separately by parameter 21.08.
DC MAGN
DC magnetising should be selected if a high break-away torque is required. 2 The drive pre-magnetises the motor before the start. The pre-magnetising time is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on the motor size. DC MAGN guarantees the highest possible break-away torque. Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is selected. Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
CNST DC MAGN
3 Constant DC magnetising should be selected instead of DC magnetising if constant pre-magnetising time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be simultaneous with a mechanical brake release). This selection also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetising time is set long enough. The pre-magnetising time is defined by parameter 21.02. Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is selected. Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetising time has passed although the motor magnetisation is not completed. Ensure always in applications where a full break-away torque is essential, that the constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetisation and torque.
21.02
CONST MAGN TIME
Defines the magnetising time in the constant magnetising mode. See parameter 21.01. After the start command, the drive automatically premagnetises the motor the set time. Magnetising time. To ensure full magnetising, set this value to the same value as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb value given in the table below: Motor Rated Power < 10 kW 10 to 200 kW 200 to 1000 kW Constant Magnetising Time > 100 to 200 ms > 200 to 1000 ms > 1000 to 2000 ms 30 10000
30.0 10000.0 ms
21.03
STOP FUNCTION COAST
Selects the motor stop function. Stop by cutting of the motor power supply. The motor coasts to a stop. WARNING! If the mechanical brake control function is on, the application program uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST (see parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL). 1
RAMP
Stop along a ramp. See parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
134
Index 21.04
Name/Selection DC HOLD
Description Activates/deactivates the DC hold function. DC Hold is not possible if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. When both the reference and the speed drop below the value of parameter 21.05, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.06. When the reference speed exceeds parameter 21.05, normal drive operation continues. SPEEDmotor
FbEq
DC Hold
Ref. DC HOLD SPEED
t Note: DC Hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off. Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up. In applications where long DC hold times are required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If the DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor. See section DC Hold on page 57. NO YES 21.05 21.06 21.07 DC HOLD SPEED 0 3000 rpm DC HOLD CURR 0 100% RUN ENABLE FUNC Inactive Active Defines the DC Hold speed. See parameter 21.04. Speed in rpm Defines the DC hold current. See parameter 21.04. Current in percent of the motor nominal current Selects the stop mode applied when the Run Enable signal is switched off. The Run Enable signal is put into use by parameter 16.01. Note: The setting overrides the normal stop mode setting (parameter 21.03) when the Run Enable signal is switched off. WARNING! The drive will restart after the Run Enable signal restores (if the start signal is on). RAMP STOP COAST STOP The application program stops the drive along the deceleration ramp defined in 1 group 22 ACCEL/DECEL. The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply (the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed. WARNING! If the brake control function is on, the application program uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST STOP (see parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL). OFF2 STOP The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply (the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed. The drive will restart only when the Run Enable signal is on and the start signal is switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal). 3 2 0 100 0 3000 0 65535
135
Index
Name/Selection OFF3 STOP
Description
FbEq
The application program stops the drive along the ramp defined by parameter 4 22.07. The drive will restart only when the Run Enable is on and the start signal is switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal). Activates the flying start feature in the scalar control mode. See parameters 21.01 and 99.04. Inactive Active Defines how the Start Interlock input on RMIO board affects the drive operation. Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by coasting. Drive stopped: 1 = Start allowed. 0 = No start allowed. Restart after OFF2 STOP: Input is back to 1 and the drive receives rising edge of the Start signal. 1 0 65535
21.08
SCALAR FLY START NO YES
21.09
START INTRL FUNC OFF2 STOP
OFF3 STOP
Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by ramp. The ramp time is defined by parameter 22.07 EM STOP RAMP. Drive stopped: 1 = Normal start. 0 = No start allowed. Restart after OFF3 STOP: Start Interlock input = 1 and the drive receives rising edge of the Start signal.
21.10
ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position. No Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed controller switched off: Motor coasts to stop. Zero Speed Time No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the speed controller is switched off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill. With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the actual motor speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the zero speed delay function activates. During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is magnetised and the drive is ready for a quick restart. 0.0 60.0 s Delay time Acceleration and deceleration times. See section Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 59. Selects the active acceleration/deceleration time pair. Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are used. See parameters 22.02 and 22.03. 1 10 = 1 s With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed controller remains live. Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed. Zero Speed Delay Time
22 ACCEL/DECEL
22.01 ACC/DEC SEL ACC/DEC 1
136
Index
Name/Selection ACC/DEC 2 DI1
Description Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are used. See parameters 22.04 and 22.05.
FbEq 2
Acceleration/deceleration time pair selection through digital input DI1. 0 = 3 Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in use. 1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in use. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Acceleration and deceleration times given by parameters 22.08 and 22.09 Defines the acceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change from zero to the maximum speed. - If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate. - If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference signal. - If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 PAR 22.08&09 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1
0.00 1800.00 s 22.03 DECEL TIME 1
Acceleration time Defines the deceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change from the maximum (see parameter 20.02) to zero. - If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference signal. - If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate. - If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits. If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on (parameter 20.05). Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e.g. with a brake chopper and a brake resistor.
0 18000
0.00 1800.00 s 22.04 22.05 ACCEL TIME 2 0.00 1800.00 s DECEL TIME 2 0.00 1800.00 s
Deceleration time See parameter 22.02. See parameter 22.02. See parameter 22.03. See parameter 22.03.
0 18000 0 18000 0 18000
137
Index 22.06
Name/Selection ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE 0.00 1000.00 s
Description Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp. See also section Jogging on page 81. 0.00 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps. 0.01 1000.00 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another. The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between. A rule of thumb A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1/5. Speed Max Linear ramp: Par. 22.06 = 0 s
FbEq
0 100000
S-curve ramp: Par. 22.06 > 0 s time Par. 22.02 22.07 EM STOP RAMP TIME Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if - the drive receives an emergency stop command or - the Run Enable signal is switched off and the Run Enable function has value OFF3 (see parameter 21.07). The emergency stop command can be given through a fieldbus or an Emergency Stop module (optional). Consult the local ABB representative for more information on the optional module and the related settings of the Standard Control Program. 0.00 2000.00 s 22.08 ACC PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767 22.09 DEC PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767 22.10 SLS ACCELER TIME Deceleration time Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01 Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. 100 = 1 s 100 = 1 s 0 200000 Par. 22.06
Defines the time required for the speed limits to ramp up from the safely-limited 100 = 1 s speed defined by parameter 20.22 to the speed limits defined by parameters 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED when the SLS function is deactivated. Note: This parameter is available in AS7R firmware version only. Speed ramp time.
01800 s
138
Index 22.11
Name/Selection SLS DECELER TIME
Description
FbEq
Defines the time required for the speed limits to ramp down from the value 100 = 1 s defined by parameters 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED to the safely-limited speed defined by parameter 20.22 when the SLS function is activated. If the speed is already lower than the safely-limited speed, the speed does not change. Note: This parameter is available in AS7R firmware version only.
01800 s
Speed ramp time. Speed controller variables. The parameters are not visible if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. See section Speed controller tuning on page 60. Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. Great gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant. % Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time = 0 TD= Derivation time = 0 Error Value Controller Output Controller output = Kp e e = Error value
23 SPEED CTRL
23.01 GAIN
t 0.0 250.0 23.02 INTEGRATION TIME Gain Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control unstable. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant. % 0 25000
Controller Output Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time = 0
Kp e
Kp e
e = Error value
TI
0.01 999.97 s Integration time
t 10 999970
139
Index 23.03
Name/Selection DERIVATION TIME
Description Defines the derivation time for the speed controller. Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller. The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances. Note: Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoder is used. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant. Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time > 0 Ts= Sample time period = 1 ms e = Error value change between two samples Controller Output Kp e Error Value Kp e e = Error value
FbEq
% e Ts
Kp TD
TI 0.0 9999.8 ms 23.04 ACC COMPENSATION Derivation time value.
t 1 = 1 ms
Defines the derivation time for acceleration/(deceleration) compensation. In order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is described for parameter 23.03. Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine. (The speed controller Autotune Run does this automatically, see parameter 23.06.) The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp. No Acceleration Compensation % % Acceleration Compensation Speed reference Actual speed
t 0.00 999.98 s Derivation time
t 0 9999
140
Index 23.05
Name/Selection SLIP GAIN
Description Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control. 100% means full slip compensation; 0% means no slip compensation. The default value is 100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip compensation. Example: 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite of the full slip compensation (SLIP GAIN = 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased. At the 106% gain value, no static speed error exists.
FbEq
0.0 400.0% 23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN
Slip gain value. Start automatic tuning of the speed controller. Instructions: - Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed. - Change the autotuning parameter 23.06 to YES. Note: The motor load must be connected to the motor.
0 400
NO YES 23.07 SP ACT FILT TIME 0...1000000 ms
No autotuning. Activates the speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to NO. Defines the time constant of the actual speed filter, i.e. time within the actual speed has reached 63% of the nominal speed. Time constant Torque control variables. Visible only if parameter 99.02 = T CNTRL and parameter 99.04 = DTC. Defines the torque reference ramp up time. Time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque. Defines the torque reference ramp down time. Time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero. Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to operate. See section Critical speeds on page 59. Activates/deactivates the critical speeds function. Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm. To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges: - activate the critical speeds function, - set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below. Motor speed (rpm) 1560 1380 690 540 1 2 3 4 Drive speed reference (rpm)
0 65535
1 = 1 ms
24 TORQUE CTRL
24.01 24.02 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 120.00 s TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 120.00 s
0 12000 0 12000
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS
25.01 CRIT SPEED SELECT
1 2 3 4
Par. 25.02 = 540 rpm Par. 25.03 = 690 rpm Par. 25.04 = 1380 rpm Par. 25.05 = 1590 rpm
Note: If parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL, the critical speeds are not in use. OFF ON Inactive Active. 0 65535
141
Index 25.02
Name/Selection CRIT SPEED 1 LOW 0 18000 rpm
Description Defines the minimum limit for critical speed range 1. Minimum limit. The value cannot be above the maximum (parameter 25.03). Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, the unit is Hz. Defines the maximum limit for critical speed range 1. Maximum limit. The value cannot be below the minimum (parameter 25.02). Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, the unit is Hz. See parameter 25.02. See parameter 25.02. See parameter 25.03. See parameter 25.03. See parameter 25.02. See parameter 25.02. See parameter 25.03. See parameter 25.03.
FbEq 0 18000
25.03
CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH 0 18000 rpm
0 18000
25.04 25.05 25.06 25.07
CRIT SPEED 2 LOW 0 18000 rpm CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH 0 18000 rpm CRIT SPEED 3 LOW 0 18000 rpm CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH 0 18000 rpm
0 18000 0 18000 0 18000 0 18000
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION Activates/deactivates the flux optimisation function. See section Flux Optimisation on page 58. Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. NO YES 26.02 FLUX BRAKING Inactive Active Activates/deactivates the flux braking function. Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. See section Flux Braking on page 57. NO YES 26.03 IR-COMPENSATION Inactive Active Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The function is useful in applications with high break-away torque, but no DTC motor control cannot be applied. The figure below illustrates the IR compensation. See section IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive on page 62. Note: The function can be used only if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR. U /UN (%) 0 65535 0 65535
Relative output voltage. IR compensation set to 15%.
100%
15%
Relative output voltage. No IR compensation. f (Hz) Field weakening point
0 30%
Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of the motor nominal voltage
0 3000
142
Index 26.04
Name/Selection IR STEP-UP FREQ
Description Defines the frequency at which the step-up IR compensation reaches the IR compensation used in scalar control (26.03 IR COMPENSATION). A voltage boost is used in step-up applications to achieve higher break-away torque. Since voltage cannot be fed to the transformer at 0 Hz, special IR compensation is used in step-up applications. Full IR compensation starts around slip frequency. The figure below illustrates the step-up IR compensation. U / UN (%) 100%
FbEq 100 = 1
26.03 IR COMPENSATION f (Hz) 26.04 IR STEP-UP FREQ Field weakening point (FWP)
For more information, see the Sine Filters Users Manual for ACS800 Drives [3AFE68389178 (English)]. 0...50 Hz 26.05 Frequency HEX FIELD WEAKEN Selects whether motor flux is controlled along a circular or a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening area of the frequency range (above 50/60 Hz). See section Hexagonal motor flux on page 63. OFF 0 The rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern. Optimal selection in most applications: Minimal losses at constant load. Maximal instantaneous torque is not available in the field weakening range of the speed. Motor flux follows a circular pattern below the field weakening point (typically 50 or 60 Hz) and a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range. Optimal selection in the applications that require maximal instantaneous torque in the field weakening range of the speed. The losses at constant operation are higher than with the selection NO. Selects the source for the flux reference, or sets the flux reference value. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. The range of the flux is 25 140%. With constant value settings 100% = C.10000. Typically there is no need to change this value. 100 = 1% 65535
ON
26.06
FLUX REF PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
26.07
FLYSTART CUR REF Defines the current reference used with flying start (start to a rotating motor) [%] when no pulse encoder is used. If flying start fails (i.e. drive is unable to detect motor speed 01.02 SPEED): Monitor signals 01.02 SPEED and 01.04 CURRENT with DriveWindow PC tool and increase the reference in steps of 5% until the flying start function is successfully performed (i.e. drive is able to detect 01.02 SPEED). See also parameter 26.08 FLYSTART INIT DLY. 0100% Value in percent
1 = 1%
143
Index 26.08
Name/Selection FLYSTART INIT DLY
Description
FbEq
Defines together with the motor characteristics the delay before the speed 1=1 value estimated at the beginning of flying start is connected to the speed reference ramp output. Increase the delay, if the motor starts to rotate in the wrong direction or if the motor starts to rotate with the wrong speed reference. See also parameter 26.07 FLYSTART CUR REF [%]. Delay Activates the flux correction at low frequencies, < 3 Hz, when the torque exceeds 30%. Effective in the motoring and generating modes. Active Inactive Control of the brake chopper. Activates the brake chopper control. Note: If an external chopper (e.g. NBRA-xxx) is used, parameter must be disabled. Inactive Active. Note: Ensure the brake chopper and resistor are installed and the overvoltage control is switched off (parameter 20.05). Activates the overload protection of the brake resistor. The user-adjustable variables are parameters 27.04 and 27.05. Inactive Active. If the drive detects an overload, it generates a warning. Active. If the drive detects an overload, it trips on a fault. Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value is used for brake chopper protection. Resistance value Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor. The value is used in the overload protection. See parameter 27.02. With type SACE brake resistors, the parameter setting must be 200 s. With type SAFUR brake resistors, the parameter setting must be 555 s. 0 100 0 1 2 0 65535 1=1
060 26.09 FS METHOD 1 = ON 0 = OFF
27 BRAKE CHOPPER
27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER CTL OFF ON 27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC NO WARNING FAULT 27.03 BR RESISTANCE 0.00 100.00 ohm 27.04 BR THERM TCONST
0.000 10000.000 s 27.05 MAX CONT BR POWER 0.00 10000 kW 27.06 BC CTRL MODE AS GENERATOR
Time constant Defines the maximum continuous braking power which will raise the resistor temperature to the maximum allowed value. The value is used in the overload protection. See parameter 27.02. Power Selects the control mode of the braking chopper. Chopper operation is allowed when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit, the inverter bridge modulates and the motor generates power to the drive. The selection prevents the operation in case the intermediate circuit DC voltage rises due to abnormally high supply voltage level. Long time supply voltage rise would damage the chopper.
1=1
1=1 0
COMMON DC
Chopper operation is allowed always when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit. The selection is to be used in applications where several inverters are connected to the same intermediate circuit (DC bus). WARNING! Excessive supply voltage will raise the intermediate circuit voltage above the operation limit of the chopper. If the voltage remains abnormally high for a long period, the braking chopper will be overloaded and damaged.
65535
144
Index
Name/Selection
Description Programmable protection functions Selects how the drive reacts when an analogue input signal falls below the set minimum limit. Note: The analogue input minimum setting must be set to 0.5 V (1 mA) or above (see parameter group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS).
FbEq
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION
FAULT NO CONST SP 15
The drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to stop. Inactive The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 12.16. WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analogue input signal is lost.
1 2 3
LAST SPEED
The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and freezes the speed 4 to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds. WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analogue input signal is lost.
30.02
PANEL LOSS FAULT CONST SP 15
Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel communication break. Drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to a stop. The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 12.16. WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a panel communication break. 1 2
LAST SPEED
The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was 3 operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds. WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a panel communication break.
30.03
EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12
Selects an interface for an external fault signal. See section External Fault on page 63. Inactive External fault indication is given through digital input DI1. 0: Fault trip. Motor coasts to stop. 1: No external fault. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
145
Index 30.04
Name/Selection MOTOR THERM PROT FAULT
Description Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected by the function defined by parameter 30.05. See section Motor Thermal Protection on page 64. The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning level (95% of the allowed maximum value). The drive trips on a fault when the temperature exceeds the fault level (100% of the allowed maximum value). The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning level (95% of the allowed maximum value). Inactive Selects the thermal protection mode of the motor. When overtemperature is detected, the drive reacts as defined by parameter 30.04. The protection is based on the calculated motor thermal model. The following assumptions are used in the calculation: - The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when the power is switched on. With the first power switch on, the motor is at the ambient temperature (30C). - The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load curve. - The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the curve. This applies only if the motor is overheated. - The motor thermal time constant is an approximate value for a standard selfventilated squirrel-cage motor. It is possible to finetune the model by parameter 30.07. Note: The model cannot be used with high power motors (parameter 99.06 is higher than 800 A). WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.
FbEq
WARNING NO 30.05 MOT THERM P MODE DTC
2 3
USER MODE
The protection is based on the user-defined motor thermal model and the following basic assumptions: - The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when the power is switched on. With the first power switch on, the motor is at the ambient temperature (30C). - The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve. - The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the curve. This applies only if the motor is overheated. The user-defined thermal model uses the motor thermal time constant (parameter 30.06) and the motor load curve (parameters 30.07, 30.08 and 30.09). User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor. WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.
146
Index
Name/Selection TEMP SENSOR
Description
FbEq
Motor thermal protection is activated through digital input DI6. A motor 3 thermistor, or a break contact of a thermistor relay, must be connected to digital input DI6. The drive reads the DI6 states as follows: DI6 Status (Thermistor resistance) 1 (0 1.5 kohm) 0 (4 kohm or higher) Temperature Normal Overtemperature
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input. WARNING! Digital input DI6 may be selected for another use. Change these settings before selecting TEMP SENSOR. In other words, ensure that digital input DI6 is not selected by any other parameter. The figure below shows the alternative thermistor connections. At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected. Alternative 1
Thermistor relay
RMIO board, X22 6 7

T Motor
DI6 +24 VDC
Alternative 2
RMIO board, X22 6 7 DI6 +24 VDC
T Motor
10 nF
Note: If the motor nominal current is above 800 A, the user defined motor thermal model is used instead of the calculated model and the user must define parameters 30.06, 30.07, 30.08 and 30.09.
147
Index 30.06
Name/Selection MOTOR THERM TIME
Description Defines the thermal time constant for the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER MODE of parameter 30.05). Motor Load 100%
FbEq
Temperature 100% 63%
Motor thermal time constant 256.0 9999.8 s 30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE Time constant
t 256 9999
Defines the load curve together by parameters 30.08 and 30.09. The load curve is used in the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER MODE of parameter 30.05). I/IN (%) 150 30.07 100 50 30.08 30.09 Drive output frequency 50 150 25 150 I = Motor current IN = Nominal motor current
50.0 150.0% 30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25.0 150.0% 30.09 BREAK POINT 1.0 300.0 Hz
Allowed continuous motor load in percent of the nominal motor current. Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.09. Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal motor current Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.08. Drive output frequency at 100% load
100 30000
148
Index 30.10
Name/Selection STALL FUNCTION
Description Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The protection wakes up if: - the drive is at stall limit (defined by parameters 20.03, 20.13 and 20.14) - the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30.11 and - the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 30.12. Note: Stall limit is restricted by internal current limit 03.04 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM. See section Stall Protection on page 65.
FbEq
FAULT WARNING NO 30.11 30.12 30.13 STALL FREQ HI 0.5 50.0 Hz STALL TIME 10.00 400.00 s UNDERLOAD FUNC
The drive trips on a fault.
The drive generates a warning. The indication disappears in half of the time set 2 by parameter 30.12. Protection is inactive. Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See parameter 30.10. Stall frequency Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 30.10. Stall time Selects how the drive reacts to underload. The protection wakes up if: - the motor torque falls below the curve selected by parameter 30.15, - output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor frequency and - the above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 30.14. See section Underload Protection on page 65. 10 400 50 5000 3
NO WARNING FAULT 30.14 30.15 UNDERLOAD TIME 0 600 s UNDERLOAD CURVE
Protection is inactive. The drive generates a warning. The drive trips on a fault. Time limit for the underload function. See parameter 30.13. Underload time Selects the load curve for the underload function. See parameter 30.13. TM/TN (%) 100 80 60 40 20 0 N 2.4 * N 1 2 50% 5 30% 4 TM = Motor torque TN= Nominal motor torque N = Nominal motor frequency 3 70%
1 2 3 0 600
15
Number of the load curve
15
149
Index 30.16
Name/Selection MOTOR PHASE LOSS NO FAULT
Description Activates the motor phase loss supervision function. See section Motor Phase Loss on page 65. Inactive Active. The drive trips on a fault. Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault is detected in the motor or the motor cable. See section Earth Fault Protection on page 66. Note: With parallel connected R8i inverter modules (ACS800 multidrive and large ACS800-07 units) only the selection FAULT is valid.
FbEq
0 65535
30.17
EARTH FAULT
WARNING FAULT 30.18 COMM FLT FUNC
The drive generates a warning. The drive trips on a fault. Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break, i.e. when the drive fails to receive the Main Reference Data Set or the Auxiliary Reference Data Set. The time delays are given by parameters 30.19 and 30.21. Protection is active. The drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to a stop. Protection is inactive. Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 12.16. WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
0 65535
FAULT NO CONST SP 15
1 2 3
LAST SPEED
Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds. WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
30.19
MAIN REF DS T-OUT Defines the time delay for the Main Reference data set supervision. See parameter 30.18. 0.1 60.0 s Time delay Selects the operation of the fieldbus controlled relay output and analogue output in a communication break. See groups 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS and chapter Fieldbus control. The delay for the supervision function is given by parameter 30.21. Relay output is de-energised. Analogue output is set to zero. The relay output keeps the last state before the communication loss. The analogue output gives the last value before the communication loss. WARNING! After the communication recovers, the update of the relay and the analogue outputs starts immediately without fault message resetting. 0 65535 10 6000 COMM FLT RO/AO
30.20
ZERO LAST VALUE
30.21
AUX DS T-OUT
Defines the delay time for the Auxiliary Reference data set supervision. See parameter 30.18. The drive automatically activates the supervision 60 seconds after power switch-on if the value is other than zero. Note: The delay also applies for the function defined by parameter 30.20. Time delay. 0.0 s = The function is inactive. 0 6000
0.0 60.0 s
150
Index 30.22
Name/Selection IO CONFIG FUNC
Description Selects how the drive reacts in case an optional input or output channel has been selected as a signal interface, but the communication to the appropriate analogue or digital I/O extension module has not been set up accordingly in parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES. Example: The supervision function wakes up if parameter 16.01 is set to DI7, but 98.03 is set to NO.
FbEq
NO WARNING 30.23 LIMIT WARNING
Inactive. Active. The drive generates a warning. Activates/deactivates limit alarms INV CUR LIM, DC BUS LIM, MOT CUR LIM, MOT TORQ LIM and/or MOT POW LIM. For more information, see chapter Fault tracing.
1 2
0...255
Value in decimal. As default none of the alarms are active, i.e. parameter value is 0. bit 0 INV_CUR_LIM_IND bit 1 DC_VOLT_LIM_IND bit 2 MOT_CUR_LIM_IND bit 3 MOT_TORQ_LIM_IND bit 4 MOT_POW_LIM_IND Example: When parameter value is set to 3 (bit 0 and 1 values are 1), alarms INV CUR LIM and DC BUS LIM are active.
31 AUTOMATIC RESET
Automatic fault reset. Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is activated for that fault type. The automatic reset function is not operational if the drive is in local control (L visible on the first row of the panel display). See section Automatic resets on page 69.
31.01
NUMBER OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 31.02. 05 Number of the automatic resets Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See parameter 31.01. Allowed resetting time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 31.01. Resetting delay Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the overcurrent fault. Inactive Active Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link overvoltage fault. Inactive Active Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link undervoltage fault. Inactive Active Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the fault AI SIGNAL<MIN (analogue input signal under the allowed minimum level). 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 0 300 100 18000 0 TRIAL TIME 1.0 180.0 s
31.02
31.03
DELAY TIME 0.0 3.0 s
31.04
OVERCURRENT NO YES
31.05
OVERVOLTAGE NO YES
31.06
UNDERVOLTAGE NO YES
31.07
AI SIGNAL<MIN
151
Index
Name/Selection NO YES
Description Inactive Active. WARNING! The drive may restart even after a long stop if the analogue input signal is restored. Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause danger.
FbEq 0 65535
31.08
LINE CONV NO YES
Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the fault LINE CONV (FF51) (fault on line side converter). Inactive Active Supervision limits. A relay output can be used to indicate when the value is above/below the limit. See section Supervisions on page 69. Activates/deactivates the speed supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit. Supervision is not used. Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit. Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit. 1 2 3 0 65535
32 SUPERVISION
32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT ABS LOW LIMIT
Supervision wakes up if the value is below the set limit. The limit is supervised 4 in both rotating directions. The figure below illustrates the principle. speed/rpm ABS LOW LIMIT 0 -ABS LOW LIMIT
32.02
SPEED1 LIMIT
Defines the speed supervision limit. See parameter 32.01. - 18000 18000 1 2 3 4 - 18000 18000
- 18000 18000 rpm Value of the limit 32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT ABS LOW LIMIT 32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01.
- 18000 18000 rpm See parameter 32.01. 32.05 CURRENT FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT 32.06 32.07 CURRENT LIMIT 0 1000 A TORQUE 1 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT Activates/deactivates the motor current supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. Defines the limit for the motor current supervision (see parameter 32.05). Value of the limit Activates/deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01.
1 2 3 0 1000
1 2
152
Index 32.08
Name/Selection HIGH LIMIT TORQUE 1 LIMIT -600 600%
Description See parameter 32.01. Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.07). Value of the limit in percent of the motor nominal torque Activates/deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.09). Value of the limit in percent of motor nominal torque Activates/deactivates the external reference REF1 supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. Defines the limit for REF1 supervision (see parameter 32.11). Value of the limit Activates/deactivates external reference REF2 supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. Defines the limit for REF2 supervision (see parameter 32.13). Value of the limit Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT1 of the process PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. Defines the limit for ACT1 supervision (see parameter 32.15). Value of the limit Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT2 of the process PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. See parameter 32.01. Defines the limit for ACT2 supervision (see parameter 32.17). Value of the limit Program versions, test date Displays the type and the version of the firmware package in the drive. Note: Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user.
FbEq 3 -6000 6000
32.09
TORQUE 2 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT
1 2 3 -6000 6000
32.10
TORQUE 2 LIMIT -600 600%
32.11
REF1 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT
1 2 3 0 18000
32.12 32.13
REF1 LIMIT 0 18000 rpm REF2 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT
1 2 3 0 6000
32.14 32.15
REF2 LIMIT 0 600% ACT1 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT
1 2 3 0 2000
32.16 32.17
ACT1 LIMIT 0 200% ACT2 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT
1 2 3 0 2000
32.18
ACT2 LIMIT 0 200%
33 INFORMATION
33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION
153
Index
Name/Selection
Description Decoding key:
FbEq
ASxxxxyx
Product Series A = ACS800 Product S = ACS800 Standard Firmware Version 7xyx = Version 7.xyx 33.02 APPL SW VERSION Displays the type and the version of the application program. Note: Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user. Decoding key:
ASAxxxyx
Product Series A = ACS800 Product S = ACS800 Standard Firmware Type A = Application Program Firmware Version 7xyx = Version 7.xyx 33.03 TEST DATE Displays the test date. Note: Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user. Date value in format DDMMYY (day, month, year) 33.04 BOARD TYPE Shows the control board type. Note: RMIO-1x boards have different type of FLASH memory chips than RMIO-0x. Only software version ASXR7300 or later will operate with the RMIO-1x boards. - filtering for the actual signals speed and torque - reset of the run time counter 34.01 SCALE Scales the selected drive variable into a desired user-defined variable, which is stored as an actual signal 01.01. The block diagram below illustrates the use of the parameters that define actual signal 01.01.
PARAMETER TABLE
34 PROCESS VARIABLE - user variable and unit
00.00
Select
99.99 34.03 34.01 Select NO FPM 34.02 0.00100000.00% Scaling factor 0100000 Unit for actual signal 01.01 Mul. 01.01
154
Index 34.02
Name/Selection P VAR UNIT NO rpm % m/s A V Hz s h kh C lft mA mV kW W kWh F hp MWh m3h l/s bar kPa GPM PSI CFM ft MGD iHg FPM lbs
Description Selects the unit for the process variable. See parameter 34.01. No unit is selected. revolutions per minute percent metres per second ampere volt hertz second hour kilohour celsius pounds per foot milliampere millivolt kilowatt watt kilowatt hour fahrenheit horsepower megawatt hour cubic metres per hour litres per second bar kilopascal gallons per minute pounds per square inch cubic feet per minute foot millions of gallons per day inches of mercury feet per minute pound Selects the drive variable scaled into a desired process variable. See parameter 34.01. Parameter index Defines a filter time constant for actual signal 01.02 SPEED. The time constant has an effect on all functions in which signal SPEED is used. The actual speed value is used e.g. in speed supervision (parameter group 32 SUPERVISION) as an analogue output value (group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS) or as an actual signal shown on the control panel display or PC screen.
FbEq 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
34.03
SELECT P VAR 0 9999
0 9999
34.04
MOTOR SP FILT TIM
155
Index
Name/Selection 0 20000 ms
Description Filter time constant % 100 63 Filtered Signal t T I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant Unfiltered Signal O = I (1 - e-t/T)
FbEq 0 20000
34.05
TORQ ACT FILT TIM
Defines a filter time for the actual signal torque (actual signal 01.05). Affects also on the torque supervision (parameters 32.07 and 32.09) and the torque read through an analogue output. Filter time constant % 100 63 Filtered Signal t T I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant Unfiltered Signal O = I (1 - e-t/T) 0 20000
0 20000 ms
34.06
RESET RUN TIME NO YES
Resets the motor running time counter (actual signal 01.43). No reset. Reset. The counter restarts from zero. Motor temperature measurement. For the function description see sections Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 73 and Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension on page 75. 0 65535
35 MOT TEMP MEAS
35.01
MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL Activates the motor 1 temperature measurement function and selects the sensor type. Note: If an optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used for the temperature measurement and 35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL and/or 35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL are set to 1xPT100, analogue extension module input signal range must be set to 0...2 V (instead of 0...10 V) with DIP switches. NOT IN USE 1xPT100 The function is inactive. 1 The function is active. The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor. 2 Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analogue input AI1 and converts it to degrees centigrade. The function is active. Temperature is measured using two Pt 100 sensors. See selection 1xPT100. The function is active. Temperature is measured using three Pt 100 sensors. See selection 1xPT100. 3 4
2XPT100 3XPT100
156
Index
Name/Selection 1...3 PTC
Description
FbEq
The function is active. The temperature is supervised using one to three PTC 5 sensors or one to three KTY84-1xx silicon temperature sensors. Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor(s). The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the sensor reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analogue input AI1 and converts it into ohms. The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature. Ohm Temperature Normal Excessive Resistance 0 1.5 kohm > 4 kohm 550 100 4000 1330
T 35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L -10 5000 ohm/C (PTC/Pt100) 35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L -10 5000 ohm/C (PTC/Pt100) 35.04 Defines the alarm limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded. Limit in C or ohms. C: parameter 35.01 is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. Ohm: parameter 35.01 is 1...3 PTC. Defines the fault trip limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded. Limit in C or ohms. C: parameter 35.01 is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. Ohm: parameter 35.01 is 1...3 PTC. -10 5000 -10 5000
MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL Activates the motor 2 temperature measurement function and selects the sensor type. Two motors can be protected only by using an optional analogue extension module. Parameter 98.12 needs to be activated. Note: If 98.12 is activated, the analogue I/O extension is also used for motor 1 temperature measurement (the standard I/O terminals are not in use). Note: If an optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used for the temperature measurement and 35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL and/or 35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL are set to 1xPT100, analogue extension module input signal range must be set to 0...2 V (instead of 0...10 V) with DIP switches. NOT IN USE 1xPT100 2XPT100 3XPT100 1...3 PTC See 35.01. See 35.01. See 35.01. See 35.01. See 35.01. Defines the alarm limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function. The alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded. See 35.02. -10 5000 1 2 3 4 5
35.05
MOT 2 TEMP ALM L -10 5000 ohm/C (PTC/Pt100)
157
Index 35.06
Name/Selection MOT 2 TEMP FLT L -10 5000 ohm/C (PTC/Pt100)
Description Defines the fault trip limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function. The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded. See 35.03. Selects whether measured motor 1 temperature is used in the motor model compensation. The function is inactive. The temperature is used in the motor model compensation. Note: Selection is effective only when Pt 100 sensor(s) are used. Motor temperature is brought from the automation system to the drive. The source for the motor temperature feedback when parameter 35.07 has been set to value YES PAR35.08. Parameter index or a constant value. Example: Connection pointer via 85.01 CONSTANT1: 35.08 MOT MOD COMP PTR = +.085.001.00. - process PID control (99.02 = PID CTRL) - speed or torque reference trimming (99.02 is not PID CTRL) - sleep function for the process PID control (99.02 = PID CTRL) For more information, see section Process PID control on page 70.
FbEq
-10 5000
35.07
MOT MOD COMPENSAT NO YES YES PAR35.08
1 2 3
35.08
MOT MOD COMP PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
40 PID CONTROL
40.01
PID GAIN 0.1 100.0
Defines the gain of the process PID controller. Gain value. The table below lists a few examples of the gain settings and the resulting speed changes when - a 10% or 50% error value is connected to the controller (error = process reference - process actual value). - motor maximum speed is 1500 rpm (parameter 20.02) PID Gain 0.5 1.0 3.0 Speed Change: 10% Error 75 rpm 150 rpm 450 rpm 375 rpm 750 rpm 1500 rpm (limited) Speed Change: 50% Error 10 10000
40.02
PID INTEG TIME
Defines the integration time for the process PID controller. Error/Controller output O GI GI time Ti I I = controller input (error) O = controller output G = gain t = time Ti = integration time
0.02 320.00 s
Integration time
2 32000
158
Index 40.03
Name/Selection PID DERIV TIME
Description Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The derivative component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula: PID DERIV TIME (EK - EK-1)/TS, in which TS = 12 ms sample time. E = Error = Process reference - process actual value
FbEq
0.00 10.00 s 40.04 PID DERIV FILTER 0.04 10.00 s
Derivation time. Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth the derivative component of the process PID controller. Filter time constant. % 100 63 Filtered Signal t T I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant Unfiltered Signal O = I (1 - e-t/T)
0 1000
4 1000
40.05
ERROR VALUE INV NO YES
Inverts the error at the process PID controller input (error = process reference process actual value). No inversion Inversion. With sleep function, the drive operation is as follows: The drive enters the sleep mode when the motor speed is below the sleep level (02.02 < 40.21) and when the process PID control actual value is smaller than the wake-up level (01.34 < 40.23). The drive wakes up when the process PID actual value is greater than the wake-up level (01.34 > 40.23). See also section Sleep function for the process PID control on page 71. 0 65535
40.06
ACTUAL VALUE SEL
Selects the process actual value for the process PID controller: The sources for the variable ACT1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 40.07 and 40.08. ACT1 Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT 2. Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 Division of ACT1 and ACT2 Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2 Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of ACT2 Analogue input AI1 Analogue input AI2 Analogue input AI3 Analogue input AI5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4
ACT1 ACT1-ACT2 ACT1+ACT2 ACT1*ACT2 ACT1/ACT2 MIN(A1,A2) MAX(A1,A2) sqrt(A1-A2) sqA1+sqA2 40.07 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5
ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT1. See parameter 40.06.
159
Index
Name/Selection AI6 PARAM 40.25
Description Analogue input AI6 Source selected by parameter 40.25. Analogue input AI1 Analogue input AI2 Analogue input AI3 Analogue input AI5 Analogue input AI6 Defines the minimum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum and maximum (40.10) settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PID controller.
FbEq 5 6 1 2 3 4 5
40.08
ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT2. See parameter 40.06. AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6
40.09
ACT1 MINIMUM
-1000 1000%
Minimum value in percent of the set analogue input range. The equation below -10000 instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is used as a 10000 variable ACT1. AI1min - 13.01 ACT1 MINIMUM = 13.02 - 13.01 100%
AI1min
The voltage value received from the measuring device when the measured process actual value is at the desired minimum level. AI1 minimum (parameter setting) AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
13.01 13.02 40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM
Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum (40.09) and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PID controller. Maximum value in percent of the set analogue input signal range. The -10000 equation below instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is 10000 used as a variable ACT1. ACT1 MAXIMUM = AI1max - 13.01 13.02 - 13.01 100%
-1000 1000%
AI1max
The voltage value received from the measuring device when the measured process actual value is at the desired maximum level. AI1 minimum (parameter setting) AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
13.01 13.02 40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000 1000%
See parameter 40.09. See parameter 40.09. -10000 10000
160
Index 40.12
Name/Selection ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000 1000%
Description See parameter 40.10. See parameter 40.10. Activates the integration of the process PID controller. Inactive Active Activates the trim function and selects between the direct and proportional trimming. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference. See section Reference trimming on page 47. Example: A speed-controlled conveyor line where the line tension also needs to be considered: The speed reference is slightly adjusted (trimmed) depending on the value of the measured line tension. Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
FbEq
-10000 10000 1 2
40.13
PID INTEGRATION OFF ON
40.14
TRIM MODE
OFF PROPORTIONAL DIRECT 40.15 TRIM REF SEL
The trim function is deactivated. The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to the external %-reference (REF2). See parameter 11.06.
1 2
The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum 3 limit used in the reference control loop (maximum speed, frequency or torque). Selects the signal source for the trim reference. Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. Example: AI5 as a trim reference
sclAI5
minAI5 maxAI5 Trim reference sclAI5
= parameter 13.16 = parameter 13.17 = parameter 13.18
AI5 be used only with an optional I/O extension module.
-sclAI5 -maxAI5
-minAI5 minAI5
maxAI5
Analogue Input Signal AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 PAR 40.16 PAR 40.28 40.16 TRIM REFERENCE -100.0 100.0% Analogue input AI1 Analogue input AI2 Analogue input AI3 Analogue input AI5 Analogue input AI5 Value of parameter 40.16 is used as the trim reference. Value of parameter 40.28 is used as the trim reference. Defines the trim reference value when parameter 40.15 has the value PAR 40.16 selected. Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. Trim reference - 10000 10000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
161
Index 40.17
Name/Selection TRIM RANGE ADJUST -100.0 100.0%
Description Defines the multiplier for the PID controller output used as the trimming factor. Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. Multiplying factor Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the speed or torque reference. Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. Speed reference trimming Torque reference trimming
FbEq
- 10000 10000
40.18
TRIM SELECTION
SPEED TRIM TORQUE TRIM DIRECT SPD T
1 2
Speed reference trimming. Trim reference is added to the speed reference 3 after ramp calculations. Trimming is not effective during ramp stop, emergency stop or at speed defined by parameter 30.18 in a fieldbus communication break. Defines the time constant for the filter through which the actual signals are connected to the process PID controller. Filter time constant. % 100 63 Filtered Signal t T Unfiltered Signal O = I (1 - e-t/T) I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant 4 1000
40.19
ACTUAL FILT TIME 0.04 10.00 s
40.20
SLEEP SELECTION
Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the activation input. Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. See section Sleep function for the process PID control on page 71.
OFF INTERNAL DI1
Inactive Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by parameters 40.21 and 40.23. The function is activated/deactivated through digital input DI1. Activation: Digital input DI1 = 1. Deactivation: DI1 = 0. The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 40.21 and 40.23 are not effective. The sleep start and stop delays are effective (parameter 40.22 and 40.24).
1 2 3
DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12
See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
162
Index 40.21
Name/Selection SLEEP LEVEL
Description Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor speed is below a set level (40.21) longer than the sleep delay (40.22), the drive shifts to the sleeping mode: the motor is stopped and the control panel shows the warning message SLEEP MODE. Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. Sleep start level Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter 40.21. When the motor speed falls below the sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor speed exceeds the sleep level, the counter resets. Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. Sleep start delay Defines the wake-up limit for the sleep function. The drive wakes up if the process actual value is below a set level (40.23) longer than the wake-up delay (40.24). Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. The wake-up level in percent of the actual process value. Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See parameter 40.23. When the process actual value falls below the wake-up level, the wake-up counter starts. When the process actual value exceeds the wake-up level, the counter resets. Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. Wake-up delay Defines the source or constant for value PAR 40.25 of parameter 40.07. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed range. Example: The process PID control is restricted to the forward rotation direction of the motor by setting the PID minimum limit to 0% and the maximum to 100%.
FbEq
0.0 7200.0 rpm 40.22 SLEEP DELAY
0 7200
0.0 3600.0 s 40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL
0 36000
0.0 100.0% 40.24 WAKE UP DELAY
0 10000
0.0 3600.0 s 40.25 ACTUAL1 PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767 40.26 PID MINIMUM
0 36000 100 = 1%
-100 100% 40.27 PID MAXIMUM
Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed range. See parameter 40.26. Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor Defines the trim reference value when parameter 40.15 has been set to value PAR 40.28. Parameter index or a constant value: - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting.
100 = 1%
-100 100% 40.28 TRIM REF PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
100 = 1%
100 = 1%
42 BRAKE CONTROL
42.01 BRAKE CTRL OFF
Control of a mechanical brake. The function operates on a 100 ms time level. For the function description, see section Control of a mechanical brake on page 77. Activates the brake control function. Inactive 1
163
Index 42.02
Name/Selection ON BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE OFF DI5 DI6 DI11 DI12
Description Active Activates the external brake on/off supervision and selects the source for the signal. The use of the external on/off supervision signal is optional. Inactive Active. Digital input DI5 is the signal source. DI5 = 1: The brake is open. DI5 = 0: the brake is closed. See selection DI5. See selection DI5. See selection DI5.
FbEq 2
1 2 3 4 5
42.03
BRAKE OPEN DELAY Defines the brake open delay (= the delay between the internal open brake command and the release of the motor speed control). The delay counter starts when the drive has magnetised the motor and risen the motor torque to the level required at the brake release (parameters 42.07 and 42.08). Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake function energises the relay output controlling the brake and the brake starts opening. 0.0 5.0 s Delay time. Set the delay the same as the mechanical opening delay of the brake specified the brake manufacturer. Defines the brake close delay. The delay counter starts when the motor actual speed has fallen below the set level (parameter 42.05) after the drive has received the stop command. Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake control function de-energises the relay output controlling the brake and the brake starts closing. During the delay, the brake function keeps the motor live preventing the motor speed from falling below zero. Delay time. Set the delay time to the same value as the mechanical make-up time of the brake (= operating delay when closing) specified by the brake manufacturer. Defines the brake close speed. See parameter 42.04. Speed (an absolute value) 0 100000 0 6000 0 500
42.04
BRAKE CLOSE DELAY
0.0 60.0 s
42.05
ABS BRAKE CLS SPD 0 1000 rpm
42.06
BRAKE FAULT FUNC Defines how the drive reacts in case the status of the optional external brake acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed by the brake control function. FAULT WARNING The drive trips on a fault: fault indication and drive stops the motor. The drive generates a warning. Selects the source for the motor starting torque reference applied at the brake release. The value is read in percent of the motor nominal torque. No source selected. This is the default value. Analogue input AI1 Analogue input AI2 Analogue input AI3 Analogue input AI5 Analogue input AI6 Defined by parameter 42.08. The motor torque stored at the previous brake close command. Defines the motor starting torque at brake release if parameter 42.07 has value PAR 40.28. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
42.07
START TORQ REF SEL NO AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 PAR 42.08 MEMORY
42.08
START TORQ REF
164
Index
Name/Selection -300 300%
Description Torque value in percent of the motor nominal torque Defines an extended run time for the brake control function at stop. During the delay, the motor is kept magnetised and ready for an immediate restart. 0.0 s = Normal stop routine of the brake control function: The motor magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay has passed. 0.1 60.0 s = Extended stop routine of the brake control function: The motor magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay and the extended run time have passed. During the extended run time, a zero torque reference is applied, and the motor is ready for a immediate restart. Start/Stop Motor magnetised Actual speed 1 = brake close speed 2 = brake close delay 3 = extended run time 2 3 t
FbEq -30000 30000
42.09
EXTEND RUN T 0.0 60.0 s
100 = 1 s
42.10
LOW REF BRK HOLD Activates a brake hold function and defines the hold delay for it. The function stabilises the operation of the brake control application when the motor operates near zero speed and there is no measured speed feedback available (pulse encoder). 0.0 60.0 s 0.0 s = inactive. 0.1 s 60.0 s = active. When the absolute value of the motor speed reference falls below the brake close speed: - The brake hold delay counter starts. - The brake is closed according to normal stop routine of the brake control function. During the delay, the function keeps the brake closed despite of the speed reference value and the value of start command. When the set delay has passed, the normal operation resumes. 100 = 1 s
45 ENERGY OPT
45.02 ENERGY TARIFF1
Energy optimization settings Price of energy per kWh. Used for reference when savings are calculated. See parameters 01.46 SAVED KWH, 01.48 SAVED AMOUNT and 01.50 SAVED CO2. Price of energy per kWh. Specifies the currency used for the savings calculation. The currency is determined by the setting of parameter 99.01 Language. Euro US dollar Pump power when connected directly to supply. Used for reference when energy savings are calculated. See parameters 01.46 SAVED KWH, 01.48 SAVED AMOUNT and 01.50 SAVED CO2. 0 1 2 1 = 0.001
0.00001024.0000 45.06 E TARIFF UNIT LOCAL EUR USD 45.08 PUMP REF POWER
165
Index
Name/Selection 0 950%
Description Pump power in percent of nominal motor power. Note: The maximum value depends on the motor and is calculated in power-up or when the motor power changes. Resets the energy counters 01.46 SAVED KWH, 01.47 SAVED GWH, 01.48 SAVED AMOUNT, 01.49 SAVED AMOUNT M, 01.50 SAVED CO2 and 01.51 SAVED CO2 KTON. Reset not requested (normal operation). Reset energy counters. The value reverts automatically to DONE. Encoder connection. Visible only when a pulse encoder module (optional) is installed and activated by parameter 98.01. The settings will remain the same even though the application macro is changed.
FbEq 1000 = 100%
45.09
ENERGY RESET
DONE RESET
0 1
50 ENCODER MODULE
50.01 50.02
PULSE NR 0 29999 ppr A -- B DIR A-A --- B DIR A --- B ---
States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution. Pulse number in pulses per round (ppr) Channel A: positive edges calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. Channel A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed. Channel B: not used. Channel A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. All edges of the signals are calculated. Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in communication between the pulse encoder and the pulse encoder interface module, or between the module and the drive. Encoder supervision function activates if either of the following conditions is valid: -The difference between estimated and measured speed is greater than 20% of the motor nominal speed. - No pulses are received from the encoder within the defined time (see parameter 50.04) and the drive is simultaneously at current or torque limit. 0 29999 0 1 2 3
SPEED MEAS MODE Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated.
50.03
ENCODER FAULT
WARNING FAULT 50.04 ENCODER DELAY 0 50000 ms 50.05
The drive generates a warning indication. The drive trips on a fault, gives a fault indication and stops the motor. Defines the time delay for the encoder supervision function (See parameter 50.03). Time delay
0 65535
0 50000
ENCODER DDCS CH Defines the fibre optic channel of the control board from which the drive program reads the signals coming from the pulse encoder interface module. The setting is valid only if the module is connected to the drive via the DDCS link (i.e. not to the option slot of the drive). CH 1 1 Signals via channel 1 (CH1). The pulse encoder interface module must be connected to CH1 instead of CH2 in applications where CH2 is reserved by a Master station (e.g. a Master/Follower application). See also parameter 70.03. Signals via channel 2 (CH2). Can be used in most cases. Defines the speed feedback value used in control. Calculated speed estimate Actual speed measured with an encoder 65535 0 2
CH 2 50.06 SPEED FB SEL INTERNAL ENCODER
166
Index 50.07
Name/Selection ENC CABLE CHECK
Description Selects the drive operation when encoder signal is missing. Note: Monitoring is only for RTAC-03. For more information, see RTAC-03 Pulse Encoder Interface Module Users Manual [3AFE68650500 (English)].
FbEq
NO WARNING FAULT
No action Drive generates warning ENC CABLE. Drive trips on fault ENC CABLE. The parameters are visible and need to be adjusted, only when a fieldbus adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by parameter 98.02. For details on the parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and chapter Fieldbus control. These parameter settings will remain the same even though the macro is changed.
0 1 2
51 COMM MODULE DATA
52 STANDARD MODBUS
52.01 STATION NUMBER 1 247 52.02 BAUDRATE 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 52.03 PARITY NONE1STOPBIT NONE2STOPBIT ODD EVEN
The settings for the Standard Modbus Link. See chapter Fieldbus control. Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line. Address Defines the transfer rate of the link. 600 bit/s 1200 bit/s 2400 bit/s 4800 bit/s 9600 bit/s 19200 bit/s Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all on-line stations. No parity bit, one stop bit No parity bit, two stop bits Odd parity indication bit, one stop bit Even parity indication bit, one stop bit Master/Follower application. For more information, see section Master/ Follower use of several drives on page 80 and a separate Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)]. Note: Two Master stations are not allowed on-line. If a Follower drive is changed to be a Master drive (or vice versa) by this parameter, the RMIO board must be powered up again for the M/F link to work properly. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1=1
60 MASTER/ FOLLOWER
60.01
MASTER LINK MODE Defines the role of the drive on the Master/Follower link.
NOT IN USE MASTER FOLLOWER STANDBY 60.02
The Master/Follower link is not active. Master drive Follower drive
1 2 3
Follower drive which reads the control signals through a fieldbus interface, not 4 from the Master/Follower link as usual.
TORQUE SELECTOR Selects the reference used in motor torque control. Typically, the value needs to be changed only in the Follower station(s). The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 = T CTRL. External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable torque selector.
167
Index
Name/Selection ZERO SPEED
Description This selection forces the output of the torque selector to zero. The follower speed controller output is used as a reference for motor torque control. The drive is speed-controlled. SPEED can be used both in the Follower and in the Master if - the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are connected flexibly. (A slight speed difference between the Master and the Follower is possible/allowed.) - drooping is used (see parameter 60.06).
FbEq 1 2
TORQUE
The drive is torque-controlled. The selection is used in the Follower(s) when the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are coupled solidly to each other by gearing, a chain or other means of mechanical power transmission and no speed difference between the drives is allowed or possible. Note: If TORQUE is selected, the drive does not restrict the speed variation as long as the speed is within the limits defined by parameters 20.01 and 20.02. More definite speed supervision is often needed. In those cases, the selection ADD should be used instead of TORQUE.
MINIMUM
The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed controller output, and the smaller of them is used as the reference for the motor torque control. MINIMUM is selected in special cases only.
MAXIMUM
The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed 5 controller output and the greater of them is used as the reference for the motor torque control. MAXIMUM is selected in special cases only. The torque selector adds the speed controller output to the direct torque reference. The drive is torque-controlled in the normal operating range. The selection ADD, together with the window control, forms a speed supervision function for a torque-controlled Follower drive. See parameter 60.03. Activates the Window control function. The Window control, together with selection ADD at parameter 60.02, forms a speed supervision function for a torque-controlled drive. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T CTRL. External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable window control. Inactive 0 Window control is active. Selection YES is used only when parameter 60.02 65535 has value ADD. Window control supervises the speed error value (Speed Reference - Actual Speed). In the normal operating range, window control keeps the speed controller input at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if: - the speed error exceeds the value of parameter 60.04 or - the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the value of parameter 60.05. When the speed error moves outside the window, the exceeding part of the error value is connected to the speed controller. The speed controller produces a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller (parameter 23.01) which the torque selector adds to the torque reference. The result is used as the internal torque reference for the drive. Example: In a load loss condition, the internal torque reference of the drive is decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed. If window control were inactivated, the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive were reached. 6
ADD
60.03
WINDOW SEL ON
NO YES
60.04
WINDOW WIDTH POS 0 1500 rpm
Defines the supervision window width above the speed reference. See parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T CTRL. Positive window width 0 20000
168
Index 60.05
Name/Selection WINDOW WIDTH NEG 0 1500 rpm
Description Defines the supervision window width below the speed reference. See parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T CTRL. Negative window width Defines the droop rate. The parameter value needs to be changed only if both the Master and the Follower are speed-controlled: - External control location 1 (EXT1) is selected (see parameter 11.02 or - External control location 2 (EXT2) is selected (see parameter 11.02) and parameter 60.02 is set to SPEED. The droop rate needs to be set both for the Master and the Follower. The correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice. The drooping prevents a conflict between the Master and the Follower by allowing a slight speed difference between them. The drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases. The actual speed decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the drive load ( = torque reference / speed controller output). At 100% speed controller output, drooping is at its nominal level, i.e. equal to the value of the DROOP RATE. The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load.
Motor Speed % of nominal
100%
FbEq
0 20000
60.06
DROOP RATE
Speed Decrease = Speed Controller Output Drooping Nominal Speed Example: Speed Controller output is 50%, DROOP RATE is 1%, nominal speed of the drive is 1500 rpm. Speed decrease = 0.50 0.01 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm
No Drooping } Par. 60.06 DROOP RATE Drooping
100%
Speed Controller Drive load Output / %
0 100% 60.07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 0000 9999 60.08 MASTER SIGNAL 3 0000 9999
Droop rate in percent of the motor nominal speed Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 1 (speed reference). Parameter index Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 2 (torque reference). Parameter index Settings for the fibre optic channels 0, 1 and 3. Defines the node address for channel 0. No two nodes on-line may have the same address. The setting needs to be changed when a master station is connected to channel 0 and it does not automatically change the address of the slave. Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller or another drive. Address. Node address for channel 3. No two nodes on-line may have the same address. Typically the setting needs to be changed when the drive is connected in a ring which consists of several drives and a PC with the DriveWindow program running.
0 1000
0000 9999
0000 9999
70 DDCS CONTROL
70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR
1 125 70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR
1 125
169
Index 70.03
Name/Selection 1 254 CH1 BAUD RATE
Description Address. The communication speed of channel 1. Typically the setting needs to be changed only if the pulse encoder interface module is connected to channel 1 instead of channel 2. Then the speed must be changed to 4 Mbit/s. See also parameter 50.05. 8 megabits per second 4 megabits per second 2 megabits per second 1 megabits per second Selects the topology of the channel 0 link. Devices are connected in ring topology. Devices are connected in a star topology. Selects the topology of the DDCS channel CH2 link. Devices are connected in a ring. Forwarding of messages is enabled. Devices are connected in a star. Forwarding of messages is disabled. This selection is used with NDBU branching units. See section User load curve on page 83. Activates the user load curve and selects how the drive reacts when the user load curve has been exceeded. User load curve is inactive. The drive generates a warning USER L CURVE. Drive output current is not limited. The drive trips on a fault USER L CURVE. Drive output current is limited to Iuser curve. Drive output current is limited to Iuser curve and the drive generates a warning USER L CURVE. Defines the first current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par. 72.10 LOAD FREQ 1. Value in percent of the nominal motor current Defines the second current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par. 72.11 LOAD FREQ 2. Value in percent of the nominal motor current Defines the third current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par. 72.12 LOAD FREQ 3. Value in percent of the nominal motor current Defines the fourth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par. 72.13 LOAD FREQ 4. Value in percent of the nominal motor current Defines the fifth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par. 72.14 LOAD FREQ 5. Value in percent of the nominal motor current Defines the sixth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par. 72.15 LOAD FREQ 6. Value in percent of the nominal motor current
FbEq 1 254
8 Mbit/s 4 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 1 Mbit/s 70.04 CH0 DDCS HW CONN RING STAR 70.05 CH2 HW CONNECTION 0 = RING 1 = STAR
0 1 2 3
0 65535 1=1
72 USER LOAD CURVE

72.01 OVERLOAD FUNC NO WARNING FAULT LIMIT LIMIT / WARN 72.02 LOAD CURRENT 1 0...800% 72.03 LOAD CURRENT 2 0...800% 72.04 LOAD CURRENT 3 0...800% 72.05 LOAD CURRENT 4 0...800% 72.06 LOAD CURRENT 5 0...800% 72.07 LOAD CURRENT 6 0...800%
0 1 2 3 4
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
170
Index 72.08
Name/Selection LOAD CURRENT 7 0...800%
Description Defines the seventh current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par. 72.16 LOAD FREQ 7. Value in percent of the nominal motor current Defines the eighth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par. 72.17 LOAD FREQ 8. Value in percent of the nominal motor current Defines the first frequency point of the load curve. Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the second frequency point of the load curve. Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the third frequency point of the load curve. Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the fourth frequency point of the load curve. Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the fifth frequency point of the load curve. Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the sixth frequency point of the load curve. Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the seventh frequency point of the load curve. Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the eight frequency point of the load curve. Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency Defines the overload current. Value is used by the overload integrator (I
2dt).
FbEq
1=1
72.09
LOAD CURRENT 8 0...800%
1=1 1=1 1=1
72.10 72.11
LOAD FREQ 1 0... par. 72.11 % LOAD FREQ 2 par. 72.10... par. 72.12 %
72.12
LOAD FREQ 3 par. 72.11... par. 72.13 %
1=1
72.13
LOAD FREQ 4 par. 72.12... par. 72.14 %
1=1
72.14
LOAD FREQ 5 par. 72.13... par. 72.15 %
1=1
72.15
LOAD FREQ 6 par. 72.14... par. 72.16 %
1=1
72.16
LOAD FREQ 7 par. 72.15... par. 72.17 %
1=1
72.17 72.18
LOAD FREQ 8 par. 72.16...600% LOAD CURRENT LIMIT
1=1
If the continuous motor load capacity (i.e. the defined user load curve) is not 100% at the nominal frequency, calculate the overload current using the following equation: 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT = 2 2 2 I overload I user curve + 100
where Ioverload is the motor overload and Iuser curve is the current defined by the user load curve at the nominal frequency. User load curve is defined by parameters 72.02...72.17. Example: Motor overload capacity is 150% of the nominal current for 10 s / 10 min and the continuous load capacity is 80% at the nominal frequency: 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT = 150 80 + 100 = 162%
2 2 2
72.19 LOAD THERMAL TIME = 10 s 72.20 LOAD COOLING TIME = 590 s 100...800% Value in percent of the nominal motor current (99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT) 10 = 1%
171
Index 72.19
Name/Selection LOAD THERMAL TIME 0.0...9999.9 s
Description
2
FbEq
Defines the overload time. Value is used by the overload integrator (I dt). See 10 = 1 s the example given for par. 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT. Time. If the value is set to zero, the drive output current is limited to the user load curve defined by parameters 72.02...72.17. Defines the cooling time. The output of the overload integrator is set to zero if the current stays continuously below the user load curve for the defined cooling time. See the example given for par. 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT. Time Control of the Adaptive Program execution. For more information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide [3AFE64527274 (English)]. Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program. Stop. The program cannot be edited. Run. The program cannot be edited. Stop to edit mode. Program can be edited. Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter 83.03. The program must be in editing mode (see parameter 83.01). Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing command 1 has been executed. Shifts the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and the following blocks 2 one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location by programming the Block Parameter Set as usual. Example: A new block needs to be placed in between the current block number four (parameters 84.20 84.25) and five (parameters 84.25 84.29). In order to do this: - Shift the program to the editing mode by parameter 83.01. - Select location number five as the desired location for the new block by parameter 83.03. - Shift the block in location number 5 and the following blocks one location forward by parameter 83.02. (selection PUSH) - Program the emptied location number 5 by parameters 84.25 to 84.29 as usual. 1 2 3 1=1s
72.20
LOAD COOLING TIME 0...9999 s
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL

83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD STOP RUN EDIT 83.02 EDIT COMMAND NO PUSH
DELETE PROTECT
Deletes the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and shifts the following blocks one step down. Activation of the Adaptive Program protection. Activate as follows: - Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter 83.01). - Set the passcode (parameter 83.05). - Change parameter 83.02 to PROTECT. When activated: - All parameters in group 84 excluding the block output parameters are hidden (read protected). - It is not possible to switch the program to the editing mode (parameter 83.01). - Parameter 83.05 is set to 0.
3 4
172
Index
Name/Selection UNPROTECT
Description Inactivation of the Adaptive Program protection. Inactivate as follows: - Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter 83.01). - Set the passcode (parameter 83.05). - Change parameter 83.02 to UNPROTECT. Note: If the passcode is lost, it is possible to reset the protection also by changing the application macro setting (parameter 99.02).
FbEq 5
83.03
EDIT BLOCK 1 15
Defines the block location number for the command selected by parameter 83.02. Block location number Selects the execution cycle time for the Adaptive Program. The setting is valid for all blocks. 12 milliseconds 100 milliseconds 1000 milliseconds Sets the passcode for the Adaptive Program protection. The passcode is needed at activation and inactivation of the protection. See parameter 83.02. Passcode. The setting restores to 0 after the protection is activated/inactivated. Note: When activating, write down the passcode and store it in a safe place. - selections of the function blocks and their input connections. - diagnostics For more information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide [3AFE64527274 (English)]. 1 2 3 1=1
83.04
TIMELEVEL SEL 12 ms 100 ms 1000 ms
83.05
PASSCODE 0
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
84.01
STATUS
Shows the value of the Adaptive Program status word. The table below shows the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 Display 1 2 4 8 10 20 40 100 Meaning Stopped Running Faulted Editing Checking Pushing Popping Initialising -
84.02 84.05
FAULTED PAR BLOCK1 ABS ADD AND BITWISE COMPARE COUNT DPOT EVENT
Points out the faulted parameter in the Adaptive Program. Selects the function block for Block Parameter Set 1. See the Adaptive Program Application Guide [3AFE64527274 (English)].
11 10 2 26 16 21 23 20
173
Index
Name/Selection FILTER MASK-SET MAX MIN MULDIV NO OR PI PI-BAL PI BIPOLAR RAMP SR SWITCH-B SWITCH-I TOFF TON TRIGG XOR
Description
FbEq 13 24 17 18 12 1 3 14 15 25 22 5 7 19 9 8 6 4
84.06
INPUT1 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Selects the source for input I1 of Block Parameter Set 1. Parameter index or a constant value: - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting. Example: The state of digital input DI2 is connected to Input 1 as follows: - Set the source selection parameter (84.06) to +.01.17.01. (The application program stores the state of digital input DI2 to bit 1 of actual signal 01.17.) - If you need an inverted value, switch the sign of the pointer value (-01.17.01.). -
84.07
INPUT2 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
See parameter 84.06. See parameter 84.06. -
84.08
INPUT3 -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
See parameter 84.06. See parameter 84.06. -
84.09 84.79
OUTPUT OUTPUT
Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 1. Stores the output of Block Parameter Set 15. Storage of the Adaptive Program constants and messages. For more information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide [3AFE64527274 (English)]. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value 1=1 -
85 USER CONSTANTS
85.01 CONSTANT1 -8388608 to 8388607
174
Index 85.02 85.03 85.04 85.05 85.06 85.07 85.08 85.09 85.10 85.11 85.12 85.13 85.14 85.15
Name/Selection CONSTANT2 -8388608 to 8388607 CONSTANT3 -8388608 to 8388607 CONSTANT4 -8388608 to 8388607 CONSTANT5 -8388608 to 8388607 CONSTANT6 -8388608 to 8388607 CONSTANT7 -8388608 to 8388607 CONSTANT8 -8388608 to 8388607 CONSTANT9 -8388608 to 8388607 CONSTANT10 -8388608 to 8388607 STRING1 MESSAGE1 STRING2 MESSAGE2 STRING3 MESSAGE3 STRING4 MESSAGE4 STRING5 MESSAGE5
Description Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message - Addresses into which the received fieldbus data sets are written. - Numbers of the main and auxiliary data sets. The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by parameter 98.02. For more information, see chapter Fieldbus control.
FbEq 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 -
90 D SET REC ADDR
90.01 90.02 90.03 90.04
AUX DS REF3 0 8999 AUX DS REF4 0 8999 AUX DS REF5 0 8999 MAIN DS SOURCE 1 255
Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF3 is written. Parameter index Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF4 is written. Parameter index Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF5 is written. Parameter index Defines the data set from which the drive reads the Control Word, Reference REF1 and Reference REF2. Data set number Defines the data set from which the drive reads References REF3, REF4 and REF5.
90.05
AUX DS SOURCE
175
Index
Name/Selection 1 255
Description Data set number Main and Auxiliary Data Sets which the drive sends to the fieldbus master station. The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by parameter 98.02. For more information, see chapter Fieldbus control.
FbEq
92 D SET TR ADDR
92.01
MAIN DS STATUS WORD 302 (fixed) MAIN DS ACT1 0 9999
Stores the address from which the Main Status Word is read from. Fixed value, not visible. Parameter index Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 1 is read to the Main Data Set. Parameter index Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 2 is read to the Main Data Set. Parameter index Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 3 is read to the Auxiliary Data Set. Parameter index Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 4 is read to the Auxiliary Data Set. Parameter index Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 5 is read to the Auxiliary Data Set. Parameter index Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 10 is read from. Parameter index or a constant value: - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting.
92.02
92.03
MAIN DS ACT2 0 9999
92.04
AUX DS ACT3 0 9999
92.05
AUX DS ACT4 0 9999
92.06
AUX DS ACT5 0 9999
92.07
MSW B10 PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
92.08
MSW B13 PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 13 is read from. Parameter index or a constant value: - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting.
92.09
MSW B14 PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 14 is read from. Parameter index or a constant value: - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting.
95 HARDWARE SPECIF Fan speed control, sine filter application etc.

95.01 FAN SPD CTRL MODE CONST 50 Hz Selects the speed control of the optional inverter cooling fan. Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz when powered. 0
176
Index
Name/Selection RUN/STOP CONTROLLED
Description Drive stopped: Fan is running at constant frequency of 10 Hz. Drive running: Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz. The speed of the fan is determined from IGBT temperature vs. fan speed curve.
FbEq 1 2
95.02
FUSE SWITCH CTRL Activates the inverter DC switch (switch fuse) monitoring function. The monitoring must be active when the Switch Fuse Control Board (ASFC) is in use and connected to the inverter AINT board, i.e. in all frame R8i inverters equipped with the DC switch. The function must be inactive in units that do not use the ASFC board with the DC switch, i.e. for frame R2iR7i inverters and all single drive units where no DC switch exists. The default setting (ON or OFF) for each unit is set accordingly at the factory as default. ACS800 IGBT pulses are always blocked when the program detects that the DC switch is opened or inverter charging is ongoing (at power switch on). The application program generates alarm INV DISABLED if the DC switch is opened when the inverter is stopped. The inverter trips to fault INV DISABLED if the DC switch is opened when the inverter is running. OFF ON Inactive Active Number of parallel connected inverter modules. Activates the Reduced Run function. See section Reduced Run function on page 82. Number of parallel connected inverter modules Activates the sine filter or Ex-motor application. Inactive Sine filter application. See the Sine Filters Users Manual for ACS800 Drives [3AFE68389178 (English)]. EX-motor and sine filter applications. See the Sine Filters Users Manual for ACS800 Drives [3AFE68389178 (English)]. Note: This selection is not supported from firmware version AS7R7363 onwards. 1 3 4 Ex-motor application. Used with motors which comply with the ATEX directive. 2 0 1
95.03
INT CONFIG USER 1...12
95.04
EX/SIN REQUEST NO EX SIN EX&SIN
95.05
ENA INC SW FREQ
Activates the minimum switching frequency limitation for Ex-motor applications. Parameter is visible if parameter 95.04 EX/SIN REQUEST is set to EX. Inactive Active. Minimum switching frequency limit is set to 2 kHz. Used with motors with an ATEX certification based on 2 kHz minimum switching frequency. 0 1
NO YES
177
Index 95.06
Name/Selection LCU Q PW REF
Description Defines the reference value for the line-side converter (i.e. IGBT supply unit) reactive power generation. Line-side converter can generate reactive power to the supply network. This reference is written into line-side converter unit parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. Example 1: When parameter 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PERCENT, value 10000 of parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to value 100% of parameter 24.01 Q POWER REF (i.e. 100% of the converter nominal power given in signal 04.06 CONV NOM POWER). Example 2: When parameter 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to kVAr, value 1000 of parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to parameter 24.01 Q POWER REF value calculated with the following equation: 100 (1000 kVAr divided by converter nominal power in kVAr)%. Example 3: When parameter 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PHI, value 3000 of parameter 24.02 POWER REF2 equals approximately to parameter 24.01 Q POWER REF value calculated with the following equation: S 30
FbEq
P P - = -----------------------cos ( 30 ) = --S 2 2 P +Q
P Positive reference 30 denotes capacitive load. Negative reference 30 denotes inductive load. P = signal 01.09 POWER value Parameter 24.03 values are converter to degrees by the line-side converter application program: -3000...30000 = -30...30. Value -10000/10000 equals to -30/30, since the range is limited to -3000/3000. -10000...10000 95.07 LCU DC REF Reference value. Defines the intermediate circuit DC voltage reference for the line-side converter (i.e. IGBT supply unit). This reference is written into line-side converter parameter 23.01 DC VOLT REF. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. Voltage Selects the line-side converter address from which the actual signal 09.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL1 is read from. Line-side converter parameter index. Default value 106 = line-side converter parameter 01.06 LINE CURRENT. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. Selects the line-side converter address from which the actual signal 09.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL2 is read from. Line-side converter parameter index. Default value 110 = line side converter parameter 01.10 DC VOLTAGE. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. Defines the ambient temperature for the Enhanced drive temperature monitoring function. See Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800, frame sizes R7 and R8 on page 67. Note: If ambient temperature exceeds 40C, the drive load capacity decreases. See the derating instructions in the appropriate hardware manual. 20...50C Temperature 10 = 1C 09999 09999 1=1V See par. description.
0...1100 V 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 09999
95.09
LCU PAR2 SEL 09999
95.10
TEMP INV AMBIENT
178
Index 95.11
Name/Selection SUPPLY CTRL MODE NONE LINE CONV
Description Enables/disables the control and data transfer of line-side converter unit (LSU) by inverter unit (INU). The parameter 98.02 COMM.MODULE in LSU must have the value INU COM LIM. Line-side converter control disabled. Limited control from the inverter RMIO board DDCS channel CH1.
FbEq
0 65535
11.02 Q REF SELECT
Inverter RMIO board
Line converter RMIO board

98.02 COMM. MODULE = INVERTER Dataset 121 (CH0) MCW (fixed) Q-REF(fixed) DC REF(fixed)
PARAM 24.01 Q POVER AI1 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL AI2 AI3 REF 24.01
Dataset 121 (CH1) MCW 95.06 LCU Q PW REF 95.07 LCU DC REF
24.02
PERCENT kVAr PHI COSPHI
+ +
PARAM 24.02
Dataset 122 (CH1) MSW 9.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL1 9.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL2
Dataset 122 (CH0) MSW (fixed) 106 (value) 110 (value)
24.04 11.01 DC REF SELECT
Dataset 123 (CH1) 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL
Dataset 123 (CH0) 106 110
PARAM 23.01 DC VOLT AI1 AI2 AI3 FIELDBUS REF 23.01
MCW = Main Control Word MSW = Main Status Word
95.12
LCU RUN PTR
Selection of run command for line-side converter. When 95.11 SUPPLY CTRL MODE is set to LINE CONV, starting of modulation can be assigned freely to a parameter or signal using bit pointer. Note: This parameter is available in AS7R firmware version only. Parameter index or a constant value: - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting. -
-255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768C.32767
96 EXTERNAL AO
Output signal selection and processing for the analogue extension module (optional). The parameters are visible only when the module is installed and activated by parameter 98.06.
96.01
EXT AO1 NOT USED P SPEED SPEED FREQUENCY CURRENT TORQUE
Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. 1 2 3 4 5 6
179
Index
Name/Selection POWER DC BUS VOLT OUTPUT VOLT APPL OUTPUT REFERENCE CONTROL DEV ACTUAL 1 ACTUAL 2 COM.REF4 PARAM 96.11
Description See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. Source selected by parameter 96.11. Activates the inversion of analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module. Inactive Active. The analogue signal is at a minimum level when the drive signal indicated is at its maximum and vice versa. Defines the minimum value for the analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module. Note: Actually, the setting 10 mA or 12 mA does not set the AO1 minimum but fixes 10/12 mA to actual signal value zero. Example: Motor speed is read through the analogue output. - The motor nominal speed is 1000 rpm (parameter 99.08). - 96.02 is NO. - 96.05 is 100%. The analogue output value as a function of the speed is shown below. Analogue output mA 20
Analogue output signal minimum
FbEq 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
96.02
INVERT EXT AO1 NO YES
0 65535
96.03
MINIMUM EXT AO1
12 10
4 3 2 1 2
1 2 3 4
0 mA 4 mA 10 mA 12 mA
4 0
-1000 0 mA 4 mA 10 mA 12 mA 96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 0.00 10.00 s 96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 0 mA 4 mA 10 mA 12 mA
-500
500
1000 Speed/rpm 1 2 3 4
Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.04. Filtering time constant Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.05. 0 1000
180
Index
Name/Selection 10 1000%
Description Scaling factor Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.01. See parameter 15.06. Source selected by parameter 96.12. Activates the inversion of analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module. The analogue signal is at its minimum level when the drive signal indicated is at its maximum and vice versa. Inactive Active Defines the minimum value for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 96.03. 0 mA 4 mA 10 mA 12 mA Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.04. Filtering time constant Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.05. Scaling factor Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.11 of parameter 96.01. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
FbEq 100 10000
96.06
EXT AO2 NOT USED P SPEED SPEED FREQUENCY CURRENT TORQUE POWER DC BUS VOLT OUTPUT VOLT APPL OUTPUT REFERENCE CONTROL DEV ACTUAL 1 ACTUAL 2 COM.REF5 PARAM 96.12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
96.07
INVERT EXT AO2
NO YES 96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 0 mA 4 mA 10 mA 12 mA 96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 0.00 10.00 s 96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 10 1000% 96.11 EXT AO1 PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
0 65535
1 2 3 4
0 1000
100 10000 1000 = 1 mA -
181
Index 96.12
Name/Selection EXT AO2 PTR -255.255.31 +255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Description Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.12 of parameter 96.06. Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on the difference. Activation of the option modules. The parameter settings will remain the same even though the application macro is changed (parameter 99.02).
FbEq 1000 = 1 mA -
98 OPTION MODULES
98.01
ENCODER MODULE NTAC
Activates the communication to the optional pulse encoder module. See also parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE. Communication active. Module type: NTAC module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see the NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730 (English)]. 0
NO RTAC-SLOT1 RTAC-SLOT2 RTAC-DDCS
Inactive Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.
1 2 3
Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Optional I/O 4 module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see the RTAC-01 Pulse Encoder Interface User's Manual [3AFE64486853 (English)].
RRIA-SLOT1 RRIA-SLOT2 RRIA-DDCS
Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: option slot 1 5 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: option slot 2 6 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: Optional I/O 7 module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see RRIA-01 Resolver Interface Module User's Manual [3AFE68570760 (English)].
RTAC03-SLOT1 RTAC03-SLOT2 RTAC03-DDCS
Communication active. Module type: RTAC-03. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RTAC-03. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RTAC-03. Connection interface: Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see the RTAC-03 Pulse Encoder Interface User's Manual [3AFE68650500 (English)].
98.02
COMM. MODULE LINK NO FIELDBUS
Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface. See chapter Fieldbus control. No communication The drive communicates through an Rxxx type fieldbus adapter connected to slot 1 or through an Nxxx type fieldbus adapter connected to RMIO board channel CH0. See also parameter group 51 COMM MODULE DATA. 1 2
182
Index
Name/Selection ADVANT STD MODBUS
Description The drive communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CH0 on the RDCO board (optional). See also parameter group 70 DDCS CONTROL. The drive communicates with a Modbus controller via the Modbus Adapter Module (RMBA) in option slot 1 of the drive. See also parameter 52 STANDARD MODBUS.
FbEq 3 4
CUSTOMISED 98.03
The drive communicates via a customer specified link. The control sources are 5 defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05.
DI/O EXT MODULE 1 Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 1 (optional) and defines the type and connection interface of the module. Module inputs: See parameter 98.09 for the use of the inputs in the drive application program. Module outputs: See parameters 14.10 and 14.11 for selecting the drive states that are indicated through the relay outputs. NDIO Communication active. Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 2. For directions, see the NTAC-0x/ NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730 (English)]. NO RDIO-SLOT1 RDIO-SLOT2 RDIO-DDCS Inactive 2 Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 3 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 4 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O 5 module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 2. For directions, see the RDIO Module Users Manual [3AFE64485733 (English)]. 1
98.04
183
Index 98.05
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
98.06
AI/O EXT MODULE
Activates the communication to the analogue I/O extension module (optional), and defines the type and connection interface of the module. Module inputs: - Values AI5 and AI6 in the drive application program are connected to module inputs 1 and 2. - See parameters 98.13 and 98.14 for the signal type definitions. Module outputs: - See parameters 96.01 and 96.06 for selecting the drive signals that are indicated through module outputs 1 and 2.
NAIO
Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see the NTAC-0x/ NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730 (English)].
NO RAIO-SLOT1 RAIO-SLOT2 RAIO-DDCS
Communication inactive
Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 3 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 4 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O 5 module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see the RAIO Module Users Manual [3AFE64484567 (English)].
98.07
COMM PROFILE
Defines the profile on which the communication with the fieldbus or another drive is based. Visible only when fieldbus communication is activated by parameter 98.02. ABB Drives profile 1
ABB DRIVES
184
Index
Name/Selection GENERIC CSA 2.8/3.0
Description Generic drive profile. Typically used with the fieldbus modules that have the type designation of form Rxxx (installed in the option slot of the drive). Communication profile used by application program versions 2.8 and 3.0. Defines the naming of the inputs of digital I/O extension module 1 in the drive application program. See parameter 98.03. DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module inputs are named DI7 and DI8. DI1 and DI2 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1 and DI2. The inputs are named DI1 and DI2. DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module inputs are named DI7, DI8 and DI9. DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2 and DI3. The inputs are named DI1, DI2 and DI3. Defines the naming of the inputs of digital I/O extension module 2 in the drive application program. See parameter 98.04. DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module inputs are named DI9 and DI10. DI1 and DI2 of the module replace the standard input channels DI3 and DI4. The inputs are named DI3 and DI4. DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module inputs are named DI10, DI11 and DI12. DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2 and DI3. The inputs are named DI4, DI5 and DI6. Defines the naming of the inputs of digital I/O extension module 3 in the drive application program. See parameter 98.05. DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module inputs are named DI11 and DI12. DI1 and DI2 of the module replace the standard input channels DI5 and DI6. The inputs are named DI5 and DI6.
FbEq 2 3
98.09
DI/O EXT1 DI FUNC DI7,8 REPL DI1,2 DI7,8,9 REPL DI1,2,3
1 2 3 4
98.10
DI/O EXT2 DI FUNC DI9,10 REPL DI3,4 DI10,11,12 REPL DI4,5,6
1 2 3 4
98.11
DI/O EXT3 DI FUNC DI11,12 REPL DI5,6
1 2
185
Index 98.12
Name/Selection AI/O MOTOR TEMP
Description Activates the communication to the analogue I/O extension module and reserves the module for the use of the motor temperature measurement function. The parameter also defines the type and connection interface of the module. For more information on the temperature measurement function, see parameter group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS and section Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension on page 75. The use of the analogue inputs (AI) and outputs (AO) of the module is shown in the table below. Motor 1 temperature measurement AO1 Feeds a constant current to motor 1 temperature sensor. The current value depends on the setting of parameter 35.01: - AO1 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100 - AO1 is 1.6 mA with selection 1...3 PTC AI1 AO2 Measures voltage over motor 1 temperature sensor. Feeds a constant current to motor 2 temperature sensor. The current value depends on the setting of parameter 35.04: - AO2 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100, - AO2 is 1.6 mA with selection 1...3 PTC AI2 Measures voltage over motor 2 temperature sensor. Motor 2 temperature measurement
FbEq
Before setting the drive parameters, ensure the module hardware settings are appropriate for the motor temperature measurement: 1. The module node number is 9. 2. The input signal type selections are the following: - for one Pt 100 sensor measurement, set the range to 0 2 V. - for two to three Pt 100 sensors or one to three PTC sensors, set the range to 0 10 V. 3. The operation mode selection is unipolar. NAIO Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Make the module hardware settings as described above. For instructions, see the NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Startup Guide [3AFY58919730 (English)]. NO RAIO-SLOT1 Inactive 2 Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 3 of the drive. Note: Make the module hardware settings as described above. The node number is not required. For directions, see the RAIO Module Users Manual [3AFE64484567 (English)]. RAIO-SLOT2 Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 4 of the drive. Note: Make the module hardware settings as described above. The node number is not required. For directions, see the RAIO Module Users Manual [3AFE64484567 (English)]. 1
186
Index
Name/Selection RAIO-DDCS
Description
FbEq
Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O 5 module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Set the module node number to 9. For directions, see the RAIO Module Users Manual [3AFE64484567 (English)].
98.13
AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC
Defines the signal type for input 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI5 in the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to the module. Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06. Unipolar Bipolar Defines the signal type for input 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI6 in the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to the module. Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06. Unipolar Bipolar Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module and reserves the module for the use of the sine-filter temperature measurement. Parameter is visible if parameter 95.04 is set to SIN or EX&SIN. Parameter value is automatically set to NO, when parameter 95.04 value is changed. Note: This parameter is used only in special applications. 1 2 1 2
UNIPOLAR AI5 BIPOLAR AI5 98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC
UNIPOLAR AI6 BIPOLAR AI6 98.16 SIN FILT SUPERV
NDIO
Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 8. For directions see the NTAC-0x/ NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730 (English)].
NO RDIO-SLOT1 RDIO-SLOT2 RDIO-DDCS
Supervision disabled. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.
2 3 4
Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) 5 that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 8. For directions, see the RDIO Module User's Manual [3AFE64485733 (English)].
99 START-UP DATA
99.01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH AM DEUTSCH ITALIANO ESPANOL PORTUGUES NEDERLANDS FRANCAIS DANSK SUOMI SVENSKA
Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data. Selects the display language. British English American English. If selected, the unit of power used is HP instead of kW. German Italian Spanish Portuguese Dutch French Danish Finnish Swedish 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
187
Index
Name/Selection CESKY POLSKI/LOC1 PO-RUS/LOC2
Description Czech Polish Russian Selects the application macro. See chapter Application macros for more information. Note: When you change the default parameter values of a macro, the new settings become valid immediately and stay valid even if the power of the drive is switched off and on. However, backup of the default parameter settings (factory settings) of each standard macro is still available. See parameter 99.03.
FbEq 11 12 13
99.02
APPLICATION MACRO
FACTORY HAND/AUTO
Factory for basic applications Two control devices are connected to the drive: - device 1 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT1. - device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT2. - EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time. Switching through a digital input.
1 2
PID-CTRL
PID control. For application in which the drive controls a process value. E.g. pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump. Measured pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive. See sections Process PID control on page 70 and Sleep function for the process PID control on page 71.
T-CTRL SEQ CTRL
Torque Control macro
Sequential Control macro. For applications that are frequently run through a 5 pre-defined speed pattern (constant speeds and acceleration and deceleration ramps). User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter 6 settings and the motor model are suitable for the application. Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor model. Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See parameter 99.03. 7
USER 1 LOAD USER 1 SAVE
USER 2 LOAD USER 2 SAVE
User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter 8 settings and the motor model are suitable for the application. Save User 2 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor model. Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See parameter 99.03. 9
99.03
APPLIC RESTORE
Restores the original settings of the active application macro (99.02). - If a standard macro (Factory, ... , Sequential Control) is active, the parameter values are restored to the default settings (factory settings). Exceptions: parameter settings in parameter group 99 remain unchanged. The motor model remains unchanged. - If User Macro 1 or 2 is active, the parameter values are restored to the last saved values. In addition, the last saved motor model are restored. Exceptions: Settings of parameters 16.05 and 99.02 remain unchanged. Note: The parameter settings and the motor model are restored according to the same principles when a macro is changed to another.
NO
No action
188
Index 99.04
Name/Selection YES DTC SCALAR
Description Restoring Direct Torque Control mode is suitable for most applications. Scalar control is suitable in special cases where the DTC cannot be applied. The scalar control mode is recommended: - for multimotor drives with variable number of motors - when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive (inverter) - the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected. Note: The outstanding motor control accuracy of the DTC cannot be achieved in scalar control. The differences between the scalar and DTC control modes are pointed out in this manual in relevant parameter lists. There are some standard features that are disabled in the scalar control mode: Motor Identification Run (group 99 START-UP DATA), Speed Limits (group 20 LIMITS), Torque Limit (group 20 LIMITS), DC Hold (group 21 START/STOP), DC Magnetizing (group 21 START/STOP), Speed Controller Tuning (group 23 SPEED CTRL), Torque Control (group 24 TORQUE CTRL), Flux Optimization (group 26 MOTOR CONTROL), Flux Braking (group 26 MOTOR CONTROL), Underload Function (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Phase Loss Protection (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Stall Protection (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS). For more information, see section Scalar control on page 62.
FbEq 65535 0 65535
MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode.
99.05
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 1/2 2 UN
Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. Voltage. Allowed range is 1/2 2 UN of the drive. Note: The stress on the motor insulations is always dependent on the drive supply voltage. This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the rating of the drive and the supply of the drive. 1=1V
99.06
MOTOR NOM CURRENT
Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. If several motors are connected to the inverter, enter the total current of the motors. Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 percent of the nominal current of the inverter.
0 2 I2hd 99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 8 300 Hz 99.08
Allowed range: approx. 1/6 2 I2hd of ACS800 (parameter 99.04 = DTC). Allowed range: approx. 0 2 I2hd of ACS800 (parameter 99.04 = SCALAR). Defines the nominal motor frequency. Nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz typically)
1 = 0.1 A
800 30000
MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must not be given instead! Note: If the value of parameter 99.08 is changed, the speed limits in parameter group 20 LIMITS change automatically as well. 1 18000 rpm Nominal motor speed Defines the nominal motor power. Set exactly as on the motor rating plate. If several motors are connected to the inverter, enter the total power of the motors. Nominal motor power 0 90000 1 18000
99.09
MOTOR NOM POWER 0 9000 kW
189
Index 99.10
Name/Selection MOTOR ID RUN MODE
Description Selects the type of the motor identification. During the identification, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID Run Procedure is described in chapter Start-up and control through the I/O. Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected if: - The operation point is near zero speed, and/or - Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required. Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) cannot be performed if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR. See section Motor identification on page 53.
FbEq
ID MAGN STANDARD
No ID Run. The motor model is calculated at first start by magnetising the motor for 20 to 60 s at zero speed. This can be selected in most applications. Standard ID Run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID Run takes about one minute. Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment. Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction. WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
1 2
REDUCED
Reduced ID Run. Should be selected instead of the Standard ID Run: - if mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor cannot be decoupled from the driven equipment) - if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e. in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals). Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction. WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
99.11
DEVICE NAME
Defines the name for the drive or application. The name is visible on the control panel display in the Drive Selection Mode. Note: The name can be typed only by using a drive PC tool.
190
191
Fieldbus control
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system usually a fieldbus controller via an adapter module. The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the external control interface, or the control can be distributed between the external control interface and other available sources, for example digital and analogue inputs. The following diagram shows the control interfaces and I/O connections of the drive.
Fieldbus controller Fieldbus ACS800 Other devices
(* (*
Fieldbus adapter Rxxx Slot 1 RMIO board RMBA-01 adapter std. Modbus link Slot 1 or 2 RDCO comm. module CH1 AIMA-01 I/O (DDCS) adapter module
(*
Controller Modbus
Advant controller (e.g. AC 800M, AC 80)
I/O adapter RTAC/RDIO/RAIO
CH0 (DDCS)
Fieldbus adapter Nxxx or
Data Flow
Control Word (CW) References Status Word (SW) Actual values Parameter R/W requests/responses
(*
Process I/O (cyclic)
Service messages (acyclic)
Either an Rxxx or Nxxx, and an RMBA-01 adapter can be connected to the drive simultaneously.
Fieldbus control
192
Redundant fieldbus control It is possible to connect two fieldbuses to the drive with the following adapter configuration: Type Rxxx fieldbus adapter module (not RMBA-01) is installed in drive slot 1. RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module is installed in drive slot 2.
E.g. PROFIBUS ACS800 RMIO board
RPBA-01 adapter PROFIBUS-DP link
Modbus
Slot 1
RMBA-01 adapter std. Modbus link
Slot 2
The control (i.e. the Main Reference data set, see section The fieldbus control interface on page 202) is activated by setting parameter 98.02 to FIELDBUS or STD MODBUS. In case there is a communication problem with one fieldbus, the control can be switched to the other fieldbus. Switching between the buses can be controlled e.g. with adaptive programming. Parameters and signals can be read by both fieldbuses, but simultaneous cyclical writing to the same parameter is forbidden.
Fieldbus control
193
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module

Fieldbus adapters for several communication protocols are available (e.g. PROFIBUS and Modbus). Rxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are mounted in expansion slot 1 of the drive. Nxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are connected to channel CH0 of the RDCO module. Note: For instructions on setting up an RMBA-01 module, see section Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link on page 195. Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual of the drive, and the module manual. The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter.
Parameter Alternative settings Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 98.02 NO FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS CUSTOMISED ABB DRIVES GENERIC CSA 2.8/3.0 FIELDBUS Initialises communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module. Activates module set-up parameters (Group 51).
98.07
ABB DRIVES GENERIC or CSA 2.8/3.0
Selects the communication profile used by the drive. See section Communication profiles on page 210.
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 51.01 MODULE TYPE 51.02 (FIELDBUS PARAMETER 2) 51.26 (FIELDBUS PARAMETER 26) 51.27 FBA PAR REFRESH* 51.28 FILE CPI FW REV* (0) DONE (1) REFRESH xyz (binary coded decimal Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings. After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE. Displays the required CPI firmware revision of the fieldbus adapter as defined in the configuration file stored in the memory of the drive. The CPI firmware version of the fieldbus adapter (refer to par. 51.32) must contain the same or a later CPI version to be compatible. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07. Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module.
These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the module manual. Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible.
Fieldbus control
194
Parameter 51.29 FILE CONFIG ID*
Alternative settings xyz (binary coded decimal)
Setting for fieldbus control
Function/Information Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration file identification stored in the memory of the drive. This information is drive application programdependent. Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration file revision stored in the memory of the drive. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 1 = revision 0.01. Displays the status of the adapter module. IDLE = Adapter not configured. EXEC. INIT = Adapter initialising. TIME OUT = A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive. CONFIG ERROR = Adapter configuration error. The major or minor revision code of the CPI program revision in the drive is not the revision required by the module (refer to par. 51.32) or configuration file upload has failed more than five times. OFF-LINE = Adapter is off-line. ON-LINE = Adapter is on-line. RESET = Adapter performing a hardware reset.
51.30 FILE CONFIG REV*
xyz (binary coded decimal)
51.31 FBA STATUS*
(0) IDLE (1) EXEC. INIT (2) TIME OUT (3) CONFIG ERROR (4) OFF-LINE (5) ON-LINE (6) RESET
51.32 FBA CPI FW REV*
Displays the CPI program revision of the module inserted in slot 1. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07. Displays the application program revision of the module inserted in slot 1. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
51.33 FBA APPL FW REV*
*Parameters 51.27 to 51.33 are only visible when type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is installed.
After the module configuration parameters in group 51 have been set, the drive control parameters (section Drive control parameters on page 199) must be checked and adjusted where necessary. The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when parameter 51.27 is activated.
Fieldbus control
195
Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link

An RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter installed in slot 1 or 2 of the drive forms an interface called the Standard Modbus Link. The Standard Modbus Link can be used for external control of the drive by a Modbus controller (RTU protocol only). Before configuring the drive for Modbus control, the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual of the drive, and the module manual. The following table lists the parameters, which need to be defined when setting up communication through the standard Modbus link.
Parameter Alternative settings Setting for control through Standard Modbus Link Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 98.02 NO FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS CUSTOMISED ABB DRIVES GENERIC CSA 2.8/3.0 STD MODBUS Initialises communication between drive (Standard Modbus Link) and Modbus-protocol controller. Activates communication parameters in group 52. Selects the communication profile used by the drive. See section Communication profiles on page 210.
98.07
ABB DRIVES
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS 52.01 52.02 1 to 247 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 ODD EVEN NONE1STOPBIT NONE2STOPBIT Specifies the station number of the drive on the Standard Modbus Link. Defines the communication speed for the Standard Modbus Link.
52.03
Selects the parity setting for the Standard Modbus Link.
After the communication parameters in group 52 have been set, the drive control parameters (section Drive control parameters on page 199) must be checked and adjusted where necessary.
Fieldbus control
196
Modbus addressing In the Modbus controller memory, the Control Word, the Status Word, the references, and the actual values are mapped as follows:
Data from fieldbus controller to drive Address 40001 40002 40003 40007 40008 40009 Contents Control Word Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference 3 Reference 4 Reference 5 Data from drive to fieldbus controller Address 40004 40005 40006 40010 40011 40012 Contents Status Word Actual 1 Actual 2 Actual 3 Actual 4 Actual 5
More information on Modbus communication is available from the Modicon website http://www.modicon.com.
Fieldbus control
197
Setting up communication through Advant controller

The Advant controller is connected via DDCS link to channel CH0 of the RDCO module. AC 800M Advant Controller DriveBus connection: CI858 DriveBus Communication Interface required. See CI858 DriveBus Communication Interface Users Manual, [3AFE 68237432 (English)]. Optical ModuleBus connection: TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required. See section Optical ModuleBus connection below. For more information, see AC 800M Controller Hardware Manual [3BSE027941 (English)], AC 800M/C Communication, Protocols and Design Manual [3BSE028811 (English),] ABB Industrial Systems, Vsters, Sweden. AC 80 Advant Controller Optical ModuleBus connection: TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required. See section Optical ModuleBus connection below. CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required. The TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface is equipped with 5 MBd optical components and the TB810 is equipped with 10 MBd components. All optical components on a fibre optic link must be of the same type since 5 MBd components do not match with 10 MBd components. The choice between TB810 and TB811 depends on the equipment it is connected to. With RDCO Communication Option Module, the Interface is selected as follows:
Optional ModuleBus Port Interface TB811 TB810 DDCS Communication Option Module RDCO-01 RDCO-02 RDCO-03
If branching unit NDBU-85/95 is used with CI810A, TB810 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface must be used.
Fieldbus control
198
The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up communication between the drive and Advant controller.
Parameter Alternative settings Setting for control through CH0 Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 98.02 NO FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS CUSTOMISED ABB DRIVES GENERIC CSA 2.8/3.0 0-254 ADVANT Initialises communication between drive (fibre optic channel CH0) and Advant controller. The transmission speed is 4 Mbit/s. Selects the communication profile used by the drive. See section Communication profiles on page 210. Defines the node address for DDCS channel CH0. Selects the topology of the channel CH0 link.
98.07
ABB DRIVES
70.01
AC 800M ModuleBus 1...125 AC 80 ModuleBus 17-125 FCI (CI810A) 17-125
70.04
RING STAR
After the communication initialisation parameters have been set, the drive control parameters (section Drive control parameters on page 199) must be checked and adjusted where necessary. In an Optical ModuleBus connection, channel 0 address (parameter 70.01) is calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the appropriate database element (for the AC 80, DRISTD) as follows: 1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16. 2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result. For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the value of 110 (the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring), parameter 70.01 must be set to 16 1 + 10 = 26.
Fieldbus control
199
Drive control parameters

After the fieldbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters listed in the table below must be checked and adjusted where necessary. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter. The fieldbus signal routes and message composition are explained later in section The fieldbus control interface on page 202.
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION 10.01 10.02 10.03 COMM.CW COMM.CW FORWARD REVERSE or REQUEST 0 or 1 Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except 03.01 Main Control Word bit 11) when EXT1 is selected as the active control location. See also par. 10.07. Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except 03.01 Main Control Word bit 11) when EXT2 is selected as the active control location. Enables rotation direction control as defined by parameters 10.01 and 10.02. The direction control is explained in section Reference handling on page 204. Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par. 10.01 so that the fieldbus Control Word (except 03.01 Main Control Word bit 11) is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active control location. Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected (see par. 98.07). Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory. 10.08 0 or 1 Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par. 11.03 so that Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is selected as the active control location. Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected (see par. 98.07). Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory. 11.02 11.03 COMM.CW COMM.REF1 FAST COMM COM.REF1+AI1 COM.REF1+AI5 COM.REF1*AI1 or COM.REF1*AI5 COMM.REF2 FAST COMM COM.REF2+AI1 COM.REF2+AI5 COM.REF2*AI1 or COM.REF2*AI5 Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection by fieldbus Control Word bit 11 EXT CTRL LOC. Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is selected as the active control location. See section References on page 203 for information on the alternative settings.
10.07
11.06
Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is selected as the active control location. See section References on page 203 for information on the alternative settings.
Fieldbus control
200
Parameter
Setting for fieldbus control
Function/Information
OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION 14.01 14.02 14.03 15.01 15.06 COM.REF3 COM.REF3 COM.REF3 COMM.REF4 COMM.REF5 Enables relay output RO1 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 13. Enables relay output RO2 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 14. Enables relay output RO3 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 15. Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF4 to analogue output AO1. Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF5 to analogue output AO2. Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS 16.01 COMM.CW Enables the control of the Run Enable signal through fieldbus 03.01 Main Control Word bit 3. Note: Must be set to YES when the Generic Drive communication profile is selected (see par. 98.07). 16.04 COMM.CW Enables fault reset through fieldbus 03.01 Main Control Word bit 7. Note: Reset through fieldbus Control Word (03.01 bit 7) is enabled automatically and it is independent of parameter 16.04 setting if parameter 10.01 or 10.02 is set to COMM.CW. 16.07 DONE; SAVE Saves parameter value changes (including those made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory.
COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS 30.18 FAULT NO CONST SP15 LAST SPEED Determines drive action in case fieldbus communication is lost. Note: The communication loss detection is based on monitoring of received Main and Auxiliary data sets (whose sources are selected with parameters 90.04 and 90.05 respectively). Defines the time between Main Reference data set loss detection and the action selected with parameter 30.18. Determines the state in which relay outputs RO1 to RO3 and analogue outputs AO1 and AO2 are left upon loss of the Auxiliary Reference data set. Defines the time between Auxiliary Reference data set loss detection and the action selected with parameter 30.18. Note: This supervision function is disabled if this parameter, or parameters 90.01, 90.02 and 90.03 are set to 0. FIELDBUS REFERENCE TARGET SELECTION 90.01 0 8999 Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF3 is written. Format: xxyy, where xx = parameter group (10 to 89), yy = parameter Index. E.g. 3001 = parameter 30.01.
30.19 30.20 30.21
0.1 60.0 s ZERO LAST VALUE 0.0 60.0 s
Fieldbus control
201
Parameter 90.02
Setting for fieldbus control 0 8999
Function/Information Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF4 is written. Format: see parameter 90.01.
90.03
0 8999
Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF5 is written. Format: see parameter 90.01.
90.04
1 (Fieldbus Control) or 81 (Standard Modbus Control) 3 (Fieldbus Control) or 83 (Standard Modbus Control)
If 98.02 is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter selects the source from which the drive reads the Main Reference data set (comprising the fieldbus Control Word, fieldbus reference REF1, and fieldbus reference REF2). If 98.02 is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter selects the source from which the drive reads the Auxiliary Reference data set (comprising fieldbus references REF3, REF4 and REF5).
90.05
ACTUAL SIGNAL SELECTION FOR FIELDBUS 92.01 92.02 302 (Fixed) 0 9999 The Status Word is transmitted to as the first word of the Main Actual Signal data set. Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the second word (ACT1) of the Main Actual Signal data set. Format: (x)xyy, where (x)x = actual signal group or parameter group, yy = actual signal or parameter index. E.g. 103 = actual signal 1.03 FREQUENCY; 2202 = parameter 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1. Note: With the Generic Drive communication profile active (par. 98.07 = GENERIC), this parameter is fixed to 102 (actual signal 1.02 SPEED in DTC motor control mode) or 103 (1.03 FREQUENCY in Scalar mode). 92.03 0 9999 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the third word (ACT2) of the Main Actual Signal data set. Format: see parameter 92.02. 92.04 0 9999 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the first word (ACT3) of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set. Format: see parameter 92.02. 92.05 0 9999 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the second word (ACT4) of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set. Format: see parameter 92.02. 92.06 0 9999 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the third word (ACT5) of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set. Format: see parameter 92.02. 92.07 92.08 92.09 -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768 C.32767 -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768 C.32767 -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768 C.32767 Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 10 is read from. Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 13 is read from. Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 14 is read from.
Fieldbus control
202
The fieldbus control interface

The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive employs data sets. One data set (abbreviated DS) consists of three 16-bit words called data words (DW). The Standard Control Program supports the use of four data sets, two in each direction. The two data sets for controlling the drive are referred to as the Main Reference data set and the Auxiliary Reference data set. The sources from which the drive reads the Main and Auxiliary Reference data sets are defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05 respectively. The contents of the Main Reference data set are fixed. The contents of the Auxiliary Reference data set can be selected using parameters 90.01, 90.02 and 90.03. The two data sets containing actual information on the drive are referred to as the Main Actual Signal data set and the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set. The contents of both data sets are partly selectable with the parameters at group 92.
Data from fieldbus controller to drive Word *Index 1 2 3 *Index 7 8 9 Contents Selector *Index (Fixed) (Fixed) (Fixed) 4 5 6 *Index 10 11 12 Data from drive to fieldbus controller Word Contents Selector
Main Reference data set DS1 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Control Word Reference 1 Reference 2
Main Actual Signal data set DS2 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Status Word Actual 1 Actual 2 (Fixed) **Par. 92.02 Par. 92.03
Auxiliary Reference data set DS3 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Reference 3 Reference 4 Reference 5 Par. 90.01 Par. 90.02 Par. 90.03
Aux. Actual Signal data set DS4 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Actual 3 Actual 4 Actual 5 Par. 92.04 Par. 92.05 Par. 92.06
*The index number is required when data word allocation to process data is defined via the fieldbus parameters at group 51. This function is dependent on the type of the fieldbus adapter. **With the Generic Drive communication profile active, Actual 1 is fixed to actual signal 01.02 SPEED (in DTC motor control mode) or 01.03 FREQUENCY (in Scalar mode). The update time for the Main Reference and Main Actual Signal data sets is 6 milliseconds; for the Auxiliary Reference and Auxiliary Actual Signal data sets, it is 100 milliseconds.
Fieldbus control
203
The Control Word and the Status Word The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is effective when the active control location (EXT1 or EXT2, see parameters 10.01 and 10.02) is set to COMM.CW, or if par. 10.07 is set to 1 (with Generic Drive communication profile only). The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control Word. The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller. See section Communication profiles on page 210 for information on the composition of the Control Word and the Status Word. References References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the twos complement from the corresponding positive reference value. Fieldbus reference selection and correction Fieldbus reference (called COM.REF in signal selection contexts) is selected by setting a Reference selection parameter 11.03 or 11.06 to COMM.REFx, FAST COMM, COM.REFx+AI1, COM.REFx+AI5, COM.REFx*AI1 or COM.REFx*AI5. (With Generic Drive communication profile, fieldbus reference is also selected when par. 10.08 is set to 1.) The latter four selections enable correction of the fieldbus reference using analogue inputs as shown below. (An optional RAIO-01 Analogue I/O Extension Module is required for use of Analogue input AI5). COMM.REF1 (in 11.03) or COMM.REF2 (in 11.06) The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. FAST COMM The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. The reference is read every 2 milliseconds if either of the following conditions is met: Control location is EXT1, par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, and par. 40.14 TRIM MODE is OFF Control location is EXT2, par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, par. 40.14 TRIM MODE is OFF, and a torque reference is used. In any other event, the fieldbus reference is read every 6 milliseconds. Note: The FAST COMM selection disables the critical speed function.
Fieldbus control
204
COM.REF1+AI1; COM.REF1+AI5; COM.REF1*AI1; COM.REF1*AI5 (in 11.03) COM.REF2+AI1; COM.REF2+AI5; COM.REF2*AI1; COM.REF2*AI5 (in 11.06) These selections enable the correction of the fieldbus reference as follows:
Parameter Setting COM.REFx+AI1 COM.REFx+AI5
Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient
Effect of AI1/AI5 Input Voltage on Fieldbus Reference
(100 + 0.5 [par. 13.03])%
100%
(100 0.5 [par. 13.03])% 0 5V 10 V AI1/AI5 Input Voltage
COM.REFx*AI1 COM.REFx*AI5
Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient
100%
50%
0% 0 5V 10 V AI1/AI5 Input Voltage
Reference handling The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and EXT2) using the parameters in group 10. Fieldbus references are bipolar, i.e. they can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference REF1/REF2. Notes: With the ABB Drives communication profile, 100% reference is defined by parameters 11.05 (REF1) and 11.08 (REF2). With the Generic Drive communication profile, 100% reference is defined by parameter 99.08 in DTC motor control mode (REF1), or 99.07 in scalar control mode (REF1), and by parameter 11.08 (REF2). External reference scaling parameters 11.04 and 11.07 are also in effect. For information on the scaling of the fieldbus reference, see section Fieldbus reference scaling on page 214 (for ABB Drives profile) or Fieldbus reference scaling on page 217 (for Generic Drive profile).
Fieldbus control
205
*Direction determined by the sign of COM.REF par. 10.03 DIRECTION = FORWARD

Resultant REF1/2
Direction determined by digital command, e.g. digital input, control panel

Resultant REF1/2
Max.Ref.
Max.Ref.
Fieldbus Ref. 1/2
-100% -163% [Max.Ref.]
100% 163%
Fieldbus Ref. 1/2
-100% -163% [Max.Ref.]
100% 163%
par. 10.03 DIRECTION = REVERSE
Resultant REF1/2
Resultant REF1/2
Max.Ref. -163% -100% 163% 100% -163% -100%
Max.Ref. 163% 100%
Fieldbus Ref. 1/2
Fieldbus Ref. 1/2
[Max.Ref.]
[Max.Ref.]
par. 10.03 DIRECTION = REQUEST
Resultant REF1/2
Resultant REF1/2
Direction Command: FORWARD
Max.Ref. -163% -100% 100% 163% [Max.Ref.]
Max.Ref.
Fieldbus Ref. 1/2
Fieldbus Ref. 1/2
-100% -163% [Max.Ref.]
100% 163%
Direction Command: REVERSE
*Direction is determined by the sign of COM.REF when par. 10.01/10.02 EXTx STRT/STP/DIR is set to COMM.CW OR par. 11.03/11.06 EXT REFx SELECT is set to FAST COMM.
Actual Values Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in group 92. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the selected function; please refer to chapter Actual signals and parameters.
Fieldbus control
206
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used
COMM.CW DI1 11.02
10.01
DATA SET TABLE
NO
Fieldbus control
30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC 30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT COMM.CW DI1 03.01 MAIN CW
Words 1 n **
Fieldbus Adapter Slot1 10.02

AI1 COMM.REF DS 1
ADVANT FIELDBUS
MAIN REFERENCE DATA SET CW REF1 AI1 COMM.REF REF2
Word 1 (Control word) Word 2 (Speed/freq ref.*) Word 3

DS
01.11 EXT REF1
DS 2
11.03
3 DS n PAR
PAR
STD MODBUS CUSTOMISED
DS 3
Word n
98.02
DS 4
01.12 EXT REF2
11.06
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DS 5
Bits 1315
90.01
Relay Outputs (see 14.0114.03)
PARAMETER TABLE 10.01
NO
Fieldbus specific selectors in Group 51** 97 98 DS 33 99

FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS CUSTOMISED
10.02
AUXILIARY REFERENCE DATA SET REF3 REF4 REF5
90.02
Analogue Output AO1 (see 15.01)
Addresses for words 3 n in format xxyy xx Address 00 yy = word no. in data set table 01 xx = par. group 99 yy = par. index in parameter table
98.02
89.99
90.03
30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC 30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO 30.21 AUX REF DS T-OUT
* Depends on the selected motor control mode (parameter 99.04).
** See the fieldbus adapter users manual for more information.
Block diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used
DATA SET TABLE Words 1 n ***
ACTUAL SIGNAL/ PARAMETER TABLE
92.01 *
DS 2
DS PAR 3
DS 1
Fieldbus Adapter (Slot 1)
1.01
MAIN ACTUAL SIGNAL DATA SET
1.02 DS 4
DS PAR n
92.02 **
STATUS WORD* ACT1** ACT2
DS 3
Word 1 (STATUS WORD) Word 2 (ACT1**) Word 3 Word n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3.99 DS 33
92.03
97 98 99
10.01
92.04
AUXILIARY ACTUAL SIGNAL DATA SET
Fieldbus specific selectors in Group 51 ***
ACT3 ACT4 ACT5
92.05
Addresses for words 3 n in format xxyy xx Address 00 yy = word no. in data set table 01 xx = par. group 99 yy = par. index in parameter table
99.99
92.06
* Fixed to 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD (bits 10, 13 and 14 are programmable).
** Fixed to 01.02 SPEED (DTC control) or 01.03 FREQUENCY (Scalar control) when Generic communication profile is used.
Fieldbus control
*** See the fieldbus adapter users manual for more information.
207
208
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used
COMM.CW DI1
Fieldbus control
11.02
30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC 30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT DATA SET TABLE
10.01
NO
DI1 COMM.CW
03.01 MAIN CW
3 words (6 bytes)
DS 1
ADVANT
FIELDBUS
MAIN REFERENCE DATA SET
Fieldbus Adapter (CH0)

DS 2
STD MODBUS
10.02
AI1 COMM.REF
CW REF1 REF2
1 DS 3 255
CUSTOMISED
3 words (6 bytes)
01.11 EXT REF1 11.03
90.04
DS 4 COMM.REF AI1
98.02
Modbus Controller
DS 81
NO
01.12 EXT REF2 11.06
40001 40002 40003
3 words (6 bytes)
DS 82
ADVANT
Standard Modbus Link (RMBA) (Slot 1/2)

FIELDBUS
Bits 1315
90.01
Relay Outputs (see 14.0114.03)
PARAMETER TABLE 10.01
40007 40008 40009
3 words (6 bytes)
DS 83 1 DS 84 255
CUSTOMISED
STD MODBUS
AUXILIARY REFERENCE DATA SET REF3 REF4 REF5
10.02
90.05
98.02
90.02
30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC 30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO 30.21 AUX REF DS T-OUT
89.99
90.03
Block Diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used
DATA SET TABLE
ACTUAL SIGNAL/ PARAMETER TABLE
92.01*
DS 2
3 words (6 bytes)
DS 1
1.01
MAIN ACTUAL SIGNAL DATA SET
1.02 DS 4
92.02
STATUS WORD* ACT1** ACT2
DS 3
3 words (6 bytes)
Fieldbus Adapter (CH0)
3.99
92.03
DS 81
Modbus Controller
DS 82
3 words (6 bytes)
10.01
92.04
DS 83 AUXILIARY ACTUAL SIGNAL DATA SET
Standard Modbus Link
40004 40005 40006
99.99
DS 84
92.05
ACT3 ACT4 ACT5
3 words (6 bytes)
40010 40011 40012
92.06
* Fixed to 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD (bits 10, 13 and 14 are programmable).
Fieldbus control
** Fixed to 01.02 SPEED (DTC motor control) or 0103 FREQUENCY (Scalar control) when Generic communication profile is used.
209
210
Communication profiles
The ACS800 supports three communication profiles: ABB Drives communication profile Generic Drive communication profile. CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile. The ABB Drives communication profile should be selected with type Nxxx fieldbus adapter modules, and when the manufacturer-specific mode is selected (via the PLC) with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules. The Generic Drive profile is supported by type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules only. The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile can be selected for backward compatibility with Application Program versions 2.8 and 3.0. This eliminates the need for reprogramming the PLC when drives with the above-mentioned program versions are replaced. ABB Drives communication profile The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to ABB DRIVES. The Control Word, Status Word, and reference scaling for the profile are described below. The ABB Drives communication profile can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2. The Control Word commands are in effect when par. 10.01 or 10.02 (whichever control location is active) is set to COMM.CW.
Fieldbus control
211
03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 1.
Bit 0 Name Value 0 1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 0 2 OFF3 CONTROL 1 0 Enter STATE/Description Enter READY TO OPERATE. Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (22.03/22.05). Enter OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active. Continue operation (OFF2 inactive). Emergency OFF, coast to stop. Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. Continue operation (OFF3 inactive). Emergency stop, stop within time defined by par. 22.07. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode. 3 INHIBIT_ OPERATION 1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run Enable signal must be active; see parameter 16.01. If par. 16.01 is set to COMM.CW, this bit also activates the Run Enable signal.) Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED. Normal operation. Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED. Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force). Enable ramp function. Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED. 0 6 7 8 9 10 RAMP_IN_ ZERO RESET INCHING_1 INCHING_2 REMOTE_CMD 1 0 01 0 1 10 1 10 1 0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held). Normal operation. Enter OPERATING. Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero. Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. Continue normal operation. Not in use. Not in use. Not in use. Not in use. Fieldbus control enabled. Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference. Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled. Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked. Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW. Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW. OFF1 CONTROL 1
0 4 RAMP_OUT_ ZERO 1 0 5 RAMP_HOLD 1
11 12 15
EXT CTRL LOC Reserved
1 0
Fieldbus control
212
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 1.
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Name RDY_ON RDY_RUN RDY_REF TRIPPED OFF_2_STA OFF_3_STA SWC_ON_INHIB ALARM AT_SETPOINT Value 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Warning/Alarm. No Warning/Alarm. OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance limits i.e in speed control the speed error is less than or equal to 10% of the nominal motor speed). Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance limits). Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2). Drive control location: LOCAL. Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92.07 MSW B10 PTR. The default value is signal 03.14 bit 9 ABOVE_LIMIT: Actual frequency or speed value equals or exceeds the supervision limit (par. 32.02). 0 11 12 13 14 15 1 0 EXT CTRL LOC EXT RUN ENABLE 1 0 1 0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit. External Control Location EXT2 selected. External Control Location EXT1 selected. External Run Enable signal received. No External Run Enable received. Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92.08 MSW B13 PTR. By default no address has been selected. Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92.09 MSW B14 PTR. By default no address has been selected. Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module (on fibre optic channel CH0). Fieldbus adapter (CH0) communication OK. STATE/Description READY TO SWITCH ON. NOT READY TO SWITCH ON. READY TO OPERATE. OFF1 ACTIVE. OPERATION ENABLED. OPERATION INHIBITED. FAULT. No fault. OFF2 inactive. OFF2 ACTIVE. OFF3 inactive. OFF3 ACTIVE. SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0 9 10 REMOTE ABOVE_LIMIT 1 0 1
Fieldbus control
213
MAINS OFF Power ON
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
(SW Bit6=1)
(CW Bit0=0)
A B C D
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
ABB Drives Communication Profile

CW = Control Word SW = Status Word n = Speed I = Input Current RFG = Ramp Function Generator f = Frequency
(SW Bit0=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110) (CW Bit3=0) READY TO SWITCH ON (SW Bit2=0)
OPERATION INHIBITED operation inhibited
(SW Bit0=1) from any state
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111) Fault READY TO OPERATE FAULT (SW Bit1=1)
(SW Bit3=1)
from any state (CW Bit7=1) OFF1 (CW Bit0=0) OFF1 ACTIVE (CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111 and SW Bit12=1) from any state (SW Bit1=0) n(f)=0 / I=0 B C D (CW Bit3=1 and SW Bit12=1) Emergency Stop OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF3 ACTIVE from any state Emergency OFF OFF2 (CW Bit1=0) OFF2 ACTIVE
(SW Bit5=0)
(SW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0 (CW Bit4=0)
C D A (CW Bit5=0)
OPERATION ENABLED
(SW Bit2=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111) RFG: OUTPUT ENABLED B
(CW Bit6=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111) RFG: ACCELERATOR ENABLED C (CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111) OPERATING D
(SW Bit8=1)
Figure 1 State Machine for the ABB Drives communication profile.
Fieldbus control
214
Fieldbus reference scaling With the ABB Drives communication profile active, fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the table below. Note: Any correction of the reference is applied before scaling. See section References on page 203.
Ref. No. REF1 Application Macro used (par. 99.02) (any) Range Reference type Scaling Notes
-32768 ... 32767
Speed or Frequency (not with FAST COMM)
-20000 = -[par. 11.05] -1 = -[par. 11.04] 0 = [par. 11.04] 20000 = [par. 11.05]
Final reference limited by 20.01/20.02 [speed] or 20.07/20.08 [frequency].
Speed or Frequency with FAST COMM
-20000 = -[par. 11.05] 0=0 20000 = [par. 11.05]
Final reference limited by 20.01/20.02 [speed] or 20.07/20.08 [frequency]. Final reference limited by 20.01/20.02 [speed] or 20.07/20.08 [frequency]. Final reference limited by 20.01/20.02 [speed] or 20.07/20.08 [frequency]. Final reference limited by par. 20.04.
REF2
FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, or SEQ CTRL
-32768 ... 32767
Speed or Freq. (not with FAST COMM)
-20000 = -[par. 11.08] -1 = -[par. 11.07] 0 = [par. 11.07] 20000 = [par. 11.08] -20000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 20000 = [par. 11.08] -10000 = -[par. 11.08] -1 = -[par. 11.07] 0 = [par. 11.07] 10000 = [par. 11.08] -10000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 10000 = [par. 11.08] -10000 = -[par. 11.08] -1 = -[par. 11.07] 0 = [par. 11.07] 10000 = [par. 11.08] -10000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 10000 = [par. 11.08]
Speed or Freq. with FAST COMM T CTRL or M/F (optional) -32768 ... 32767 Torque (not with FAST COMM)
Torque with FAST COMM PID CTRL -32768 ... 32767 PID Reference (not with FAST COMM) PID Reference with FAST COMM
Final reference limited by par. 20.04.
Fieldbus control
215
Generic Drive communication profile The Generic Drive communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to GENERIC. The Generic Drive profile realises the device profile for drives speed control only as defined by specific fieldbus standards such as PROFIDRIVE for PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet, Drives and Motion Control for CANopen, etc. Each device profile specifies its Control and Status Words, Reference and Actual value scaling. The profiles also define Mandatory services which are transferred to the application interface of the drive in a standardised way. The Generic Drive communication profile can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2*. The proper functioning of the Generic Drive profile requires that Control Word commands are enabled by setting parameter 10.01 or 10.02 (whichever control location is active) to COMM.CW (or par. 10.07 to 1) and by setting parameter 16.01 to YES. *For vendor specific support of EXT2 reference, see appropriate fieldbus manual. Note: The Generic Drive profile is only available with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules.
Fieldbus control
216
Drive commands supported by the Generic Drive communication profile

Name STOP START Description The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the active deceleration ramp (parameter 22.03 or 22.05). The drive accelerates to the set reference value according to the active acceleration ramp (par. 22.02 or 22.04). The direction of rotation is determined by the sign of the reference value and the setting of par. 10.03. The drive coasts to stop, i.e. the drive stops modulating. However, this command can be overridden by the Brake Control function, which forces the drive to decelerate to zero speed by the active deceleration ramp. When the Brake Control function is active, Coast stop and Emergency coast stop (OFF2) commands given after the Emergency ramp stop (OFF3) coast the drive to a stop. The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed within the emergency stop deceleration time defined by par. 22.07. The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the set current limit (par. 20.03) or torque limit (20.04), whichever is first reached. The same procedure is valid in case of a Voltage Limit Stop (VLS). With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 12 (defined by par. 12.13). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed. Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the current (or torque) limit of the drive. Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2. Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode. With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 13 (defined by par. 12.14). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed. Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the current (or torque) limit of the drive. Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2. Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode. When active, forces the output of the reference function generator to zero. When active, freezes the reference function generator output. Trips the drive. The drive will indicate fault FORCED TRIP. Resets an active fault.
COAST STOP
QUICK STOP CURRENT LIMIT STOP (CLS) INCHING1
INCHING2
RAMP OUT ZERO RAMP HOLD FORCED TRIP RESET
Fieldbus control
217
Fieldbus reference scaling With the Generic Drive communication profile active, the speed reference value received from the fieldbus and the actual speed value received from the drive are scaled as shown in the table below. Note: Any correction of the reference (see section References on page 203) is applied before scaling.
Ref. No. REF1 Application Macro used (par. 99.02) (any) Range Reference type Speed or Frequency Speed reference scaling 0=0 20000 = [par. 99.08 (DTC) / 99.07 (scalar)]** -20000 = -[par. 11.08] -1 = -[par. 11.07] 0 = [par. 11.07] 20000 = [par. 11.08] Actual speed scaling* 0=0 20000 = [par. 99.08 (DTC) / 99.07 (scalar)]** 0=0 20000 = [par. 99.08 (DTC) / 99.07 (scalar)]** Final reference limited by 20.01/20.02 [speed] or 20.07/20.08 [frequency] Final reference limited by 20.01/20.02 [speed] or 20.07/20.08 [frequency] Final reference limited by par. 20.04 Notes
-32768... 32767
REF2
FACTORY, HAND/AUT or SEQ CTRL
-32768... 32767
Speed or Freq. (not with FAST COMM)
Speed or Freq. with FAST COMM
-20000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 20000 = [par. 11.08]
0=0 20000 = [par. 99.08 (DTC) / 99.07 (scalar)]**
T CTRL or M/F (optional)
-32768... 32767
Torque (not with FAST COMM)
-10000 = -[par. 11.08] -1 = -[par. 11.07] 0 = [par. 11.07] 10000 = [par. 11.08] -10000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 10000 = [par. 11.08]
0=0 20000 = [par. 99.08 (DTC) / 99.07 (scalar)]** 0=0 20000 = [par. 99.08 (DTC) / 99.07 (scalar)]** 0=0 20000 = [par. 99.08 (DTC) / 99.07 (scalar)]** 0=0 20000 = [par. 99.08 (DTC) / 99.07 (scalar)]**
Torque with FAST COMM
Final reference limited by par. 20.04
PID CTRL
-32768... 32767
PID Reference (not with FAST COMM)
-10000 = -[par. 11.08] -1 = -[par. 11.07] 0 = [par. 11.07] 10000 = [par. 11.08] -10000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 10000 = [par. 11.08]
PID Reference with FAST COMM
* With DTC the filter time of the actual speed value can be adjusted using parameter 34.04. ** Note: The maximum reference value is 163% (i.e. 163% = 1.63 value of parameter 99.08/99.07 value).
Fieldbus control
218
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to CSA 2.8/3.0. The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below. CONTROL WORD for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15 Name Reserved ENABLE Reserved START/STOP Reserved CNTRL_MODE Reserved Reserved RESET_FAULT Reserved 0 1 Reset drive fault. 1 0 Select control mode 2. Select control mode 1. 0 1 Start. 0 Stop according to parameter 21.03 STOP FUNCTION. 1 0 Enabled. Coast to stop. Value Description
STATUS WORD for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Name READY ENABLE Reserved RUNNING Reserved REMOTE Reserved AT_SETPOINT FAULTED WARNING LIMIT 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 11 15 Reserved Drive at reference Drive not at reference A fault is active. No active faults A warning is active. No active warnings Drive at a limit Drive at no limit 1 0 Drive in Remote mode Drive in Local mode 1 0 Running with selected reference. Stopped. Value Description 1 0 1 0 Ready to start. Initialising, or initialising error. Enabled. Coast to stop.
The reference and actual scaling is equal to that of the ABB Drives profile.
Fieldbus control
219
Diverse status, fault, alarm and limit words

03.03 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name Reserved OUT OF WINDOW Reserved MAGNETIZED Reserved SYNC RDY 1 START NOT DONE IDENTIF RUN DONE START INHIBITION LIMITING TORQ CONTROL ZERO SPEED INTERNAL SPEED FB M/F COMM ERR Reserved Position counter synchronised. Drive has not been started after changing the motor parameters in group 99. Motor ID Run successfully completed. Safe torque off function or Prevention of unexpected start-up is active. Control at a limit. See actual signal 3.04 LIMIT WORD 1 below. Torque reference is followed*. Absolute value of motor actual speed is below zero speed limit (4% of synchronous speed). Internal speed feedback followed. Master/Follower link (on CH2) communication error*. Flux has been formed in the motor. Speed difference is out of the window (in speed control)*. Description
*See the Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFY58962180 (English)].
Fieldbus control
220
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name TORQ MOTOR LIM SPD_TOR_MIN_LIM SPD_TOR_MAX_LIM TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM TORQ_MIN_LIM TORQ_MAX_LIM TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM FLUX_MIN_LIM FREQ_MIN_LIMIT FREQ_MAX_LIMIT DC_UNDERVOLT DC_OVERVOLT TORQUE LIMIT FREQ_LIMIT Active Limit Pull-out limit Speed control torque min. limit Speed control torque max. limit User-defined current limit Internal current limit Any torque min. limit Any torque max. limit Torque reference min. limit Torque reference max. limit Flux reference min. limit Speed/Frequency min. limit Speed/Frequency max. limit DC undervoltage limit DC overvoltage limit Any torque limit Any speed/frequency limit
03.05 FAULT WORD 1

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 Name SHORT CIRC OVERCURRENT DC OVERVOLT ACS800 TEMP EARTH FAULT THERMISTOR MOTOR TEMP SYSTEM_FAULT UNDERLOAD OVERFREQ Reserved A fault is indicated by the System Fault Word (Actual Signal 3.07). For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
Fieldbus control
221
03.06 FAULT WORD 2

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name SUPPLY PHASE NO MOT DATA DC UNDERVOLT Reserved RUN ENABLE ENCODER ERR I/O COMM CTRL B TEMP EXTERNAL FLT OVER SWFREQ AI < MIN FUNC PPCC LINK COMM MODULE PANEL LOSS MOTOR STALL MOTOR PHASE For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
Fieldbus control
222
03.07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name FLT (F1_7) USER MACRO FLT (F1_4) FLT (F1_5) FLT (F2_12) FLT (F2_13) FLT (F2_14) FLT (F2_15) FLT (F2_16) FLT (F2_17) FLT (F2_18) FLT (F2_19) FLT (F2_3) FLT (F2_1) FLT (F2_0) Reserved Description Factory default parameter file error User Macro file error FPROM operating error FPROM data error Internal time level 2 overflow Internal time level 3 overflow Internal time level 4 overflow Internal time level 5 overflow State machine overflow Application program execution error Application program execution error Illegal instruction Register stack overflow System stack overflow System stack underflow
03.08 ALARM WORD 1

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 12 13 14 15 Name START INHIBIT Reserved THERMISTOR MOTOR TEMP ACS800 TEMP ENCODER ERR T MEAS ALM Reserved COMM MODULE Reserved EARTH FAULT Reserved For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
Fieldbus control
223
03.09 ALARM WORD 2

Bit 0 1 2, 3 4 5, 6 7 8 9 10 11, 12 13 14, 15 Name Reserved UNDERLOAD Reserved ENCODER Reserved POWFAIL FILE (FFA0) ALM (OS_17) MOTOR STALL AI < MIN FUNC Reserved PANEL LOSS Reserved For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Error in restoring POWERFAIL.DDF Error in restoring POWERDOWN.DDF For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description
03.13 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1215 Name REVERSED EXT CTRL REF 2 SEL CONST SPEED STARTED USER 2 SEL OPEN BRAKE LOSS OF REF STOP DI STATUS READY DATASET STATUS MACRO CHG Reserved Description Motor rotates in reverse direction. External control is selected. Reference 2 is selected. A Constant Speed (115) is selected. The drive has received a Start command. User Macro 2 has been loaded. The Open Brake command is ON. See group 42 BRAKE CONTROL. The reference has been lost. The state of the interlock input on the RMIO board. Ready to function: Run enable signal on, no fault Data set has not been updated. Macro is changing or is being saved.
Fieldbus control
224
03.14 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 Name SPEED 1 LIM SPEED 2 LIM CURRENT LIM REF 1 LIM REF 2 LIM TORQUE 1 LIM Description Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision limit 1. See group 32 SUPERVISION. Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision limit 2. See group 32 SUPERVISION. Motor current has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION. Reference 1 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION. Reference 2 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION. The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the TORQUE1 supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION. The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the TORQUE2 supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION. PID controller actual value 1 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION. PID controller actual value 2 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION. 1 = Actual frequency or speed value equals or exceeds the supervision limit (par. 32.02). 0 = Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit. 10 15 Reserved
TORQUE 2 LIM
7 8 9
ACT 1 LIM ACT 2 LIM ABOVE_LIMIT
03.15 FAULT WORD 4

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 15 Name CHOKE OTEMP MOTOR 1 TEMP MOTOR 2 TEMP BRAKE ACKN Reserved Description Step-up module fault For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
Fieldbus control
225
03.16 ALARM WORD 4

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 Name FAN OTEMP MOTOR 1 TEMP MOTOR 2 TEMP BRAKE ACKN SLEEP MODE MACRO CHANGING Reserved User or Application macro is being saved or loaded Description Step-up module fan overtemperature alarm For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
03.17 FAULT WORD 5

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14...15 Name BR BROKEN BR WIRING BC SHORT CIR BR OVERHEAT BC OVERHEAT IN CHOKE TEMP PP OVERLOAD INV DISABLED TEMP DIF POWERF INV xx/ POWERFAIL INT CONFIG USER L CURVE Reserved INV OVERTEMP Reserved For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
Fieldbus control
226
03.18 ALARM WORD 5

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name REPLACE FAN SYNCRO SPEED BR OVERHEAT BC OVERHEAT IN CHOKE TEMP PP OVERLOAD INV DISABLED CUR UNBAL INV CUR LIM DC BUS LIM MOT CUR LIM MOT TORQ LIM MOT POW LIM USER L CURVE Reserved BATT FAILURE For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
03.19 INT INIT FAULT

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 15 Name AINT FAULT AINT FAULT AINT FAULT AINT FAULT AINT FAULT Reserved Description Wrong EPLD version Wrong AINT board revision Du/dt limitation hardware failure Current measurement scaling error Voltage measurement scaling error
This signal is active with AINT board.
Fieldbus control
227
03.30 LIMIT WORD INV The LIMIT WORD INV Word includes faults and warnings, which occur when the output current limit of the drive is exceeded. The current limit protects the drive in various cases, e.g. integrator overload, high IGBT temperature etc.
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 Name INTEGRAT 200 INTEGRAT 150 INT LOW FREQ INTG PP TEMP PP OVER TEMP PP OVERLOAD Description Current limit at 200% integrator overload. Temperature model is not active.* Current limit at 150% integrator overload. Temperature model is not active.* Current limit at high IGBT temperature with low output frequency (<10 Hz). Temperature model is not active.* Current limit at high IGBT temperature. Temperature model is not active.* Current limit at high IGBT temperature. Temperature model is active. Current limit at high IGBT junction to case temperature. Temperature model is active. If the IGBT junction to case temperature continues to rise in spite of the current limitation, PP OVERLOAD alarm or fault occurs. See chapter Fault tracing Current limit at inverter output power limit Current limit at inverter overcurrent trip limit Maximum inverter overload current limit. See par. 20.03. Continuous dc-current limit Continuous output current limit (Icont.max)
6 7 8 9 10 11...15
INV POW LIM INV TRIP CUR OVERLOAD CUR CONT DC CUR CONT OUT CUR Reserved
*Not active with ACS800 Factory macro default settings.
03.31 ALARM WORD 6

Bit 0 1...2 3 415 Name INV OVERTEMP Reserved ENC CABLE Reserved For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
Fieldbus control
228
03.32 EXT IO STATUS

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name EMSTOP MODULE ERROR EMSTOP OFF2 CMD EMSTOP OFF3 CMD FREE EMSTOP OFF3 STATUS EMSTOP TRIP STATUS STEPUP MODULE ERROR STEPUP CHOKE FLT CMD STEPUP FAN ALM CMD FREE STEPUP MODULATING STATUS STEPUP TRIP STATUS Reserved Description Emergency stop module is not communicating with the drive software. DI1 of emergency stop module. See 03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD bit1 OFF2 CONTROL. DI2 of emergency stop module. See 03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD bit2 OFF3 CONTROL. DI3 of emergency stop module. RO1 of emergency stop module. See 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD bit5 OFF_3_STA. Bit inverted. RO2 of emergency stop module. See 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD bit3 TRIPPED. Step up module is not communicating with the drive software. DI1 of Step-Up module. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing: CHOKE OTEMP (FF82). DI2 of Step-Up module. For possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing: FAN OTEMP (FF83). DI3 of Step-Up module. RO1 of Step-Up module. Drive is modulating. RO2 of Step-Up module. See 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD bit3 TRIPPED.
8 9 10 11 12-15
03.33 FAULT WORD 6

Bit 01 2 315 Name Reserved ENC CABLE Reserved For possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description
Fieldbus control
229
04.01 FAULTED INT INFO The FAULTED INT INFO Word includes information on the location of faults PPCC LINK, OVERCURRENT, EARTH FAULT, SHORT CIRCUIT, ACS800 TEMP, TEMP DIF and POWERF INV (see 03.05 FAULT WORD 1, 03.06 FAULT WORD 2, 03.17 FAULT WORD 5 and chapter Fault tracing).
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12...14 15 Name INT 1 FLT INT 2 FLT INT 3 FLT INT 4 FLT INT 5 FLT INT 6 FLT INT 7 FLT INT 8 FLT INT 9 FLT INT 10 FLT INT 11 FLT INT 12 FLT Reserved PBU FLT PBU board fault Description INT 1 board fault INT 2 board fault INT 3 board fault INT 4 board fault INT 5 board fault INT 6 board fault INT 7 board fault INT 8 board fault INT 9 board fault INT 10 board fault INT 11 board fault INT 12 board fault
Used only with parallel connected inverters.
Fieldbus control
230
Inverter Block Diagram RMIO

Upper-leg IGBTs
Motor Control and I/O Board Main Circuit Interface Board PPCS Link Branching Unit
INT PBU
RMIO
INT Lower-leg IGBTs
Inverter Unit Block Diagram (2 to 12 parallel inverters)

RMIO
PBU INT3 INT1 INT2
INT
INT
INT
...
04.02 INT SC INFO The INT SC INFO Word includes information on the location of the SHORT CIRCUIT fault (see 03.05 FAULT WORD 1 and chapter Fault tracing).
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6...15 Name U-PH SC U U-PH SC L V-PH SC U V-PH SC L W-PH SC U W-PH SC L Reserved Description Phase U upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit Phase U lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit Phase V upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit Phase V lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit Phase W upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit Phase W lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
Fieldbus control
231
Fault tracing
Chapter overview
The chapter lists all warning and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The Safety Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read before you start working with the drive.
Warning and fault indications

A warning or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status. Most warning and fault causes can be identified and corrected using this information. If not, an ABB representative should be contacted. If the drive is operated with the control panel detached, the red LED in the panel mounting platform indicates the fault condition. (Note: Some drive types are not fitted with the LEDs as standard). The four digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus communication. (See chapter Fieldbus control.)
How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been removed, the motor can be restarted.
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The latest faults and warnings are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected. The fault logger collects 64 of the latest faults. When the drive power is switched off, 16 of the latest faults are stored. See chapter Control panel for more information.
Fault tracing
232
Warning messages generated by the drive

WARNING ACS800 TEMP (4210)
3.08 AW 1 bit 4
CAUSE Drive IGBT temperature is excessive. Fault trip limit is 100%.
WHAT TO DO Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power.
AI < MIN FUNC (8110)

3.09 AW 2 bit 10
Analogue control signal is below minimum allowed value due to incorrect signal level or failure in control wiring.
Check for proper analogue control signal levels. Check control wiring. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable Fault Function 30.01) AD [message] BACKUP USED (FFA3) BATT FAILURE (5581)
3.18 AW 5 bit 15
Message generated by an EVENT block in the Adaptive Program. PC stored backup of drive parameters is downloaded into use. APBU branching unit memory backup battery error caused by - incorrect APBU switch S3 setting - too low battery voltage.
Consult the documentation or author of the Adaptive Program. Wait until download is completed.
With parallel connected inverters, enable backup battery by setting actuator 6 of switch S3 to ON. Replace backup battery. Stop drive. Let chopper cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see parameter group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive.
BC OVERHEAT (7114)
3.18 AW 5 bit 3
Brake chopper overload
BRAKE ACKN (FF74)

3.16 AW 4 bit 3
Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal
See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL. Check connection of brake acknowledgement signal.
BR OVERHEAT (7112)
3.18 AW 5 bit 2
Brake resistor overload
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see parameter group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
CALIBRA DONE (FF37) CALIBRA REQ (FF36)
Calibration of output current transformers is completed. Calibration of output current transformers is required. Displayed at start if drive is in scalar control (parameter 99.04) and scalar fly start feature is on (parameter 21.08).
Continue normal operation.
Calibration starts automatically. Wait for a while.
Fault tracing
233
WARNING COMM MODULE (7510)

3.08 AW 1 bit 12
CAUSE Cyclical communication between drive and master is lost.
WHAT TO DO Check status of fieldbus communication. See chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. Check parameter settings: - group 51 COMM MODULE DATA (for fieldbus adapter) - group 52 STANDARD MODBUS (for Standard Modbus Link). Check Fault Function parameters. Check cable connections. Check if master can communicate.
(programmable Fault Function 30.18, 30.19)
DC BUS LIM (3211)

3.18 AW5 bit 9
Drive limits torque due to too high or too low intermediate circuit DC voltage.
Informative alarm Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable Fault Function 30.23) EARTH FAULT (2330)

3.08 AW 1 bit 14
Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable.
Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables: - measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.
(programmable Fault Function 30.17)
ENC CABLE (7310)

3.31 AW 6 bit 3
Pulse encoder phase signal is missing.
Check pulse encoder and its wiring. Check pulse encoder interface module and its wiring.
(programmable Fault Function 50.07) ENCODER A<>B (7302)

3.09 AW 2 bit 4
Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is connected to terminal of phase B and vice versa. Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module and between module and drive Excessive temperature of drive output filter fan. Supervision is in use in step-up drives.
Interchange connection of pulse encoder phases A and B.
ENCODER ERR (7301)

3.08 AW 1 bit 5
Check pulse encoder and its wiring, pulse encoder interface module and its wiring, parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE settings. Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
FAN OTEMP (FF83)

3.16 AW 4 bit 0
HW RECONF RQ (FF38)
Inverter type (e.g. sr0025_3) has been changed. Inverter type is usually changed at factory or during drive implementation.
Wait until alarm POWEROFF! activates and switch control board power off to validate inverter type change.
Fault tracing
234
WARNING ID DONE (FF32) ID MAGN (FF31) ID MAGN REQ (FF30)
CAUSE Drive has performed motor identification magnetisation and is ready for operation. This warning belongs to normal start-up procedure. Motor identification magnetisation is on. This warning belongs to normal start-up procedure. Motor identification is required. This warning belongs to normal start-up procedure. Drive expects user to select how motor identification should be performed: By Identification Magnetisation or by ID Run. Drive ID number has been changed from 1.
WHAT TO DO Continue drive operation.
Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed. Start Identification Magnetisation by pressing Start key, or select ID Run and start (see parameter 99.10).
ID N CHANGED (FF68) ID RUN (FF35) ID RUN SEL (FF33) IN CHOKE TEMP (FF81)
3.18 AW 5 bit 4
Change ID number back to 1. See chapter Control panel. Wait until drive indicates that motor identification Run is completed. Press Start key to start Identification Run.
Motor identification Run is on.
Motor Identification Run is selected, and drive is ready to start ID Run. This warning belongs to ID Run procedure. Excessive input choke temperature
Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check that fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
INV CUR LIM (2212)

3.18 AW 5 bit 8
Internal inverter current or power limit has been exceeded.
Reduce load or increase ramp time. Limit inverter actual power or decrease lineside converter reactive power generation reference value (parameter 95.06 LCU Q PW REF). Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable Fault Function 30.23) INV DISABLED (3200)

3.18 AW 5 bit 6
Optional DC switch has opened while unit was stopped.
Close DC switch. Check AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit.
Fault tracing
235
WARNING INV OVERTEMP (4290)

3.31 AW 6 bit 0
CAUSE Converter module temperature is excessive.
WHAT TO DO Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40C, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See appropriate hardware manual. Check that ambient temperature setting is correct (parameter 95.10). Check converter module cooling air flow and fan operation. Cabinet installation: Check cabinet air inlet filters. Change when necessary. See appropriate hardware manual. Modules installed in cabinet by user: Check that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been prevented with air baffles. See module installation instructions. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of converter module for dust pick-up. Clean when necessary.
IO CONFIG (FF8B) (programmable Fault Function 30.22) MACRO CHANGE (FF69) MOD BOARD T (FF88)
09.11 AW 3 bit 14
Input or output of optional I/O extension or fieldbus module has been selected as signal interface in application program but communication to appropriate I/O extension module has not been set accordingly. Macro is restoring or User macro is being saved. Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module.
Check Fault Function parameters. Check parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES.
Wait until drive has finished task.
Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature.
MOD CHOKE T (FF89)

09.11 AW 3 bit 13
Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module.
Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check liquid cooling system.
MOT CUR LIM (2300)

3.18 AW 5 bit 10
Drive limits motor current according to current limit defined by parameter 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT.
Reduce load or increase ramp time. Increase parameter 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT value. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable Fault Function 30.23) MOTOR STALL (7121)

3.09 AW 2 bit 9
Motor is operating in stall region due to e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power.
Check motor load and drive ratings. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable Fault Function 30.10) MOTOR STARTS (FF34) Motor Identification Run starts. This warning belongs to ID Run procedure. Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed.
Fault tracing
236
WARNING MOTOR TEMP (4310)

3.08 AW 1 bit 3
CAUSE Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be too high) due to excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.
WHAT TO DO Check motor ratings, load and cooling. Check start-up data. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable Fault Function 30.0430.09) MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312)

3.16 AW 4 bit 1
Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit set by parameter 35.02.
Check value of alarm limit. Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc.
MOTOR 2 TEMP (4313)

3.16 AW 4 bit 2
MOT POW LIM (FF86)

3.18 AW 5 bit 12
Drive limits motor power according to limits defined by parameters 20.11 and 20.12.
Informative alarm Check parameter 20.11 P MOTORING LIM and 20.12 P GENERATING LIM settings. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable Fault Function 30.23) MOT TORQ LIM (FF85)

3.18 AW 5 bit 11
Drive limits motor torque according to calculated motor pull-out torque limit and minimum and maximum torque limits defined by parameters 20.13 and 20.14.
Informative alarm Check parameter 20.13 MIN TORQ SEL and 20.14 MAX TORQ SEL settings. Check Fault Function parameters. If LIMIT WORD 1 bit 0 TORQ MOTOR LIM is 1, - check motor parameter settings (parameter group 99 START-UP DATA) - ensure that ID run has been completed successfully.
PANEL LOSS (5300)

3.09 AW 2 bit 13
Control panel selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.
Check panel connection (see appropriate hardware manual). Check control panel connector. Replace control panel in mounting platform. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable Fault Function 30.02) POINTER ERROR (FFD0) ->POWEROFF! (FF39) Source selection (pointer) parameter points to non existing parameter index. Inverter type (e.g. sr0025_3) has been changed. Inverter type is usually changed at factory or during drive implementation.
Check source selection (pointer) parameter settings. Switch control board power off to validate inverter type change.
Fault tracing
237
WARNING PPCC LINK (5210)

3.06 FW 2 bit 11
CAUSE Fibre optic link to INT board is faulty.
WHAT TO DO Check fibre optic cables or galvanic link. With frame sizes R2-R6 link is galvanic. If RMIO is powered from external supply, ensure that supply is on. See parameter 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY. Check signal 03.19. Contact ABB representative if any of faults in signal 3.19 are active.
PPCC LINK xx (5210)

3.06 FW 2 bit 11 and 4.01
INT board fibre optic connection fault in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx refers to inverter module number.
Check connection from inverter module Main Circuit Interface Board, INT to PPCC Branching Unit, PBU. (Inverter module 1 is connected to PBU INT1 etc.) Check signal 03.19. Contact ABB representative if any of faults in signal 3.19 are active.
PP OVERLOAD (5482)
3.18 AW 5 bit 5
Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This can be caused by excessive load at low frequencies (e.g. fast direction change with excessive load and inertia). Running time of inverter cooling fan has exceeded its estimated life time.
Increase ramp time. Reduce load.
REPLACE FAN (4280)

3.18 AW 5 bit 0
Replace fan. Reset fan run time counter 01.44.
RUN ENABLE (FF8E)

3.06 FW 2 bit 4
No Run enable signal received.
Check setting of parameter 16.01. Switch on signal or check wiring of selected source.
SLEEP MODE (FF8C)

3.16 AW 4 bit 4
Sleep function has entered sleeping mode.
See parameter group 40 PID CONTROL.
START INHIBI (FF7A)

AW 1 bit 0
Safe torque off function has been activated while drive was stopped. Or: Optional start inhibit hardware logic is activated. No Start Interlock signal received.
Close Safe torque off function switch. If switch is closed and warning is still active, check power supply at ASTO board input terminals. Replace ASTO board. Or: Check start inhibit circuit (AGPS board).
START INTERL (FF8D) SYNCRO SPEED (FF87)

3.18 AW 5 bit 1
Check circuit connected to Start Interlock input on RMIO board. Check nominal speed from motor rating plate and set parameter 99.08 exactly accordingly.
Value of motor nominal speed set to parameter 99.08 is not correct: Value is too near synchronous speed of motor. Tolerance is 0.1%. This warning is active only in DTC mode.
Fault tracing
238
WARNING TEMP DIF xx y (4380)

4.01 FAULTED INT INFO
CAUSE Excessive temperature difference between several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (1...12) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Alarm is indicated when temperature difference is 15C. Fault is indicated when temperature difference is 20C. Excessive temperature can be caused e.g. by unequal current sharing between parallel connected inverters.
WHAT TO DO Check cooling fan. Replace fan. Check air filters.
THERMISTOR (4311)
3.08 AW 1 bit 2
Motor temperature is excessive. Motor thermal protection mode selection is TEMP SENSOR.
Check motor ratings and load. Check start-up data. Check thermistor connections to digital input DI6.
(programmable Fault Function 30.0430.05) T MEAS ALM (FF91)

3.08 AW 1 bit 6
Motor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range.
Check connections of motor temperature measurement circuit. See chapter Program features for circuit diagram. Check for problem in driven equipment. Check Fault Function parameters.
UNDERLOAD (FF6A)
3.09 AW 2 bit 1
Motor load is too low due to e.g. release mechanism in driven equipment.
(programmable Fault Function 30.13) USER L CURVE (2312)

3.18 AW 5 bit 13
Integrated motor current has exceeded load curve defined by parameters in group 72 USER LOAD CURVE.
Check parameter group 72 USER LOAD CURVE settings. Reduce load.
Fault tracing
239
Warning messages generated by the control panel

WARNING DOWNLOADING FAILED CAUSE Download function of panel has failed. No data has been copied from panel to drive. WHAT TO DO Make sure panel is in local mode. Retry (there might be interference on link). Contact ABB representative. DRIVE IS RUNNING DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE NO COMMUNICATION (X) Downloading is not possible while motor is running. Stop motor. Perform downloading.
Cabling problem or hardware malfunction on Panel Link
Check Panel Link connections. Press RESET key. Panel reset may take up to half a minute, please wait. Check panel type and drive application program version. Panel type is printed on panel cover. Application program version is stored in parameter 33.02. Disconnect another station from link to free ID number.
(4) = Panel type not compatible with drive application program version
NO FREE ID NUMBERS ID NUMBER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE NOT UPLOADED DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE UPLOADING FAILED WRITE ACCESS DENIED PARAMETER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE
Panel Link already includes 31 stations.
No upload function has been performed.
Perform upload function before downloading. See chapter Control panel. Retry (there might be interference on link). Contact ABB representative. Stop motor, then change parameter value.
Upload function of panel has failed. No data has been copied from drive to panel. Certain parameters do not allow changes while motor is running. If tried, no change is accepted, and warning is displayed. Parameter lock is on.
Open parameter lock (see parameter 16.02).
Fault tracing
240
Fault messages generated by the drive

FAULT ACS800 TEMP (4210)
3.05 FW 1 bit 3
CAUSE Drive IGBT temperature is excessive. Fault trip limit is 100%.
WHAT TO DO Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power.
ACS TEMP xx y (4210)

3.05 FW 1 bit 3 and 4.01
Excessive internal temperature in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (1...12) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Analogue control signal is below minimum allowed value due to incorrect signal level or failure in control wiring.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. Check for proper analogue control signal levels. Check control wiring. Check Fault Function parameters.
AI < MIN FUNC (8110)

3.06 FW 2 bit 10
(programmable Fault Function 30.01) AD [message] BACKUP ERROR (FFA2) Message generated by an EVENT block in the Adaptive Program. Failure when restoring PC stored backup of drive parameters.
Consult the documentation or author of the Adaptive Program. Retry. Check connections. Check that parameters are compatible with drive.
BC OVERHEAT (7114)
3.17 FW 5 bit 4
Let chopper cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see parameter group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive.
BC SHORT CIR (7113)

3.17 FW 5 bit 2
Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT(s)
Replace brake chopper. Ensure brake resistor is connected and not damaged.
BRAKE ACKN (FF74)

3.15 FW 4 bit 3
Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal
See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL. Check connection of brake acknowledgement signal.
BR BROKEN (7110)
3.17 FW 5 bit 0
Brake resistor is not connected or it is damaged. Resistance rating of brake resistor is too high.
Check resistor and resistor connection. Check that resistance rating meets specifications. See appropriate drive hardware manual.
Fault tracing
241
FAULT BR OVERHEAT (7112)

3.17 FW 5 bit 3
CAUSE Brake resistor overload
WHAT TO DO Let resistor cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see parameter group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive.
BR WIRING (7111)
3.17 FW 5 bit 1
Wrong connection of brake resistor
Check resistor connection. Ensure brake resistor is not damaged.
CHOKE OTEMP (FF82)
Excessive temperature of drive output filter. Supervision is in use in step-up drives.
Let drive cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check filter fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
COMM MODULE (7510)

3.06 FW 2 bit 12
Cyclical communication between drive and master is lost.
Check status of fieldbus communication. See chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. Check parameter settings: - group 51 COMM MODULE DATA (for fieldbus adapter), or - group 52 STANDARD MODBUS (for Standard Modbus Link). Check Fault Function parameters. Check cable connections. Check if master can communicate.
(programmable Fault Function 30.18, 30.19)
CTRL B TEMP (4110)

3.06 FW 2 bit 7
Control board temperature is above 88C.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow. Check main and additional cooling fans.
CURR MEAS (2211) CUR UNBAL xx (2330)

3.05 FW 1 bit 4 and 4.01
Current transformer failure in output current measurement circuit Drive has detected excessive output current unbalance in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. This can be caused by external fault (earth fault, motor, motor cabling, etc.) or internal fault (damaged inverter component). xx (1...12) refers to inverter module number.
Check current transformer connections to Main Circuit Interface Board, INT. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables: - measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.
DC HIGH RUSH (FF80)
Drive supply voltage is excessive. When supply voltage is over 124% of unit voltage rating (415, 500 or 690 V), motor speed rushes to trip level (40% of nominal speed).
Check supply voltage level, drive rated voltage and allowed voltage range of drive.
Fault tracing
242
FAULT DC OVERVOLT (3210)

3.05 FW 1 bit 2
CAUSE Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage. DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 1.35 U1max, where U1max is maximum value of supply voltage range. For 400 V units, U1max is 415 V. For 500 V units, U1max is 500 V. For 690 V units, U1max is 690 V. Actual voltage in intermediate circuit corresponding to the supply voltage trip level is 728 V DC for 400 V units, 877 V DC for 500 V units, and 1210 V DC for 690 V units. Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient due to missing supply voltage phase, blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault. DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.6 1.35 U1min, where U1min is minimum value of supply voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V. For 690 V units, U1min is 525 V. Actual voltage in intermediate circuit corresponding to supply voltage trip level is 307 V DC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 425 V DC for 690 V units.
WHAT TO DO Check that overvoltage controller is on (parameter 20.05). Check supply voltage for static or transient overvoltage. Check brake chopper and resistor (if used). Check deceleration time. Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable). Retrofit frequency converter with brake chopper and brake resistor. Check main supply and fuses.
DC UNDERVOLT (3220)
3.06 FW 2 bit 2
EARTH FAULT (2330)

3.05 FW 1 bit 4
Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable.
Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables: - measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.
ENC CABLE (7310)

3.33 FW 6 bit 2
(programmable Fault Function 50.07) ENCODER A<>B (7302) ENCODER ERR (7301)
3.06 FW 2 bit 5
Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is connected to terminal of phase B and vice versa. Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module and between module and drive Fault in external device. (This information is configured through one of programmable digital inputs.)
Interchange connection of pulse encoder phases A and B. Check pulse encoder and its wiring, pulse encoder interface module and its wiring and parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE settings. Check external devices for faults. Check parameter 30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT.
EXTERNAL FLT (9000)

3.06 FW 2 bit 8
Fault tracing
243
FAULT FORCED TRIP (FF8F) GD DISABLED (FF53)
CAUSE Generic Drive Communication Profile trip command AGPS power supply of parallel connected R8i inverter module has been switched off during run. X (112) refers to inverter module number. Motor ID Run is not completed successfully.
WHAT TO DO See appropriate communication module manual. Check Prevention of Unexpected Start-up circuit. Replace AGPS board of R8i inverter module. Check maximum speed (parameter 20.02). It should be at least 80% of motor nominal speed (parameter 99.08). Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check that fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
ID RUN FAIL (FF84) IN CHOKE TEMP (FF81)

3.17 FW 5 bit 5
Excessive input choke temperature
INT CONFIG (5410)

03.17 FW 5 bit 10
Number of inverter modules is not equal to original number of inverters.
Check status of inverters. See signal 04.01 FAULTED INT INFO. Check fibre optic cables between APBU and inverter modules. If Reduced Run function is used, remove faulted inverter module from main circuit and write number of remaining inverter modules into parameter 95.03 INT CONFIG USER. Reset drive.
INV DISABLED
03.17 FW 5 bit 7
Optional DC switch has opened while unit was running or start command was given.
Close DC switch. Check AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit.
(3200) INV OVERTEMP (4290)

3.17 FW 5 bit 13
Converter module temperature is excessive.
Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40C, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See appropriate hardware manual. Check that ambient temperature setting is correct (parameter 95.10). Check converter module cooling air flow and fan operation. Cabinet installation: Check cabinet air inlet filters. Change when necessary. See appropriate hardware manual. Modules installed in cabinet by user: Check that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been prevented with air baffles. See module installation instructions. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of converter module for dust pick-up. Clean when necessary. Reset and restart after problem is solved and let converter module cool down.
Fault tracing
244
FAULT I/O COMM ERR (7000)

3.06 FW 2 bit 6
CAUSE Communication error on control board, channel CH1 Electromagnetic interference
WHAT TO DO Check connections of fibre optic cables on channel CH1. Check all I/O modules (if present) connected to channel CH1. Check for proper earthing of equipment. Check for highly emissive components nearby.
LINE CONV (FF51)
Fault on line side converter
Shift panel from motor side converter control board to line side converter control board. See line side converter manual for fault description.
MOD BOARD T (FF88) MOD CHOKE T (FF89)
Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module. Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module.
Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check liquid cooling system.
MOTOR PHASE (FF56)

3.06 FW 2 bit 15
One of motor phases is lost due to fault in motor, motor cable, thermal relay (if used) or internal fault.
Check motor and motor cable. Check thermal relay (if used). Check Fault Function parameters. Disable this protection.
(programmable Fault Function 30.16) MOTOR STALL (7121)

3.06 FW 2 bit 14
(programmable Fault Function 30.1030.12) MOTOR TEMP (4310)

3.05 FW 1 bit 6
(programmable Fault Function 30.0430.09) MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312)

3.15 FW 4 bit 1
Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be too high) due to excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.
Check motor ratings and load. Check start-up data. Check Fault Function parameters.
Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit set by parameter 35.03.
Check value of fault limit. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc. Check value of fault limit. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc. Check motor data parameters 99.0499.09.
MOTOR 2 TEMP (4313)

3.15 FW 4 bit 2
NO MOT DATA (FF52)

3.06 FW 2 bit 1
Motor data is not given or motor data does not match with inverter data.
Fault tracing
245
FAULT OVERCURR xx (2310)

3.05 FW 1 bit 1 and 4.01
CAUSE Overcurrent fault in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (1...12) refers to inverter module number.
WHAT TO DO Check motor load. Check acceleration time. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing). Check encoder cable (including phasing). Check motor nominal values from group 99 START-UP DATA to confirm that motor model is correct. Check that there are no power factor correction or surge absorbers in motor cable.
OVERCURRENT (2310)
3.05 FW 1 bit 1
Output current exceeds trip limit.
Check motor load. Check acceleration time. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing). Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check encoder cable (including phasing).
OVERFREQ (7123)
3.05 FW 1 bit 9
Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum/ maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference. Trip level is 50 Hz over operating range absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar Control active). Operating range limits are set by parameters 20.01 and 20.02 (DTC mode active) or 20.07 and 20.08 (Scalar Control active).
Check minimum/maximum speed settings. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check applicability of torque control. Check need for brake chopper and resistor(s).
OVER SWFREQ (FF55)

3.06 FW 2 bit 9
Switching frequency is too high.
Check motor parameter settings (parameter group 99 START-UP DATA) Ensure that ID run has been completed successfully.
PANEL LOSS (5300)

3.06 FW 2 bit 13
Control panel or DriveWindow selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.
Check panel connection (see appropriate hardware manual). Check control panel connector. Replace control panel in mounting platform. Check Fault Function parameters. Check DriveWindow connection.
(programmable Fault Function 30.02) PARAM CRC (6320) CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) error
Switch control board power off and on again. Reload firmware to control board. Replace control board.
POWERFAIL (3381)
3.17 FW 5 bit 9
INT board powerfail in several inverter units of parallel connected inverter modules.
Check that INT board power cable is connected. Check that POW board is working correctly. Replace INT board.
Fault tracing
246
FAULT POWERF INV xx (3381)

3.17 FW 5 bit 9 and 4.01
CAUSE INT board powerfail in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (1...12) refers to inverter module number.
WHAT TO DO Check that INT board power cable is connected. Check that POW board is working correctly. Replace INT board.
PPCC LINK (5210)

3.06 FW 2 bit 11
Fibre optic link to INT board is faulty.
Check fibre optic cables or galvanic link. With frame sizes R2-R6 link is galvanic. If RMIO is powered from external supply, ensure that supply is on. See parameter 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY. Check signal 03.19. Contact ABB representative if any of faults in signal 3.19 are active.
PPCC LINK xx (5210)

3.06 FW 2 bit 11 and 4.01
Check connection from inverter module Main Circuit Interface Board, INT to PPCC Branching Unit, PBU. (Inverter module 1 is connected to PBU INT1 etc.) Check signal 03.19. Contact ABB representative if any of faults in signal 3.19 are active.
PP OVERLOAD (5482)
3.17 FW 5 bit 6
Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This fault protects IGBT(s) and it can be activated by short circuit at output of long motor cables. Short circuit in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (1...12) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Short-circuit in motor cable(s) or motor
Check motor cables.
SC INV xx y (2340)
3.05 FW 1 bit 0, 4.01 and 4.02
Check motor and motor cable. Check power semiconductors (IGBTs) of inverter module.
SHORT CIRC (2340)

3.05 FW 1 bit 0 and 4.02
Check motor and motor cable. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
Output bridge of converter unit is faulty. SLOT OVERLAP (FF8A) START INHIBI (FF7A) 3.03 bit 8 Two option modules have same connection interface selection. Safe torque off has been activated during motor run or motor start command has been given when Safe torque off is active. Or: Optional start inhibit hardware logic is activated. SUPPLY PHASE (3130)
3.06 FW 2 bit 0
Contact ABB representative. Check connection interface selections in group 98 OPTION MODULES. Close Safe torque off switch. If switch is closed and fault is still active, check power supply at ASTO board input terminals. Replace ASTO board. Or: Check start inhibit circuit (AGPS board). Check main supply fuses. Check for main supply imbalance.
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing supply voltage phase, blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault. Trip occurs when DC voltage ripple is 13% of DC voltage.
Fault tracing
247
FAULT TEMP DIF xx y (4380)

3.17 FW 5 bit 8 and 4.01
CAUSE Excessive temperature difference between several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (1...12) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Alarm is indicated when temperature difference is 15C. Fault is indicated when temperature difference is 20C Excessive temperature can be caused e.g. by unequal current sharing between parallel connected inverters.
WHAT TO DO Check cooling fan. Replace fan. Check air filters.
THERMAL MODE (FF50) THERMISTOR (4311)

3.05 FW 1 bit 5
Motor thermal protection mode is set to DTC for high-power motor. Motor temperature is excessive. Motor thermal protection mode selection is TEMP SENSOR.
See parameter 30.05. Check motor ratings and load. Check start-up data. Check thermistor connections to digital input DI6.
(programmable Fault Function 30.0430.05) UNDERLOAD (FF6A)

3.05 FW 1 bit 8
Motor load is too low due to e.g. release mechanism in driven equipment.
Check for problem in driven equipment. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable Fault Function 30.1330.15) USER L CURVE (2312)

3.17 FW 5 bit 11
Integrated motor current has exceeded load curve defined by parameter group 72 USER LOAD CURVE.
Check parameter group 72 USER LOAD CURVE settings. After motor cooling time specified by parameter 72.20 LOAD COOLING TIME has elapsed, fault can be reset. Create User Macro.
USER MACRO (FFA1)

3.07 SFW bit 1
No User Macro saved or file is defective.
Fault tracing
248
Fault tracing
249
Analogue Extension Module
Chapter overview
The chapter describes the use of analogue extension module RAIO as an speed reference interface of ACS800 equipped with Standard Control Program.
Speed control through the analogue extension module

Two variants are described: Bipolar Input in Basic Speed Control Bipolar Input in Joystick Mode Only the use of a bipolar input ( signal range) is covered here. The use of unipolar input corresponds to that of a standard unipolar input when: the settings described below are done, and the communication between the module and the drive is activated by parameter 98.06. Basic checks Ensure the drive is: installed and commissioned, and the external start and stop signals are connected. Ensure the extension module: settings are adjusted. (See below.) is installed and reference signal is connected to AI1. is connected to the drive. Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive Set the module node address to 5 (not required if installed to the option slot of the drive). Select the signal type for the module input AI1 (switch). Select the operation mode (unipolar/bipolar) of the module input (switch). Ensure the drive parameter settings correspond to the mode of the module inputs (parameter 98.13 and 98.14). Set the drive parameters (see the appropriate section on the following pages).
250
Parameter settings: bipolar input in basic speed control

The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed reference received through the extension module bipolar input AI1 (AI5 of the drive).
Parameter 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC 10.03 DIRECTION 11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 13.16 MINIMUM AI5 13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 13.18 SCALE AI5 13.20 INVERT AI5 30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION Setting RAIO-SLOT1 BIPO AI5 FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST(1 EXT1 AI5 minREF1 maxREF1 minAI5 maxAI5 100% NO
(2
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of the extension module.
scaled maxREF1
Operation Range
10.03 DIRECTION = FORWARD or REQUEST1) Speed Reference

minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION = REVERSE or REQUEST1)

-scaled maxREF1 -maxAI5
-minAI5
minAI5
maxAI5
Analogue Input Signal minAI5 maxAI5 scaled maxREF1 minREF1

1) For 2)
= = = =
13.16 MINIMUM AI5 13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 13.18 SCALE AI5 x 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM
the negative speed range, the drive must receive a separate reverse command. Set if supervision of living zero is used.
251
Parameter settings: bipolar input in joystick mode

The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed and direction reference received through the extension module bipolar input AI1 (AI5 of the drive).
Parameter 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC 10.03 DIRECTION 11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 13.16 MINIMUM AI5 13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 13.18 SCALE AI5 13.20 INVERT AI5 30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION Setting RAIO-SLOT1 BIPO AI5 FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST(1 EXT1 AI5/JOYST minREF1 maxREF1 minAI5 maxAI5 100% NO
(2
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of the extension module in joystick mode.
scaled maxREF1
Operation Range
10.03 DIRECTION = FORWARD or REQUEST1) Speed Reference

minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION = REVERSE or REQUEST1)

-scaled maxREF1 -maxAI5
-minAI5
minAI5
maxAI5
Analogue Input Signal minAI5 maxAI5 scaled maxREF1 minREF1

1) Enables 2)
= = = =
13.15 MINIMUM AI5 13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 13.18 SCALE AI5 x 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM
the use of both positive and negative speed range. Set if supervision of living zero is used.
252
253
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
Chapter overview
This chapter lists the actual signal and parameter lists with some additional data. For the descriptions, see chapter Actual signals and parameters.
Terms and abbreviations

Term PB FbEq Absolute Maximum Frequency Absolute Maximum Speed W Definition Profibus equivalent for drive parameters communicating through the NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter. Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication. Value of 20.08, or 20.07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit. Value of parameter 20.02, or 20.01 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit. Write access is not allowed when the motor is running.
Fieldbus addresses
Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.) See the appropriate fieldbus adapter module Users Manual. Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.) NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter All versions see column PB in the tables below. Version 1.5 or later see NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Installation and Start-Up Guide [3BFE64341588 (English)]. Reading or writing a drive parameter can be done also by converting the parameter group (PNU) and the parameter index (subindex) into hexadecimal. Example: drive parameter 12.07: 12 = 0C(hex) 07 = 07(hex) => 0C07. Request label for request parameter value is 6. Request label for change parameter value is 7. Note: Not every parameter has Profibus equivalent value (PB).
254
NIBA-01 InterBus-S Adapter xxyy 100 + 12288 converted into hexadecimal, where xxyy = drive parameter number Example: The index number for drive parameter 13.09 is 1309 + 12288 = 13597 (dec) = 351D (hex) NMBP-01 ModbusPlus Adapter and NMBA-01 Modbus Adapter 4xxyy, where xxyy = drive parameter number
255
Actual signals
Index Name 01 ACTUAL SIGNALS 01.01 PROCESS VARIABLE 01.02 SPEED Short name PROC VAR SPEED FbEq 1=1 Unit According to parameter 34.02 rpm Range PB 1 2
01.03 FREQUENCY 01.04 CURRENT 01.05 TORQUE
FREQ CURRENT TORQUE
01.06 POWER
POWER
01.07 01.08 01.09 01.10 01.11 01.12
DC BUS VOLTAGE V MAINS VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE ACS800 TEMP EXTERNAL REF 1 EXTERNAL REF 2
DC BUS V MAINS V OUT VOLT ACS TEMP EXT REF1 EXT REF2 CTRL LOC
01.13 CTRL LOCATION
01.14 OP HOUR COUNTER OP HOURS 01.15 KILOWATT HOURS KW HOURS 01.16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT APPL OUT 01.17 01.18 01.19 01.20 01.21 01.22 01.23 01.24 DI6-1 STATUS AI1 [V] AI2 [mA] AI3 [mA] RO3-1 STATUS AO1 [mA] AO2 [mA] ACTUAL VALUE 1 DI6-1 AI1 [V] AI2 [mA] AI3 [mA] RO3-1 AO1 [mA] AO2 [mA] ACT VAL1 ACT VAL2
01.25 ACTUAL VALUE 2
01.26 CONTROL DEVIATION CONT DEV 01.27 APPLICATION MACRO MACRO 01.28 01.29 01.30 01.31 01.32 01.33 01.34 01.35 01.36 01.37 01.38 EXT AO1 [mA] EXT AO2 [mA] PP 1 TEMP PP 2 TEMP PP 3 TEMP PP 4 TEMP ACTUAL VALUE MOTOR 1 TEMP MOTOR 2 TEMP MOTOR TEMP EST AI5 [mA] EXT AO1 EXT AO2 PP 1 TEM PP 2 TEM PP 3 TEM PP 4 TEM ACT V M 1 TEMP M 2 TEMP MOTOR TE AI5 [mA]
-20000 = -100% 20000 = 100% of motor absolute max. speed -100 = -1 Hz 100 = 1 Hz Hz 10 = 1 A A -10000 = -100% % 10000 = 100% of motor nominal torque -1000 = -100% 1000 % = 100% of motor nominal power 1=1V V 1=1V V 1=1V V 10 = 1% % 1 = 1 rpm rpm 0 = 0% 10000 = % 100% 1) (1,2) LOCAL; (3) EXT1; (4) EXT2 1=1h h 1 = 100 kWh kWh 0 = 0% 10000 = % 100% 1=1 1 = 0.001 V V 1 = 0.001 mA mA 1 = 0.001 mA mA 1=1 1 =0.001 mA mA 1 = 0.001 mA mA 0 = 0% 10000 = % 100% 0 = 0% 10000 = % 100% -10000 = -100% % 10000 = 100% 17 1 = 0.001 mA 1 = 0.001 mA 1 = 1C 1 = 1C 1 = 1C 1 = 1C 0 = 0% 10000 = 100% 1 = 1C/ohm 1 = 1C/ohm 1 = 1C 1 = 0.001 mA mA mA C C C C % C C C mA
3 4 5
7 8 9 10 11 12 LOCAL; EXT1; EXT2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 According to 27 parameter 99.02 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
256
Index Name Short name 01.39 AI6 [mA] AI6 [mA] 01.40 DI7-12 STATUS DI7...12 01.41 EXT RO STATUS EXT RO 01.42 PROCESS SPEED REL P SPEED 01.43 MOTOR RUN TIME MOTOR RUN TIME 01.44 FAN ON-TIME FAN TIME 01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP CTRL B T 01.46 SAVED KWH SAV KWH 01.47 SAVED GWH SAV GWH 01.48 SAVED AMOUNT SAV AM 01.49 SAVED AMOUNT M SAV AM M 01.50 SAVED CO2 SAV CO2 01.51 SAVED CO2 KTON SAV CO2K 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS 02.01 SPEED REF 2 S REF 2 02.02 SPEED REF 3 S REF 3 02.09 02.10 02.13 02.14 TORQUE REF 2 TORQUE REF 3 TORQ USED REF FLUX REF T REF 2 T REF 3 T USED R FLUX REF SPEED ES SPEED ME MOTOR AC USER CUR MAIN CW MAIN SW AUX SW LIMIT W1 FAULT W1 FAULT W2 SYS FLT ALARM W1 ALARM W2 FOLL MCW
FbEq 1 = 0.001 mA 1=1 1=1 1=1 1 = 10 h 10 h = 1 1=1 1 = 100 kWh 1 = 1 GWh 1 = 100 cur 1 = 1 Mcur 1 = 100 kg 1 = 1 kton 0 = 0% 20000 = 100% of motor absolute max. speed 0 = 0% 10000 = 100% of motor nominal torque 0 = 0% 10000 = 100% 0 = 0% 20000 = 100% of motor absolute max. speed 1 = 1 rpm/s. 10 = 1% 2)
Unit mA
Range
% h h C kWh GWh local; EUR; USD local; EUR; USD kg kton rpm rpm % % % % rpm rpm rpm/s %
0999 999 18388607 0999 999 18388607 0999 999 18388607
PB 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 59 60 63 64 67 68 69 70
02.17 SPEED ESTIMATED 02.18 SPEED MEASURED 02.19 MOTOR ACCELERATIO 02.20 USER CURRENT 03 ACTUAL SIGNALS 03.01 MAIN CTRL WORD 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD 03.03 AUX STATUS WORD 03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 03.05 FAULT WORD 1 03.06 FAULT WORD 2 03.07 SYSTEM FAULT 03.08 ALARM WORD 1 03.09 ALARM WORD 2 03.11 FOLLOWER MCW
03.13 AUX STATUS WORD 3 AUX SW 3 03.14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 AUX SW 4 03.15 FAULT WORD 4 03.16 ALARM WORD 4 FAULT W4 ALARM W4
0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal)
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 88 89 90 91
257
Index Name 03.17 FAULT WORD 5 03.18 ALARM WORD 5 03.19 INT INIT FAULT 03.20 LATEST FAULT 03.21 2.LATEST FAULT 03.22 3.LATEST FAULT 03.23 4.LATEST FAULT 03.24 5.LATEST FAULT 03.25 LATEST WARNING 03.26 2.LATEST WARNING 03.27 3.LATEST WARNING 03.28 4.LATEST WARNING 03.29 5.LATEST WARNING 03.30 LIMIT WORD INV 03.31 ALARM WORD 6 03.32 EXT IO STATUS 03.33 FAULT WORD 6 04 ACTUAL SIGNALS 04.01 FAULTED INT INFO 04.02 INT SC INFO 09 09.01 09.02 09.03 09.04 09.05 09.06 ACTUAL SIGNALS AI1 SCALED AI2 SCALED AI3 SCALED AI5 SCALED AI6 SCALED DS MCW
Short name FAULT W5 ALARM W5 INT INIT LAST FLT 2.FAULT 3.FAULT 4.FAULT 5.FAULT LAST WRN 2.WARN 3.WARN 4.WARN 5.WARN LIMIT WO ALARM W6 E IO ST FAULT W6
FbEq
Unit
Range 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 (Decimal)
PB 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
FLTD INT INT SC
020000 020000 020000 020000 020000 0...65535 (Decimal) 09.07 MASTER REF1 M REF1 -3276832767 -3276832767 09.08 MASTER REF2 M REF2 -3276832767 -3276832767 09.09 AUX DS VAL1 AUX DSV1 -3276832767 -3276832767 09.10 AUX DS VAL2 AUX DSV2 -3276832767 -3276832767 09.11 AUX DS VAL3 AUX DSV3 -3276832767 -3276832767 09.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL1 LCU ACT1 1=1 09.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL2 LCU ACT2 1=1 1) Percent of motor max. speed / nominal torque / max. process reference (depending on the ACS800 macro selected). 2) The contents of these data words are detailed in chapter Fieldbus control. For the contents of Actual Signal 3.11, see the Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)].
AI1 SCAL AI2 SCAL AI3 SCAL AI5 SCAL AI6 SCAL DS MCW
20000 = 10 V 20000 = 20 mA 20000 = 20 mA 20000 = 20 mA 20000 = 20 mA 0...65535 (Decimal)
258
Parameters
Index Name/Selection 10 START/STOP/DIR 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR 10.02 10.03 10.04 10.05 10.06 10.07 10.08 10.09 11 11.01 11.02 11.03 11.04 11.05 11.06 11.07 11.08 11.09 11.10 11.11 12 12.01 12.02 12.03 12.04 12.05 12.06 12.07 12.08 12.09 12.10 12.11 12.12 12.13 12.14 12.15 12.16 13 13.01 13.02 13.03 13.04 13.05 13.06 13.07 13.08 13.09 13.10 13.11 13.12 13.13 13.14 13.15 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR REF DIRECTION EXT 1 STRT PTR EXT 2 STRT PTR JOG SPEED SELECT NET CONTROL NET REFERENCE SLS ACTIVE REFERENCE SELECT KEYPAD REF SEL EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT REF1 SELECT EXT REF 1 MINIMUM EXT REF 1 MAXIMUM EXT REF2 SELECT EXT REF 2 MINIMUM EXT REF 2 MAXIMUM EXT 1/2 SEL PTR EXT 1 REF PTR EXT 2 REF PTR CONSTANT SPEEDS CONST SPEED SEL CONST SPEED 1 CONST SPEED 2 CONST SPEED 3 CONST SPEED 4 CONST SPEED 5 CONST SPEED 6 CONST SPEED 7 CONST SPEED 8 CONST SPEED 9 CONST SPEED 10 CONST SPEED 11 CONST SPEED 12 CONST SPEED 13 CONST SPEED 14 CONST SPEED 15 ANALOGUE INPUTS MINIMUM AI1 MAXIMUM AI1 SCALE AI1 FILTER AI1 INVERT AI1 MINIMUM AI2 MAXIMUM AI2 SCALE AI2 FILTER AI2 INVERT AI2 MINIMUM AI3 MAXIMUM AI3 SCALE AI3 FILTER AI3 INVERT AI3 FACTORY DI1,2 (US: DI1P,2P,3) NOT SEL FORWARD 0 0 NOT SEL 0 0 NO REF1 (rpm) EXT1 AI1 0 rpm 1500 rpm KEYPAD 0% 100% 0 0 0 DI5,6 300 rpm 600 rpm 900 rpm 300 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0V 10 V 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL DI1,2 DI6,5 REQUEST 0 0 NOT SEL 0 0 NO REF1 (rpm) DI3 AI1 0 rpm 1500 rpm AI2 0% 100% 0 0 0 DI4(SPEED4) 300 rpm 600 rpm 900 rpm 300 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0V 10 V 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO DI1 DI6 FORWARD 0 0 NOT SEL 0 0 NO REF1 (rpm) DI3 AI1 0 rpm 1500 rpm AI1 0% 100% 0 0 0 DI4(SPEED4) 300 rpm 600 rpm 900 rpm 300 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0V 10 V 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO T-CTRL DI1,2 DI1,2 REQUEST 0 0 NOT SEL 0 0 NO REF1 (rpm) DI3 AI1 0 rpm 1500 rpm AI2 0% 100% 0 0 0 DI4(SPEED4) 300 rpm 600 rpm 900 rpm 300 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0V 10 V 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO SEQ CTRL DI1,2 NOT SEL REQUEST 0 NOT SEL 0 0 NO REF1 (rpm) EXT1 AI1 0 rpm 1500 rpm AI1 0% 100% 0 0 0 DI4,5,6 300 rpm 600 rpm 900 rpm 1200 rpm 1500 rpm 2400 rpm 3000 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0V 10 V 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO PB W 101 W 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 W W W W W
126 127 W 128 W 129 130 131 W 132 133 134 135 136 151 W 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190
259
Index Name/Selection 13.16 MINIMUM AI5 13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 13.18 SCALE AI5 13.19 FILTER AI5 13.20 INVERT AI5 13.21 MINIMUM AI6 13.22 MAXIMUM AI6 13.23 SCALE AI6 13.24 FILTER AI6 13.25 INVERT AI6 14 RELAY OUTPUTS 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT 14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT 14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT 14.04 RO1 TON DELAY 14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY 14.06 RO2 TON DELAY 14.07 RO2 TOFF DELAY 14.08 RO3 TON DELAY 14.09 RO3 TOFF DELAY 14.10 DIO MOD1 RO1 14.11 DIO MOD1 RO2 14.12 DIO MOD2 RO1 14.13 DIO MOD2 RO2 14.14 DIO MOD3 RO1 14.15 DIO MOD3 RO2 14.16 RO PTR1 14.17 RO PTR2 14.18 RO PTR3 14.19 RO PTR4 14.20 RO PTR5 14.21 RO PTR6 14.22 RO PTR7 14.23 RO PTR8 14.24 RO PTR9 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS 15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 15.02 INVERT AO1 15.03 MINIMUM AO1 15.04 FILTER AO1 15.05 SCALE AO1 15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 15.07 INVERT AO2 15.08 MINIMUM AO2 15.09 FILTER AO2 15.10 SCALE AO2 15.11 AO1 PTR 15.12 AO2 PTR 16 SYS CTRL INPUTS 16.01 RUN ENABLE 16.02 PARAMETER LOCK 16.03 PASS CODE 16.04 FAULT RESET SEL 16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG 16.06 LOCAL LOCK 16.07 PARAMETER SAVE 16.08 RUN ENA PTR
FACTORY 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO READY RUNNING FAULT(-1) 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s READY RUNNING FAULT WARNING REF 2 SEL AT SPEED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.10 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 YES OPEN 0 NOT SEL NOT SEL OFF DONE 0
HAND/AUTO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO READY RUNNING FAULT(-1) 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s READY RUNNING FAULT WARNING REF 2 SEL AT SPEED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.10 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 YES OPEN 0 NOT SEL NOT SEL OFF DONE 0
PID-CTRL 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO READY RUNNING FAULT(-1) 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s READY RUNNING FAULT WARNING REF 2 SEL AT SPEED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.10 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 DI5 OPEN 0 NOT SEL NOT SEL OFF DONE 0
T-CTRL 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO READY RUNNING FAULT(-1) 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s READY RUNNING FAULT WARNING REF 2 SEL AT SPEED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.10 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 DI6 OPEN 0 NOT SEL NOT SEL OFF DONE 0
SEQ CTRL 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO 0 mA 20 mA 100% 0.10 s NO READY RUNNING FAULT(-1) 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s READY RUNNING FAULT WARNING REF 2 SEL AT SPEED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.10 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 YES OPEN 0 NOT SEL NOT SEL OFF DONE 0
PB W 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
226 W 227 228 229 230 231 W 232 233 234 235 236 237 251 W 252 253 254 W 255 W 256 257 258
260
Index Name/Selection 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY 16.10 16.11 16.12 20 20.01 20.02 20.03 20.04 20.05 20.06 20.07 20.08 20.11 20.12 20.13 20.14 20.15 20.16 20.17 20.18 20.19 20.20 20.21 20.22 21 21.01 21.02 21.03 21.04 21.05 21.06 21.07 21.08 21.09 21.10 22 22.01 22.02 22.03 22.04 22.05 22.06 22.07 22.08 22.09 22.10 22.11 23 23.01 23.02 23.03 23.04 23.05 23.06 23.07 ASSIST SEL FAULT RESET PTR RESET COUNTER LIMITS MINIMUM SPEED MAXIMUM SPEED MAXIMUM CURRENT TORQ MAX LIM1 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL MINIMUM FREQ MAXIMUM FREQ P MOTORING LIM P GENERATING LIM MIN TORQ SEL MAX TORQ SEL TORQ MIN LIM1 TORQ MIN LIM2 TORQ MAX LIM2 TORQ MIN PTR TORQ MAX PTR MIN AI SCALE MAX AI SCALE SLS SPEED LIMIT START/STOP START FUNCTION CONST MAGN TIME STOP FUNCTION DC HOLD DC HOLD SPEED DC HOLD CURR RUN ENABLE FUNC SCALAR FLY START START INTRL FUNC ZERO SPEED DELAY ACCEL/DECEL ACC/DEC SEL ACCEL TIME 1 DECEL TIME 1 ACCEL TIME 2 DECEL TIME 2 ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE EM STOP RAMP TIME ACC PTR DEC PTR SLS ACCELER TIME SLS DECELER TIME SPEED CTRL GAIN INTEGRATION TIME DERIVATION TIME ACC COMPENSATION SLIP GAIN AUTOTUNE RUN SP ACT FILT TIME
FACTORY INTERNAL 24V ON 0 NO (calculated) (calculated) type specific 300% ON ON - 50 Hz 50 Hz 300% -300% NEG MAX TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 300.0% 0 0 0% 300% 0 rpm AUTO 500.0 ms COAST NO 5 rpm 30% COAST STOP NO OFF2 STOP 0.5 s DI4 20 s 20 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 0.00 s 3.00 s 0 0 20 s 20 s 10 2.50 s 0.0 ms 0.00 s 100.0% NO 8 ms
HAND/AUTO INTERNAL 24V ON 0 NO (calculated) (calculated) type specific 300% ON ON - 50 Hz 50 Hz 300% -300% NEG MAX TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 300.0% 0 0 0% 300% 0 rpm AUTO 500.0 ms COAST NO 5 rpm 30% COAST STOP NO OFF2 STOP 0.5 s ACC/DEC 1 20 s 20 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 0.00 s 3.00 s 0 0 20 s 20 s 10 2.50 s 0.0 ms 0.00 s 100.0% NO 8 ms
PID-CTRL INTERNAL 24V ON 0 NO (calculated) (calculated) type specific 300% ON ON - 50 Hz 50 Hz 300% -300% NEG MAX TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 300.0% 0 0 0% 300% 0 rpm AUTO 500.0 ms COAST NO 5 rpm 30% COAST STOP NO OFF2 STOP 0.5 s ACC/DEC 1 20 s 20 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 0.00 s 3.00 s 0 0 20 s 20 s 10 2.50 s 0.0 ms 0.00 s 100.0% NO 8 ms
T-CTRL INTERNAL 24V ON 0 NO (calculated) (calculated) type specific 300% ON ON - 50 Hz 50 Hz 300% -300% NEG MAX TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 300.0% 0 0 0% 300% 0 rpm AUTO 500.0 ms COAST NO 5 rpm 30% COAST STOP NO OFF2 STOP 0.5 s DI5 20 s 20 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 0.00 s 3.00 s 0 0 20 s 20 s 10 2.50 s 0.0 ms 0.00 s 100.0% NO 8 ms
SEQ CTRL INTERNAL 24V ON 0 NO (calculated) (calculated) type specific 300% ON ON - 50 Hz 50 Hz 300% -300% NEG MAX TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 300.0% 0 0 0% 300% 0 rpm AUTO 500.0 ms RAMP NO 5 rpm 30% COAST STOP NO OFF2 STOP 0.5 s DI3 20 s 20 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 0.00 s 3.00 s 0 0 20 s 20 s 10 2.50 s 0.0 ms 0.12 s 100.0% NO 8 ms
PB W 259 260 261 262 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 W 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 W W
W W
401 W 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 W 411 W 426 427 428 429 430 431 432
261
Index Name/Selection 24 TORQUE CTRL 24.01 TORQ RAMP UP 24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 25.01 CRIT SPEED SELECT 25.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW 25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH 25.04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW 25.05 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH 25.06 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW 25.07 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH 26 MOTOR CONTROL 26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 26.02 FLUX BRAKING 26.03 IR-COMPENSATION 26.04 IR STEP-UP FREQ 26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN 26.06 FLUX REF PTR 26.07 FLYSTART CUR REF [%] 26.08 FLYSTART INIT DLY 26.09 FS METHOD 27 BRAKE CHOPPER 27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER CTL 27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC 27.03 BR RESISTANCE 27.04 BR THERM TCONST 27.05 MAX CONT BR POWER 27.06 BC CTRL MODE 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION 30.02 PANEL LOSS 30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT 30.04 MOTOR THERM PROT 30.05 MOT THERM P MODE 30.06 30.07 30.08 30.09 30.10 30.11 30.12 30.13 30.14 30.15 30.16 30.17 30.18 30.19 30.20 30.21 30.22 30.23 31 31.01 31.02 31.03 31.04 MOTOR THERM TIME MOTOR LOAD CURVE ZERO SPEED LOAD BREAK POINT STALL FUNCTION STALL FREQ HI STALL TIME UNDERLOAD FUNC UNDERLOAD TIME UNDERLOAD CURVE MOTOR PHASE LOSS EARTH FAULT COMM FLT FUNC MAIN REF DS T-OUT COMM FLT RO/AO AUX DS T-OUT IO CONFIG FUNC LIMIT WARNING AUTOMATIC RESET NUMBER OF TRIALS TRIAL TIME DELAY TIME OVERCURRENT
FACTORY
HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL
T-CTRL 0.00 s 0.00 s
SEQ CTRL
PB 451 452
OFF 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm NO YES 0% 0 NO C.10000 60% 25 OFF OFF NO
476 477 478 479 480 481 482 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 W W W W W W W W W
526 W 527 528 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 529 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 530 COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC 531 FAULT FAULT NOT SEL NO DTC/USER MODE (calculated) 100.0% 74.0% 45.0 Hz FAULT 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO 600.0 s 1 NO FAULT FAULT 3.00 s ZERO 3.0 s WARNING 0 0 30.0 s 0.0 s NO FAULT FAULT NOT SEL NO DTC/USER MODE (calculated) 100.0% 74.0% 45.0 Hz FAULT 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO 600.0 s 1 NO FAULT FAULT 3.00 s ZERO 3.0 s WARNING 0 0 30.0 s 0.0 s NO FAULT FAULT NOT SEL NO DTC/USER MODE (calculated) 100.0% 74.0% 45.0 Hz FAULT 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO 600.0 s 1 NO FAULT FAULT 3.00 s ZERO 3.0 s WARNING 0 0 30.0 s 0.0 s NO FAULT FAULT NOT SEL NO DTC/USER MODE (calculated) 100.0% 74.0% 45.0 Hz FAULT 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO 600.0 s 1 NO FAULT FAULT 3.00 s ZERO 3.0 s WARNING 0 0 30.0 s 0.0 s NO 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 626 627 628 629
FAULT FAULT NOT SEL NO DTC/USER MODE (calculated) 100.0% 74.0% 45.0 Hz FAULT 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO 600.0 s 1 NO FAULT FAULT 3.00 s ZERO 3.0 s WARNING 0 0 30.0 s 0.0 s NO
262
Index Name/Selection 31.05 OVERVOLTAGE 31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE 31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN 31.08 LINE CONV 32 SUPERVISION 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION 32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT 32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION 32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT 32.05 CURRENT FUNCTION 32.06 CURRENT LIMIT 32.07 TORQUE 1 FUNCTION 32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT 32.09 TORQUE 2 FUNCTION 32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT 32.11 REF1 FUNCTION 32.12 REF1 LIMIT 32.13 REF2 FUNCTION 32.14 REF2 LIMIT 32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION 32.16 ACT1 LIMIT 32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION 32.18 ACT2 LIMIT 33 INFORMATION 33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION 33.02 APPL SW VERSION 33.03 TEST DATE 33.04 BOARD TYPE 34 34.01 34.02 34.03 34.04 34.05 34.06 35 35.01 35.02 35.03 35.04 35.05 35.06 35.07 35.08 40 40.01 40.02 40.03 40.04 40.05 40.06 40.07 40.08 40.09 40.10 40.11 40.12 PROCESS VARIABLE SCALE P VAR UNIT SELECT P VAR MOTOR SP FILT TIM TORQ ACT FILT TIM RESET RUN TIME MOT TEMP MEAS MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL MOT 1 TEMP ALM L MOT 1 TEMP FLT L MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL MOT 2 TEMP ALM L MOT 2 TEMP FLT L MOT MOD COMPENSAT MOT MOD COMP PTR PID CONTROL PID GAIN PID INTEG TIME PID DERIV TIME PID DERIV FILTER ERROR VALUE INV ACTUAL VALUE SEL ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL ACT1 MINIMUM ACT1 MAXIMUM ACT2 MINIMUM ACT2 MAXIMUM
FACTORY NO NO NO NO 0 rpm NO 0 rpm NO 0 NO 0% NO 0% NO 0 rpm NO 0% NO 0% NO 0% (Version) (Version) (Date) (Control board type) 100 % 142 500 ms 100 ms NO NOT IN USE 110 130 NOT IN USE 110 130 YES 0 1 60.00 s 0.00 s 1.00 s NO ACT1 AI2 AI2 0 100% 0% 100%
HAND/AUTO NO NO NO NO NO 0 rpm NO 0 rpm NO 0 NO 0% NO 0% NO 0 rpm NO 0% NO 0% NO 0% (Version) (Version) (Date) (Control board type) 100 % 142 500 ms 100 ms NO NOT IN USE 110 130 NOT IN USE 110 130 YES 0 1 60.00 s 0.00 s 1.00 s NO ACT1 AI2 AI2 0 100% 0% 100%
PID-CTRL NO NO NO NO NO 0 rpm NO 0 rpm NO 0 NO 0% NO 0% NO 0 rpm NO 0% NO 0% NO 0% (Version) (Version) (Date) (Control board type) 100 % 142 500 ms 100 ms NO NOT IN USE 110 130 NOT IN USE 110 130 YES 0 1 60.00 s 0.00 s 1.00 s NO ACT1 AI2 AI2 0 100% 0% 100%
T-CTRL NO NO NO NO NO 0 rpm NO 0 rpm NO 0 NO 0% NO 0% NO 0 rpm NO 0% NO 0% NO 0% (Version) (Version) (Date) (Control board type) 100 % 142 500 ms 100 ms NO NOT IN USE 110 130 NOT IN USE 110 130 YES 0 1 60.00 s 0.00 s 1.00 s NO ACT1 AI2 AI2 0 100% 0% 100%
SEQ CTRL NO NO NO NO NO 0 rpm NO 0 rpm NO 0 NO 0% NO 0% NO 0 rpm NO 0% NO 0% NO 0% (Version) (Version) (Date) (Control board type) 100 % 142 500 ms 100 ms NO NOT IN USE 110 130 NOT IN USE 110 130 YES 0 1 60.00 s 0.00 s 1.00 s NO ACT1 AI2 AI2 0 100% 0% 100%
PB W 630 631 632 633 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 676 677 678 679
701 702 703 704 705 706 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862
263
Index Name/Selection 40.13 PID INTEGRATION 40.14 TRIM MODE 40.15 TRIM REF SEL 40.16 TRIM REFERENCE 40.17 TRIM RANGE ADJUST 40.18 TRIM SELECTION 40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME 40.20 SLEEP SELECTION 40.21 SLEEP LEVEL 40.22 SLEEP DELAY 40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL 40.24 WAKE UP DELAY 40.25 ACTUAL1 PTR 40.26 PID MINIMUM 40.27 PID MAXIMUM 40.28 TRIM REF PTR 42 BRAKE CONTROL 42.01 BRAKE CTRL 42.02 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE 42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY 42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY 42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD 42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC 42.07 START TORQ REF SEL 42.08 START TORQ REF 42.09 EXTEND RUN T 42.10 LOW REF BRK HOLD 45 ENERGY OPT 45.02 ENERGY TARIFF1 45.06 E TARIFF UNIT 45.08 PUMP REF POWER 45.09 ENERGY RESET 50 ENCODER MODULE 50.01 PULSE NR 50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE 50.03 ENCODER FAULT 50.04 ENCODER DELAY 50.05 ENCODER DDCS CH 50.06 SPEED FB SEL 50.07 ENC CABLE CHECK 51 COMM MOD DATA 52 52.01 52.02 52.03 60 60.01 60.02 60.03 60.04 60.05 60.06 60.07 60.08 70 70.01 70.02 STANDARD MODBUS STATION NUMBER BAUDRATE PARITY MASTER/FOLLOWER MASTER LINK MODE TORQUE SELECTOR WINDOW SEL ON WINDOW WIDTH POS WINDOW WIDTH NEG DROOP RATE MASTER SIGNAL 2 MASTER SIGNAL 3 DDCS CONTROL CHANNEL 0 ADDR CHANNEL 3 ADDR
FACTORY ON OFF AI1 0.0% 100.0% 0.04 s not visible not visible not visible not visible not visible 0 -100.0% 100.0% 0 OFF OFF 0.0 s 0.0 s 10 rpm FAULT NO 0% 0.0 s 0.0 s 0 c/E EUR 100% DONE 2048 A --- B --WARNING 1000 CHANNEL 1 INTERNAL NO
HAND/AUTO ON OFF AI1 0.0% 100.0% 0.04 s not visible not visible not visible not visible not visible 0 -100.0% 100.0% 0 OFF OFF 0.0 s 0.0 s 10 rpm FAULT NO 0% 0.0 s 0.0 s 0 c/E EUR 100% DONE 2048 A --- B --WARNING 1000 CHANNEL 1 INTERNAL NO
PID-CTRL ON
0.0% 100.0% 0.04 s OFF 0.0 rpm 0.0 s 0% 0.0 s 0 -100.0% 100.0% 0 OFF OFF 0.0 s 0.0 s 10 rpm FAULT NO 0% 0.0 s 0.0 s 0 c/E EUR 100% DONE 2048 A --- B --WARNING 1000 CHANNEL 1 INTERNAL NO
T-CTRL ON OFF AI1 0.0% 100.0% SPEED TRIM 0.04 s not visible not visible not visible not visible not visible 0 -100.0% 100.0% 0 OFF OFF 0.0 s 0.0 s 10 rpm FAULT NO 0% 0.0 s 0.0 s 0 c/E EUR 100% DONE 2048 A --- B --WARNING 1000 CHANNEL 1 INTERNAL NO
SEQ CTRL ON OFF AI1 0.0% 100.0% 0.04 s not visible not visible not visible not visible not visible 0 -100.0% 100.0% 0 OFF OFF 0.0 s 0.0 s 10 rpm FAULT NO 0% 0.0 s 0.0 s 0 c/E EUR 100% DONE 2048 A --- B --WARNING 1000 CHANNEL 1 INTERNAL NO
PB W 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1026 ... 1051 1052 1053 1195 1196 1167 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1375 1376
1 9600 ODD NOT IN USE not visible not visible not visible not visible 0 202 213 1 1
1 9600 ODD NOT IN USE TORQUE NO 0 0 0 202 213 1 1
264
Index Name/Selection 70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE 70.04 CH0 DDCS HW CONN 70.05 CH2 HW CONNECTION 72 USER LOAD CURVE 72.01 OVERLOAD FUNC 72.02 LOAD CURRENT 1 72.03 LOAD CURRENT 2 72.04 LOAD CURRENT 3 72.05 LOAD CURRENT 4 72.06 LOAD CURRENT 5 72.07 LOAD CURRENT 6 72.08 LOAD CURRENT 7 72.09 LOAD CURRENT 8 72.10 LOAD FREQ 1 72.11 LOAD FREQ 2 72.12 LOAD FREQ 3 72.13 LOAD FREQ 4 72.14 LOAD FREQ 5 72.15 LOAD FREQ 6 72.16 LOAD FREQ 7 72.17 LOAD FREQ 8 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT 72.19 LOAD THERMAL TIME 72.20 LOAD COOLING TIME 83 ADAPT PROG CTRL 83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD 83.02 EDIT COMMAND 83.03 EDIT BLOCK 83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL 83.05 PASSCODE 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 84.01 STATUS 84.02 FAULTED PAR 84.05 BLOCK1 84.06 INPUT1 84.07 INPUT2 84.08 INPUT3 84.09 OUTPUT 84.79 85 85.01 85.02 85.03 85.04 85.05 85.06 85.07 85.08 85.09 85.10 85.11 85.12 85.13 85.14 85.15 OUTPUT USER CONSTANTS CONSTANT1 CONSTANT2 CONSTANT3 CONSTANT4 CONSTANT5 CONSTANT6 CONSTANT7 CONSTANT8 CONSTANT9 CONSTANT10 STRING1 STRING2 STRING3 STRING4 STRING5
FACTORY 4 Mbit/s RING RING NO 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 800 0.0 0 EDIT NO 0 100ms 0
HAND/AUTO 4 Mbit/s RING RING NO 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 800 0.0 0 EDIT NO 0 100ms 0
PID-CTRL 4 Mbit/s RING RING NO 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 800 0.0 0 EDIT NO 0 100ms 0
T-CTRL 4 Mbit/s RING RING NO 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 800 0.0 0 EDIT NO 0 100ms 0
SEQ CTRL 4 Mbit/s RING RING NO 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 800 0.0 0 EDIT NO 0 100ms 0
PB W 1377 1378
1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428
1609 W 1610 1611 1612 1613 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659
NO 0 0 0 0
NO 0 0 0 0
NO 0 0 0 0
NO 0 0 0 0
NO 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5
265
Index Name/Selection 90 D SET REC ADDR 90.01 AUX DS REF3 90.02 AUX DS REF4 90.03 AUX DS REF5 90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE 90.05 AUX DS SOURCE 92 D SET TR ADDR 92.01 MAIN DS STATUS WORD 92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 92.04 AUX DS ACT3 92.05 AUX DS ACT4 92.06 AUX DS ACT5 92.07 MSW B10 PTR 92.08 MSW B13 PTR 92.09 MSW B14 PTR 95 HARDWARE SPECIF 95.01 FAN SPD CTRL MODE 95.02 FUSE SWITCH CTRL 95.03 INT CONFIG USER 95.04 EX/SIN REQUEST 95.05 ENA INC SW FREQ 95.06 LCU Q PW REF 95.07 LCU DC REF 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL 95.10 TEMP INV AMBIENT 95.11 SUPPLY CTRL MODE 95.12 LCU RUN PTR 96 EXTERNAL AO 96.01 EXT AO1 96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 96.06 EXT AO2 96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 96.11 EXT AO1 PTR 96.12 EXT AO2 PTR 98 OPTION MODULES 98.01 ENCODER MODULE 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 98.05 DI/O EXT MODULE 3 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 98.07 COMM PROFILE 98.09 DI/O EXT1 DI FUNC 98.10 DI/O EXT2 DI FUNC 98.11 DI/O EXT3 DI FUNC 98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP 98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC 98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC
FACTORY 0 0 0 1 3 302 102 105 305 308 306 3.014.09 0 0
HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL 0 0 0 1 3 302 102 105 305 308 306 3.014.09 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 302 102 105 305 308 306 3.014.09 0 0
T-CTRL 0 0 0 1 3 302 102 105 305 308 306 3.014.09 0 0
SEQ CTRL 0 0 0 1 3 302 102 105 305 308 306 3.014.09 0 0
PB 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914
0 1 0 0 0 106 110 40C type specific C.00000 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.01 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 NO NO NO NO NO NO ABB DRIVES DI7,8,9 DI10,11,12 DI11,12 NO UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI6
CONTROLLED Inverter type dependent 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 106 106 106 110 110 110 40C 40C 40C type specific type specific type specific C.00000 C.00000 C.00000 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.01 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 NO NO NO NO NO NO ABB DRIVES DI7,8,9 DI10,11,12 DI11,12 NO UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI6 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.01 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 NO NO NO NO NO NO ABB DRIVES DI7,8,9 DI10,11,12 DI11,12 NO UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI6 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.01 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 NO NO NO NO NO NO ABB DRIVES DI7,8,9 DI10,11,12 DI11,12 NO UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI6
0 1 0 0 0 106 110 40C type specific C.00000 SPEED NO 0 mA 0.01 s 100% CURRENT NO 0 mA 2.00 s 100% 0 0 NO NO NO NO NO NO ABB DRIVES DI7,8,9 DI10,11,12 DI11,12 NO UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI6
266
Index Name/Selection 98.16 SIN FILT SUPERV 99 START-UP DATA 99.01 LANGUAGE 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO 99.03 APPLIC RESTORE 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE 99.05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED 99.09 MOTOR NOM POWER 99.10 MOTOR ID RUN MODE 99.11 DEVICE NAME
FACTORY NO ENGLISH FACTORY NO DTC 0V 0.0 A 50.0 Hz 2900 rpm 0.0 kW ID MAGN
HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL NO NO ENGLISH HAND/AUTO NO DTC 0V 0.0 A 50.0 Hz 2900 rpm 0.0 kW ID MAGN ENGLISH PID-CTRL NO DTC 0V 0.0 A 50.0 Hz 2900 rpm 0.0 kW ID MAGN
T-CTRL NO ENGLISH T CTRL NO DTC 0V 0.0 A 50.0 Hz 2900 rpm 0.0 kW ID MAGN
SEQ CTRL NO ENGLISH SEQ CTRL NO DTC 0V 0.0 A 50.0 Hz 2900 rpm 0.0 kW ID MAGN
PB W 1915 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936
W W W W W W W W
267
Control block diagrams
Chapter overview
Diagram Reference control chain, sheet 1 Valid when FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL or T CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02). Reference control chain, sheet 1 Valid when PID CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02). Reference control chain, sheet 2 Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02). Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable Start Interlock Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02). Handling of Reset and On/Off Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02). Related diagrams Continued on sheet 2 Continued on sheet 2 Continued from sheet 1 -
268
Reference control chain, sheet 1: FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL and T CTRL macros (continued on the next page )
269
continued from the previous page
270
Reference control chain sheet 1: PID CTRL macro (continued on the next page )
271
272
Reference control chain sheet 2: All macros (continued on the next page )
273
274
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock
275
Handling of Reset and On/Off The diagram below is a detail to the previous diagram (Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock).
RESET FROM PANEL RESET FROM FIELDBUS IN LOCAL MODE 16.04
OR
MAIN CW / B7 (RESET)
EXT RESET AND
31
AUTORESET
AND
AND AND
MAIN CW / B0 (ON/OFF)
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON SWITCH ON INHIBITED
OR
FIELDBUS CW / B0
276
277
Index
A
ABB drives communication profile 210 Absolute maximum frequency 99, 253 Absolute maximum speed 99, 253 ACCEL TIME 1 136 ACCEL/DECEL 135 Acceleration compensation 139 motor 102 ramps 59 settings 59 speed reference ramps 46 times 20 times, setting 42 Actual signals 53, 255257 defined 99 diagnostics 44, 52, 53 display mode 29 displaying the full names 30 parameters 52, 53 PID control 71 settings 52, 53 speed controller 60 speed controller tuning 60 user-defined variables 69 Actual values 53 actual signals 52, 53 analogue outputs 50 defined 205 digital inputs 51 relay outputs 52 Adapter module, fieldbus 192 Advent controller 197198 AI 63 ALARM WORD 1 222 ALARM WORD 2 223 ALARM WORD 4 225 ALARM WORD 5 226 ALARM WORD 6 227 Analogue extension module 249 Analogue inputs optional, supervising 66 Analogue outputs diagnostics 50 optional, supervising 66 parameters 50 settings 50 APPLICATION MACRO 101, 187 Application macros 85 factory 85, 87 hand/auto 85, 89 PID control 85, 91 reference control chain diagram 270 sequential control 85, 95 torque control 85, 93 user 85, 97 Application, selection for start-up assistant 41 Automatic resets 69 Automatic start 54 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 223 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 224
B
Boolean values 40
C
Cable connection, monitoring 65 Clearing fault history 30 Communication fault protection 66 profiles 210218 using a fieldbus adapter module 193 Communication profiles 210218 ABB drives 210 generic drive 215 Constant speeds 59 Control block diagrams 267275 Control board temperature fault 68 Control panel basic keys 35 display mode 29 downloading drive data 37 drive control 2728 overview 2526 setting the display contrast 38 upload drive data 36 Control word 203 CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile 218 Critical speeds 59
D
DC hold 57
Index
278 intermediate circuit protection 69 magnetising 57 overvoltage fault 66 undervoltage fault 67 DECEL TIME 1 136 Deceleration compensation 139 ramps 59 settings 59 Default tasks, start-up assistant 41 Diagnostics actual signals 44, 52, 53 analogue outputs 50 digital inputs 51 relay outputs 52 speed controller 60 supervision of user-defined variables 69 Digital inputs diagnostics 51 optional, supervising 66 parameters 51 settings 51 Digital outputs optional, supervising 66 Display contrast, setting 38 Displaying actual signal full names 30 fault history 30 Drive changing panel link ID number 39 data, downloading to the control panel 37 data, uploading to the control panel 36 IR compensation for scalar controlled 62 reference types and processing 46 start-up 15 temperature fault 67 Drive control parameters 199201 using I/O interface 21 Fault history clearing 30 viewing and resetting 30 FAULT WORD 1 220 FAULT WORD 2 221 FAULT WORD 4 224 FAULT WORD 5 225 FAULT WORD 6 228 FAULTED INT INFO 229 Faults communication, protection 66 DC overvoltage 66 earth, protection 65 external, settings 63 overcurrent 66 preprogrammed 66 control board temperature 68 DC undervoltage 67 drive temperature 67 Enhanced drive temperature monitoring 67 input phase loss 68 internal fault 68 overfrequency 68 short circuit 68 Features of the program 4184 Fieldbus adapter communication parameters 193194 module 192 Fieldbus addresses 253 Fieldbus control 191230 connecting two fieldbuses to a drive 192 control word, status word 203 interface 202209 References 203 Fieldbus reference scaling ABB drives communication profile 214 CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile 218 generic drive 217 Fieldbus, equivalent, defined 99 Flux braking 57, 58 Flux optimisation 58
E
Earth fault protection 65 Energy optimizing 101, 164 EXT IO STATUS 228 External control 44 diagnostics 44 reference source diagram 45 stop, start, direction diagram 45 External fault 63
G
Generic drive communication profile 215
H
Hand/auto macro 85, 89 Hexagonal motor flux 63
F
Factory macros 8587
I
ID run procedure 2223 Input bridge protection 69
Index
279 Input phase loss fault 68 INT INIT FAULT 226 INT SC INFO 230 Integer scaling 67 Internal fault 68 Parameter settings, bipolar input in joystick mode 251 Parameters actual signals 52, 53 Advent controller 197198 AI 63 analogue outputs 50 automatic reset 69 communication fault protection 66 data tables 258 defined 99 digital inputs 51 drive control 199201 earth fault protection 65 external fault 63 fieldbus adapter 193194 hexagonal motor flux 63 IR compensation 62 motor phase loss 65 motor stall protection 65 motor temperature 64 motor underload protection 65 operation limits 68 optional analogue inputs and outputs 66 parameter lock 69 reference trimming 47 relay outputs 52 scalar control 62 selecting and changing values 32 speed controller tuning 60 standard modbus link 195196 start-up assistant 41 supervision 69 PB, defined 253 Performance figures speed controller 60 torque control 60 PID control block diagrams 70 macro 85, 91 macro, reference control diagram 270 parameters 71 settings 71 sleep function 71 Power limit 69 Power loss ride-through 54 Preprogrammed faults 66 control board temperature 68 DC undervoltage 67 drive temperature 67 Enhanced drive temperature monitoring 67 input phase loss 68 internal fault 68 overfrequency 68
K
Keys on the control panel 35
L
LIMIT WORD 1 220 LIMIT WORD INV 227 Limits, adjustable 68 Local control 44
M
Macros factory 85, 87 hand/auto 85, 89 overview 85 PID control 85, 91 reference control chain diagram 270 sequential control 95 defined 85 torque control 85, 93 user 97 defined 85 Modbus adapter module 192 addressing 196 link, communication parameters 195196 Motor identification 53 phase loss 65 stall protection 65 temperature measurement using standard I/O 72, 73 temperature thermal model 64 thermal protection 64 underload protection 65
O
Operation limits 68 Overcurrent fault 66 Overfrequency fault 68
P
Panel link ID number, changing 39 Panel loss 63 Parameter lock 69
Index
280 short circuit 68 Prevention of unexpected start-up (POUS) 55 Program features 4184 Programmable analogue outputs 50 digital inputs 51 relay outputs 52 Protection functions 63 flux braking 58 flux optimisation 58 hexagonal motor flux 63 IR compensation 62 limits 68 local control 44 motor phase loss 65 motor stall protection 65 motor temperature 64 motor underload protection 65 optional analogue inputs 66 optional analogue outputs 66 optional digital inputs 66 optional digital outputs 66 parameter lock 69 PID control 71 reference trimming 47 relay outputs 52 scalar control 62 speed controller 60 supervision 69 Short circuit fault 68 Sleep function 71 example 72 Speed controller tuning 60 Speed reference acceleration/deceleration ramps 46 parameters 250 Stall protection 65 Start-up 15 automatic start 54 basic settings 1720 guided 1516 Start-up assistant application selection 41 default tasks 41 tasks and parameters 41 Status word 203 auxiliary 219 CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile 218 Supervising user-selectable variables 69 SYSTEM FAULT WORD 222 System overview 191
R
Ramps acceleration 59 deceleration 59 Reference control chain diagrams 270 handling 204 source EXT 1 45 types and processing 46 trimming 47 Relay outputs diagnostics 52 parameters 52 settings 52 Resets, automatic 69 Resetting fault history 30
S
Safe torque off (STO) 55 Safely-limited speed (SLS) 56 Scalar control 62 Sequential control macro 95 defined 85 Setting, acceleration times 42 Settings acceleration 59 actual signals 52, 53 AI 63 analogue outputs 50 automatic reset 69 automatic start 54 communication fault protection 66 constant speed 59 critical speeds 59 DC hold 57 DC magnetising 57 deceleration 59 digital inputs 51 earth fault protection 65 external control 44 external fault 63
T
Temperature calculation method 64 measurement using standard I/O 72, 73 Torque control macro 85, 93 performance figures 60 Tuning the speed controller 60
Index
281
U
Underload protection 65 User macros 97 defined 85 user-defined, supervising 69
V
Variables 69 Viewing fault history 30
Index
282
Index
ABB Oy Drives P.O. Box 184 FI-00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone +358 10 22 211 Telefax +358 10 22 22681 Internet www.abb.com/drives
ABB Inc. Automation Technologies Drives & Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin, WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785-3200 1-800-HELP-365 Fax 262 780-5135
ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd. No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing, P.R. China, 100015 Telephone +86 10 5821 7788 Fax +86 10 5821 7618 Internet www.abb.com/drives
3AFE64527592 REV L / EN EFFECTIVE: 2011-08-25
ACS800
Firmware Manual PCP and ESP Control Program
PCP and ESP Control Program Firmware Manual
3AUA0000005224 / 3AFE68609259 REV B / EN EFFECTIVE: 04/14/2008 SUPERSEDES: 01/20/2004
2008 ABB Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Table of Contents
............................................................................. 2 Introduction to the manual Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-up Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to perform the ID Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control panel Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview of the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Panel operation mode keys and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Status row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Drive control with the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 How to start, stop and change direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 How to set speed reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Actual signal display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 How to select actual signals to the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 How to display the full name of the actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 How to view and reset the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 How to display and reset an active fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 About the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 How to select a parameter and change the value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Function mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 How to copy data from a drive to the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 How to download data from the panel to a drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 How to set the display contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Drive selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3 3 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
Table of Contents
ii
Program features Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flux Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flux Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36
Table of Contents
iii
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scalar Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor temperature thermal model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of the motor thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preprogrammed Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7 and R8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive Programming using the function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DriveAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application macros
36 37 37 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 41 41 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 45 45 45
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table of Contents
iv
Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCP Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input and Output Signal Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Input and Output Signal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESP Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown Definition for PCP & ESP Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals and parameters Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05 PUMP ACTUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06 FIELDBUS INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07 AI SCALED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08 STATUS WORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09 FAULT WORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ANALOG INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 DC HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SPEED REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 SPEED CTRL TUNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 FLUX CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 SCALAR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 AUTO FLT RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 PULSE ENCODER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 MASTER ADAPTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 STANDARD MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 DDCS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 PUMP CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 PUMP SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 PUMP SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 ADAPT PROG CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 USER CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 FIELDBUS OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 HARDWARE SPECIFIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47 47 47 48 48 49 49
51 51 52 53 53 53 54 54 54 54 54 56 58 59 61 61 62 63 64 64 66 67 67 71 72 72 78 79 80 80 80 81 84 89 91 93 94 95 95
Table of Contents
98 OPTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Fieldbus control Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modbus addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up communication through Advant controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 800M Advant Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DriveBus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical ModuleBus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 80 Advant Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical ModuleBus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical ModuleBus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1, Setting up communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2, Default connections for the cyclical fieldbus communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3, DataSet 1 Word 1 - Command Word (Actual Signal 06.01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4, DataSet 3 Word 1 - Pump Command (Actual Signal 06.04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5, Main Status Word (Actual Signal 08.01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6, Pump Status Word 4 (Actual Signal 08.02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 7, Fault Word 1 (Actual Signal 09.01). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 8, Fault Word 2 (Actual Signal 09.02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9, Alarm Word 1 (Actual Signal 09.03). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 10, Limit Word (Actual Signal 09.04). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault tracing Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning messages generated by the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 119 119 119 119 120 125 127 103 103 104 105 107 108 109 109 109 109 109 109 109 109 110 111 111 111 111 112 112 113 113 113 114 115 116 116 117 118
Table of Contents
vi
Additional data: actual signals and parameters Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A: Software One-Line Diagrams Figure A-1, SPD/TQ Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 135 135 135 135 135 136 138
Table of Contents

Chapter overview
The chapter includes a description of the contents of the manual. In addition it contains information about the compatibility, safety, intended audience, and related publications.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with ACS 800 PCP and ESP Control Program (Version BZXR631G and above). See 04.01 SW PACKAGE VERSION.
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive. Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the Hardware Manual. Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are given in this manual in the subsection describing the related user-adjustable parameters.
Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.
Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters: Start-up instructs in performing an ID Run. Control panel gives instructions for using the panel. Program features contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the user settings and diagnostic signals. Application macros contains a short description of each macro. Actual signals and parameters describes the actual signals and parameters of the drive. Fieldbus control describes the communication through the serial communication links.
Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and remedies. Additional data: actual signals and parameters contains more information on the actual signals and parameters. Appendix A: Software One-Line Diagrams diagrams the signal flow for the speed and torque chains.
Product and service inquiries

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type code and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and selecting Drives - Sales, Support and Service network on the right pane.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select Drives - Training courses on the right pane.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives, then select successively Drives - Document Library - Manuals feedback form (LV AC drives) on the right pane.
Start-up
Chapter overview
The chapter instructs how to: complete the initial start-up. perform an identification run (ID Run) for the drive.
How to start-up
SAFETY The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician. The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions. Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation manual. Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger. De-couple the driven machine if: - There is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or - A Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive setup (see section How to perform the ID Run on page 7). POWER-UP Apply mains power. The control panel first shows the panel identification data then the Identification Display of the drive and after a few seconds the panel enters the Actual Signal Display. The drive is now ready for the start-up.
CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx ....... ACS 800 xx kW ID NUMBER 1 1 -> 0.0 rpm O 0.00 Hz FREQ SPD FILT 0.00 rpm TORQ FILT 0.00 %
Start-up
START-UP DATA ENTERING (parameter group 99) Select the language. The general parameter setting procedure is described below.
The general parameter setting procedure: - Press PAR to select the Parameter Mode of the panel. - Press the double-arrow keys ( - Press the arrow keys ( or or ) to scroll the parameter groups. ) to scroll parameters within a group. or ), fast change using the 1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH O
- Select the value you would like to modify by pressing ENTER. - Change the value using the arrow keys ( double-arrow keys ( or ).
1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 01 LANGUAGE [ENGLISH]
- Press ENTER to accept the new value (brackets disappear).
Select the Application Macro. The general parameter setting procedure is given above. Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate:
1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 02 APPLICATION MACRO [ ] Note: Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate. For example, if the motor nominal speed is 1440 rpm on the nameplate, setting the value of parameter 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm will result in incorrect operation of the drive.
ABB Motors
3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 IEC 200 M/L 55 No Ins.cl. F IP 55 Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s 1475 32.5 0.83 30 50 56 1475 50 0.83 30 50 1470 34 0.83 30 1470 59 30 0.83 50 1475 50 54 0.83 30 59 35 1770 0.83 60 3GAA 202 001 - ADA 6210/C3 IEC 34-1 180
V 690 Y 400 D 660 Y 380 D 415 D 440 D Cat. no
380 V mains voltage
6312/C3
- motor nominal voltage

Allowed range: 1/2 UN2 UN of ACS800. (UN refers to the highest voltage in each of the nominal voltage ranges: 415 VAC for 400 VAC units, 500 VAC for 500 VAC units and 690 VAC for 600 VAC units.)
1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 07 MOTOR NOM FREQ [ ] O
- motor nominal current

Allowed range: 1/6 I2hd 2 I2hd of ACS800
- motor nominal frequency

Range: 8300 Hz
- motor nominal speed Range: 118000 rpm
1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 08 MOTOR NOM SPEED [ ]
Start-up
- motor nominal power Range: 09000 kW When the motor data has been entered, a warning appears. It indicates that the motor parameters have been set, and the drive is ready to start the motor identification (ID magnetization or ID Run). Select the motor identification.
The ID Run (STANDARD) should be selected. For more information, see section How to perform the ID Run on page 7.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 09 MOTOR NOM POWER [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm ** WARNING ** ID MAGN REQ 1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 10 MOTOR ID RUN [STANDARD] O
DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR Check the direction of rotation of the motor. - Press ACT to get the status row visible. - Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value by pressing REF and then the arrow keys ( , , or ). - Press to start the motor. - Check that the motor is running in the desired direction. - Stop the motor by pressing . To change the direction of rotation of the motor: - Disconnect input power from the drive and wait 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure the voltage between each input terminal (U1, V1 and W1) and ground with a multimeter to ensure that the frequency converter is discharged. - Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the motor terminals or at the motor connection box. - Verify your work by applying mains power and repeating the check as described above.
1 L->[xxx] rpm I xxx Hz FREQ CURRENT xx A POWER xx %
forward direction
reverse direction
Start-up
SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES Set the minimum speed.

1 L-> 0.0 rpm 20 LIMITS 01 MINIMUM SPEED [ ] 1 L-> 0.0 rpm 20 LIMITS 02 MAXIMUM SPEED [ ] 1 L-> 0.0 rpm 22 ACCEL/DECEL 02 ACCELER TIME 1 [ ] 1 L-> 0.0 rpm 22 ACCEL/DECEL 03 DECELER TIME 1 [ ] O
Set the maximum speed.
Set the acceleration time 1.
Set the deceleration time 1.
The drive is now ready for use.
Start-up
How to perform the ID Run

For a PCP application, the Standard ID Run must be performed. Uncouple the motor if possible. Note: 10.04 RUN ENABLE must be set to Yes or the digital input made and 10.05 EMERG STOP INPUT must be set to Not Select or the digital input made in order to perform the ID Run. ID Run Procedure Note: If parameter values (Group 10 to 98) are changed before the ID Run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions: 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of motor rated speed 20.05 MAXIMUM TORQUE > 50% 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 < 1 s Ensure that the panel is in the local control mode (L displayed on the status row). Press the LOC/REM key to switch between modes. Change the selection to STANDARD.
1 L ->1242.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 10 MOTOR ID RUN [STANDARD] O
Press ENTER to verify selection. The following message will be displayed:

1 L ->1242.0 rpm ACS 800 55 kW **WARNING** ID RUN SEL O
To start the ID Run, press the

Warning when the ID Run is started 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS 800 55 kW **WARNING** MOTOR STARTS I
key.
Warning after a successfully completed ID Run 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS 800 55 kW **WARNING** ID DONE I
Start-up
In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run. However: The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the control panel stop key ( ). After the ID Run is started with the start key ( ), it is possible to monitor the actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then a double-arrow key ( ).
Start-up
Control panel
Chapter overview The chapter describes how to control, monitor and change the settings of the drive using the control panel CDP 312R. The same control panel is used with all ACS800 series drives, so the instructions given apply to all ACS800 types. The display examples shown are based on the Standard Control Program; displays produced by other control programs may differ slightly. Overview of the panel
The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters. The language is selected at start-up by parameter 99.01. The control panel has four operation modes: - Actual Signal Display Mode (ACT key)
- Parameter Mode (PAR key) - Function Mode (FUNC key) - Drive Selection Mode (DRIVE key) The use of single arrow keys, double arrow keys, and ENTER depend on the operation mode of the panel. The drive control keys: No. Use Start Stop Activate reference setting Forward direction of rotation Reverse direction of rotation Fault reset Change between Local / Remote (external) control
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
ENTER
1 2
7
LOC REM
6
RESET
3
REF
3 4
5 2 6 7
Control panel
10
Panel operation mode keys and displays The figure below shows the mode selection keys of the panel, and the basic operations and displays in each mode.
Actual Signal Display Mode ACT Act. signal / Fault history selection Act. signal / Fault message scrolling ENTER Parameter Mode PAR Group selection Fast value change Parameter selection Slow value change ENTER Function Mode FUNC ENTER Row selection Function start 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 7 Status row List of functions Enter change mode Accept new value 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 10 START/STOP 01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2 Status row Parameter group Parameter Parameter value Enter selection mode Accept new signal 1 L -> FREQ CURRENT POWER 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz 80.00 A 75.00 % Status row Actual signal names and values
Drive Selection Mode DRIVE ENTER Drive selection ID number change Enter change mode Accept new value ACS 801 75 kW xxxxx ASAA5000 ID NUMBER 1 Device type Application name, version and ID number
Status row The figure below describes the status row digits.
Drive ID number Drive control status L = Local control R = Remote control = External control
1 L ->
1242.0 rpm I
Drive reference
Direction of rotation -> = Forward <- = Reverse
Drive status I = Running O = Stopped = Run disabled
Control panel
11
Drive control with the panel The user can control the drive with the panel as follows: start, stop, and change direction of the motor give the motor speed reference or torque reference reset the fault and warning messages change between local and external drive control. The panel can be used for drive control when the drive is under local control and the status row is visible on the display. How to start, stop and change direction
Step 1. Action To display the status row.
ACT PAR FUNC
Press Key
Display 1 ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
2.
To switch to local control. (only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L on the first row of the display.)
LOC REM
3.
To stop
4.
To start
5.
To change the direction to reverse.
1 L <-1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
6.
To change the direction to forward.
Control panel
12
How to set speed reference

ACT PAR FUNC
Press Key
Display 1 ->1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->[1242.0 rpm]I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->[1325.0 rpm]I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
2.
To switch to local control. (Only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L on the first row of the display.)
LOC REM
3.
To enter the Reference Setting function.
REF
4.
To change the reference. (slow change) (fast change)
5.
To save the reference. (The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is restored automatically after power switch-off.)
ENTER
Control panel
13
Actual signal display mode In the Actual Signal Display Mode, the user can: show three actual signals on the display at a time select the actual signals to display view the fault history reset the fault history. The panel enters the Actual Signal Display Mode when the user presses the ACT key, or does not press any key within one minute. How to select actual signals to the display
Step 1. Action To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. Press Key Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz 80.00 A CURRENT POWER 75.00 %
ENTER
ACT
2.
To select a row (a blinking cursor indicates the selected row).
3.
To enter the actual signal selection function.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 CURRENT 80.00 A 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS 05 TORQUE 70.00 %
4.
To select an actual signal. To change the actual signal group.
5.a
To accept the selection and return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz 70.00 % TORQUE POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz 80.00 A CURRENT POWER 75.00 %
5.b
To cancel the selection and keep the original selection. The selected keypad mode is entered.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
Control panel
14
How to display the full name of the actual signals

Step 1. Action To display the full name of the three actual signals. Press Key Hold
ACT
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQUENCY CURRENT POWER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
2.
Release
ACT
How to view and reset the fault history Note: The fault history cannot be reset if there are active faults or warnings.
Step 1. Action To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. Press Key
ACT
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 LAST FAULT +OVERCURRENT 6451 H 21 MIN 23 S 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT +OVERVOLTAGE 1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
2.
To enter the Fault History Display.
3.
To select the previous (UP) or the next fault/warning (DOWN).
To clear the Fault History.
RESET
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT H MIN S 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
4.
Control panel
15
How to display and reset an active fault The table below includes the step-by-step instructions. WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive will start immediately after fault reset. If the cause of the fault has not been removed, the drive will trip again.
Step 1. Action To display an active fault.
ACT
Press Key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS 801 75 kW ** FAULT ** ACS 800 TEMP 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %
2.
To reset the fault.
RESET
About the fault history The fault history reports information on the latest events (faults, warnings and resets) logged by the drive. The table below shows how these events are stored in the fault history.
A Fault History View Sequential number (1 is the most recent event) Sign 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT +OVERVOLTAGE 1121 H 1 MIN 23 S Name Power-on time
Event Drive detects a fault and generates a fault message.
Information on Display Sequential number of the event. Name of the fault and a + sign in front of the name. Total power-on time.
User resets the fault message.
Sequential number of the event. -RESET FAULT text. Total power-on time.
Drive generates a warning message.
Sequential number of the event. Name of the warning and a + sign in front of the name. Total power-on time.
Drive deactivates the warning message.
Sequential number of the event. Name of the warning and a - sign in front of the name. Total power-on time.
Control panel
16
Parameter mode In the Parameter Mode, the user can: view the parameter values change the parameter settings. The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key. How to select a parameter and change the value
Step 1. Action To enter the Parameter Mode.
PAR
Press Key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 10 START/STOP/DIR 01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm) 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1
2.
To select a different group.
3.
To select a parameter.
4.
To enter the parameter setting function.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT [AI1] 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT [AI2]
5.
To change the parameter value. - (slow change for numbers and text) - (fast change for numbers only)
6a.
To save the new value.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI2 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1
6b.
To cancel the new setting and keep the original value, press any of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
Control panel
17
How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter Most parameters define values that are used directly in the drive application program. Source selection (pointer) parameters are exceptions: They point to the value of another parameter. The parameter setting procedure differs somewhat from that of the other parameters.
Step 1. Action See the table above to: - enter the Parameter Mode - select the correct parameter group and parameter - enter the parameter setting mode
PAR
Press Key
Display 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [000.000.00]
ENTER
2.
To scroll between the inversion, group, index and bit fields.
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [000.000.00] 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [000.018.00]
ENTER
3.
To adjust the value of a field.
4.
To accept the value.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [ 001.018.00] Inversion field Group field Index field Bit field
Inversion field inverts the selected parameter value. Plus sign (+): no inversion Minus (-) sign: inversion. Bit field selects the bit number (relevant only if the parameter value is a packed boolean word). Index field selects the parameter index. Group field selects the parameter group.
Note: Instead of pointing to another parameter, it is also possible to define a constant by the source selection parameter. Proceed as follows: - Change the inversion field to C. The appearance of the row changes. The rest of the line is now a constant setting field. - Give the constant value to the constant setting field. - Press Enter to accept.
Control panel
18
Function mode In the Function Mode, the user can: copy the drive parameter values and motor data from the drive to the panel. copy group 1 to 97 parameter values from the panel to the drive. 1) adjust the contrast of the display. The panel enters the Function Mode when the user presses the FUNC key. How to copy data from a drive to the panel Note: Uploading must be completed before downloading. The uploading and downloading are possible only if the program versions of the destination drive are the same as the versions of the source drive, see 04.01 SW PACKAGE VER and 04.07 APPL SW VERSION. The drive must be stopped during the downloading.
Step 1. Action Set-up the drives. In each drive, activate the communication to the optional equipment. See parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES. In one drive, set the parameters in groups 10 to 97 as preferred. Enter the Function Mode.
FUNC
Press Key
Display
2. 3.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O <=<= UPLOAD DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O <=<= UPLOAD DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4
4.
Select the upload function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).
5. 6.
Enter the upload function. Switch to external control. (No L on the first row of the display.)
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= 1 -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4
LOC REM
7.
Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the drive into which the data will be downloaded.
The parameter groups 98, 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included as default. The restriction prevents downloading of unfit motor data. In special cases it is, however, possible to download all. For more information, please contact your local ABB representative.
1)
Control panel
19
How to download data from the panel to a drive Consider the notes in section How to copy data from a drive to the panel above.
Step 1. 2. Action Connect the panel containing the uploaded data to the drive. Ensure the drive is in local control (L shown on the first row of the display). If necessary, press the LOC/REM key to change to local control. Enter the Function Mode.
FUNC LOC REM
Press Key
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O <=<= UPLOAD DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4
3.
4.
Select the download function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function). Start the download.
ENTER
5.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O DOWNLOAD =>=>
How to set the display contrast

FUNC
Press Key
Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O <=<= UPLOAD DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> 4 CONTRAST
2.
Select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).
3. 4.
Enter the contrast setting function. Adjust the contrast.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O CONTRAST [4] 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm CONTRAST [6]
5.a
Accept the selected value.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 6 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> 4 CONTRAST
5.b
Cancel the new setting and retain the original value, press any of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
Control panel
20
Drive selection mode In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed; the features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one panel link. (For more information, see the Installation and Start-up Guide for the Panel Bus Connection Interface Module, NBCI, Code: 3AFY58919748). In the Drive Selection Mode, the user can: Select the drive with which the panel communicates through the panel link. Change the identification number of a drive or panel connected to the panel link. View the status of the drives connected on the panel link. The panel enters the Drive Selection Mode when the user presses the DRIVE key. Each on-line station must have an individual identification number (ID). By default, the ID number of the drive is 1. Note: The default ID number setting of the drive should not be changed unless the drive is to be connected to the panel link with other drives on-line. How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number
Step 1. Action To enter the Drive Selection Mode.
DRIVE
Press Key
Display ACS 800 75 kW
ASAAA5000 xxxxxx ID NUMBER 1 2. To select the next drive/view. The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing ENTER (the brackets round the ID number appear) and then adjusting the value with double-arrow buttons. The new value is accepted with ENTER. The power of the drive must be switched off to validate its new ID number setting. The status display of all devices connected to the Panel Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations do not fit on the display at once, press the double-arrow up to view the rest of them. ACS 800 75 kW
ASAAA5000 xxxxxx ID NUMBER 1
1o Status Display Symbols: o = Drive stopped, direction forward = Drive running, direction reverse F = Drive tripped on a fault
ACT PAR
3.
To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another mode, press one of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.
FUNC
Control panel
21
Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display Some actual values and parameters are packed boolean, i.e. each individual bit has a defined meaning (explained at the corresponding signal or parameter). On the control panel, packed boolean values are read and entered in hexadecimal format. In this example, bits 1, 3 and 4 of the packed boolean value are ON:
Bit 15 Bit 0
Boolean Hex
0000 0000 0001 1010 0 0 1 A
Control panel
22
Control panel
23
Program features
Chapter overview
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related user settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages.
Local control vs. external control

The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analog inputs. An optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped with DriveWindow can also control the drive.
Local Control ACS800 External Control
Standard I/O Control panel Fieldbus Adapter Slot 1
CH3 (DDCS) DriveWindow
RTAC/RDIO/RAIO Slot 1 or Slot 2 module Fieldbus Adapter RDCO Nxxx CH0 Board (DDCS) Advant controller (e.g. AC 80, AC 800 M) CH1 AIMA-01 I/O (DDCS) adapter module RTAC/RDIO/RAIO module
Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control. L indicates local control on the panel display. The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local mode. 1 L ->1242 rpm I
Program features
24
External control When the drive is in external control, the commands are given through the control terminal block on the standard I/O board (digital and analog inputs), optional I/O extension modules and/or CH0 Fieldbus Adapter. In addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control. External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display or with an R in those special cases when the panel is defined as a source for external control. 1 ->1242 rpm I 1 R ->1242 rpm I
External Control through the Input/ Output terminals, or through the fieldbus interfaces
External Control by control panel
Settings
Panel key LOC/REM Parameter 10.01 10.02 11.01 11.02 11.05 Group 98 OPTION MODULES Start and stop source for EXT1. Direction source for EXT1. Selection between EXT1 and EXT2. Reference source for EXT1. Reference source for EXT2. Activation of the optional I/O and serial communication. Additional Information Selection between local and external control.
Program features
25
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and direction for external control location EXT1.
DI1 / Std IO
DI1DI6 XT DI1 I/O Extensions See parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES Fb. selection See chapter Fieldbus control COMM. MODULE KEYPAD
Select EXT1 Start/stop 10.01
DI6 / Std IO
DI1 / DIO EXT 1
Fieldbus Adapter Slot1 CH0 / RDCO board Control panel
DI1 / Std IO = Digital input DI1 on the standard I/O terminal block DI1 / DIO ext 1 = Digital input DI1 on the Digital I/O Extension Module 1 (XT DI1 in Parameters)
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT1.
AI1 / Std IO AI2 / Std IO AI3 / Std IO AI1, AI2, AI3 XT AI1 I/O Extensions See parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES Fb. selection See chapter Fieldbus control Control panel COMM. MODULE KEYPAD Select EXT1 Reference REF1 (rpm) 11.03
AI1 / AIO ext
CH0 / RDCO board
AI1 / Std IO = analog input AI1 on the standard I/O terminal block AI1 / AIO ext = analog input AI1 on the Analog I/O Extension Module (AI5 in Parameters)
Program features
26
Reference types and processing

It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal maximum value corresponds to a speed other than the maximum speed limit. Settings
Parameter Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 20 LIMITS Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Additional Information External reference source, type and scaling. Operating limits. Speed reference acceleration and deceleration ramps.
Diagnostics
Actual Signal Group 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS Parameter Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Active reference / reference loss through a relay output. Reference value. Additional Information The reference values in different stages of the reference processing chain.
Program features
27
Programmable analog inputs

The drive has three programmable analog inputs: one voltage input (0/2 to 10 V) and two current inputs (0/4 to 20 mA). Two extra inputs are available if an optional Analog I/O Extension Module is used. Each input can be inverted and filtered, and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. Update cycles in the Standard Control Program
Input AI / standard AI / extension Cycle 10 ms 10 ms
Settings
Parameter Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Group 71 PUMP CONTROLS Group 72 PUMP SETUP Group 73 PUMP SETUP Group 98 OPTION MODULES Additional Information Reference source. Processing of the standard inputs. Sleep AI. Discharge pressure and fluid level sources. Pt100 source. Activation of optional analog inputs.
Diagnostics
Actual Value 01.2001.22 01.27, 01.28 Additional Information Standard inputs Optional inputs
Program features
28
Programmable analog outputs

Two programmable current outputs are available as standard, and two outputs can be added by using an optional Analog I/O Extension Module. Analog output signals can be inverted and filtered. The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed, process speed (scaled motor speed), output frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power, etc. It is possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link. Update cycles in the Control Program
Output AO / standard AO / extension Cycle 50 ms 50 ms
Settings
Parameter Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Group 98 OPTION MODULES Additional information Value selection and processing (standard outputs). Activation of optional I/O.
Diagnostics
Actual value 01.23, 01.24 01.29, 01.30 Additional information Values of the standard outputs. Values of the optional outputs.
Program features
29
Programmable digital inputs

The drive has six programmable digital inputs as a standard. Six extra inputs are available if the optional Digital I/O Extension Modules are used. Update cycles in the Control Program
Input DI / standard DI / extension Cycle 50 ms 50 ms
Settings
Parameter Group 10 START/STOP/DIR Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Group 16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS Group 71 PUMP CONTROLS Group 72 PUMP SETUP Group 73 PUMP SETUP 98.0398.04 Additional Information Start, stop, direction source. Reference selection, reference source. Constant speed selection. External run enable, fault reset, user macro change Pump enable, pump resets source. High pressure, level control selection source. Klixon selection source. Activation of the optional Digital I/O Extension Modules.
Diagnostics
Actual Value 01.18 01.25 Additional Information Standard digital inputs Optional digital inputs
Program features
30
Programmable relay outputs

On the standard I/O board there are three programmable relay outputs. Six outputs can be added by using the optional Digital I/O Extension Modules. With parameter setting it is possible to choose which information to indicate through the relay output: ready, running, fault, warning, motor stall, etc. It is possible to write a value to a relay output through a serial communication link. Update cycles in the Control Program
Output RO / standard RO / extension Cycle 50 ms 50 ms
Settings
Parameter Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 98 OPTION MODULES Additional Information Value selections and operation times Activation of optional relay outputs
Diagnostics
Actual Value 01.19 01.26 Additional Information Standard relay output states Optional relays output states
Program features
31
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available: Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power Motor speed and torque Supply voltage and intermediate circuit DC voltage Reference values Drive temperature Operating time counter (h), kWh counter Digital I/O and analog I/O status PID controller actual values Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display. It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs. Settings
Parameter Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Group 92 FIELDBUS OUTPUT Additional Information Selection of an actual signal to an analog output Selection of an actual signal to a dataset (serial communication)
Diagnostics
Actual Value Group 01 ACTUAL SIGNALS 09 FAULT WORDS Additional Information Lists of actual signals
Program features
32
Motor identification
The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start-up. A motor identification magnetization is automatically done the first time the start command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetized at zero speed for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification method is suitable for most applications. However, as previously stated, for PCP applications, a separate identification run should be performed. Settings Parameter 99.10.
Power loss ride-through

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Umains UDC
fout UDC TM (Nm) (Hz) (V d.c.) 160 120 80 40 80 60 40 20 520 390 260 130
fout TM
1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4 UDC = Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive, TM = Motor torque
t (s)
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the supply is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
Note: Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option have a hold circuit that keeps the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break. The allowed duration of the break is adjustable. The factory setting is five seconds.
Program features
33
Automatic Start
Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds, starting is immediate under all conditions. There is no restart delay, e.g. the starting of turbining pumps or windmilling fans is easy. Settings Parameter 21.01.
DC Magnetizing
When DC Magnetizing is activated, the drive automatically magnetizes the motor before the start. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up to 200% of motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetizing time, it is possible to synchronize the motor start and e.g. a mechanical brake release. The Automatic Start and DC Magnetizing features cannot be activated at the same time. Settings Parameters 21.01 and 21.02.
DC Hold
By activating the motor DC Hold feature it is possible to Motor Speed lock the rotor at zero speed. When both the reference and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold DC hold speed, the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC speed into the motor. When the reference speed again exceeds the DC hold speed, the normal drive operation resumes. Speed
Reference DC Hold
Settings Parameters 17.0117.03.

DC hold speed t
Program features
34
Flux Braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. This feature is useful in motor power ranges below 15 kW.
Motor Speed No Flux Braking TBr TN (%) 60 40 Flux Braking t (s) 20 No Flux Braking f (Hz) 50 HZ/60 Hz TBr = Braking Torque TN = 100 Nm Flux Braking
Braking Torque (%) 120

1
80 Rated Motor Power

1 2 3 4 5
No Flux Braking
40
2
2.2 kW 15 kW 37 kW 75 kW 250 kW
0 120 80 40 0
3 5
10
20
30
40
f (Hz) 50
Flux Braking
2 3 4 5
10
20
30
40
f (Hz) 50
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during the Flux Braking. Therefore, Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed. The other benefits of Flux Braking are: The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it commences braking. The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases during the Flux Braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor. Settings Parameter 27.02.
Program features
35
Flux Optimization
Flux Optimization reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive) can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed. Settings Parameter 27.01.
Acceleration and deceleration ramps

It is possible to adjust the acceleration/ deceleration times and the ramp shape. The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S-curve. Linear: Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow acceleration/deceleration. S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed. Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
Motor speed
Linear
S-curve
2 t (s)
Constant speeds
It is possible to predefine constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference. Settings Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS.
Program features
36
Speed controller tuning

During the motor identification, the drive speed controller is automatically tuned. It is, however, possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and derivation time, or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune Run. In Autotune Run, the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine. The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step (typically, 1 to 20%).
n nN
A: Undercompensated B: Normally tuned (autotuning) C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B D: Overcompensated speed controller
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller output is the reference for the torque controller.
Derivative acceleration compensation
Speed reference
+ -
Error value
Proportional, integral
+ Torque + reference
Derivative Calculated actual speed
Settings Parameter groups 24 SPEED CTRL TUNE and 20 LIMITS. Diagnostics Actual signal 01.01.
Program features
37
Speed control performance figures

The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control when Direct Torque Control is used.
Speed Control No Pulse Encoder With Pulse Encoder + 0.01% T (%) TN 100 Tload
Static speed error, + 0.1 to 0.5% % of nN (10% of nominal slip) Dynamic speed error 0.4% sec.*
0.1% sec.* nact-nref nN
t (s) 0.1 - 0.4% s TN = rated motor torque nN = rated motor speed nact = actual speed nref = speed reference
*Dynamic speed error depends on speed controller tuning.
Torque control performance figures

The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control, when Direct Torque Control is used.
Torque Control Linearity error Repeatability error Torque rise time No Pulse Encoder + 4%* + 3%* 1 to 5 ms With Pulse Encoder + 3% + 1% 1 to 5 ms T (%) TN 100 90 Tref Tact
*When operated around zero frequency, the error may be greater. 10 < 5 ms TN = rated motor torque Tref = torque reference Tact = actual torque t (s)
Program features
38
Scalar Control
Note: DTC is the only control mode for the Factory or PCP macros. Scalar Control is the only control mode available for the ESP macro. In the Scalar Control mode, the drive is controlled with a frequency reference. The outstanding performance of the default motor control method, Direct Torque Control, is not achieved with Scalar Control. It is recommended to activate Scalar Control mode in the following special applications: In multi-motor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after motor identification. If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive. If the drive is used without a motor connected (e.g. for test purposes) The drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step-up transformer In the Scalar Control mode, some standard features are not available. Setting Parameter 99.04.
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive

IR Compensation is active only when the motor control mode is Scalar (see section Scalar Control above). When IR Compensation is activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. IR Compensation is useful in applications that require high breakaway torque. In Direct Torque Control mode, no IR Compensation is possible/needed. Setting Parameter 29.04. Motor Voltage IR compensation
No compensation f (Hz)
Program features
39
Programmable protection functions

Motor Thermal Protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal Protection function and by selecting one of the motor thermal protection modes available. The Motor Thermal Protection modes are based either on a motor temperature thermal model or on an overtemperature indication from a motor thermistor. Motor temperature thermal model The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions: The motor is at the estimated temperature (value at 01.17 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when power is applied to the drive. When power is applied for the first time, the motor is in the ambient temperature of 86 F (30 C). Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time and motor load curve (see the figures below). The load curve should be adjusted at case the ambient temperature exceeds 80 F (30 C).
Motor Load 100% Motor Current 150 (%) 100 50 Temp. Rise 100% 63% t t Zero speed load Speed Break point Motor load curve
Motor thermal time
Use of the motor thermistor It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor thermistor (PTC) between the +24 VDC voltage supply offered by the drive and digital input DI6. In normal motor operation temperature, the thermistor resistance should be less than 1.5 kOhm (current 5 mA). The drive stops the motor and gives a fault indication if the thermistor resistance exceeds 4 kOhm. The installation must meet the regulations for protecting against contact. Settings Parameters 30.0230.12. Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See the section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 44.
Program features
40
Stall Protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision limits (frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition (warning indication / fault indication and stop the drive / no reaction). Settings Parameters 30.1330.15. Motor Phase Loss The Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connection. The function is useful especially during the motor start: the drive prevents the motor from starting if it detects a missing motor phase. The Phase Loss function also supervises the motor connection status during normal operation. Settings Parameter 30.19. Ground Fault Protection The Ground Fault Protection detects ground faults in the motor or motor cable.The protection is based on sum current measurement. A ground fault in the line supply does not activate the protection. In a grounded supply, the protection activates in 200 microseconds. In floating supply networks, the line supply capacitance should be 1 microF or more. The capacitive currents due to screened copper motor cables up to 1,000 feet (300 meters) do not activate the protection. Ground fault protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped. Note: With parallel connected inverter modules, the ground fault indication is CUR UNBAL xx. See chapter Fault tracing. Settings Parameter 30.20. Communication Fault The Communication Fault function supervises the communication between the drive and an external control device (e.g. a fieldbus adapter module). Settings Parameters 70.0370.04.
Program features
41
Preprogrammed Faults
Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 3.5 I2hd (rated output current, heavy-duty use rating. DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 U1max, where U1max is the maximum value of the supply voltage range. For: 400 V units, U1max is 415 V 500 V units, U1max is 500 V 690 V units, U1max is 690 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the supply voltage trip level is: 728 VDC for 400 V units, 877 VDC for 500 V units, and 1210 VDC for 690 V units. DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.6 U1min, where U1min is the minimum value of the supply voltage range. For: 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V 690 V units, U1min is 525 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the supply voltage trip level is: 307 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 425 VDC for 690 V units. Drive temperature The drive supervises the inverter module temperature. If the inverter module temperature exceeds 240 F (115 C), a warning is given. The temperature trip level is 260 F (125 C). Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7 and R8 Traditionally, drive temperature monitoring is based on the power semiconductor (IGBT) temperature measurement, which is compared with a fixed maximum IGBT temperature limit. However, certain abnormal conditions, such as cooling fan failure, insufficient cooling air flow, or excessive ambient temperature might cause overheating inside the converter module, which the traditional temperature monitoring alone does not detect. The Enhanced drive temperature monitoring improves the protection in these situations. The function monitors the converter module temperature by checking cyclically that the measured IGBT temperature is not excessive considering the load current, ambient temperature, and other factors that affect the temperature rise inside the converter module. The calculation uses an experimentally defined equation that
Program features
42
simulates the normal temperature changes in the module depending on the load. The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the limit, and trips when the temperature exceeds the limit by 6 oC. Note: The monitoring is available only for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame size R7 and R8 with Standard Control Program version BZXR631G (and later versions). Types to which the enhanced drive temperature monitoring is available: ACS800-Ux-0080-0100-2 -0120-2 -0140-2/3/7 -0170-2/3/5/7 -0210-2/3/5/7 -0230-2 -0260-2/3/5/7 -0270-5 -0300-2/5 -0320-3/5/7 -0400-3/5/7 -0440-3/5/7 -0490-3/5/7 -0550-5/7 -0610-5/7 Settings
Parameter 95.10 Additional Information Ambient temperature
Diagnostics
Warning/Fault INV OVERTEMP Excessive converter module temperature
Short circuit There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the inverter short circuits. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault indication is given. Input phase loss Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the supply cable connection status by detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases. The drive is stopped and a fault indication is given if the ripple exceeds 13%.
Program features
43
Ambient temperature The drive will not start if the ambient temperature is below 23 F (-5 C) to 32 F (0 C) or above 163 F (73 C) to180 F (82 C) (the exact limits vary within the given ranges depending on drive type). Overfrequency If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given. The preset level is 50 Hz over the operating range absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar Control active). Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given.
Operation limits
ACS800 has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and DC voltage. Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS.
Power limit
Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit. If the maximum allowed power is exceeded, the drive torque is automatically limited. Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the hardware. For specific values refer to the appropriate hardware manual.
Automatic Resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overvoltage, undervoltage, rod torque, AI < min. and underload faults. The Auto Flt Resets must be activated by the user. Settings Parameter group 34 AUTO FLT RESET.
Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock. Settings Parameters 16.02 and 16.03.
Program features
44
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O

The figure below shows the temperature measurement options of one motor when the RMIO is used as the connection interface.
One sensor Motor T AO1+ AO110 nF (>630 VAC) Three sensors Motor T T T The minimum voltage of the capacitor must be 630 VAC RMIO board AI1+ AI1AO1+ AO110 nF (>630 VAC) RMIO board AI1+ AI1-
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor to the RMIO, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 0.315 (8mm) (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement: The RMIO board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment. Or The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RMIO board terminals. See also the section Motor Thermal Protection on page 39. Settings
Parameter 15.01 30.0330.05 Other Parameters 13.0113.05 (AI1 processing) and 15.0115.05 (AO1 processing) are not effective. At the motor end the cable shield should be grounded through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected. Additional Information Analog output in a motor 1 temperature measurement Motor 1 temperature measurement settings
Program features
45
Diagnostics
Actual values 01.15 09.03 09.01 Warnings MOTOR 1 TEMP T MEAS ALM Faults MOTOR 1 TEMP Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 09.01 Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 09.03 Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 09.03 Additional Information Temperature value Warning bit state Fault bit states
Adaptive Programming using the function blocks

Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. Each parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range. The parameters make the programming easy, but the choices are limited. The user cannot customize the operation any further. The Adaptive Program makes freer customizing possible without the need of a special programming tool or language: The program is built of standard function blocks included in the drive control program. The control panel is the programming tool. The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template sheets. The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 15 function blocks. The program may consist of several separate functions. For more information, see Application Guide for Adaptive Program (code: 3AFE64527274 [English]). DriveAP DriveAP is a Windows based tool for Adaptive Programming. With DriveAP it is possible to upload the Adaptive Program from the drive and edit it on a PC. For more information, see the DriveAP Users Manual [3AFE64540998 (English)].
Program features
46
Program features
47
Application macros
Chapter overview
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and the default control connections of the standard application macros.
Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting up the drive, the user can select one of the macros with parameter 99.02. There are three standard macros.
Factory Macro
Similar functionality to the standard software. Note: Parameters will vary from the standard software, and DTC is the only possible motor control mode.
PCP Macro
PCP macro allows for controls to come from 4 possible locations: Local Mode - Commands come from the keypad in local mode. Keypad Remote - Commands come from the keypad in remote mode. External 1 - Commands come from remote digital signals. External 2 - Commands come from a second remote location for digital signals. The speed reference can also be selected from the 4 locations listed above. The only motor control mode is DTC, and the speed reference is always given in rpm. The speed reference has bump-less transfer from one location to the next while switching during a run situation. When commanding the speed reference from the keypad while in remote mode, the reference will be memorized on power loss. As long as the run command is still present, the drive will restart and run at the memorized reference on power-up. The drive is speed controlled at all times, even during shutdown sequences. The drive application allows for backspin control of the pump rods during pump fault occurrence, loss of enable signal, and normal stop commands. Individual pump faults will be discussed in later sections.
Application macros
48
Input and Output Signal Defaults

Input Signals Start/Stop (DI1) External Speed Reference 1 (AI1) Output Signals Ready Run (RO1) Ready Ref (RO2) Tripped (RO3) Motor Current (AO1) Motor Speed Filt (AO2)
Possible Input and Output Signal Configuration

Input Signals Start/Stop 1 (DI1) Run Enable (DI2) Pump Enable (DI3) Level Ctrl Enable (DI4) Pump Fault Reset (DI5) Start/Stop 2 (DI6) High Pressure Sel (XT DI1) Ext1 / Ext2 Sel (XT DI2) External Fault (XT DI3) Runtime Reset (XT DI4) Motor Pt100 or PTC (AI1) External Speed Reference 1 (AI2) External Speed Reference 2 (AI3) Pump Pt100 AI Signal (XT AI1) Fluid Level Signal (XT AI2) Discharge Pressure Signal (XT AI3) Unused (XT AI4) Output Signals Ready Run (RO1) At Speed (RO2) Tripped (RO3) Enabled (XT RO1) DC Overvoltage Limit (XT RO2) Constant Output for Motor Pt100/PTC (AO1) Constant Output for Pump Pt100 (AO2) Rod Speed (XT AO1) Rod Torque (XT AO2)
Application macros
49
ESP Macro
The ESP macro is like the PCP macro only the motor control mode is SCALAR and the speed reference is always given in Hz.
Shutdown Definition for PCP & ESP Macros

When the PCP or ESP macro is active and the pump is enabled, the drive is allowed to perform a specialized shutdown sequence to control the backspin of the rods in the well or back flow of fluid through the pump. The controlled shutdown can be performed under any normal stop command: Loss of Run, Stall Condition, High Torque, High Pressure, Underload, and High Pump Temperature. The sequence of events during a controlled shutdown is as follows: 1. Shutdown is activated. 2. Speed reference is ramped to zero by the decel time specified in 22.02 DECEL TIME. While the speed reference is being ramped, the drive remains in speed control so that the speed regulator is always active. 3. When zero speed is reached, the drive will begin ramping to the backspin speed reference with an accel time specified in 71.05 BACKSPIN ACCEL TIME. If the torque in the pump is driving the motor in the reverse direction then the actual backspin speed will be equal to the backspin speed reference. However, if torque in the pump is not driving the motor in reverse, the actual speed will not equal the backspin speed reference. 4. The backspin speed reference is based upon the actual torque of the system. Backspin Speed Ref = Backspin Limit - [(Actual Torque Filtered / Max Torque) * Backspin Limit * Backspin Speed Range] 5. As the torque in the system decreases, the backspin speed reference will slowly increase due to the formula listed above. 71.05 BACKSPIN ACCEL TIME is required because as the drive enters into the regenerative quadrant of control, the tighter the speed is controlled the less of a chance for entering into a high DC bus condition which limits the amount of torque the drive can produce. The DC bus will not rise as long as speed is controlled in the negative direction at a very low reference when 100% torque is required. As the torque required decreases, the backspin speed reference is allowed to increase in the negative direction while still retaining control of the load. Thus, the drive is able to control the load through the entire shutdown sequence. Once the entire torque of the system (rod torque and any back flow through the pump) has been released the motor will come to a complete stop, even though the drive has a negative speed reference command. This is possible because 20.06 MINIMUM TORQUE is commanded to zero, which will not allow the drive to rotate the motor in the negative direction (not active in factory macro). After a few seconds at zero speed the drive will drop the run command, thus releasing the flux in the motor.
Application macros
50
Note: As 71.06 BACKSPIN SPEED RANGE increases, the backspin speed reference will decrease (if torque is held constant) as shown in the formula above.
Note: If backspin control is not desired, then set 71.06 BACKSPIN SPEED RANGE to 100%.
Note: When the ESP macro is active, the backspin speed reference is displayed in Hz. However, 71.03 BACKSPIN LIMIT is displayed in rpm. Calculate the Hz for backspin limit by using the following formula.
Backspin Limit (Hz)
Backspin Limit (RPM) Maximum Speed (RPM)
Maximum Frequency
This calculation is performed internally to the drive before the backspin limit is used for calculating the backspin speed reference (Hz) while in ESP macro.
Application macros
51

Chapter overview
The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters. The fieldbus equivalent value is given for each signal/parameter. More data is given in chapter Additional data: actual signals and parameters.
Terms and abbreviations

The table defines the terms and abbreviations used in the parameter and actual signal tables.
Term Absolute Maximum Frequency Absolute Maximum Speed Actual signal FbEq Parameter Definition Value of 29.02 MAXIMUM FREQ, or 29.03 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit. Value of 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit. Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user. No user setting possible. Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication. A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.
52
No.
Name/Value
Description Basic signals for monitoring of the drive. Filtered calculated motor speed in rpm. 100% corresponds to 11.04 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.07 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. Calculated motor speed in rpm. 100% corresponds to 11.04 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.07 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM.
FbEq 200 = 1% 200 = 1%
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01.01 MOTOR SPEED FILT 01.02 MOTOR SPEED FILT 01.03 SPEED MEASURED 01.04 ACTUAL MTR FLUX 01.05 FREQUENCY 01.06 MOTOR CURRENT 01.07 MOTOR TORQUE FILT 01.08 MOTOR TORQUE 01.09 POWER 01.10 DC BUS VOLTAGE 01.11 MOTOR VOLTAGE 01.12 ACS800 TEMP 01.13 OP HOUR COUNTER 01.14 KILOWATT HOURS 01.15 MOTOR 1 TEMP 01.16 MOTOR 2 TEMP 01.17 MOTOR TEMP EST
Measured actual speed from the pulse encoder. 100% corresponds to 200 = 1% 11.03 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.07 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. Absolute value of actual motor flux. Calculated output frequency. Measured motor current. Filtered, calculated motor torque. 100% is the nominal motor torque. Calculated motor torque. 100% is the nominal motor torque. Motor power. 100% is the nominal motor power. Measured intermediate circuit voltage. Calculated motor voltage. Temperature of the heat sink plate. Elapsed time counter. Runs when the control board is powered. kWh counter. Measured temperature of motor 1. See 30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL. Value of analog input 2 displayed in C, when Pt100 temperature measured is selected. See 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE, 30.09 OTOR THERM TIME, and 30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE for thermal model settings. 10 = 1% 100 = 1 Hz 10 = 1 A 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 10 = 1% 1 = 1 VDC 1 = 1 VAC 1 = 1 C 1=1h 1 = 100 kWh 10 = 1 C 10 = 1 C
Calculated motor temperature based upon DTC motor thermal model. 1 = 1 C
01.18 DI6-1 STATUS 01.19 RO3-1 STATUS 01.20 AI1 [V] 01.21 AI2 [mA] 01.22 AI3 [mA] 01.23 AO1 [mA] 01.24 AO2 [mA] 01.25 XT DI6-1 STATUS 01.26 XT RO6-1 STATUS 01.27 XT AI1 [V] 01.28 XT AI2 [V] 01.29 XT AO1 [mA] 01.30 XT AO2 [mA] 01.31 CTRL LOCATION
Status of digital inputs. Example: 000001 = DI1 is ON, DI2 to DI6 are OFF. Status of relay outputs. Example: 001 = RO1 is energized, RO2 and RO3 are de-energized. Value of analog input AI1. Value of analog input AI2. Value of analog input AI3. Value of analog output AO1. Value of analog output AO2. Status of digital inputs of the Digital I/O Extension modules (optional). Status of digital outputs of the Digital I/O Extension modules (optional). Value of input 1 of the Analog I/O Extension module (optional). Value of input 2 of the Analog I/O Extension module (optional). Value of output 1 of the Analog I/O Extension module (optional). Value of output 2 of the Analog I/O Extension module (optional). Control location. See 11.01EXT1/EXT2 SEL for EXT CTRL configuration.
1=1 1=1 1000 = 1 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1=1 1=1 1000 = 1 V 1000 = 1 V 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 0 = Ext1 1 = Ext2
53
No.
Name/Value
Description Speed and torque reference monitoring signals and control program values. Limited speed reference. 100% corresponds to 11.03 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.07 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. Ramped and shaped speed reference. 100% corresponds to 11.03 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.07 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM.
FbEq
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
02.01 SPEED REF 2 02.02 SPEED REF 3 02.03 SPEED REF 4
200 = 1% 200 = 1%
Sum of 02.02 SPEED REF 3 and SPEED CORRECTION (zero in this 200 = 1% application). 100% corresponds to 11.03 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.07 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. Limited sum of M/F torque reference and external torque reference. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Speed controller output. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Internal torque reference; after the torque reference selector. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1%
02.04 TORQ REF 1 02.05 TORQ REF 2 02.06 TORQ REF 3 02.07 TORQ REF 4 02.08 TORQ REF 5 02.09 TORQ USED REF 02.10 SPEED USED REF
Sum of 02.06 TORQ REF 3 and LOAD COMPENSATION (zero in this 100 = 1% application). 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Sum of 02.07 TORQ REF 4 and TORQ TRIM (zero in this application). 100 = 1% 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Final torque reference for the internal torque controller. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Final speed reference for the internal speed controller. 100% corresponds to 11.03 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.07 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. Information on the application loaded. Name and version identification of the complete software package. Control program name. Control program release date. Shows the control board type. Note: RMIO-Ix boards have different type of FLASH memory chips than RMIO-0x. Only software version BZXR631G or later will operate with RMIO-1x boards. 100 = 1% 200 = 1%
04 INFORMATION
04.01 SW PACKAGE VER 04.07 APPL SW VERSION 04.09 APPL RELEASE DATE 04.10 BOARD TYPE
05 PUMP ACTUALS
05.01 MOTOR TORQUE 05.02 MAX MOTOR TORQUE 05.03 POWER 05.04 ROD TORQUE 05.05 ROD SPEED 05.06 RUNTIME HOURS 05.07 BACKSPIN SPD REF
Application signals for monitoring pump control functions. 01.08 MOTOR TORQUE scaled to engineering units. Maximum allowed motor torque displayed from 71.01 MAX MOTOR TORQUE. 01.09 POWER scaled to engineering units. Actual rod torque equals 05.01 MOTOR TORQUE * 71.07 REDUCTION RATIO. Actual rod speed equals 01.02 MOTOR SPEED FILT / 71.07 REDUCTION RATIO. Actual time that the drive was enabled and running. Updates once every hour. Value is retained on power loss. Reference generated to the speed controller when the drive enters into the shutdown process. See section Shutdown Definition for PCP & ESP Macros on page 49. 1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft 1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft 1 = 1 kW 1 = 1 Hp 1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft 1 = 1 rpm 1=1h 1 = 1 rpm
54
No.
Name/Value
Description Identification if the shutdown process is operating or disabled due to normal running conditions. Actual fluid level feedback signal. Actual discharge pressure feedback signal. Actual measured temperature from a Pt100 for thermal protection of the pump. Actual rod speed reference in pump rpm. Words for monitoring data received from fieldbus. A 16-bit data word. See Table 3 on page 113. A 16-bit data word. If 71.19 SPEED REFERENCE is Motor Speed then the fieldbus integer speed range is defined by 11.04 EXT1 REF MAX - 11.03 EXT1 REF MIN. If 71.19 SPEED REFERENCE is Rod Pump Speed then the fieldbus integer speed range scaling is 10:1.
FbEq 0 = NOT ACTIVE 1 = ACTIVE 10 = 1 m 10 = 1 JNTS 1 = 1 KPa 1 = 1 psi 1 = 1 C 10 = 1 Prpm 1=1 20000 = 100% of speed range
05.08 BACKSPIN OPERATION
05.09 WELL FLUID LEVEL 05.10 DISCHARGE PRESSURE 05.11 MEASURED TEMP 05.12 ROD SPD REF
06 FIELDBUS INPUTS
06.01 COMMAND WORD 06.02 SPEED REF1
06.03 SPEED REF2
A 16-bit data word. If 71.19 SPEED REFERENCE is Motor Speed then the fieldbus integer speed range is defined by 11.07 EXT2 REF MAX - 11.06 EXT2 REF MIN. If 71.19 SPEED REFERENCE is Rod Pump Speed then the fieldbus integer speed range scaling is 10:1.
20000 = 100% of speed range
06.04 PUMP COMMAND
A 16-bit data word. See Table 4 on page 113. Signals for the Adaptive Program Value of analog input AI1 scaled to an integer value. Value of analog input AI2 scaled to an integer value. Value of analog input AI3 scaled to an integer value. Value of analog input AI5 scaled to an integer value. Value of analog input AI6 scaled to an integer value. A 16-bit data word. Line-side converter signal selected by 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL. A 16-bit data word. Line-side converter signal selected by 95.09 LCU PAR1 SEL. Status signals for monitoring of the drive. A 16-bit data word. See Table 5 on page 114. A 16-bit data word. See Table 6 on page 115. Fault and alarm signals for monitoring the drive. A 16-bit data word. See Table 7 on page 116. A 16-bit data word. Table 8 on page 116. A 16-bit data word. Table 9 on page 117. A 16-bit data word. Table 10 on page 118. The sources for external start, stop, direction and run enable control. Defines the connections and the source of the start and stop commands for external control location 1. This function is not selected.
1=1 2000 = 1 V 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1=1 1=1
07 AI SCALED
07.01 AI1 SCALED 07.02 AI2 SCALED 07.03 AI3 SCALED 07.04 AI5 SCALED 07.05 AI6 SCALED 07.06 LCU ACT SIGNAL1 07.07 LCU ACT SIGNAL2
08 STATUS WORDS
08.01 MAIN STATUS WORD 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD
1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1
09 FAULT WORDS
09.01 FAULT WORD 1 09.02 FAULT WORD 2 09.03 ALARM WORD 1 09.04 LIMIT WORD
10 START/STOP/DIR
10.01 START / STOP 1 NOT SEL
55
No.
Name/Value DI1 DI1P-2P DI6 KEYPAD FIELDBUS XT DI1 KEYPADorFBUS
Description Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop; 1 = start. WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if DI1 = 1. Pulse start through DI1. Transition from 0 to 1 = start. Pulse stop through DI2. Transition from 1 to 0 = stop. See selection DI1. Start and stop through the control panel. See chapter Control panel for additional details.
FbEq 2 3 4 5
See selection DI1. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 6 06.01 COMMAND WORD bit 03. See chapter Fieldbus control. See selection DI1. Start and stop through DI1, FIELDBUS or KEYPAD. See selections DI1, FIELDBUS or KEYPAD for more information. Note: DI1 must equal 1 in order to control through the fieldbus or keypad. DI1 will start and stop the drive. If DI1 is equal to 1 and the drive has been stopped (either through the fieldbus or keypad), it can be restarted through the fieldbus or keypad. All start inputs are pulsed, as are the fieldbus and keypad stop inputs. 7 8
PARAM 10.06 10.02 START / STOP 2 NOT SEL DI1 DI1P-2P DI6 KEYPAD FIELDBUS XT DI1 KEYPADorFBUS PARAM 10.07 10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD DI2 DI3 DI4 XT DI2 XT DI3 XT AI1 FIELDBUS KEYPAD KEYPADorFBUS
Source selected by 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR. Defines the connections and the source of the start and stop commands for external control location 2. This function is not selected. See 10.01 START / STOP 1. See 10.01 START / STOP 1. See 10.01 START / STOP 1. See 10.01 START / STOP 1. See 10.01 START / STOP 1. See 10.01 START / STOP 1. See 10.01 START / STOP 1. Source selected by 10.07 STRT/STP 2 PTR. Enables the control of direction of rotation of the motor, or fixes the direction. Fixed to forward. If digital input DI2 = 1, the direction is reverse. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. Direction will reverse if the speed reference is negative; 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT or 11.05 EXT REF2 SELECT must be XT AI1.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 8 06.01 COMMAND WORD bit 04. See chapter Fieldbus control. Selected by control panel. Direction is selected through FIELDBUS or KEYPAD. See selections FIELDBUS and KEYPAD for more information. 9 10
56
No.
Name/Value
Description Sets the run enable signal on, or selects a source for the external run enable signal. If no run enable signal is on, the drive will not start, or stops if it is running. Run enable signal is ON. External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = run enable. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1.
FbEq
10.04 RUN ENABLE
YES DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 FIELDBUS PARAM 10.08 10.05 EMERG STOP INPUT DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 XT DI2 NOT SELECT PARAM 10.09 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
See selection DI1. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 8 06.01 COMMAND WORD bit 00. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by 10.08 RUN ENABLE PTR Disables E-stop functionality or selects a source for the hardwired signal. Hardwired E-stop signal required through digital input DI2. 0 = stop by 1 21.05 EME STOP MODE. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. There is no hardwired E-stop signal. Source selected by 10.09 E-STOP PTR. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 10.06 of 10.01 START / STOP 1. Parameter index or a constant value: - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting. 2 3 4 5 6 7 9
10.07 STRT/STP 2 PTR -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767 10.08 RUN ENABLE PTR -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767 10.09 E-STOP PTR -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767
Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 10.07 of 10.02 START / STOP 2. Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 10.08 of 10.04 RUN ENABLE. Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 10.09 of 10.05 EMERG STOP INPUT Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR for information on the difference. External control location selection and external pump speed reference sources and limits. Specifies the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between the two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2.
11 REFERENCE SELECT
11.01 EXT1/EXT2 SEL
57
No.
Name/Value NOT SELECT DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 XT DI1 XT DI2 FIELDBUS PARAM 11.08
Description EXT1 is active, EXT2 is disabled. The control signal sources are defined by 10.01 START / STOP 1 and 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT. External signal required through digital input DI2; 0=EXT1, 1=EXT2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.
FbEq 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 9 06.04 PUMP COMMAND bit 00. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by 11.08 EXT1/EXT2 PTR Selects the source for EXT1 speed reference input. The analog input should be scaled such that the 100% input level = maximum speed reference. The 100% input level can be either voltage (10v) or current (20mA) depending upon the channel selected. 10
11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI1 AI2 AI3 XT AI1 FIELDBUS KEYPAD KEYPADorFBUS
Analog input AI1 (voltage). Analog input AI2 (current). Analog input AI3 (current). Analog input XT AI1 (voltage/current selected by hardware switch). 06.02 SPEED REF1. See chapter Fieldbus control. Control panel. The first line in the display shows the reference value.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Reference comes from either FIELDBUS or KEYPAD. The keypad 7 reference tracks the fieldbus reference when the fieldbus reference changes. See selections FIELDBUS or KEYPAD for more information. Source selected by 11.09 EXT REF1 PTR Defines the minimum value for external reference 1 (absolute value). Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal. EXT REF1 Range 2 1 2 1 2 13.01 MINIMUM AI1 13.02 SCALE AI1 11.03 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 11.04 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 8
PARAM 11.09 11.03 EXT REF1 MINIMUM
Nmotor Nshaft 1 1 2
AI1 Range
Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the reference source (value of 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT is AI1). The reference minimum and maximum correspond the AI minimum and maximum settings as above. 0.018000.0 rpm Setting range in rpm. (Hz if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR). 1 = 1 rpm
58
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines the maximum value for external reference 1 (absolute value). Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal. Note: When PCP or ESP macros are active with the Fluid Level Regulator enabled, the reference generated by the level regulator is scaled by the active external reference limits (REF1 or REF2).
FbEq
11.04 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM
0.018000.0 rpm 11.05 EXT REF2 SELECT
Setting range in rpm. (Hz if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR). 1 = 1 rpm Selects the source for EXT2 speed reference input. The analog input should be scaled such that the 100% input level = maximum speed reference. The 100% input level can be either voltage (10v) or current (20mA) depending upon the channel selected.
AI1 AI2 AI3 XT AI1 FIELDBUS KEYPAD KEYPADorFBUS PARAM 11.10 11.06 EXT REF2 MINIMUM 0.018000.0 rpm 11.07 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM
See 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT. See 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT. See 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT. See 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT. 06.03 SPEED REF2. See chapter Fieldbus control. See 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT. See 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT. Source selected by 11.10 EXT REF2 PTR Defines the minimum value for external reference 2 (absolute value). Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setting range in rpm. (Hz if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR). 1 = 1 rpm Defines the maximum value for external reference 2 (absolute value). Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal. Note: When PCP or ESP macros are active with the Fluid Level Regulator enabled, the reference generated by the level regulator is scaled by the active external reference limits (REF1 or REF2).
0.018000.0 rpm 11.08 EXT1/EXT2 PTR -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767 11.09 EXT REF1 PTR -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767 11.10 EXT REF2 PTR -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767
Setting range in rpm. (Hz if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR). 1 = 1 rpm Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 11.08 of 11.01 EXT1/EXT2 SEL. Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 11.09 of 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT. Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR for information on the difference. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 11.10 of 11.05 EXT REF2 SELECT. Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR for information on the difference. Constant speed selection and values. An active constant speed overrides the drive speed reference (unless otherwise indicated). Selects the activation signal source for the ramped constant speeds. This function is not selected. Digital input DI5 = 1 selects RAMPED SPD1. 1 2
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS
12.01 RAMPED SPEED SEL NOT SELECT DI5
59
No.
Name/Value DI5-DI6
Description Digital input DI5 = 1 selects RAMPED SPD1. Digital input DI6 = 1 selects RAMPED SPD2. Note: If both digital inputs = 1, the speed reference is set to zero. See selection DI5. See selection DI5-DI6. See selection DI5-DI6. Instead of digital inputs, the selection comes from 06.01 COMMAND WORD bits 05 and 06. See chapter Fieldbus control. Defines the ramped speed 1. Setting range. Defines the ramped speed 2. Setting range. The analog input signal processing Defines the minimum value for analog input AI1. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting. Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference 1, this value corresponds to the value of 11.03 EXT REF1 MINIMUM.
FbEq 3
XT DI3 XT DI3-XT DI4 FIELDBUS
4 5 6
12.02 RAMPED SPD 1 -1800.01800.0 rpm 12.03 RAMPED SPD 2 -1800.01800.0 rpm
1 = 1 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
13 ANALOG INPUTS
13.01 MINIMUM AI1
0V 2V TUNED VALUE TUNE
Zero Volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analog input signal. Two Volts. The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. The value measurement triggering. Procedure: - Connect the minimum signal to input. - Set the parameter to TUNE. Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 V to 10 V.
1 2 3 4
13.02 SCALE AI1
Scales analog input AI1. Example: The effect on speed reference REF1 when: - 11.04 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM = 1500 rpm. - Actual AI1 value = 4 V (40% of the full scale value). - 13.02 SCALE AI1 = 100%. 40% 10 V
AI1 1500 rpm
600 rpm
0V 50500% Scaling range. 1 = 1%
60
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1. % Unfiltered Signal O = I (1 - e-t/T) I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant t
FbEq
13.03 FILTER AI1 ms
63
Filtered Signal T
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (10 ms time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter. 15000 ms 13.04 MINIMUM AI2 0 mA 4 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE Filter time constant. Defines the minimum value for analog input AI2. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting. Zero milliAmps. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analog input signal. Four milliAmps. The value measured by the tuning function. See selection TUNE. The value measurement triggering. Procedure: 1. 2. 13.05 SCALE AI2 13.06 FILTER AI2 ms 13.07 MINIMUM AI3 13.08 SCALE AI3 13.09 FILTER AI3 ms 13.10 ZERO XT AI1 Connect the minimum signal to input. Set the parameter to TUNE. 1 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 14 1 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 1 2 3 4 1 = 1 ms
Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 mA to 20 mA. See 13.02 SCALE AI1 See 13.03 FILTER AI1 ms See 13.04 MINIMUM AI2 See 13.02 SCALE AI1 See 13.03 FILTER AI1 ms Defines the minimum value for analog input XT AI1. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting. Example: If XT AI1 is selected as the source for external reference 1, this value corresponds to the value of 11.03 EXT REF1 MINIMUM. 0V TUNED VALUE TUNE Zero Volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analog input signal. The value measured by the tuning function. See selection TUNE. The value measurement triggering. Procedure: 1. 2. 13.11 SCALE XT AI1 13.12 FILTER XT AI1 ms 13.13 ZERO XT AI2 13.14 SCALE XT AI2 13.15 FILTER XT AI2 ms 13.16 SCALE XT AI3 13.17 SCALE XT AI4 Connect the minimum signal to input. Set the parameter to TUNE. 1 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 13 1 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 1 = 1% 1 = 1% 2 3 1
Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 V to 10 V. See 13.02 SCALE AI1 See 13.03 FILTER AI1 ms See 13.10 ZERO XT AI1. See 13.02 SCALE AI1 See 13.03 FILTER AI1 ms See 13.02 SCALE AI1 See 13.02 SCALE AI1
61
No.
Name/Value
Description Status information indicated through relay outputs. The relay output is controlled by use of pointers. This parameter selects the word that the desired bit is packed in. Example: +.002.026.01 = Main Status Word bit 1 (RDY_RUN).
FbEq
14 RELAY OUTPUTS
14.01 RO1 POINTER
-255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767 14.03 RO1 TON DELAY
Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR for information on the difference. Defines the operation delay for the relay output RO1. The figure below illustrates the operation and release delays for relay output RO1. Drive status RO1 status 1 0 1 0 t
tOn
tOff tOn tOff 14.03 14.04
tOn
tOff
0.019999.00 s 14.04 RO1 TOFF DELAY 0.019999.00 s 14.05 RO2 POINTER 14.07 RO2 TON DELAY 14.08 RO2 TOFF DELAY 14.09 RO3 POINTER 14.11 RO3 TON DELAY 14.12 RO3 TOFF DELAY 14.13 XT RO1 POINTER 14.15 XT RO2 POINTER 14.17 XT RO3 POINTER 14.19 XT RO4 POINTER
Setting range. Defines the release delay for the relay output RO1. Setting range. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.03 RO1 TON DELAY. See 14.04 RO1 TOFF DELAY. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.03 RO1 TON DELAY. See 14.04 RO1 TOFF DELAY. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. The analog output signal processing The analog output is controlled by use of pointers. This parameter selects the word that is the desired output. Example: +.001.002.00 = MOTOR SPEED FILT.
1=1s 1=1s 1=1s 1=1s 1=1s 1=1s -
15 ANALOG OUTPUTS
15.01 ANALOG OUTPUT1
-255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767 15.03 MINIMUM AO1 0 mA 4 mA 10 mA
Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.06 STRT/STP 1 PTR for information on the difference. Defines the minimum value of the analog output signal AO1. Zero mA. Four mA. 1 2
Ten mA. 50% offset on 0 to 20 mA for testing or indication of direction. 3
62
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1. % 100 63 Filtered Signal t Unfiltered Signal O = I (1 - e-t/T) I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant
FbEq
15.04 FILTER AO1 ms
Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot be changed by any parameters. 010000 ms 15.05 SCALE AO1 065535 15.06 ANALOG OUTPUT2 15.08 MINIMUM AO2 15.09 FILTER AO2 ms 15.10 SCALE AO2 15.11 XT ANALOG OUTPUT1 15.13 MINIMUM XT AO1 15.14 FILTER XT AO1 15.15 SCALE XT AO1 15.16 XT ANALOG OUTPUT 2 15.18 MINIMUM XT AO2 15.19 FILTER XT AO2 15.20 SCALE XT AO2 Filter time constant. When the value of the signal selected in 15.01 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 equals this parameter, the output = 20 mA. Setting range. See 15.01 ANALOG OUTPUT1. See 15.03 MINIMUM AO1. See 15.04 FILTER AO1 ms. See 15.05 SCALE AO1. See 15.01 ANALOG OUTPUT1. See 15.03 MINIMUM AO1. See 15.04 FILTER AO1 ms. See 15.05 SCALE AO1. See 15.01 ANALOG OUTPUT1. See 15.03 MINIMUM AO1. See 15.04 FILTER AO1 ms. See 15.05 SCALE AO1. Fault reset, parameter lock, etc. Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists. Fault reset only from the control panel keypad (RESET key). Reset through digital input DI2 or by control panel: - If the drive is in external control mode: Reset by a rising edge of DI2 - If the drive is in local control mode: Reset by the RESET key of the control panel. DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 FIELDBUS 16.02 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. 3 4 5 6 1 2 10 = 1 13 1 = 1 ms 10 = 1 13 1 = 1 ms 10 = 1 13 1 = 1 ms 10 = 1 1 = 1 ms
16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS

16.01 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SELECT DI2
See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 7 06.01 COMMAND WORD bit 07. See chapter Fieldbus control. Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing. The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 0
63
No.
Name/Value LOCKED
Description Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel. The lock can be opened by entering the valid Pass Code. Selects the pass code for the parameter lock.
FbEq 65535
16.03 PASS CODE 032767 16.04 LOCAL LOCK
Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts back to 0 automatically. 1 = 1 Disables entering to local control mode (LOC/REM key of the panel). WARNING! Before activating, ensure that the control panel is not needed for stopping the drive!
OFF ON 16.05 PARAMETER SAVE
Local control allowed. Local control disabled. Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory. Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection.
0 65535
DONE SAVE
Saving started. Saving is done. DC hold settings. Note: This group is not visible if 99.04 is SCALAR. Activates/deactivates the DC hold function. DC Hold is not possible if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. When both the reference and the speed drop below 17.02 DC HOLD SPEED, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor. The current is set by 17.03 DC HOLD CURRENT. When the reference speed exceeds 17.02 DC HOLD SPEED, normal drive operation continues. SPEEDmotor DC Hold
0 1
17 DC HOLD
17.01 DC HOLD ACTIVE
Ref. DC HOLD SPEED
t Note: DC Hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off. Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up. In applications where long DC hold times are required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If the DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor. See section DC Hold on page 33. NO YES 17.02 DC HOLD SPEED 03600 rpm 17.03 DC HOLD CURR 0100.0% Function inactive. Function active. Defines the DC Hold speed. See 17.01 DC HOLD ACTIVE. Speed in rpm. Defines the DC hold current. See 17.01 DC HOLD ACTIVE. Current in percent of the motor nominal current. 1 = 1% 1 = 1 rpm 0 65535
64
No.
Name/Value
Description Drive operation limits. Defines the allowed minimum speed. The value cannot be set if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. WARNING! The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e. 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED. If 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED is changed, the default speed limit will also change.
FbEq
20 LIMITS
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED
-18000 / (no. of pole pairs) MAXIMUM SPEED 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED
Minimum speed limit
20000 = 11.04 EXT REF1 MAX
Defines the allowed minimum speed. The value cannot be set if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. WARNING! The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e. 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED. If 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED is changed, the default speed limit will also change.
MINIMUM SPEED18000 / (no. of pole pairs) 22.03 EM STOP RAMP TIME 20.04 MAXIMUM CURRENT 0.0x.xA 20.05 SPC TORQMAX 0600.0% 20.06 SPC TORQMIN -600.00% 20.07 FREQ TRIP MARGIN
Maximum speed limit.
20000 = 11.04 EXT1 REF MAX
Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if the drive receives 200 = 1% an emergency stop command. Defines the allowed maximum motor current in percent of the rated heavy-duty use output current (I2hd). Current limit Maximum torque limit of the speed regulator output. Setting range. Minimum torque limit of the speed regulator output. Setting range. Defines the allowable overspeed limit, in frequency units, for the overspeed protection function. This value is added to 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED (if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE = DTC) or 29.02 MAXIMUM FREQ (if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE = SCALAR) to define the overspeed limit. If the motor speed exceeds the sum of 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED + 20.07 FREQ TRIP MARGIN, the trip OVERSPEED FAULT is activated. Example: 99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ = 60 Hz 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED = 1140 rpm 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED = 1140 rpm 20.07 FREQ TRIP MARGIN = 30 Hz For this example, the MAXIMUM SPEED = MOTOR NOM SPEED and the FREQ TRIP MARGIN = [0.5 x MOTOR NOM FREQ], therefore the drive will trip at 1.5 x the Nominal Speed (Freq) or 1710 rpm (90 Hz). 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 10 = 1 A
0500 Hz
Setting range. Start and stop modes of the motor. Selects the motor starting method. See also section Automatic Start on page 33.
100 = 1 Hz
21 START/STOP
21.01 START FUNCTION
65
No.
Name/Value AUTO
Description Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the flying start function (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart function (stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions. Note: In scalar control mode (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR), no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default.
FbEq 1
DC MAGN
DC magnetizing should be selected if a high break-away torque is required. The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before the start. The pre-magnetizing time is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on the motor size. DC MAGN guarantees the highest possible break-away torque. Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetizing is selected. Note: DC magnetizing cannot be selected in scalar control mode (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR).
CNST DCMAGN
Constant DC magnetizing should be selected instead of DC magnetizing if constant pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be simultaneous with a mechanical brake release). This selection also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetizing time is set long enough. The premagnetizing time is defined by 21.02 CONST MAGN TIME. Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetizing is selected. Note: DC magnetizing cannot be selected in scalar control mode (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR). WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetizing time has passed although the motor magnetization is not completed. Ensure always in applications where a full break-away torque is essential, that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque.
21.02 CONST MAGN TIME
Defines the magnetizing time in the constant magnetizing mode. See 21.01 START FUNCTION. After the start command, ACS800 automatically pre-magnetizes the motor the set time. Magnetizing time. To ensure full magnetizing, set this value to the 1 = 1 ms same value as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb value given in the table below: Motor Rated Power < 10 kW 10 to 200 kW 200 to 1000 kW Constant Magnetizing Time > 100 to 200 ms > 200 to 1000 ms > 1000 to 2000 ms
30.010000.0 ms
66
No.
Name/Value
Description When FREE DIRECT MAGN is set to ON and 21.01 START FUNCTION is set to CNST DC MAGN, the drive will memorize the rotors last position (angle of flux). When the drive is restarted, the flux will be applied in the last position when stopped. CAUTION! If the machine moves after the drive has stopped controlling the motor, the memorized flux position may not be correct for the rotor position since the rotor has moved. This may cause the motor to rotate to the last memorized position. This should be less than half a rotation.
FbEq
21.03 FREE DIRECT MAGN
OFF ON 21.04 STOP FUNCTION RAMP STOP COAST STOP 21.05 EME STOP MODE STOP RAMPING
FREE DIRECT MAGN deactivated. FREE DIRECT MAGN activated. Selects the motor stop function. Stop along a ramp defined by the active deceleration time. See group 22 ACCEL/DECEL. Stop by cutting off the motor power supply. The motor coasts to a stop. The drive stopping method when an E-Stop command has been received. The drive ramps to zero speed in the time set by 22.03 EM STOP RAMP TIME. When the drive reaches zero speed, it will turn off (remove RUN). The drive decelerates to zero speed at the torque limits. When the drive reaches zero speed it will turn off (remove RUN). The drive coasts to a stop (immediate removal of RUN). Time allowed for the drive to stop, after an E-stop command is received, before an internal coast stop is commanded. Setting range. Acceleration and deceleration times. See section Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 35. Defines the acceleration time, i.e. the time required for the speed to change from zero to the maximum speed. - If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate. - If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference signal. - If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits.
0 65535 0 65535
STOP TORQUE COAST STOP 21.06 ESTOP COAST DELAY 0100 s
2 3
1=1s
22 ACCEL/DECEL
22.01 ACCEL TIME 1
0.001000.00 s
Acceleration time.
100 = 1 s
67
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines the deceleration time, i.e. the time required for the speed to change from the maximum to zero. - If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference signal. - If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate. - If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits. If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on. Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e.g. with a braking chopper and a braking resistor.
FbEq
22.02 DECEL TIME 1
0.001800.00 s 22.03 EM STOP RAMP TIME 0.01000.0 s 22.04 RAMP SHAPE TIME
Deceleration time Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if the drive receives an emergency stop command. E-stop deceleration time. 0.0 s: Linear Ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps. 0.01 to 1000.0 s: S-curve Ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another. The S-curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear section in between. A rule of thumb. A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp is 1/5. Speed Linear Ramp: 22.04 = 0 s
100 = 1 s
10 = 1 s
S-curve Ramp: 22.04 > 0 s
22.01 0.001000.00 s Acceleration time. Speed controller variables. Note: These values are READ ONLY. 23.01 SPEED REF
22.04
t 100 = 1 s
23 SPEED REFERENCES
Initial speed reference from keypad or remote source.
20000 = EXT REF MAX
24 SPEED CTRL TUNE

24.01 PI TUNE
Speed controller variables. See section Speed controller tuning on page 36. Start automatic tuning of the speed controller. Instructions: - Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed. - Change the parameter to ON. Note: The motor load must be connected to the motor.
OFF
No autotuning.
68
No.
Name/Value ON
Description Coefficient of dampening for PI TUNE. A lower value yields an increased dynamic response. Note: Visible only after entering proper passcode in 16.03 PASS CODE.
FbEq
Activates the speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to NO. 65535
24.02 DAMPENING COEF
0.008.00 24.03 P-GAIN
Setting range. Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. Great gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant. Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time = 0 TD= Derivation time = 0 % Controller output = Kp e Error Value Controller Output e = Error value t
10 = 1
0.0250.0 24.04 P-GAIN MIN
Gain. The proportional gain setting when the speed controller output is zero. Note: Visible only after entering proper passcode in 16.03 PASS CODE.
100 = 1
0100 24.05 P-GAIN WEAKPOINT
Setting range. The output level of the speed controller where the gain is set to GAIN. Note: Visible only after entering proper passcode in 16.03 PASS CODE.
1=1
0Max Torque% 24.06 P-GAIN WP FILT
Setting range. This can soften the rate of change for the proportional gain. Note: Visible only after entering proper passcode in 16.03 PASS CODE.
1 = 1%
099999 ms
Filter time constant.
1 = 1 ms
69
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control unstable. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant. Controller Output % Kp e Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time = 0 e = Error value t
FbEq
24.09 INTEGRATION TIME
Kp e
TI
0.01999.97 s 24.10 INTEG INIT VALUE -300.00300.00% 24.11 DROOP RATE Integration time. Initial value of the integrator. Setting range.
1000 = 1 s 100 = 1%
Defines the droop rate. The parameter value needs to be changed only if both the Master and the Follower are speed-controlled. The droop rate needs to be set both for the Master and the Follower. The correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice. The drooping prevents a conflict between the Master and the Follower by allowing a slight speed difference between them. The drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases. The actual speed decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the drive load ( = torque reference / speed controller output). At 100% speed controller output, drooping is at its nominal level, i.e. equal to the value of the DROOP RATE. The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load. Speed Decrease = Speed Controller Output Drooping Max. Speed Motor Speed % of nominal 100% Example: Speed Controller output is 50%, DROOP RATE is 1%, maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm. Speed decrease = 0.50 0.01 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm No Drooping } DROOP RATE Drooping Speed Controller Output % Drive load 10 = 1%
100% 0.0100.0% Setting range.
70
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines the derivation time for the speed controller. Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller. The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances. Note: Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoder is used. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant. Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time > 0 Ts= Sample time period = 2 ms e = Error value change between two samples Controller Output Kp e Error Value Kp e TI e = Error value t
FbEq
24.12 DERIVATION TIME
% e Kp TD Ts
0.09999.8 ms 24.13 DERIV FILT TIME 0.010000.0 ms 24.14 ACC COMP DERV
Derivation time value. Derivation time for the speed controller. Setting range. Defines the derivation time for acceleration compensation. In order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is described in 24.12 DERIVATION TIME. Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine. (The speed controller autotuning does this automatically, see 24.01 PI TUNE.) The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp. No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation % % Speed reference Actual speed
1 = 1 ms 1 = 1 ms
t 0.00999.98 s 24.15 ACC COMP FILT Derivation time. Acceleration compensation term filter coefficient.
t 10 = 1 s
71
No.
Name/Value 0.00999999.00 ms
Description Setting range. Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control. 100% means full slip compensation; 0% means no slip compensation. The default value is 100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip compensation. Example: 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite of the full slip compensation (SLIP GAIN = 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased. At the 106% gain value, no static speed error exists.
FbEq 1 = 1 ms
24.16 SLIP GAIN
0.0400.0% 24.17 KPS TIS MIN FREQ
Slip gain value. The minimum frequency limit above which the relative gain and integral time is defined by KPS VAL MIN FREQ and TIS VAL MIN FREQ. Note: Visible only after entering proper passcode in 16.03 PASS CODE.
1 = 1%
0200 Hz 24.18 KPS TIS MAX FREQ
Setting range. The frequency point which relative KPS and TIS equal 100%. Note: Visible only after entering proper passcode in 16.03 PASS CODE.
1 = 1 Hz
0200 Hz 24.19 KPS VAL MIN FREQ
Setting range. The relative gain percentage of the KPS value at the speed defined by KPS TIS MIN FREQ. Note: Visible only after entering proper passcode in 16.03 PASS CODE.
1 = 1 Hz
100500% 24.20 TIS VAL MIN FREQ
Setting range. The relative gain percentage of the TIS value at the speed defined by KPS TIS MIN FREQ. Note: Visible only after entering proper passcode in 16.03 PASS CODE.
1 = 1%
100500% 24.21 SPEED FDBK FILT
Setting range. The time constant of the first order actual speed filter. Note: Visible only after entering proper passcode in 16.03 PASS CODE.
1 = 1%
0.0999999.0 ms
Setting range. Flux control variables. Improves the stability of a system by decreasing the amount of electrical motor flux when low torque requirements are present. Activates/deactivates the flux optimization function. Note: The function cannot be used if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. See section Flux Optimization on page 35.
1 = 1 ms
27 FLUX CONTROL
27.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION
NO YES
Inactive. Active.
0 65535
72
No.
Name/Value
Description Activates/deactivates the flux braking function. Note: The function cannot be used if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. See section Flux Braking on page 34.
FbEq
27.02 FLUX BRAKING
NO YES 27.03 FLUX REFERENCE 25140% 27.04 FS METHOD OFF ON
Inactive. Active. Maximum flux reference. Used if 27.01 FLUX OPTIMAZATION is NO or if the required motor torque is > 30%. Setting range. Activates the flux correction at low frequencies, < 3 Hz, when the torque exceeds 30%. Effective in the motoring and generating modes. Inactive. Active. Frequency reference variables. Note: This group is not visible if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE = DTC. Initial frequency reference from the keypad or remote source. Note: This parameter is READ ONLY. Defines the maximum limit for drive output frequency. Maximum frequency limit. Defines the minimum limit for drive output frequency. Minimum frequency limit. Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The function is useful in applications with high breakaway torque, but no DTC motor control cannot be applied. The figure below illustrates the IR compensation. Note: The function can be used only if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. U /UN Relative output voltage. (%) IR compensation set to 15%. 100%
0 65535
10 = 1%
0 65535
29 SCALAR CONTROL
29.01 FREQUENCY REF 29.02 MAXIMUM FREQ MINIMUM FREQ 300.00 Hz 29.03 MINIMUM FREQ -300.00 Hz MAXIMUM FREQ 29.04 IR-COMPENSATION
100 = 1 Hz
100 = 1 Hz
100 = 1 Hz
15%
Relative output voltage. No IR compensation. Field weakening point f (Hz) 100 = 1% (UN)
030%
Setting range. Programmable protection functions Selects the thermal protection mode of the motor. When overtemperature is detected, the drive reacts as defined by 30.02 MOTOR THERM PROT.
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.01 MOT THERM P MODE
73
No.
Name/Value DTC
Description The protection is based on the calculated motor thermal model. The following assumptions are used in the calculation: - The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.17 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when the power is switched on. With the first power switch on, the motor is at the ambient temperature 86 F (30 C). - The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load curve and decreases if it operates below the curve. - The motor thermal time constant is an approximate value for a standard self-ventilated squirrel-cage motor. It is possible to fine tune the model by 30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE. Note: The model cannot be used with high power motors (99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT is higher than 800 A). WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.
FbEq 1
USER MODE
The protection is based on the user-defined motor thermal model and 2 the following basic assumptions: - The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.17 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when the power is switched on. With the first power switch on, the motor is at the ambient temperature 86 F (30 C). - The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve and decreases if it operates below the curve. The user-defined thermal model uses 30.09 MOTOR THEM TIME and the motor load curve (set by 30.10, 30.11 and 30.12). User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor. WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.
74
No.
Name/Value THERMISTOR
Description
FbEq
Motor thermal protection is activated through digital input DI6. A motor 3 thermistor, or a break contact of a thermistor relay, must be connected to digital input DI6. The drive reads the DI6 states as follows: DI6 Status (Thermistor Resistance) 1 (01.5 kOhm) 0 (4 kOhm or higher) Temperature Normal Overtemperature
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input. WARNING! Digital input DI6 may be selected for another use. Change these settings before selecting THERMISTOR. In other words, ensure that digital input DI6 is not selected by any other parameter. The figure below shows the alternative thermistor connections. At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected. Alternative 1 Thermistor relay
RMIO I/O Board 6 7 T Motor Alternative 2 18 19 DI6 +24 VDC
RMIO I/O Board 6 18 19 DI6 +24 VDC
7 Motor
10 nF
KLIXON 30.02 MOTOR THERM PROT
Temperature switch in the motor windings. Uses digital input DI6. Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected by the function defined by 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE. See section Motor Thermal Protection on page 39. Inactive The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning level (95% of the nominal value).
NO WARNING
1 2
75
No.
Name/Value FAULT
Description
FbEq
The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the 3 warning level (95% of the allowed maximum value). The drive trips on a fault when the temperature exceeds the fault level (100% of the allowed maximum value). Activates the motor 1 temperature measurement function and selects the sensor type. The function is inactive. 1 The function is active. The temperature is measured with one Pt100 2 sensor. Analog output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 and converts it to degrees centigrade. The function is active. Temperature is measured using two Pt100 sensors. See selection 1xPT100. The function is active. Temperature is measured using three Pt 100 sensors. See selection 1xPT100. 3 4
30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL NOT IN USE 1xPT100
2xPT100 3xPT100 13 PTC
The function is active. The temperature is supervised using one to 5 three PTC sensors. Analog output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor(s). The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 and converts it into Ohms. The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature. Ohm 4000 Temperature Resistance Normal Excessive 01.5 kOhm > 4 kOhm 550 100 1330
t 30.04 MOT1 TEMP ALM -1010000 Ohm/C (PTC/Pt100) 30.05 MOT1 TEMP FLT -1010000 Ohm/C (PTC/Pt100) Defines the alarm limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded. Limit in C or Ohms. C: 30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. Ohm: 30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL is 13 PTC. Defines the fault trip limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded. Limit in C or Ohms. C: 30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. Ohm: 30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL is 13 PTC. 1 = 1 C 1 = 1 C
76
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines the thermal time constant for the user-defined thermal model (see selection USER MODE of 30.01 MOTOR THERM P MODE). Motor Load 100%
FbEq
30.09 MOTOR THERM TIME
Temperature 100% 63%
Motor thermal time constant 256.09999.8 s 30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE Time constant
t 1=1s
Defines the load curve together with 30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD and 30.12 BREAK POINT. The load curve is used in the user-defined thermal model (see selection USER MODE of 30.01 MOTOR THERM P MODE). I = Motor current I/IN IN = Nominal motor current (%) 30.10 100 50 30.11 30.12 Drive output frequency 1 = 1%
50.0150.0% 30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25.0150.0% 30.12 BREAK POINT 1.0300.0 Hz 30.13 STALL FUNCTION
Allowed continuous motor load in percent of the nominal motor current. Defines the load curve together with 30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE and 30.12 BREAK POINT.
Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal 1 = 1% motor current Defines the load curve together with 30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE and 30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD. Drive output frequency at 100% load Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The protection wakes up if: - the motor torque is at the internal stall torque limit (not useradjustable). - the output frequency is below the level set by 30.14 STALL FREQ HI and - the conditions above have been valid longer than 30.15 STALL TIME. See section Stall Protection on page 40. 100 = 1 Hz
77
No.
Name/Value NO WARNING FAULT
Description Protection is invalid.
FbEq 1
The drive generates a warning. The indication disappears in half of the 2 time set by 30.15 STALL TIME. The drive trips on a fault. Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See 30.13 STALL FUNCTION. Stall frequency. Defines the time for the stall function. See 30.13 STALL FUNCTION. Stall time. Activates the motor phase loss supervision function. See section Motor Phase Loss on page 40. Inactive. Active. The drive trips on a fault. Selects how the drive reacts when an ground fault is detected in the motor or the motor cable. See section Ground Fault Protection on page 40. Inactive. Active. The drive trips on a fault. Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link. If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan. 0 65535 0 65535 1=1s 100 = 1 Hz 3
30.14 STALL FREQ HI 0.550.0 Hz 30.15 STALL TIME 10.00400.00 s 30.19 MOTOR PHASE LOSS NO FAULT 30.20 GROUND FAULT
NO FAULT 30.21 UNDERVOLTAGE
OFF ON 30.22 OVERVOLTAGE
Undervoltage control deactivated. Undervoltage control activated. Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link. Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque. Note: If a braking chopper and resistor are connected to the drive, the controller must be off (selection NO) to allow chopper operation.
0 65535
OFF ON 30.23 AI<MIN FUNC
Overvoltage control deactivated. Overvoltage control activated. Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal falls below the set minimum limit. Only active if 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT or 11.05 EXT REF2 SELECT is using an AI. Note: The analog input minimum setting must be set to 0.5 V (1 mA) or above (see group 13 ANALOG INPUTS).
0 65535
NO
Inactive.
78
No.
Name/Value WARNING
Description The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC and continues to run. WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analog input signal is lost.
FbEq 2
FAULT LAST SPEED
The drive trips on fault and shuts down.
The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the 4 drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds. WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analog signal is lost.
30.24 KEYPAD LOSS FUNC
Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel communication break. Note: Only active if 11.02 EXT REF1 SELECT or 11.05 EXT REF2 SELECT is using KEYPAD.
FAULT LAST SPEED
The drive trips on a fault and shuts down.
The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the 2 drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds. WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analog input is lost.
30.25 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SELECT DI2
Selects an interface for an external fault signal. Inactive. External fault indication is given through digital input DI2. 0 = Fault trip; drive will shutdown. 1 = No external fault. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. Automatic fault reset. Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is activated for that fault type. The automatic reset function is not operational if the drive is in local control (L visible on the first row of the panel display). 1 2
DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 XT DI2 XT DI3
3 4 5 6 7 8
34 AUTO FLT RESET
34.01 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL OFF ON 34.02 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL OFF ON 34.03 ROD TORQ CTRL OFF ON
Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link overvoltage fault. Inactive. Active. Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link undervoltage fault. Inactive. Active. Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the high torque limit fault. Inactive. Active. 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535
79
No.
Name/Value
Description Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link AI < min fault. Inactive. Active. Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the underload fault. Inactive. Active. Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by 34.08 TRIAL TIME. Number of the automatic resets. Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset. See 34.06 NUMBER OF TRIALS. Resetting delay. Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See 34.06 NUMBER OF TRIALS. Allowed resetting time. Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the high pressure switch fault. Inactive. Active. Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the line converter fault (fault on line side converter). Inactive. Active. Encoder connection. Visible only when a pulse encoder module (optional) is installed and activated by 98.01 ENCODER MODULE. The settings will remain the same even though the application macro is changed.
FbEq
34.04 AI<MIN CTRL OFF ON 34.05 UNDERLOAD CTRL OFF ON 34.06 NUMBER OF TRIALS 010 34.07 OFF DELAY TIME 0.0100000.0 s 34.08 TRIAL TIME 0.0100000.0 s 34.09 PRESS SWITCH CTRL OFF ON 34.10 LINE CONV CTRL OFF ON
0 65535 0 65535
1=1
1=1s
1=1s
0 65535
0 65535
50 PULSE ENCODER
50.01 ENCODER PULSE NR 029999 ppr 50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE A_- B DIR A_-_ A_-_ B DIR A_-_ B_-_ 50.03 SPEED FDBK SEL INTERNAL ENCODER
States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution. Pulse number in pulses per round (ppr). Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated. Channel A: positive edges calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. 1 Channel A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed. Channel 2 B: not used. Channel A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. All edges of the signals are calculated. (Recommended Setting.) Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated. Calculated speed estimate. Actual speed measured with an encoder. 1 2 3 4 1 = 1 ppr
80
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in communication between the pulse encoder and the Pulse Encoder Interface Module or in between the module and the drive. Encoder supervision function activates if either of the following conditions is valid: - There is a 20% difference between the estimated speed and the measured speed received from the encoder. - No pulses are received from the encoder within the defined time and the motor torque is at the allowed maximum value.
FbEq
50.04 ENCODER FAULT
ALARM FAULT 50.05 NTAC FILTER 020 ms
The drive generates a warning indication. The drive trips on a fault, gives a fault indication and stops the motor. Medium filter time for the speed measurement in the NTAC module. Setting range. The parameters are visible and need to be adjusted only when a fieldbus adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by 98.02 COMM MODULE. For details on the parameters, refer to the manual for the fieldbus module. These parameter settings will remain the same even if the macro is changed.
0 65535 1 = 1 ms
51 MASTER ADAPTER
52 STANDARD MODBUS
52.01 STATION NUMBER 1247 52.02 BAUDRATE 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 52.03 PARITY NONE1STOPBIT NONE2STOPBIT ODD EVEN
The setting for the standard modbus link.This group will be visible only when Standard Modbus is selected by 98.02 COMM MODULE. Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line. Address Defines the transfer rate of the link. 600 bit/s. 1200 bit/s. 2400 bit/s. 4800 bit/s. 9600 bit/s. 19200 bits/s. Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all on-line stations. No parity bit, one stop bit. No parity bit, two stop bits. Odd parity indication bit, one stopbit. Even parity indication bit, one stopbit. Settings for the fiber optic channels. Defines the node address for channel 0. No two nodes on-line may have the same address. The setting needs to be changed when a master station is connected to channel 0 and it does not automatically change the address of the slave. Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller or another drive. Address. The communication speed of channel 0. 8 megabits per second. 0 1=1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1=1
70 DDCS CONTROL
70.01 CH0 NODE ADDR
0254 70.02 CH0 BAUD RATE 8 Mbit/s
81
No.
Name/Value 4 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 1 Mbit/s
Description 4 megabits per second. 2 megabits per second. 1 megabits per second. The delay time before a CH0 COMM LOSS is declared. Setting range. Action the drive will take when a CH0 COMM LOSS is detected. CH0 communication loss is not checked. COMM LOSS warning will be displayed on keypad. The drive will remove the run command and coast to a stop. If the PCP or ESP macro is active and the pump is enabled (71.02 PUMP ENABLE), the drive will enter a shutdown sequence where it controls the backspin of the motor until zero speed is reached. Node address for channel 3. No two nodes on-line may have the same address. Typically the setting needs to be changed when the drive is connected in a ring which consists of several drives and a PC with the DriveWindow program running. Address. Pump setup and control functions (only available in PCP & ESP macros). Maximum torque limit of the motor in lbft. This parameter is converted to percent of 99.11 CALC MOTOR TORQUE and written to 20.05 MAXIMUM TORQUE. This parameter does not take any gear reduction in the system into consideration. Setting range. Selection for activating the backspin control during shutdown. This parameter is also used for enabling the fault operation of the shutdown functions listed in Groups 72 and 73 (i.e. pressure, discharge pressure, rod torque limits, fluid level, stall, underload, and thermal functions). Pump controlled shutdown feature is inactive. If one of the fault functions listed above is tripped, the display will only show a warning message and will not shutdown.
FbEq 1 2 3 1 = 1 ms 1 2 3
70.03 CH0 TIMEOUT 060000 ms 70.04 CH0 COM LOSS CTRL NO ERR CHK WARNING FAULT
70.12 CHANNEL 3 ADDR
1254
1=1
71 PUMP CONTROLS
71.01 MAX MOTOR TORQUE
0.010000.0 Nm 0.010000.0 lbft 71.02 PUMP ENABLE
1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft
DISABLE
ENABLE
Pump controlled shutdown feature is active. If one of the fault 2 functions listed above is tripped, the display will show a warning during the shutdown process and will change to a fault at zero rod speed and torque. If digital input DI2 = 1, pump controlled shutdown feature is active, otherwise, it is inactive. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 06.04 PUMP COMMAND bit 01. See chapter Fieldbus control. 3 4 5 6 7 8
DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 FIELDBUS
82
No.
Name/Value
Description Sets the maximum limit to the backspin speed reference used during the controlled shutdown. If backspin control is not desired then set this value to zero. (See 71.06 BACKSPN SPD RANGE). For optimum performance, set equal to or slightly greater than the motors rpm slip. Setting range. When 05.04 ROD TORQUE decreases to a value less than this parameter setting, the drive will discontinue the shutdown process and initiate a coast to stop command. This setting is used to eliminate excessive shut down times. Setting range. Defines the time to accel from 0 to 71.03 BACKSPIN LIMIT during a shutdown. During a controlled shutdown, pump will decelerate from the current running speed by following the ramp of the speed reference (22.02 DECEL TIME) until zero speed is reached. At this point the pump begins to accelerate in the negative speed direction following the backspin acceleration time specified in this parameter. Excessive time will cause instability during the shutdown process (i.e. Default = 3 seconds is recommended in most cases).
FbEq
71.03 BACKSPIN LIMIT
-500.000.00 rpm 71.04 ROD TORQ STOP LIM
1 = 1 rpm
0.010000.0 Nm 0.010000.0 lbft 71.05 BACKSPN ACCEL TIME
1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft
0.003600.00 s 71.06 BACKSPN SPD RANGE
Setting range. Sets the percent of 71.03 BACKSPIN LIMIT used for calculating the backspin speed reference during shutdown, when the load torque requirement equals 100% of 20.05 MAXIMUM TORQUE (see formula). Excessive speed range will cause instability during shutdown process. Keep this value at a very small number (i.e. Default = 0% is recommended in most cases). Example: 71.03 = 100 rpm 71.06 = 50% 1.07 = 100% 20.05 = 100% 71.02 = Enable Backspin Speed Ref = 50 rpm 01.07 CALC TORQUE FILT TIME = 2 s 20.05 MAX TORQUE Filt / * -Backspin Speed Ref
1=1s
71.06 BACKSPIN SPD RANGE 71.03 BACKSPN LIMIT 0.00100.00% 71.07 REDUCTION RATIO Setting range.
1 = 1%
Defines the entire gear reduction within the mechanical system of the pumps between the motor shaft and the pump rods. This parameter is used in calculating 05.05 ROD SPEED and 05.04 ROD TORQUE for the application. Setting range. Defines the command source used to reset faults associated with the pump (i.e. High Pressure, High Rod Torque, Underload, etc.) and drive faults (i.e. Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Overcurrent, etc.). 16.01 FAULT RESET SEL will also reset both pump and drive faults. 1=1
1.0010000.00:1 71.08 PUMP FLT RST SEL
83
No.
Name/Value PANEL RESET DI1
Description Control keypad reset button is used to reset faults. Reset through digital input DI1 or by control panel: - If the drive is in external control mode: Reset by a rising edge of DI1. - If the drive is in local control mode: Reset by the RESET key of the control panel.
FbEq 1 2
DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 XT DI3 XT DI4 FIELDBUS 71.09 RUNTIME RESET NOT SELECT DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 XT DI3 XT DI4 FIELDBUS 71.10 SLEEP FUNCTION
See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 06.04 PUMP COMMAND bit 03. See chapter Fieldbus control. Defines the command source used to reset 05.06 RUNTIME HOURS. Runtime counter reset feature is disabled. The runtime counter is reset by digital input DI1 = 1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 06.04 PUMP COMMAND bit 02. See chapter Fieldbus control. Activates the sleep function for PCP and ESP macros. Note: 71.02 PUMP ENABLE must be active before sleep function will shutdown the drive.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOT SELECT LOW LIMIT
Sleep function is disabled.
Sleep function is activated when 71.11 SLEEP AI SELECT is less than 2 or equal to 71.13 SLEEP LEVEL. When sleep function is activated, the message SLEEP MODE will be displayed on the control keypad and the drive will shut down. Sleep function will stay active until 71.11 SLEEP AI SELECT increases to a level greater than or equal to 71.14 WAKE-UP LEVEL.
HIGH LIMIT
Sleep function is activated when 71.11 SLEEP AI SELECT is greater than or equal to 71.13 SLEEP LEVEL. When sleep function is activated, the message SLEEP MODE will be displayed on the control keypad and the drive will shut down. Sleep function will stay active until 71.11 SLEEP AI SELECT decreases to a level less than or equal to 71.14 WAKE-UP LEVEL.
71.11 SLEEP AI SELECT AI1 AI2
Selects the analog input source used to compare to 71.13 SLEEP LEVEL and 71.14 WAKE-UP LEVEL for sleep functionality. Analog input AI1 will be scaled to represent 0 to 100%. See selection AI1. 1 2
84
No.
Name/Value AI3 XT AI1 XT AI2 XT AI3 XT AI4 AI2 - AI3
Description See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. The difference between AI3 and AI2 will be scaled to represent 0 to 100%. Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See 71.13 and 71.14. When the input meets the sleep function criteria, the counter starts. When the input exceeds the criteria, the counter resets. Setting range. Percentage setpoint that triggers the sleep function to be activated after 71.12 SLEEP DELAY TIME has expired. Setting range. Percentage setpoint that terminates the active sleep function. Setting range. Selects the unit of display for all torque display values on the keypad. Pound-feet will be used. Newton-meters will be used. Selects the unit of display for all pressure display values on the keypad. Pounds per square inch will be used. KiloPascals will be used. Selects the unit of display for all depth display values on the keypad. Joints will be used. Meters will be used. Selects the unit of display for all power display values on the keypad. Kilowatts will be used. Horsepower will be used. Selects whether speed reference is in motor rpm or pump rpm (which is motor rpm/reduction ratio). Ref is motor rpm. Ref is pump rpm. Pump setup functions (only available in PCP nd ESP macro). Source selection for the high pressure input. A warning will be displayed during the shutdown process; once rod speed and rod torque reach zero, the fault message HIGH PRESS will be displayed. Note: 71.02 PUMP ENABLE must be active before a high pressure fault will shutdown the drive.
FbEq 3 4 5 6 7 8
71.12 SLEEP DELAY TIME
0.0010000.00 s 71.13 SLEEP LEVEL 0.00100.00% 71.14 WAKE-UP LEVEL 0.00100.00% 71.15 TORQUE UNITS LBFT Nm 71.16 PRESSURE UNITS PSI KPa 71.17 DEPTH UNITS JOINTS METERS 71.18 POWER UNITS KW HP 71.19 SPEED REFERENCE MOTOR SPEED ROD PMP SPD
1=1s
1 = 1% 1 = 1% 0 65535
0 65535 0 65535 0 65535
0 65535
72 PUMP SETUP
72.01 HIGH PRESSURE SEL
NOT SELECT DI1 DI2 DI3
Function is inactive. If digital input DI1 = 0, a high pressure condition is indicated. See selection DI1. See selection DI1.
1 2 3 4
85
No.
Name/Value DI4 DI5 DI6 XT DI1 XT DI4
Description See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Selects the function of the fault condition for both 72.01 HIGH PRESSURE SEL and 72.05 DISCHRG PRESS SEL.
FbEq 5 6 7 8 9
72.02 PRESSURE LATCH LATCHING
Once high pressure or high discharge pressure occurs, the fault stays 1 active until a fault reset is triggered after the drive completes the shutdown process. Once high pressure or high discharge pressure occurs, the warning 2 message will be displayed as long as the tripped condition is still active. Once the high pressure or high discharge pressure condition is removed, the drive will regain a normal run condition. If the shutdown process finishes and the drive shuts off and the high pressure or high discharge pressure condition is removed, the drive will automatically start if a valid run command is still present. Once high pressure or high discharge pressure occurs, the warning message will be displayed as long as the tripped condition is still active. Once the high pressure or high discharge pressure condition is removed, the drive will regain a normal run condition. If the shutdown process finishes and the drive shuts off and the high pressure or high discharge pressure condition is removed, the drive will NOT automatically start if a valid run command is still present. A fault message will be displayed once rod speed and rod torque reach zero and stays active until a fault reset is triggered after the drive completes the shutdown process. Enables the discharge pressure function. A warning will be displayed during the shutdown process; once rod speed and rod torque reach zero, the fault message DISCHRG FLT will be displayed. Note: 71.02 PUMP ENABLE must be active before a high pressure fault will shutdown the drive. 3
NONLATCHING
LATCH 0 SPD
72.03 DISCHRG FLT ENA
DISABLED ENABLED 72.04 MAX DISCHRG PRESS 0.0010000.00 KPa / 0.0010000.00 PSI 72.05 DISCHRG PRESS SEL NOT SELECT AI1 AI2 AI3 XT AI1 XT AI2 XT AI3 XT AI4
Function is inactive. Function is active. Maximum pressure that will be present in the mechanical system. This parameter is used to scale 72.05 DISCHARGE PRESS SEL. Setting range. Selects the analog input source for the discharge pressure signal. Discharge pressure function is inactive.
0 65535
1 = 1 KPa / 1 = 1 psi 1
Analog input AI1 will be scaled to represent 0 to 72.04 MAX DISCHRG 2 PRESS. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. 3 4 5 6 7 8
86
No.
Name/Value
Description On delay time at which a high discharge condition must be present before the drive will enter the shutdown process. Setting range. Enables 72.08 ROD TORQUE 1 FUNC. Note: 71.02 PUMP ENABLE must be active before a high pressure fault will shutdown the drive.
FbEq
72.06 HIGH DISCHRG TIME 1.001000000.00 s 72.07 ROD TORQ TIME ENA
1=1s
DISABLED ENABLED 72.08 ROD TORQ 1 FUNC
Function is inactive. Function is active. Selects the function of the fault condition for 72.09 ROD TORQ 1 LIMIT. A warning will be displayed during the shutdown process, once rod speed and rod torque reach zero, the fault message ROD TORQ LIM will be displayed.
0 65535
NO LOW LIMIT
Function is inactive.
Rod torque 1 function is tripped if 05.04 ROD TORQUE is less than or 2 equal to 72.09 ROD TORQUE 1 LIM and 05.05 ROD SPEED is less than or equal to 72.10 ROD TORQ1 SPD LIM for a period of time greater than 72.11 ROD TORQUE 1 TIME. A hysteresis (of ROD TORQUE * 5%) is present in the comparator which means, once the condition is set, it will latch until the ROD TORQUE increases to a value of [ROD TORQ 1 LIM + (ROD TORQUE * .05)]. Rod torque 1 function is tripped if 05.04 ROD TORQUE is greater than 3 or equal to 72.09 ROD TORQUE 1 LIMIT and 05.05 ROD SPEED is less than or equal to 72.10 ROD TORQ1 SPD LIM for a period of time greater than 72.11 ROD TORQUE 1 TIME. A hysteresis (of ROD TORQUE * 5%) is present in the comparator which means, once the condition is set, it will latch until the ROD TORQUE decreases to a value of [ROD TORQ 1 LIM - (ROD TORQUE * .05)]. The rod torque limit used for the 72.08 ROD TORQ1 FUNC. Setting range. The rod speed limit used for the 72.08 ROD TORQ1 FUNC. Setting range. On delay time at which the rod torque 1 limit condition must be set before the drive will enter the shutdown process. See 72.08 ROD TORQ1 FUNC. Setting range. Enables 72.13 ROD TORQ2 FUNCTION. Note: 71.02 PUMP ENABLE must be active before rod torque 2 limit will shut down the drive. 1=1s 1 = 1 rpm 1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft
HIGH LIMIT
72.09 ROD TORQ 1 LIM 0.0010000.00 Nm 0.0010000.00 lbft 72.10 ROD TORQ1 SPD LIM 010000 rpm 72.11 ROD TORQ1 TIME
0.0010000.00 s 72.12 ROD TORQ2 SPD ENA
DISABLED ENABLED
Function is inactive. Function is active.
0 65535
87
No.
Name/Value
Description Selects the function of the fault condition for 72.14 ROD TORQ2 LIM. The warning TORQ 2 SPD will be displayed during the rod torque 2 speed adjustment, and will not cause the drive to enter the shutdown process. If the rod torque 2 speed is triggered more than the 72.18 ROD TQ2 LIM COUNT in a 7200 second time period, the drive will enter the shutdown process and display a warning TORQ 2 LIM. Once rod torque and rod speed reach zero, the fault message TORQ 2 LIM will be displayed.
FbEq
72.13 ROD TORQ2 FUNC
NO LOW LIMIT
Function is inactive.
Rod torque 2 function is tripped if 05.04 ROD TORQUE is less than or 2 equal to 72.14 ROD TORQ2 LIM for a period of time greater than 72.15 ROD TORQ2 TIME. A hysteresis (of ROD TORQUE * 5%) is present in the comparator which means, once the condition is set, it will latch until the ROD TORQUE increases to a value of [ROD TORQ2 LIMIT + (ROD TORQUE * .05)]. Rod torque 2 function is tripped if 05.04 ROD TORQUE is greater than 3 or equal to 72.14 ROD TORQ2 LIM for a period of time greater than 72.15 ROD TORQ2 TIME. A hysteresis (of ROD TORQUE * 5%) is present in the comparator which means, once the condition is set, it will latch until the ROD TORQUE decreases to a value of [ROD TORQ2 LIMIT - (ROD TORQUE * .05)]. The limit used for 72.13 ROD TORQ2 FUNC. Setting range. On delay time at which the rod torque 2 limit condition must be set before the drive will enter the adjustment process. Setting range. Added to the speed reference once the rod torque 2 limit function has been triggered. Setting range. Time at which the 72.16 ROD TORQ2 SPEED will stay in effect after the rod torque has decreased to a value that deactivates the rod torque 2 function. Setting range. Maximum number of times that the rod torque 2 function can be triggered in a 7200 second time period before the drive will enter into the shutdown process. If the 7200 second time period expires before the limit count is reached, the internal counter for the number of rod torque 2 triggers is reset. If a continuous reset is desired with no limitation, then set the value to 0. Setting range. Selection for activating fluid level PI regulator to generate the speed reference for the drive. The fluid level PI regulator overrides the external reference 1 and 2 selection of Group 11. However, constant speeds and local keypad control overrides the fluid level PI regulator reference. Function is inactive. Function is active. Digital input DI2 = 1 enables the fluid level regulator. See selection DI2. 1 2 3 4 1=1 1=1s 1 = 1 rpm 1=1s 1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft
HIGH LIMIT
72.14 ROD TORQ2 LIMIT 0.0010000.00 Nm 0.0010000.00 lbft 72.15 ROD TORQ2 TIME 0.00100000.00 s 72.16 ROD TORQ2 SPEED -3600.003600.00 rpm 72.17 ROD TQ2 SPD TIME
1.00100000.00 s 72.18 ROD TQ2 LIM COUNT
0100 72.19 LEVEL CTRL ENABLE
DISABLE ENABLE DI2 DI3
88
No.
Name/Value DI4 DI5 DI6 XT DI1 XT DI2 FIELDBUS
Description See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.
FbEq 5 6 7 8 9
See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 10 06.04 PUMP COMMAND bit 04. See chapter Fieldbus control. Maximum fluid level depth that will be present in the mechanical system. Used to scale 72.22 FLUID LEVEL SEL. Setting range. Fluid level PI regulator setpoint that determines the depth (or fluid level) to try and regulate. Setting range. Analog input source for 05.09 WELL FLUID LEVEL. Note: No alarm is associated with this analog signal for high fluid level indication. 1=1m/ 1 = 1 JNTS 1=1m/ 1 = 1 JNTS
72.20 FLUID LEVEL MAX 0.00100000.00 m / 0.00100000.00 JNTS 72.21 FLUID LEVEL SET 0.00100000.00 m / 0.00100000.00 JNTS 72.22 FLUID LEVEL SEL
NOT SELECT
No analog signal has been selected to represent the fluid level feedback. NOTE: This selection does not deactivate the fluid level PI regulator. Analog inputs to AI1 will be scaled to represent 0 to 72.20 FLUID LEVEL MAX. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. The difference between AI3 and AI2 will be scaled to represent 0 to 72.20 FLUID LEVEL MAX. Note: This selection is used when both downhole pressure and tubing pressure are used as the fluid level feedback signal.
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI2 - AI3
2 3 4 5
XT AI2 XT AI3 XT AI4 72.23 FLUID LVL P-GAIN
See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. Sets the immediate reaction step of the PI regulator. This value should be kept low to avoid unwanted oscillation from the drive speed reference causing the pump to cycle up and down in rpm.
6 7 8
0.005.00 72.24 LVL INTEG TIME
Setting range. Integration time of the PI regulator. This value should be kept at a fairly large value to avoid unwanted oscillation from the drive speed reference causing the pump to cycle up and down in rpm.
1=1
1.003600.00 s 72.25 LEVEL CTRL INVERT NORMAL PI
Setting range. Selects the reaction characteristics of the fluid level PI regulator. The PI regulator output will increase, causing the speed reference to increase, if the feedback signal selected by 72.22 FLUID LEVEL SEL is less than 72.21 FLUID LEVEL SET.
1=1s 0
89
No.
Name/Value INVERT PI
Description The PI regulator output will increase, causing the speed reference to increase, if the feedback signal selected by 72.22 FLUID LEVEL SEL is greater than 72.21 FLUID LEVEL SET. Used to trip the drive for a DISCHRG FLT. When 05.10 DISCHARGE PRESSURE is equal to or greater than this value for 72.06 DISCHRGE TIME, the drive will shutdown. Setting range. Underload and thermal protection. Enables the underload functionality. Underload allows for a custom curve to be entered by the customer using parameters 73.0273.07. The curve consists of both rod torque and rod speed to create the X-Y coordinates of a chart (see chart below). Actual rod torque and speed are used to compare to the custom curve created. If the actual rod torque/speed point falls below the curve for a period of time specified by 73.08 U-LOAD ACT TIME, then the underload function is triggered. When the underload function is triggered, the drive will enter the shutdown process and display a warning message UNDERLOAD; when rod torque and speed reach zero, then the fault message UNDERLOAD will be displayed. Example: 73.02 = 100 lbft 73.03 = 500 rpm 73.04 = 250 lbft 73.05 = 1000 rpm 73.06 = 300 lbft 73.07 = 1500 rpm Rod Torque = 200 lbft (05.04) Rod Speed = 900 rpm (05.05) lbft Underload Curve 300 200 100 rpm 0 500 1000 1500 The solid points along the curve make up the defined underload curve; the hollow point represents the actual rod torque/speed plot. Note: 71.02 PUMP ENABLE must be active before underload fault will shutdown the drive.
FbEq 65535
72.26 DSCH PRS TRIP LVL
0.0010000.00 KPa 0.0010000.00 PSI
1 = 1 KPa 1 = 1 psi
73 PUMP SETUP
73.01 UNDERLOAD FUNC
NO UNDERLOAD 73.02 ROD TORQUE 1 0.0010000.00 Nm / 0.0010000.00 lbft 73.03 ROD SPEED 1 -3600.003600.00 rpm
Function is inactive. Function is active. Rod torque 1 value used for the Y position of the first X-Y plot to create the user defined underload curve for the system. Setting range. Rod speed 1 value used for the X position of the first X-Y plot to create the user defined underload curve for the system. Setting range.
1 2
1 = 1 Nm / 1 = 1 lbft
1 = 1 rpm
90
No.
Name/Value
Description Rod torque 2 value used for the Y position of the second X-Y plot to create the user defined underload curve for the system. Setting range. Rod speed 2 value used for the X position of the second X-Y plot to create the user defined underload curve for the system. Setting range. Rod torque 3 value used for the Y position of the third X-Y plot to create the user defined underload curve for the system. Setting range. Rod speed 3 value used for the X position of the third X-Y plot to create the user defined underload curve for the system. Setting range. On delay time that underload conditions must be present before the underload fault is triggered. Underload fault delay. Selects the functionality of the thermal fault protection for the PCP and ESP macros. Note: 71.02 PUMP ENABLE must be active before a thermal protection fault will shut down the drive.
FbEq
73.04 ROD TORQUE 2 0.0010000.00 Nm / 0.0010000.00 lbft 73.05 ROD SPEED 2 -3600.003600.00 rpm 73.06 ROD TORQUE 3 0.0010000.00 Nm / 0.0010000.00 lbft 73.07 ROD SPEED 3 -3600.003600.00 rpm 73.08 U-LOAD ACT TIME 0.00100000.00 s 73.09 THERM PROT FUNC
1 = 1 Nm / 1 = 1 lbft
1 = 1 rpm
1 = 1 Nm / 1 = 1 lbft
1 = 1 rpm
1=1s
NO WARNING
Function is inactive. However, the Pt100 feedback temperature can still be monitored on the keypad at 05.11 MEASURED TEMP.
A warning message OVERTEMP is displayed on the keypad, but the 2 drive will not enter the shutdown process. Warning is triggered when the 05.11 MEASURED TEMP becomes greater than 73.13 ALARM TEMP for 5 sec. or the Klixon digital input is 0 VDC. A warning message OVERTEMP is displayed on the keypad, but the 3 drive will not enter the shutdown process, if the 05.11 MEASURED TEMP becomes greater than 73.13 ALARM TEMP for 5 sec. but less than 73.14 FAULT TEMP. If 05.11 MEASURED TEMP becomes greater than 73.14 FAULT TEMP or the Klixon digital input reaches 0 VDC for 5 sec., then the drive will enter into the shutdown process. The warning message OVERTEMP is displayed during the shutdown process; when rod torque and speed reach zero, then the fault message OVERTEMP will be displayed. Selects the type of temperature sensing device used as feedback. A Klixon is a contact closure device that is connected to 73.11 KLIXON 1 DI SEL. The contact opens upon an overtemperature. A Pt100 is an analog device that changes its resistance as the temperature changes. The resistance increases as temperature increases, causing a larger voltage to be dropped across this resistance. The analog input of the drive measures this voltage drop and scales it to temperature. Note: Analog output AO2 automatically supplies a constant current to the Pt100 device and must be wired to operate properly. 2
FAULT
73.10 TEMP FDBK TYPE KLIXON PT-100
73.11 KLIXON DI SEL DI1
Digital Input source for the Klixon device. See 73.09 THERM PROT FUNC and 73.10 TEMP FDBK TYPE. Digital input DI1 is used for Klixon thermal protection. 1
91
No.
Name/Value DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 XT DI1 XT DI2 XT DI3 XT DI4
Description See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Analog input source for the Pt100 device. See 73.09 THERM PROT FUNC and 73.10 TEMP FDBK TYPE. Note: This is not the motor thermal protection feedback input selection.
FbEq 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
73.12 PUMP PT100 AI SEL
NOT SELECT AI1 XT AI1 XT AI2 73.13 ALARM TEMP 0.00200.00 C 73.14 FAULT TEMP 0.00200.00 C
Thermal protection using Pt100 is inactive.
Analog input AI1 will be scaled to C and written to 05.11 MEASURED 2 TEMP. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. Temperature at which a warning message OVERTEMP is displayed on the keypad. Pt100 alarm trigger level. Temperature at which the drive will enter into the shutdown process, if 73.09 THERM PROT FUNC is set to fault. Pt100 fault trigger level. Control of the Adaptive Program execution. For more information, see Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE64527274 [English]). Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program. Stop. The program cannot be edited. Run. The program cannot be edited. Stop to edit mode. Program can be edited. Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by 83.03 EDIT BLOCK. The program must be in editing mode (see 83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD). Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing command has been executed. 1 1 2 3 1 = 1 C 1 = 1 C 3 4
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL

83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD STOP RUN EDIT 83.02 EDIT COMMAND
NO
92
No.
Name/Value PUSH
Description Shifts the block in location defined by 83.03 EDIT BLOCK and the following blocks one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location by programming the Block Parameter Set as usual. Example: A new block needs to be placed in between the current block number four (parameters 84.2084.25) and five (parameters 84.2584.29). In order to do this: - Shift the program to the editing mode by 83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD. - Select location number five as the desired location for the new block by 83.03 EDIT BLOCK. - Shift the block in location number 5 and the following blocks one location forward by 83.02 EDIT COMMAND (selection PUSH). - Program the emptied location number 5 by parameters 84.2584.29 as usual.
FbEq 2
DELETE PROTECT
Deletes the block in location defined by 83.03 EDIT BLOCK and shifts 3 the following blocks one step down. Activation of the Adaptive Program protection. Activate as follows: - Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is RUN or STOP 83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD). - Set the passcode (83.05 PASSCODE). - Change 83.02 EDIT COMMAND to PROTECT. When activated: - All parameters in group 84 excluding the block output parameters are hidden (read protected). - It is not possible to switch the program to the editing mode (83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD). - 83.05 PASSCODE is set to 0. 4
UNPROTECT
Inactivation of the Adaptive Program protection. Inactivate as follows: - Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is RUN or STOP (83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD). - Set the passcode (83.05 PASSCODE). - Change 83.02 EDIT COMMAND to UNPROTECT. Note: If the passcode is lost, it is possible to reset the protection also by changing the application macro setting (99.02 APPLICATION MACRO).
83.03 EDIT BLOCK 015 83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL 12 ms 100 ms 1000 ms 83.05 PASSCODE
Defines the block location number for the command selected by 83.02 EDIT COMMAND. Block location number. Selects the execution cycle time for the Adaptive Program. The setting is valid for all blocks. 12 milliseconds 100 milliseconds 1000 milliseconds Sets the passcode for the Adaptive Program protection. The passcode is needed at activation and inactivation of the protection. See 83.02 EDIT COMMAND. 1 2 3 1=1
93
No.
Name/Value 0
Description Passcode. The setting restores to 0 after the protection is activated/ inactivated. Note: When activating, write down the passcode and store it in a safe place.
FbEq 1=1
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
- selections of the function blocks and their input connections. - diagnostics For more information, see Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE64527274 [English]).
84.01 STATUS
Shows the value of the Adaptive Program status word. The table below shows the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 Display 1 2 4 8 10 20 40 100 Meaning Stopped Running Faulted Editing Checking Pushing Popping Initializing
1=1
84.02 FAULTED PAR 84.05 BLOCK1 ABS ADD AND BWISE COMPARE COUNT DPOT EVENT FILTER MASK-SET MAX MIN MULDIV NO OR PI PI-BAL PI-NEG RAMP SR SW-CB SW-IL
Points out the faulted parameter in the Adaptive Program. Selects the function block for Block Parameter Set 1. See Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE64527274 [English]).
11 10 2 26 16 21 23 20 13 24 17 18 12 1 3 14 15 25 22 5 7 19
94
No.
Name/Value TOFF TON TRIGG WR-I WR-PB XOR
Description
FbEq 9 8 6 27 28 4
84.06 INPUT1
Selects the source for input I1 of Block Parameter Set 1. -
-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value: / C.-32768C.32767 - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting. Example: The state of digital input DI2 is connected to Input 1 as follows: - Set the source selection parameter (84.06) to +.01.17.01. (The control program stores the state of digital input DI2 to bit 1 of actual signal 01.17.) - If you need an inverted value, switch the sign of the pointer value (-01.17.01.). 84.07 INPUT2 -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767 84.08 INPUT3 -255.255.31+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767 84.09 OUTPUT Stores the output of Block Parameter Set 15. Storage of the Adaptive Program constants and messages. For more information, see Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE 64527274 [English]) Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. 84.79 OUTPUT See 84.06 INPUT1. See 84.06 INPUT1. See 84.06 INPUT1. See 84.06 INPUT1. Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 1.
85 USER CONSTANTS
85.01 CONSTANT1 -83886088388607 85.02 CONSTANT2 -83886088388607 85.03 CONSTANT3 -83886088388607 85.04 CONSTANT4 -83886088388607 85.05 CONSTANT5 -83886088388607 85.06 CONSTANT6 -83886088388607 85.07 CONSTANT7 -83886088388607
1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1
95
No.
Name/Value -83886088388607
Description Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Addresses of the parameters that are to be sent over the fieldbus. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Fan speed control, sine filter application etc. Selects the speed control of the optional inverter cooling fan. Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz when powered. Drive stopped: Fan is running at constant frequency of 10 Hz. Drive running: Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz. The speed of the fan is determined from IGBT temperature vs. fan speed curve. Activates the minimum switching frequency limitation for Ex-motor applications. Inactive. Active. Minimum switching frequency limit is set to 2 kHz. Used with motors with an ATEX certification based on 2 kHz minimum switching frequency.
FbEq 1=1 1=1 1=1 -
85.08 CONSTANT8 85.09 CONSTANT9 -83886088388607 85.10 CONSTANT10 -83886088388607 85.11 STRING1 MESSAGE1 85.12 STRING2 MESSAGE2 85.13 STRING3 MESSAGE3 85.14 STRING4 MESSAGE4 85.15 STRING5 MESSAGE5
92 FIELDBUS OUTPUT
92.01 DATASET2 OUTPUT1 010000 92.02 DATASET2 OUTPUT2 010000 92.03 DATASET2 OUTPUT3 010000
1=1 1=1 1=1
95 HARDWARE SPECIFIC
95.01 FAN SPD CTRL MODE CONST 50 Hz RUN/STOP CONTROLLED 95.05 ENA INC SW FREQ NO YES
0 1 2
0 65535
96
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines the reference value for the line-side converter reactive power generation. Line-side converter can generate reactive power to the supply network. This reference is written into line-side converter unit 24.02 Q POWER REF2. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. Example 1: When 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PERCENT, value 10000 of 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to value 100% of 24.01 Q POWER REF (i.e. 100% of the converter nominal power given in 04.06 CONV NOM POWER). Example 2: When 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to kVAr, value 1000 of 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to 24.01 Q POWER REF value calculated with the following equation: 100 (1000 kVAr divided by converter nominal power in kVAr)%. Example 3: When 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PHI, value 3000 of 24.02 POWER REF2 equals approximately to 24.01 Q POWER REF value calculated with the following equation: S 30
FbEq
95.06 LCU Q POW REF
P Positive reference 30 denotes capacitive load. Negative reference 30 denotes inductive load. P = signal 01.09 POWER value 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL values are converted to degrees by the line-side converter control program: -300030000 -3030. Value 10000/10000 equals to -30/30, since the range is limited to -3000/ 3000. -1000010000 95.07 LCU DC REF [V] Reference value. Defines the intermediate circuit DC voltage reference for the line-side converter. This reference is written into line-side converter 23.01 DC VOLT REF. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. Voltage Selects the line-side converter address from which 07.06 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 is read. Line-side converter parameter index. Selects the line-side converter address from which 07.07 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 is read. Line-side converter parameter index. Defines the ambient temperature for the Enhanced drive temperature monitoring function. See Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7 and R8 on page 41. Note: If ambient temperature exceeds 40 oC, the drive load capacity decreases. See the derating instructions in the appropriate hardware manual. 2050oC Temperature 10 = 1 oC 1=1 1=1 1=1V 1=1
P P - = -----------------------cos ( 30 ) = --S 2 2 P +Q
01100 V 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 09999 95.09 LCU PAR 2 SEL 09999 95.10 TEMP INV AMBIENT
97
No.
Name/Value
Description Activation of the optional I/O extension modules and fieldbus adapter. For more information on option modules, see the module manuals. These parameter settings will remain the same even if the macro is changed.
FbEq
98 OPTION MODULES
98.01 ENCODER MODULE NTAC
Activates the communication to the optional pulse encoder module. Communication active. Module type: NTAC module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY58919730 [English]). 0
NO RTAC-SLOT1 RTAC-SLOT2 RTAC-DDCS
Inactive. Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.
1 2 3
Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: 4 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see Users Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE64485733 [English]).
RRIA-SLOT1 RRIA-SLOT2 RRIA-DDCS
Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: option slot 2 of the drive.
5 6
7 Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set at 16. For directions, see RRIA-01 Resolver Interface Module Users Manual [3AFE68570760 (English)].
RTAC03-SLOT1 RTAC03-SLOT2 RTAC03-DDCS
Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: option slot 2 of the drive.
8 9
Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: 10 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set at 16. For directions, see RRIA-01 Resolver Interface Module Users Manual [3AFE68570760 (English)].
98.02 COMM MODULE NO FIELDBUS
Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface. See chapter Fieldbus control. No communication. 1 The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 1 2 of the drive, or via CH0 on the RDCO board. See also group 51 MASTER ADAPTER. The drive communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CH0 on 3 the RDCO board (optional). See also group 70 DDCS CONTROL.
ADVANT
98
No.
Name/Value STD MODBUS
Description The drive communicates with a Modbus controller via the Modbus Adapter Module (RMBA) in option slot 1 of the drive. See also group 52 STANDARD MODBUS. Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 1 (optional) and defines the type and connection interface of the module. Communication active. Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. DI7 and DI8 are from this module. DI9 and DI10 are from a second module. Note: Module node number must be set to 2. For directions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY58919730 [English]).
FbEq 4
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1
NDIO
NO RDIO-SLOT1
Inactive. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. DI7 through DI9 are from this module. DI10 is from a second module. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive. DI7 through DI9 are from this module. DI10 is from a second module.
2 3
RDIO-SLOT2
RDIO-DDCS
Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: 5 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. DI7 through DI9 are from this module. DI10 is from a second module. Note: Module node number must be set to 2. For directions, see Users Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE64485733 [English]).
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2
Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 2 (optional) and defines the type and connection interface of the module. Communication active. Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. If 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 is an NDIO, DI9 and DI10 are from this module, otherwise only DI10 is. Note: Module node number must be set to 3. For directions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY58919730 [English]). 1
NDIO
NO RDIO-SLOT1 RDIO-SLOT2 RDIO-DDCS
Inactive. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.
2 3 4
Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: 5 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 3. For directions, see Users Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE64485733 [English]).
99
No.
Name/Value
Description Activates the communication to an optional Analog I/O Extension Module. Note: Before setting the drive parameters, ensure the module hardware settings are OK: - The module node number is set to 5. - The input signal type selections matches the actual signals (mA/V). - The operation mode selection matches the applied input signals (unipolar/bipolar).
FbEq
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 1
NAIO
Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY58919730 [English]).
Communication inactive. Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.
2 3 4
Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: 5 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see Users Manual for RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE64484567 [English]).
98.07 AI/O EXT MODULE 2
Activates the communication to an optional Analog I/O Extension Module. Note: Before setting the drive parameters, ensure the module hardware settings are OK: - The module node number is set to 6. - The input signal type selections matches the actual signals (mA/V). - The operation mode selection matches the applied input signals (unipolar/bipolar).
NAIO
Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY58919730 [English]).
Communication inactive. Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.
2 3 4
Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: 5 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 6. For directions, see Users Manual for RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE64484567 [English]).
98.09 DI DEBOUNCE FILT 01000 ms
Digital input de-bounce filter. Prevents unwanted ON/OFF switching of the digital inputs. Setting range. 1 = 1 ms
100
No.
Name/Value
Description Defines the signal type for input 1 of the first analog I/O extension module. The setting must match the signal connected to the module. Note: The communication must be activated by 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 1.
FbEq
98.10 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC
UNIPOL XTAI1 BIPOL XTAI1 98.11 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC
Unipolar. Bipolar. Defines the signal type for input 2 of the first analog I/O extension module. The setting must match the signal connected to the module. Note: The communication must be activated by 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 1.
1 2
Unipolar. Bipolar. Defines the signal type for input 1 of the second analog I/O extension module. The setting must match the signal connected to the module. Note: The communication must be activated by 98.07 AI/O EXT MODULE 2.
1 2
Unipolar. Bipolar. Defines the signal type for input 2 of the second analog I/O extension module. The setting must match the signal connected to the module. Note: The communication must be activated by 98.07 AI/O EXT MODULE 2.
1 2
UNIPOL XTAI4 BIPOL XTAI4
Unipolar. Bipolar. Drive set-up Selects the display language. British English American English. If selected, the unit of power used is Hp instead of kW. German Italian Spanish Portuguese Dutch French Danish Finnish Swedish Czech Polish Russian
1 2
99 START-UP DATA
99.01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH (AM) DEUTSCH ITALIANO ESPANOL PORTUGUES NEDERLANDS FRANCAIS DANSK SUOMI SVENSKA CESKY POLSKI / LOC1 PO RUS / LOC2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
101
No.
Name/Value
Description Selects the application macro. See chapter Application macros for more information. Note: When you change the default parameter values of a macro, the new settings becomes valid immediately and stay valid even if the power of the drive is switched off and on. However, backup of the default parameter settings (factory settings) of each standard macro is still available. See 99.03 APPLIC RESTORE.
FbEq
99.02 APPLICATION MACRO
FACTORY PCP ESP 99.03 APPLIC RESTORE
Enables the factory application. Enables the PCP application. Enables the ESP application. Restores the original settings of the active application macro (99.02 APPLICATION MACRO). Exceptions: Group 99 parameters and motor model remain unchanged.
1 2 3
NO YES 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE DTC SCALAR
No restoring. Restoring. Selects the motor control mode. Direct Torque Control mode is suitable for most applications. Note: Not available in ESP. Scalar control is suitable in cases where the DTC cannot be applied. The scalar mode is recommended: - for multi-motor drives with variable number of motors. - when the nominal current is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive (inverter). Note: Not available in PCP.
0 65535 0 65535
99.05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 2 x UN 99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. Voltage. Allowed range is 1/22 UN of the drive. Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 percent of the nominal current of the inverter. 1=1V
1/62 x I2hd 99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 8300 Hz 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED
Allowed range: 1/62 I2hd of ACS800. Defines the nominal motor frequency. Nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz typically). Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must not be given instead! Note: If the value of 99.08 is changed, the speed limits in group 20 LIMITS change automatically as well.
10 = 1 A 100 = 1 Hz
118000 rpm 99.09 MOTOR NOM POWER 09000 kW 012064 Hp
Nominal motor speed. Defines the nominal motor power. Set exactly as on the motor rating plate. Nominal motor power.
1 = 1 rpm
10 = 1 kW 10 = 1 Hp
102
No.
Name/Value
Description Selects the type of the motor identification. During the identification, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID Run Procedure is described in chapter Start-up. Note: The ID Run (STANDARD) should be selected.
FbEq
99.10 MOTOR ID RUN
NO STANDARD
No ID Run. The motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing 1 the motor for 20 to 60 sec. at zero speed. Standard ID Run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The 2 ID Run takes about one minute. Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment. Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction. WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 5080% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
REDUCED
Reduced ID Run. Should be selected instead of the Standard ID Run: 3 - If mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor cannot be de-coupled from the driven equipment) - If flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e. in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals). Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction. WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 5080% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
99.11 CALC MOTOR TORQUE
Nominal motor torque. Automatically calculated from Group 99 parameters.
10 = 1 Nm 10 = 1 lbft
103
Fieldbus control
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system usually a fieldbus controller via an adapter module. The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the external control interface, or the control can be distributed between the external control interface and other available sources, for example digital and analog inputs. The following diagram shows the control interfaces and I/O connections of the drive.
Fieldbus controller Fieldbus ACS800 Other devices (* (* Advant controller (e.g. AC 800M, AC 80)
Fieldbus adapter Rxxx Slot 1 RMIO board RMBA-01 adapter std. Modbus link Slot 1 or 2 RDCO comm. module CH1 (DDCS) AIMA-01 I/O adapter module Fieldbus adapter Nxxx or (*
Controller Modbus
I/O adapter RTAC/RDIO/RAIO
CH0 (DDCS)
Data Flow Control Word (CW) References Status Word (SW) Actual values Parameter R/W requests/responses
(
Process I/O (cyclic)
Service messages (acyclic)
* Either an Rxxx or Nxxx, and an RMBA-01 adapter can be connected to the drive simultaneously.
Fieldbus control
104
Redundant fieldbus control It is possible to connect two fieldbuses to the drive with the following adapter configuration: Type Rxxx fieldbus adapter module (not RMBA-01) is installed in drive slot 1. RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module is installed in drive slot 2.
E.g. PROFIBUS ACS800 RMIO board RPBA-01 adapter PROFIBUS-DP link Slot 1 RMBA-01 adapter std. Modbus link Slot 2 Modbus
The control (i.e. the Main Reference data set, see section The fieldbus control interface on page 111) is activated by setting parameter 98.02 to FIELDBUS or STD MODBUS. In case there is a communication problem with one fieldbus, the control can be switched to the other fieldbus. Switching between the buses can be controlled e.g. with adaptive programming. Parameters and signals can be read by both fieldbuses, but simultaneous cyclical writing to the same parameter is forbidden.
Fieldbus control
105
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module

Fieldbus adapters for several communication protocols are available (e.g. PROFIBUS and Modbus). Rxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are mounted in expansion slot 1 of the drive. Nxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are connected to channel CH0 of the RDCO module. Note: For instructions on setting up an RMBA-01 module, see section Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link on page 107. Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual of the drive, and the module manual. The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter.
Parameter Alternative Settings Setting for Fieldbus Control Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 98.02 NO FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS FIELDBUS Initializes communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module. Activates module set-up parameters (Group 51).
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 51.01 MODULE TYPE 51.02 (FIELDBUS PARAMETER 2) 51.26 (FIELDBUS PARAMETER 26) 51.27 FBA PAR REFRESH* Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module.
These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the module manual. Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible. (0) DONE (1) REFRESH Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings. After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE. Displays the required CPI firmware revision of the fieldbus adapter as defined in the configuration file stored in the memory of the drive. The CPI firmware version of the fieldbus adapter (refer to 51.32) must contain the same or a later CPI version to be compatible. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
51.28 FILE CPI FW REV*
xyz (binary coded decimal
51.29 FILE CONFIG ID*
xyz (binary coded decimal)
Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration file identification stored in the memory of the drive. This information is drive control program-dependent.
Fieldbus control
106
Parameter
Alternative Settings xyz (binary coded decimal)
Setting for Fieldbus Control
Function/Information
51.30 FILE CONFIG REV*
Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration file revision stored in the memory of the drive. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 1 = revision 0.01.
51.31 FBA STATUS*
(0) IDLE (1) EXEC. INIT (2) TIME OUT (3) CONFIG ERROR (4) OFF-LINE (5) ON-LINE (6) RESET
Displays the status of the adapter module. IDLE = Adapter not configured. EXEC. INIT = Adapter initialising. TIME OUT = A time out has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive. CONFIG ERROR = Adapter configuration error. The major or minor revision code of the CPI program revision in the drive is not the revision required by the module (refer to 51.32) or configuration file upload has failed more than five times. OFF-LINE = Adapter is off-line. ON-LINE = Adapter is on-line. RESET = Adapter performing a hardware reset.
51.32 FBA CPI FW REV*
Displays the CPI program revision of the module inserted in slot 1. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
51.33 FBA APPL FW REV*
Displays the control program revision of the module inserted in slot 1. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
*Parameters 51.27 to 51.33 are only visible when type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is installed.
After the module configuration parameters in group 51 have been set, the drive control parameters (section The fieldbus control interface on page 111) must be checked and adjusted where necessary. The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when parameter 51.27 is activated.
Fieldbus control
107
Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link

An RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter installed in slot 1 or 2 of the drive forms an interface called the Standard Modbus Link. The Standard Modbus Link can be used for external control of the drive by a Modbus controller (RTU protocol only). Before configuring the drive for Modbus control, the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual of the drive, and the module manual. The following table lists the parameters, which need to be defined when setting up communication through the standard Modbus link.
Parameter Alternative Settings Setting for Control through Standard Modbus Link Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 98.02 NO FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS STD MODBUS Initialises communication between drive (Standard Modbus Link) and Modbus-protocol controller. Activates communication parameters in group 52.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS 52.01 52.02 1247 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 ODD EVEN NONE1STOPBIT NONE2STOPBIT Specifies the station number of the drive on the Standard Modbus Link. Defines the communication speed for the Standard Modbus Link.
52.03
Selects the parity setting for the Standard Modbus Link.
After the communication parameters in group 52 have been set, the drive control parameters (section The fieldbus control interface on page 111) must be checked and adjusted where necessary.
Fieldbus control
108
Modbus addressing In the Modbus controller memory, the Control Word, the Status Word, the references, and the actual values are mapped as follows:
Data from Fieldbus Controller to Drive Address 40001 40002 40003 40007 40008 40009 Contents Control Word Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference 3 Reference 4 Reference 5 Data from Drive to Fieldbus Controller Address 40004 40005 40006 40010 40011 40012 Contents Status Word Actual 1 Actual 2 Actual 3 Actual 4 Actual 5
More information on Modbus communication is available from the Modicon website http://www.modicon.com.
Fieldbus control
109
Setting up communication through Advant controller

The Advant controller is connected via DDCS link to channel CH0 of the RDCO module. AC 800M Advant Controller DriveBus connection CI858 DriveBus Communication Interface required. See CI858 DriveBus Communication Interface Users Manual, [3AFE 68237432 (English)]. Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required. See table below. For more information, see AC 800M Controller Hardware Manual [3BSE027941 (English)], AC 800M/C Communication, Protocols and Design Manual [3BSE028811 (English),] ABB Industrial Systems, Vsters, Sweden. AC 80 Advant Controller Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required. See table below. CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required. The TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface is equipped with 5 MBd optical components and the TB810 is equipped with 10 MBd components. All optical components on a fibre optic link must be of the same type since 5 MBd components do not match with 10 MBd components. The choice between TB810 and TB811 depends on the equipment it is connected to. With RDCO Communication Option Module, the Interface is selected as follows:
Optional ModuleBus Port Interface TB811 TB810 DDCS Communication Option Module RDCO-01 RDCO-02 RDCO-03
If branching unit NDBU-85/95 is used with CI810A, TB810 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface must be used.
Fieldbus control
110
The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up communication between the drive and Advant controller. Table 1 Setting up communication
Parameter Alternative Settings Setting for Control Through CH0 Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 98.02 NO FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS 0254 ADVANT Initializes communication between drive (fibre optic channel CH0) and Advant controller. The transmission speed is 4 Mbit/s. 1125 17125 Defines the node address for DDCS channel CH0.
70.01
AC 800M ModuleBus AC 80 ModuleBus FCI (CI810A)
17125
After the communication initialization parameters have been set, the drive control parameters must be checked and adjusted where necessary. In an Optical ModuleBus connection, channel 0 address (parameter 70.01) is calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the appropriate database element (for the AC 80, DRISTD) as follows: 1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16. 2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result. For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the value of 110 (the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring), parameter 70.01 must be set to 16 1 + 10 = 26.
Fieldbus control
111
The fieldbus control interface

The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive employs data sets. One data set (abbreviated DS) consists of three 16-bit words called data words (DW). The Winder Program supports the use of six data sets, three in each direction. Table 2 Default connections for the cyclical fieldbus communication.
Data from Fieldbus Controller to Drive *Index Word Contents Selector Scaling Data from Drive to Fieldbus Controller *Index Word Contents Selector
Main Reference Data Set DS1 1 2 1st word 2nd word Command Word Ext ref1 (Fixed) (Fixed) See Table 3 on page 113. 20000 = 11.04 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 20000 = 11.07 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM
Main Actual Signal Data Set DS2 4 5 1st word 2nd word Actual 1 Actual 2 92.01 92.02
3rd word
Ext2 ref 2
(Fixed)
3rd word
Actual 3
92.03
Auxiliary Reference Data Set DS3 7 8 9 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Pump Command Not used Not used (Fixed) (Fixed) (Fixed)
Auxiliary Actual Signal Data Set DS4 10 11 12 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Not used Not used Not used
* The index number is required when data word allocation to process data is defined via the fieldbus parameters at group 51. The function is dependent on the type of the fieldbus adapter
The Control Word and the Status Word The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is effective when the active control location is set to FIELDBUS. The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control Word. The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller. See section Communication profiles on page 113 for information on the composition of the Control Word and the Status Word. References References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the twos complement from the corresponding positive reference value.
Fieldbus control
112
Reference handling The control of rotation direction is configured using the parameters in group 10. Fieldbus references are bipolar, i.e. they can be negative or positive. Notes: 100% reference is defined by parameter 11.04 and 11.07. External reference scaling parameter 11.03 and 11.06 are also in effect. Actual Values Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in group 92. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the selected function; please refer to chapter Actual signals and parameters.
Fieldbus control
113
Communication profiles
Table 3 DataSet 1 Word 1 - Command Word (Actual Signal 06.01)
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name DRIVE ENABLE Reserved Reserved START COMMAND DIRECTION CONSTANT SPD 1 ACT CONSTANT SPD 2 ACT FAULT RESET Reserved Reserved REMOTE CMD (Profibus only) Reserved Reserved Reserved COMM HEARTBEAT Reserved See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameters 10.01 and 10.02. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 10.03. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 12.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 12.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 16.01. STATE/Description See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 10.04.
Table 4 DataSet 3 Word 1 - Pump Command (Actual Signal 06.04)

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 15 Name EXT1 / EXT2 SELECTION PUMP ENABLE PUMP FAULT RESET RUNTIME RESET FLUID LEVEL PI ENABLE Reserved Description See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 11.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 71.02. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 71.08. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 71.09. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 72.19.
Fieldbus control
114
Table 5 Main Status Word (Actual Signal 08.01)

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Name RDY_ON RDY_RUN RDY_REF TRIPPED OFF_2_STA OFF_3_STA SWC_ON_INHIB ALARM AT_SETPOINT Value 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 9 10 REMOTE ABOVE_LIMIT 1 0 1 Warning/Alarm. No Warning/Alarm. OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance limits). Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance limits). Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2). Drive control location: LOCAL. Actual frequency or speed value equals or is greater than supervision limit. Valid in both rotation directions regardless of limit value. Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit. No fault Fault active External Run Enable signal received. No External Run Enable received. External Control Location 2 (EXT2) selected. External Control Location 1 (EXT1) selected. 500 ms square wave. (send back on Main Cmd Word bit 14) STATE/Description READY TO SWITCH ON. NOT READY TO SWITCH ON. READY TO OPERATE. OFF1 ACTIVE. OPERATION ENABLED. OPERATION INHIBITED. FAULT. No fault. OFF2 inactive. OFF2 ACTIVE. OFF3 inactive. OFF3 ACTIVE. SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0 11 12 FAULT Inverse of bit 3 EXT RUN ENABLE EXT CTRL LOC HEARTBEAT Reserved
-1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
13 14 15
Fieldbus control
115
Table 6 Pump Status Word 4 (Actual Signal 08.02)

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name HIGH PRESSURE HIGH DISCHARGE PRESS ROD TORQUE 1 LIMIT ROD TORQUE 2 LIMIT ROD TORQUE 2 SPD ACT BACKSPIN LIMIT UNDERLOAD HIGH PUMP TEMP ACS800 UNDERTEMP MOTOR STALL WARNING EXTERNAL FAULT AI<MIN KEYPAD LOSS RELAY OUT 1 STATUS RELAY OUT 2 STATUS RELAY OUT 3 STATUS Description See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 72.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 72.06. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 72.08. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 72.13. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 72.16. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 71.03. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 73.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 73.09. ACS800 cabin undertemp limit reached Motor stall active; shutdown process will occur See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 30.25. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 30.23. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 30.24. Relay output 1 active Relay output 2 active Relay output 3 active
Fieldbus control
116
Table 7 Fault Word 1 (Actual Signal 09.01).

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 Name SHORT CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT DC OVERVOLT ACS800 TEMP EARTH FAULT MOT TEMP MOTOR TEMP SYSTEM FAULT UNDERLOAD OVER FREQUENCY LINE CONVERTER CH2 COMM LOSS Reserved Description For possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
Table 8 Fault Word 2 (Actual Signal 09.02)

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name SUPPLY FAULT NO MOTOR DATA DC UNDERVOLT EXTERNAL FAULT RUN DISABLE ENCODER FAULT IO FAULT CABIN TEMP FAULT AI<MIN OVER SWITCH FREQ KEYPAD LOSS FAULT PPCC LINK FAULT CH0 COMM LOSS PANEL LOSS FAULT MOTOR STALL MOTOR PHASE FAULT Description For possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
Fieldbus control
117
Table 9 Alarm Word 1 (Actual Signal 09.03).

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name Reserved LIMITING MOT TEMP Reserved UNDER TEMP AI<MIN WARN TEMP MEAS WARN I/O ALARM KEYPAD LOSS WARN EXT DIO1 ALM EXT DIO2 ALM EXT AIO1 ALM EXT AIO2 ALM EXT AIO3 ALM EARTH FAULT Reserved For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description
Fieldbus control
118
Table 10 Limit Word (Actual Signal 09.04).

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name TORQ MOTOR LIM SPD_TOR_MIN_LIM SPD_TOR_MAX_LIM TORQ_USER_CURR_LIM TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM TORQ_MIN_LIM TORQ_MAX_LIM TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM FLUX_MIN_LIM FREQ_MIN_LIMIT FREQ_MAX_LIMIT DC_UNDERVOLT DC_OVERVOLT TORQUE LIMIT FREQ_LIMIT Description Pull-out torque limit. Speed control torque at MIN limit. Speed control torque at MAX limit. User-defined current limit. Internal current limit. Inclusive torque MIN limit. Inclusive torque MAX limit. Torque reference at MIN limit. Torque reference at MAX limit. Flux reference at MIN limit. Speed/Frequency at MIN limit. Speed/Frequency at MAX limit. DC Bus < Under-voltage limit. DC Bus > Over-voltage limit. Inclusive torque limit (MAX or MIN). Inclusive speed/frequency limit (MAX or MIN).
Fieldbus control
119
Fault tracing
Chapter overview The chapter lists all warning and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions. Safety WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The Safety Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read before you start working with the drive. Warning and fault indications A warning or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status. Most warning and fault causes can be identified and corrected using this information. If not, an ABB representative should be contacted. If the drive is operated with the control panel detached, the red LED in the panel mounting platform indicates the fault condition. (Note: Some drive types are not fitted with the LEDs as standard). The four digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus communication. (See chapter Fieldbus control.) How to reset The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been removed, the motor can be restarted. Fault history When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The latest faults and warnings are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected. The fault logger collects 64 of the latest faults. When the drive power is switched off, 16 of the latest faults are stored. See chapter Control panel for more information.
Fault tracing
120
Warning messages generated by the drive

Warning ACS800 TEMP (4210) 09.03 AW 1 bit 04 Cause Drive IGBT temperature is excessive. Fault trip limit is 100%. What to Do Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. BACKSPN LIM 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 05 BACKUP USED (FFA3) BATT FAILURE (5581) Motor speed is less than limit and drive is modulating, due to stopping condition. Check settings in parameter 71.03.
PC stored backup of drive parameters is downloaded into use. APBU branching unit memory backup battery error caused by - incorrect APBU switch S3 setting - too low battery voltage.
Wait until download is completed.
With parallel connected inverters, enable backup battery by setting actuator 6 of switch S3 to ON. Replace backup battery. Stop drive. Let chopper cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive.
BC OVERHEAT (7114)
BR OVERHEAT (7112)
Brake resistor overload
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
CALIBRA DONE (FF37) CALIBRA REQ (FF36) COMM MODULE (7510) 09.03 AW 1 bit 12 (programmable Fault Function 70.0370.04)
Calibration of output current transformers is completed. Calibration of output current transformers is required. Displayed at start if drive is in scalar control and scalar fly start feature is on. Cyclical communication between drive and master is lost.
Continue normal operation.
Calibration starts automatically. Wait for a while. Check status of fieldbus communication. See chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. Check parameter settings: - group 51 MASTER ADAPTER (for fieldbus adapter) - group 52 STANDARD MODBUS (for Standard Modbus Link). Check Fault Function parameters. Check cable connections. Check if master can communicate.
Fault tracing
121
Warning CUR UNBAL xx (2330) 09.03 AW1 bit 14 (programmable Fault Function 30.20) DC BUS LIM (3211) DISCHARG FLT 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 01 ENC CABLE (7310) ENCODER A<>B (7302) ENCODER ERR (7301) 09.03 AW 1 bit 05 EXT FAULT 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 10 FAN OTEMP (FF83)
Cause Drive has detected excessive output current unbalance in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. This can be caused by external fault (ground fault, motor, motor cabling, etc.) or internal fault (damaged inverter component). xx (212) refers to inverter module number. Drive limits torque due to too high or too low intermediate circuit DC voltage. Discharge pressure has exceeded the limit.
What to Do Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no ground fault in motor or motor cables: measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative. Informative alarm Check Fault Function parameters. Check for problem in discharge pipe. Check fault function setting in parameter 72.05.
Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is connected to terminal of phase B and vice versa. Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module and between module and drive Fault in external device.
Interchange connection of pulse encoder phases A and B. Check pulse encoder and its wiring, pulse encoder interface module and its wiring, parameter group 50 PULSE ENCODER settings. Check external device(s) for fault(s). Check fault function setting in parameter 30.25.
Excessive temperature of drive output filter fan. Supervision is in use in step-up drives.
Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
HIGH PRESS 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 00 HW RECONF RQ (FF38) ID DONE (FF32) ID MAGN (FF31)
High pressure switch input is open, or the discharge pressure has exceeded the limit.
Check for problem in measurement device. Check for high gas content. Check fault function setting in parameter 72.01.
Inverter type (e.g. sr0025_3) has been changed. Inverter type is usually changed at factory or during drive implementation. Drive has performed motor identification magnetization and is ready for operation. This warning belongs to normal start-up procedure. Motor identification magnetization is on. This warning belongs to normal start-up procedure.
Wait until alarm POWEROFF! activates and switch control board power off to validate inverter type change. Continue drive operation.
Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed.
Fault tracing
122
Warning ID MAGN REQ (FF30)
Cause Motor identification is required. This warning belongs to normal start-up procedure. Drive expects user to select how motor identification should be performed: By Identification Magnetization or by ID Run. Drive ID number has been changed from 1.
What to Do Start Identification Magnetization by pressing Start key, or select ID Run and start (parameter 99.10).
ID N CHANGED (FF68) ID RUN (FF35) ID RUN SEL (FF33) IN CHOKE TEMP (FF81)
Change ID number back to 1. See chapter Control panel. Wait until drive indicates that motor identification Run is completed. Press Start key to start Identification Run.
Motor identification Run is on.
Motor Identification Run is selected, and drive is ready to start ID Run. This warning belongs to ID Run procedure. Excessive input choke temperature
Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check that fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
INV CUR LIM (2212)
Internal inverter current or power limit has been exceeded.
Reduce load or increase ramp time. Limit inverter actual power or decrease lineside converter reactive power generation reference value (parameter 95.06). Check Fault Function parameters.
INV DISABLED (3200) INV OVERTEMP (4290)
Optional DC switch has opened while unit was stopped. Converter module temperature is excessive.
Close DC switch. Check AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit. Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40C, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See appropriate hardware manual. Check that ambient temperature setting is correct (parameter 95.10). Check converter module cooling air flow and fan operation. Cabinet installation: Check cabinet air inlet filters. Change when necessary. See appropriate hardware manual. Modules installed in cabinet by user: Check that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been prevented with air baffles. See module installation instructions. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of converter module for dust pick-up. Clean when necessary.
IO CONF
Input or output of optional I/O extension or fieldbus module has been selected as signal interface in the control program but communication to appropriate I/O extension module has not been set accordingly.
Check Fault Function parameters. Check parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES.
Fault tracing
123
Warning MACRO CHANGE (FF69) MOD BOARD T (FF88) MOD CHOKE T (FF89) 02.17 AW 3 bit 13 MOT CUR LIM (2300)
Cause Macro is restoring or User macro is being saved. Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module. Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module.
What to Do Wait until drive has finished task.
Drive limits motor current according to current limit defined by parameter 20.04.
Reduce load or increase ramp time. Increase parameter 20.04 value. Check Fault Function parameters.
MOTOR STALL 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 09 MOTOR STARTS (FF34) MOTOR TEMP (4310) 09.03 AW 1 bit 03 (programmable Fault Function 30.0130.12) MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312)
Motor Identification Run starts. This warning belongs to ID Run procedure. Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be too high) due to excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.
Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed. Check motor ratings, load and cooling. Check start-up data. Check Fault Function parameters.
OVERTEMP 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 07
Pump temperature has exceeded the limit, or the Klixon input is open.
Check for problem in measurement device. Check for problem in temperature measurement circuit. Check well and discharge pressures (excessive pressure can cause heating). Check fault function setting in parameters 73.0973.14.
PANEL LOSS (5300)
Control panel selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.
Check panel connection (see appropriate hardware manual). Check control panel connector. Replace control panel in mounting platform. Check Fault Function parameters.
POINTER ERROR (FFD0)
Source selection (pointer) parameter points to non existing parameter index.
Check source selection (pointer) parameter settings.
Fault tracing
124
Warning ->POWEROFF! (FF39) PP OVERLOAD (5482)
Cause Inverter type (e.g. sr0025_3) has been changed. Inverter type is usually changed at factory or during drive implementation. Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This can be caused by excessive load at low frequencies (e.g. fast direction change with excessive load and inertia). Running time of inverter cooling fan has exceeded its estimated life time. Motor load and speed is too low, or motor load is too high and speed is too low due to, for example, binding in the driven equipment.
What to Do Switch control board power off to validate inverter type change. Increase ramp time. Reduce load.
REPLACE FAN (4280) ROD TORQ LIM 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 02 SLEEP MODE START INHIBI (FF7A) 09.03 AW 1 bit 0 START INTERL (FF8D) SYNCRO SPEED (FF87)
Replace fan. Reset fan run time counter. Check for problem in driven equipment. Check fault function setting in parameter 72.08. Check fault function setting in parameter 71.11. Check start inhibit circuit (AGPS board).
Sleep function has entered sleeping mode. Optional start inhibit hardware logic is activated.
No Start Interlock signal received.
Check circuit connected to Start Interlock input on RMIO board. Check nominal speed from motor rating plate and set parameter 99.08 exactly accordingly.
Value of motor nominal speed set to parameter 99.08 is not correct: Value is too near synchronous speed of motor. Tolerance is 0.1%. This warning is active only in DTC mode. Excessive temperature difference between several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Alarm is indicated when temperature difference is 15 C. Fault is indicated when temperature difference is 20 C. Excessive temperature can be caused e.g. by unequal current sharing between parallel connected inverters.
TEMP DIF xx y (4380)
Check cooling fan. Replace fan. Check air filters.
THERMISTOR (4311) 02.15 AW 1 bit 02 (programmable Fault Function 30.0230.01) TORQ 2 SPD 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 04
Motor temperature is excessive. Motor thermal protection mode selection is THERMISTOR.
Check motor ratings and load. Check start-up data. Check thermistor connections to digital input DI6.
Motor load is too low due to, for example, a release mechanism in driven equipment, or too high due to, for example, the well having sanded in.
Check for problem in driven equipment. Check that the pump is not sanded in. Check fault function setting in parameter 72.13.
Fault tracing
125
Warning TORQ 2 LIM 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 03 T MEAS ALM (FF91) 02.15 AW 1 bit 06 UNDRLOAD 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 06 UNDERTEMP LIM 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 08 09.03 AW 1 bit 04
Cause Drive has entered TORQ 2 SPD condition too frequently within 2 hours.
What to Do Check for problem in driven equipment. Check that the pump is not sanded in. Check fault function setting in parameters 72.13 and 72.18.
Motor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range.
Check connections of motor temperature measurement circuit. See chapter Program features for circuit diagram. Check for problem in driven equipment. Check for problem in rod string. Check fault function setting in parameter 73.01.
Motor load is too low due to, for example, a release mechanism in the driven equipment.
Drive IGBT temperature is excessively low (too cold).
Check ambient conditions.
Warning messages generated by the control panel

Warning DOWNLOADING FAILED Cause Download function of panel has failed. No data has been copied from panel to drive. What to Do Make sure panel is in local mode. Retry (there might be interference on link). Contact ABB representative. DRIVE IS RUNNING DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE NO COMMUNICATION (X) Downloading is not possible while motor is running. Stop motor. Perform downloading.
Cabling problem or hardware malfunction on Panel Link
Check Panel Link connections. Press RESET key. Panel reset may take up to half a minute, please wait. Check panel type and drive control program version. Panel type is printed on panel cover. Control program version is stored in 04.07 APPL SW VERSION. Disconnect another station from link to free ID number.
(4) = Panel type not compatible with drive control program version
NO FREE ID NUMBERS ID NUMBER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE NOT UPLOADED DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE UPLOADING FAILED
Panel Link already includes 31 stations.
No upload function has been performed.
Perform upload function before downloading. See chapter Control panel. Retry (there might be interference on link). Contact ABB representative.
Upload function of panel has failed. No data has been copied from drive to panel.
Fault tracing
126
Warning WRITE ACCESS DENIED PARAMETER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE
Cause Certain parameters do not allow changes while motor is running. If tried, no change is accepted, and warning is displayed. Parameter lock is on.
What to Do Stop motor, then change parameter value.
Open parameter lock (see parameter 16.02).
Fault tracing
127
Fault messages generated by the drive

Fault ACS800 TEMP (4210) 09.01 FW 1 bit 03 Cause Drive IGBT temperature is excessive. Fault trip limit is 100%. What to Do Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. ACS TEMP xx y (4210) 09.01 FW 1 bit 03 Excessive internal temperature in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Failure when restoring PC stored backup of drive parameters. Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. Retry. Check connections. Check that parameters are compatible with drive. BC OVERHEAT (7114) Brake chopper overload Let chopper cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive. BC SHORT CIR (7113) BR BROKEN (7110) Brake resistor is not connected or it is damaged. Resistance rating of brake resistor is too high. BR OVERHEAT (7112) Brake resistor overload Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT(s) Replace brake chopper. Ensure brake resistor is connected and not damaged. Check resistor and resistor connection. Check that resistance rating meets specifications. See appropriate drive hardware manual. Let resistor cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive. BR WIRING (7111) CHOKE OTEMP (FF82) Excessive temperature of drive output filter. Supervision is in use in step-up drives. Wrong connection of brake resistor Check resistor connection. Ensure brake resistor is not damaged. Let drive cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check filter fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
BACKUP ERROR (FFA2)
Fault tracing
128
Fault COMM MODULE (7510) 09.02 FW 2 bit 12 (programmable Fault Function 70.0370.04)
Cause Cyclical communication between drive and master is lost.
What to Do Check status of fieldbus communication. See chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. Check parameter settings: - group 51 MASTER ADAPTER (for fieldbus adapter), or - group 52 STANDARD MODBUS (for Standard Modbus Link). Check Fault Function parameters. Check cable connections. Check if master can communicate.
CTRL B TEMP (4110) 09.02 FW 2 bit 07 CURR MEAS (2211) CUR UNBAL xx (2330) 09.01 FW 1 bit 04 (programmable Fault Function 30.20) DC HIGH RUSH (FF80)
Control board temperature is above 88C.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow. Check main and additional cooling fans.
Current transformer failure in output current measurement circuit Drive has detected excessive output current unbalance in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. This can be caused by external fault (earth fault, motor, motor cabling, etc.) or internal fault (damaged inverter component). xx (112) refers to inverter module number. Drive supply voltage is excessive. When supply voltage is over 124% of unit voltage rating (415, 500 or 690 V), motor speed rushes to trip level (40% of nominal speed). Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage. DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 U1max, where U1max is maximum value of mains voltage range. For: 400 V units, U1max is 415 V 500 V units, U1max is 500 V. Actual voltage in intermediate circuit corresponding to mains voltage trip level is: 728 VDC for 400 V units and 877 VDC for 500 V units.
Check current transformer connections to Main Circuit Interface Board, INT. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables: measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative. Check supply voltage level, drive rated voltage and allowed voltage range of drive.
DC OVERVOLT (3210) 09.01 FW 1 bit 02
Check that overvoltage controller is on (see parameter 30.22). Check mains for static or transient overvoltage. Check brake chopper and resistor (if used). Check deceleration time. Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable). Retrofit frequency converter with brake chopper and brake resistor.
Fault tracing
129
Fault DC UNDERVOLT (3220) 09.02 FW 2 bit 02
Cause Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient due to missing mains phase, blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault. DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.6 U1min, where U1min is minimum value of mains voltage range. For: 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V 690 V units, U1min is 525 V. Actual voltage in intermediate circuit corresponding to mains voltage trip level is: 307 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 425 VDC for 690 V units.
What to Do Check mains supply and fuses.
DISCHARG FLT 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 01 ENCODER A<>B (7302) ENCODER ERR (7301) 09.01 FW 2 bit 05 EXT FAULT 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 10 GD DISABLED (FF53)
Discharge pressure has exceeded the limit.
Check for problem in discharge pipe. Check fault function setting in parameter 72.05.
Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is connected to terminal of phase B and vice versa. Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module and between module and drive Fault in external device.
Interchange connection of pulse encoder phases A and B. Check pulse encoder and its wiring, pulse encoder interface module and its wiring and group 50 PULSE ENCODER settings. Check external device(s) for fault(s). Check fault function setting in parameter 30.25.
AGPS power supply of parallel connected R8i inverter module has been switched off during run. X (112) refers to inverter module number. Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to ground fault in motor or motor cable.
Check Prevention of Unexpected Start-up circuit. Replace AGPS board of R8i inverter module. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no ground fault in motor or motor cables: measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no ground fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.
GROUND FAULT (2330) 09.01 FW 1 bit 4 (programmable Fault Function 30.20) HIGH PRESS 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 00 ID RUN FAIL (FF84)
High pressure switch input is open, or the discharge pressure has exceeded the limit.
Check for problem in measurement device. Check for high gas content. Check fault function setting in parameter 72.01.
Motor ID Run is not completed successfully.
Check maximum speed (20.02). It should be at least 80% of motor nominal speed (99.08).
Fault tracing
130
Fault IN CHOKE TEMP (FF81)
Cause Excessive input choke temperature
What to Do Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check that fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
INT CONFIG (5410) INV DISABLED (3200) INV OVERTEMP (4290)
Number of inverter modules is not equal to original number of inverters.
Check status of inverters. Check fibre optic cables between APBU and inverter modules. Close DC switch. Check AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit. Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40C, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See appropriate hardware manual. Check that ambient temperature setting is correct (parameter 95.10). Check converter module cooling air flow and fan operation. Cabinet installation: Check cabinet air inlet filters. Change when necessary. See appropriate hardware manual. Modules installed in cabinet by user: Check that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been prevented with air baffles. See module installation instructions. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of converter module for dust pick-up. Clean when necessary. Reset and restart after problem is solved and let converter module cool down.
Optional DC switch has opened while unit was running or start command was given. Converter module temperature is excessive.
I/O COMM ERR (7000) 09.02 FW 2 bit 06
Communication error on control board, channel CH1 Electromagnetic interference
Check connections of fibre optic cables on channel CH1. Check all I/O modules (if present) connected to channel CH1. Check for proper earthing of equipment. Check for highly emissive components nearby.
LINE CONV (FF51)
Fault on line side converter
Shift panel from motor side converter control board to line side converter control board. See line side converter manual for fault description.
MOD BOARD T (FF88) MOD CHOKE T (FF89)
Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module. Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module.
Fault tracing
131
Fault MOTOR PHASE (FF56) 09.02 FW 2 bit 15 (programmable Fault Function 30.19) MOTOR STALL 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 09 MOTOR TEMP (4310) 09.01 FW 1 bit 06 (programmable Fault Function 30.0130.12) MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312)
Cause One of motor phases is lost due to fault in motor, motor cable, thermal relay (if used) or internal fault.
What to Do Check motor and motor cable. Check thermal relay (if used). Check Fault Function parameters. Disable this protection.
Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be too high) due to excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.
Check motor ratings and load. Check start-up data. Check Fault Function parameters.
Check value of fault limit. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc. Check motor data parameters 99.0599.09.
NO MOT DATA (FF52) 09.02 FW 2 bit 01 OVERCURR xx (2310) 09.01 FW 1 bit 01
Motor data is not given or motor data does not match with inverter data.
Overcurrent fault in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number.
Check motor load. Check acceleration time. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing). Check encoder cable (including phasing). Check motor nominal values from group 99 START-UP DATA to confirm that motor model is correct. Check that there are no power factor correction or surge absorbers in motor cable.
OVERCURRENT (2310) 09.01 FW 1 bit 01
Output current exceeds trip limit.
Check motor load. Check acceleration time. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing). Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check encoder cable (including phasing).
Fault tracing
132
Fault OVERFREQ (7123) 09.01 FW 1 bit 09
Cause Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum/ maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference. Trip level is 40 Hz over operating range absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar Control active). Operating range limits are set by 20.01 and 20.02 (DTC mode active) or 29.03 and 29.02 (Scalar Control active).
What to Do Check minimum/maximum speed settings. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check applicability of torque control. Check need for brake chopper and resistor(s).
OVER SWFREQ (FF55) 09.02 FW 2 bit 09 OVERTEMP 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 07
Switching frequency is too high.
Check motor parameter settings (parameter group 99 START-UP DATA) Ensure that ID run has been completed successfully.
Pump temperature has exceeded the limit, or the Klixon input is open.
Check for problem in measurement device. Check for problem in temperature measurement circuit. Check well and discharge pressures (excessive pressure can cause heating). Check fault function setting in parameters 73.0973.14.
PANEL LOSS (5300) 09.02 FW 2 bit 13
Control panel or DriveWindow selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.
Check panel connection (see appropriate hardware manual). Check control panel connector. Replace control panel in mounting platform. Check Fault Function parameters. Check DriveWindow connection.
PARAM CRC (6320)
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) error
Switch control board power off and on again. Reload firmware to control board. Replace control board.
POWERFAIL (3381)
INT board powerfail in several inverter units of parallel connected inverter modules.
POWERF INV xx (3381)
INT board powerfail in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number.
PPCC LINK (5210) 09.02 FW 2 bit 11 PPCC LINK xx (5210) 09.02 FW 2 bit 11
Fibre optic link to INT board is faulty.
Check fibre optic cables or galvanic link. With frame sizes R2-R6 link is galvanic. If RMIO is powered from external supply, ensure that supply is on.
Check connection from inverter module Main Circuit Interface Board, INT to PPCC Branching Unit, PBU. (Inverter module 1 is connected to PBU INT1 etc.)
Fault tracing
133
Fault PP OVERLOAD (5482)
Cause Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This fault protects IGBT(s) and it can be activated by short circuit at output of long motor cables. Motor load and speed is too low, or motor load is too high and speed is too low due to, for example, binding in the driven equipment.
What to Do Check motor cables.
ROD TORQ LIM 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 02 RUN DISABLED (FF54) 09.02 FW 2 bit 04 SC INV xx y (2340) 09.01 FW 1 bit 04. SHORT CIRC (2340) 09.01 FW 1 bit 00
Check for problem in driven equipment. Check fault function setting in parameter 72.08. Check setting of parameter 10.04. Switch on signal or check wiring of selected source.
No Run enable signal received.
Short circuit in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Short-circuit in motor cable(s) or motor
Check motor and motor cable. Check power semiconductors (IGBTs) of inverter module. Check motor and motor cable. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
Output bridge of converter unit is faulty. SLOT OVERLAP (FF8A) START INHIBI (FF7A) SUPPLY PHASE (3130) 09.02 FW 2 bit 00 Two option modules have same connection interface selection. Optional start inhibit hardware logic is activated. Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing mains phase, blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault. Trip occurs when DC voltage ripple is 13% of DC voltage. Excessive temperature difference between several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Alarm is indicated when temperature difference is 15 C. Fault is indicated when temperature difference is 20 C Excessive temperature can be caused e.g. by unequal current sharing between parallel connected inverters. THERMAL MODE (FF50) Motor thermal protection mode is set to DTC for high-power motor.
Contact ABB representative. Check connection interface selections in group 98 OPTION MODULES. Check start inhibit circuit (AGPS board).
Check mains fuses. Check for mains supply imbalance.
TEMP DIF xx y (4380)
Check cooling fan. Replace fan. Check air filters.
Fault tracing
134
Fault THERMISTOR (4311) 09.01 FW 1 bit 05 (programmable Fault Function 30.0230.01) TORQ 2 LIM 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 03 UNDRLOAD 08.02 PUMP STATUS WORD bit 06 USER MACRO (FFA1)
Cause Motor temperature is excessive. Motor thermal protection mode selection is THERMISTOR.
What to Do Check motor ratings and load. Check start-up data. Check thermistor connections to digital input DI6.
Drive has entered TORQ 2 SPD condition too frequently within 2 hours.
Check for problem in driven equipment. Check that the pump is not sanded in. Check fault function setting in parameters 72.13 and 72.18.
Motor load is too low due to, for example, a release mechanism in the driven equipment.
Check for problem in driven equipment. Check for problem in rod string. Check fault function setting in parameter 73.01.
No User Macro saved or file is defective.
Create User Macro.
Fault tracing
135

Chapter overview This chapter lists the actual signal and parameter lists with some additional data. For the descriptions, see chapter Actual signals and parameters. Terms and abbreviations
Term PB FbEq Absolute Maximum Frequency Definition Parameter address for the fieldbus communication through a Profibus link (Add 4000 in FMS Mode). Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication. Value of 29.02 MAXIMUM FREQ, or 29.03 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit. Value of parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit.
Absolute Maximum Speed
Fieldbus addresses Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.) See the appropriate fieldbus adapter module Users Manual. Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.) NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter: All versions see column PB in the tables below. Version 1.5 or later see NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Installation and Start-Up Guide [3BFE64341588 (English)]. NIBA-01 InterBus-S Adapter: xxyy 100 + 12288 converted into hexadecimal, where xxyy = drive parameter number Example: The index number for drive parameter 13.09 is 1309 + 12288 = 13597 (dec) = 351D (hex) NMBP-01 ModbusPlus Adapter and NMBA-01 Modbus Adapter: 4xxyy, where xxyy = drive parameter number
136
Actual signals
Index 01 01.01 01.02 01.03 01.04 01.05 01.06 01.07 01.08 01.09 01.10 01.11 01.12 01.13 01.14 01.15 01.16 01.17 01.18 01.19 01.20 01.21 01.22 01.23 01.24 01.25 01.26 01.27 01.28 01.29 01.30 01.31 02 02.01 02.02 02.03 02.04 02.05 02.06 02.07 02.08 02.09 02.10 04 04.01 04.07 04.09 04.10 05 05.01 Name ACTUAL SIGNALS MOTOR SPEED FILT SPEED ESTIMATED SPEED MEASURED ACTUAL MTR FLUX FREQUENCY MOTOR CURRENT MOTOR TORQUE FILT MOTOR TORQUE MOTOR POWER DC BUS VOLTAGE MOTOR VOLTAGE ACS800 TEMP OP HOUR COUNTER KILOWATT HOURS MOTOR 1 TEMP MOTOR 2 TEMP MOTOR TEMP EST DI6-1 STATUS R03-1 STATUS AI1 [V] AI2 [mA] AI3 [mA] AO1 [mA] AO2 [mA] XTDI6-1 STATUS XTRO6-1 STATUS XT AI1 [V] XT AI2 [V] XT AO1 [mA] XT AO2 [mA] CTRL LOCATION ACTUAL SIGNALS SPEED REF 2 SPEED REF 3 SPEED REF 4 TORQUE REF 1 TORQUE REF 2 TORQUE REF 3 TORQUE REF 4 TORQUE REF 5 TORQUE USED SPEED USED REF INFORMATION SW PACKAGE VER APPLIC SW VERSION APPLIC RELEASE DATE BOARD TYPE PUMP ACTUALS MOTOR T0RQUE Short Name SPD FILT SPD ESTI SPD MEAS ACT FLUX FREQ CURRENT TORQFILT TORQUE POWER DC VOLT MTR VOLT ACS TEMP OP HOUR KW hrs MTR1 TMP MTR2 TMP TEMP EST DI6-1 R03-1 AI1 [V] AI2 [mA] AI3 [mA] AO1 [mA] AO2 [mA] XTDI6-1 XTRO6-1 XT AI1 XT AI2 XT AO1 XT AO2 CTRL LOC FbEq 200 = 1% 200 = 1% 200 = 1% 10 = 1% 100 = 1 Hz 10 = 1 A 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 10 = 1% 1 = 1 VDC 1 = 1 VAC 1 = 1 C 1=1h 1 = 100 kWh 10 = 1 C 10 = 1 C 1 = 1 C Unit rpm rpm rpm % Hz A % % % VDC VAC C h kWh C C C 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 1000 = 1 V 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA V mA mA mA mA 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 100 = 1 V 100 = 1 V 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 0 = EXT1 1 = EXT2 200 = 1% 200 = 1% 200 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 200 = 1% V V mA mA EXT1, EXT2 Range PB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
S REF 2 S REF 3 S REF 4 TQ REF 1 TQ REF 2 TQ REF 3 TQ REF 4 TQ REF 5 TQ USED SP USED PCKG VER APPL VER APPL REL
rpm rpm rpm % % % % % % rpm
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 -
MTR TORQ MAX TORQ POWER
05.02 MAX MOTOR TORQUE 05.03 POWER
1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft 1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft 1 = 1 kW 1 = 1 Hp
Nm lbft Nm lbft kW Hp
137
Index Name 05.04 ROD TORQUE 05.05 05.06 05.07 05.08 ROD SPEED RUNTIME HOURS BACKSPIN SPD REF BACKSPIN OPERATION
Short Name ROD TORQ ROD SPD RUNTIME BSPN REF BACKSPIN WELL LVL
05.09 WELL FLUID LEVEL
05.10 DISCHARGE PRESSURE DCHRG PR 05.11 05.12 06 06.01 06.02 06.03 06.04 07 07.01 07.02 07.03 07.04 07.05 07.06 07.07 08 08.01 08.02 09 09.01 09.02 09.03 09.04 MEASURED TEMP ROD SPD REF CH0 DATASETS IN COMMAND WORD SPEED REF1 SPEED REF2 PUMP COMMAND AI1 SCALED AI2 SCALED AI3 SCALED AI5 SCALED AI6 SCALED LCU ACT SIGNAL1 LCU ACT SIGNAL2 STATUS WORDS MAIN STATUS WORD PUMP STATUS WORD ACTUAL SIGNALS FAULT WORD 1 FAULT WORD 2 ALARM WORD 1 LIMIT WORD MSD TEMP ROD REF CMD WRD SPD REF1 SPD REF2 PMP CMD AI1 SCAL AI2 SCAL AI3 SCAL AI5 SCAL AI6 SCAL
FbEq 1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft 1 = 1 rpm 1=1h 1 = 1 rpm 0 = INACTIVE 1 = ACTIVE 10 = 1 m 10 = 1 JNTS 1 = 1 kPa 1 = 1 psi 1 = 1 C 10 = 1 Prpm
Unit Nm lbft rpm h rpm
Range
PB -
INACTIVE, ACTIVE m JNTS kPa psi C Prpm - 3276832767 - 3276832767 - 3276832767 - 3276832767
2000 = 1 V 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA
02000 02000 02000 02000 02000
MN STAT PMP STAT FLT WRD1 FLT WRD2 ALM WRD1 LIM WORD
065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal)
138
Parameters
Index 10 10.01 10.02 10.03 10.04 10.05 10.06 10.07 10.08 10.09 11 11.01 11.02 11.03 11.04 11.05 11.06 11.07 11.08 11.09 11.10 12 12.01 12.02 12.03 13 13.01 13.02 13.03 13.04 13.05 13.06 13.07 13.08 13.09 13.10 13.11 13.12 13.13 13.14 13.15 13.16 13.17 14 14.01 14.03 14.04 14.05 14.07 14.08 14.09 14.11 14.12 14.13 14.14 14.15 Name/Selection START/STOP/DIR START / STOP 1 START / STOP 2 DIRECTION RUN ENABLE EMERG STOP INPUT STRT/STP 1 PTR STRT/STP 2 PTR RUN ENABLE PTR E-STOP PTR REFERENCE SELECT EXT1 EXT2 SEL EXT REF1 SELECT EXT REF1 MINIMUM EXT REF1 MAXIMUM EXT REF2 SELECT EXT REF2 MINIMUM EXT REF2 MAXIMUM EXT1/EXT2 PTR EXT1 REF1 PTR EXT1 REF2 PTR CONSTANT SPEEDS RAMPED SPEED SEL RAMPED SPD 1 RAMPED SPD 2 ANALOG INPUTS MINIMUM AI1 SCALE AI1 FILTER AI1 ms MINIMUM AI2 SCALE AI2 FILTER AI2 ms MINIMUM AI3 SCALE AI3 FILTER AI3 ms ZERO XT AI1 SCALE XT AI1 FILTER XT AI1 ms ZERO XT AI2 SCALE XT AI2 FILTER XT AI2 ms SCALE XT AI3 SCALE XT AI4 RELAY OUTPUTS RO1 POINTER RO1 TON DELAY RO1 TOFF DELAY RO2 POINTER RO2 TON DELAY RO2 TOFF DELAY RO3 POINTER RO3 TON DELAY RO3 TOFF DELAY XTRO1 POINTER XTRO2 POINTER XTRO3 POINTER FACTORY DI1 NOT SELECT FORWARD YES NOT SELECT +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SELECT AI1 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm AI1 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SELECT 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm 0V 100 100 0 mA 100 100 0 mA 100 100 0V 100 100 0V 100 100 100 100 +.008.001.01 0.01 s 0.01 s +.008.001.02 0.01 s 0.01 s +.008.001.03 0.01 s 0.01 s +.008.001.01 +.008.001.02 +.008.000.00 PCP DI1 NOT SELECT FORWARD YES NOT SELECT +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SELECT AI1 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm AI1 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SELECT 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm 0V 100 100 0 mA 100 100 0 mA 100 100 0V 100 100 0V 100 100 100 100 +.008.001.01 0.01 s 0.01 s +.008.001.02 0.01 s 0.01 s +.008.001.03 0.01 s 0.01 s +.008.001.01 +.008.001.02 +.008.000.00 ESP DI1 NOT SELECT FORWARD YES NOT SELECT +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SELECT AI1 0.0 Hz 50.0 Hz AI1 0.0 Hz 50.0 Hz +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SELECT 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm 0V 100 100 0 mA 100 100 0 mA 100 100 0V 100 100 0V 100 100 100 100 +.008.001.01 0.01 s 0.01 s +.008.001.02 0.01 s 0.01 s +.008.001.03 0.01 s 0.01 s +.008.001.01 +.008.001.02 +.008.000.00 PB 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 151 152 153 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 201 203 204 205 207 208 209 211 212 213 214 215
139
Index 14.16 15 15.01 15.03 15.04 15.05 15.06 15.08 15.09 15.10 15.11 15.13 15.14 15.15 15.16 15.18 15.19 15.20 16 16.01 16.02 16.03 16.04 16.05 17 17.01 17.02 17.03 20 20.01 20.02 20.04 20.05 20.06 20.07 21 21.01 21.02 21.03 21.04 21.05 21.06 22 22.01 22.02 22.03 22.04 23 23.01 24 24.01 24.02* 24.03 24.04* 24.05* 24.06* 24.09
Name/Selection XTRO4 POINTER ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1 MINIMUM A01 FILTER AO1 ms SCALE AO1 ANALOG OUTPUT 2 MINIMUM AO2 FILTER AO2 ms SCALE AO2 XT ANALOG OUTPUT 1 MINIMUM XT AO1 FILTER XT AO1 ms SCALE XT AO1 XT ANALOG OUTPUT 2 MINIMUM XT AO2 FILTER XT AO2 ms SCALE XT AO2 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS FAULT RESET SEL PARAMETER LOCK PASS CODE LOCAL LOCK PARAMETER SAVE DC HOLD DC HOLD ACTIVE DC HOLD SPEED DC HOLD CURRENT LIMITS MINIMUM SPEED MAXIMUM SPEED MAXIMUM CURRENT SPC TORQMAX SPC TORQMIN FREQ TRIP MARGIN START/STOP START FUNCTION CONST MAGN TIME FREE DIRECT MAGN STOP FUNCTION EME STOP MODE ESTOP COAST DELAY ACCEL/DECEL ACCEL TIME DECEL TIME EM STOP RAMP TIME RAMP SHAPE TIME SPEED REFERENCES SPEED REF SPEED CTRL TUNE PI TUNE DAMPENING COEF P-GAIN P-GAIN MIN P-GAIN WEAKPOINT P-GAIN WP FILT TIME INTEGRATION TIME
FACTORY +.000.000.00 +.001.006.00 0 mA 500 20000 +.001.001.00 0 mA 500 20000 +.001.006.00 0 mA 500 20000 +.001.001.00 0 mA 500 20000 NOT SELECT OPEN 0 OFF DONE NO 5 rpm 30.0% -1500 rpm 1500 rpm 200.0% 100% -100% 50.00 Hz AUTO 500.0 ms OFF RAMP STOP STOP RAMPING 5s 20.00 s 20.00 s 1.0 s 0.00 s 0.0 rpm OFF 2 10.0 10 0% 100 ms 2.50 s
PCP +.000.000.00 +.001.006.00 0 mA 500 20000 +.001.001.00 0 mA 500 20000 +.001.006.00 0 mA 500 20000 +.001.001.00 0 mA 500 20000 NOT SELECT OPEN 0 OFF DONE NO 5 rpm 30.0% -1500 rpm 1500 rpm 200.0% 100% 0.0% 50.00 Hz AUTO 500.0 ms OFF RAMP STOP STOP RAMPING 5s 20.00 s 20.00 s 1.0 s 0.00 s 0.0 rpm OFF 2 10.0 10 0% 100 ms 2.50 s
ESP +.000.000.00 +.001.006.00 0 mA 500 20000 +.001.001.00 0 mA 500 20000 +.001.006.00 0 mA 500 20000 +.001.001.00 0 mA 500 20000 NOT SELECT OPEN 0 OFF DONE (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) -1500 rpm 1500 rpm 200.0% 100% 0.0% 50.00 Hz AUTO 500.0 ms OFF COAST STOP STOP RAMPING 5s 20.00 s 20.00 s 1.0 s 0.00 s 0.0 Hz OFF 2 10.0 10 0% 100 ms 2.50 s
PB 216 226 228 229 230 231 233 234 235 236 238 239 240 241 243 244 245 251 252 253 254 255 276 277 278 351 352 354 355 356 357 376 377 378 379 380 381 401 402 403 404 426 451 452 453 454 455 456 459
140
Index Name/Selection 24.10 INTEG INIT VALUE 24.11 DROOP RATE 24.12 DERIVATION TIME 24.13 DERIV FILT TIME 24.14 ACC COMP DERV 24.15 ACC COMP FILT 24.16 SLIP GAIN 24.17* KPS TIS MIN FREQ 24.18* KPS TIS MAX FREQ 24.19* KPS VAL MIN FREQ 24.20* TIS VAL MIN FREQ 24.21 SPEED FDBK FILT 27 FLUX CONTROL 27.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 27.02 FLUX BRAKING 27.03 FLUX REFERECE 27.04 FS METHOD 29 SCALAR CONTROL 29.01 FREQUENCY REF 29.02 MAXIMUM FREQ 29.03 MINIMUM FREQ 29.04 IR COMPENSATION 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 30.01 MOT THERM P MODE 30.02 MOTOR THERM PROT 30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL 30.04 MOT1 TEMP ALM 30.05 MOT1 TEMP FLT 30.09 MOTOR THERM TIME 30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE 30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD 30.12 BREAK POINT 30.13 STALL FUNCTION 30.14 STALL FREQ HI 30.15 STALL TIME 30.19 MOTOR PHASE LOSS 30.20 GROUND FAULT 30.21 UNDERVOLTAGE 30.22 OVERVOLTAGE 30.23 AI<MIN FUNC 30.24 KEYPAD LOSS FUNC 30.25 EXTERNAL FAULT 34 AUTO FILT RESET 34.01 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL 34.02 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL 34.03 ROD TORQ CTRL 34.04 AI<MIN CTRL 34.05 UNDERLOAD CTRL 34.06 NUMBER OF TRIALS 34.07 OFF DELAY TIME 34.08 TRIAL TIME 34.09 PRESS SWITCH CTRL 34.10 LINE CONV CTRL 50 PULSE ENCODER 50.01 ENCODER PULSE NR 50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE 50.03 SPEED FDBK SEL
FACTORY 0.00% 0.0% 0.0 ms 8.0 ms 0.00 s 8.00 ms 100.0% 5 Hz 11.7 Hz 100% 100% 8.0 ms NO YES 100% OFF (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) DTC NO NOT IN USE 110 120 x.x s 100.0% 74.0% 45.0 Hz NO 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO FAULT ON ON NO FAULT NOT SELECT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 5.0 s 3600.0 s OFF OFF 2048 A_-_B_-_ INTERNAL
PCP 0.00% 0.0% 0.0 ms 8.0 ms 0.00 s 8.00 ms 100.0% 5 Hz 11.7 Hz 100% 100% 8.0 ms NO YES 100% OFF (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) DTC NO NOT IN USE 110 120 x.x s 100.0% 74.0% 45.0 Hz NO 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO FAULT ON ON NO FAULT NOT SELECT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 5.0 s 3600.0 s OFF OFF 2048 A_-_B_-_ INTERNAL
ESP 0.00% 0.0% 0.0 ms 8.0 ms 0.00 s 8.00 ms 100.0% 5 Hz 11.7 Hz 100% 100% 8.0 ms NO YES 100% OFF 0.00 Hz 50.00 Hz -50.00 Hz 0.0% DTC NO NOT IN USE 110 120 x.x s 100.0% 74.0% 45.0 Hz NO 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO FAULT ON ON NO FAULT NOT SELECT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 5.0 s 3600.0 s OFF OFF 2048 A_-_B_-_ INTERNAL
PB 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 526 527 528 529 576 577 578 579 601 602 603 604 605 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 1001 1002 1003
141
Index 50.04 50.05 51 52 52.01 52.02 52.03 70 70.01 70.02 70.03 70.04 70.12 71 71.01 71.02 71.03 71.04 71.05 71.06 71.07 71.08 71.09 71.10 71.11 71.12 71.13 71.14 71.15 71.16 71.17 71.18 71.19 72 72.01 72.02 72.03 72.04 72.05 72.06 72.07 72.08 72.09 72.10 72.11 72.12 72.13 72.14 72.15 72.16 72.17 72.18 72.19 72.20 72.21 72.22 72.23
Name/Selection ENCODER FAULT NTAC FILTER FIELDBUS DATA STANDARD MODBUS STATION NUMBER BAUDRATE PARITY DDCS CONTROL CH0 NODE ADDR CH0 BAUD RATE CH0 TIMEOUT CH0 COM LOSS CONTROL CHANNEL 3 ADDR PUMP CONTROLS MAX MOTOR TORQUE PUMP ENABLE BACKSPIN LIMIT ROD TORQ STOP LIM BACKSPIN ACCEL TIME BACKSPIN SPEED RANGE REDUCTION RATIO PUMP FLT RST SEL RUNTIME RESET SLEEP FUNCTION SLEEP AI SEL SLEEP DELAY TIME SLEEP LEVEL WAKE-UP LEVEL TORQUE UNITS PRESSURE UNITS DEPTH UNITS POWER UNITS SPEED REFERENCE PUMP SETUP HIGH PRESSURE SEL PRESSURE LATCH DISCHRG FLT ENA DISCHRG PRESS DISCHRG PRESS SEL HIGH DISCHRG TIME ROD TORQ TIME ENA ROD TORQ 1 FUNC ROD TORQ 1 LIM ROD TORQ1 SPD LIM ROD TORQ 1 TIME ROD TORQ 2 SPD ENA ROD TORQ 2 FUNC ROD TORQ 2 LIMIT ROD TORQ 2 TIME ROD TORQ 2 SPEED ROD TQ2 SPD TIME ROD TQ2 LIM COUNT LEVEL CTRL ENABLE FLUID LEVEL MAX FLUID LEVEL SET FLUID LEVEL SEL FLUID LEVEL P_GAIN
FACTORY ALARM 2 ms
PCP ALARM 2 ms
ESP ALARM 2 ms
PB 1004 1005
1 9600 ODD 1 1 Mbit / s 0 ms NO ERR CHK 1 (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible)
1 9600 ODD 1 1 Mbit / s 0 ms NO ERR CHK 1 (calculated) DISABLE -100.00 rpm 2.0 lbft 3.00 s 0.00% 1.00:1 PANEL RESET NOT SELECT NOT SELECT AI1 10.00 s 0.00% 0.00% lbft psi JOINTS KW MOTOR SPEED NOT SELECT LATCHING DISABLED 300.00 psi NOT SELECT 10.00 s DISABLED NO 100.00 lbft 5 rpm 15.00 s DISABLED NO 100.00 lbft 15.00 s 0.00 rpm 15.00 s 0 DISABLE 1000.00 JNTS 850.00 JNTS NOT SELECT 1.00
1 9600 ODD 1 1 Mbit / s 0 ms NO ERR CHK 1 (calculated) DISABLE -100.00 rpm 2.0 lbft 3.00 s 0.00% 1.00:1 PANEL RESET NOT SELECT NOT SELECT AI1 10.00 s 0.00% 0.00% lbft psi JOINTS KW MOTOR SPEED NOT SELECT LATCHING DISABLED 300.00 psi NOT SELECT 10.00 s DISABLED NO 100.00 lbft 5 rpm 15.00 s DISABLED NO 100.00 lbft 15.00 s 0.00 Hz 15.00 s 0 DISABLE 1000.00 JNTS 850.00 JNTS NOT SELECT 1.00
1051 1052 1053 1375 1376 1377 1378 1386 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 -
142
Index 72.24 72.25 72.26 73 73.01 73.02 73.03 73.04 73.05 73.06 73.07 73.08 73.09 73.10 73.11 73.12 73.13 73.14 83 83.01 83.02 83.03 83.04 83.05 84 84.01 84.02 84.05 84.06 84.07 84.08 84.09 84.79 85 85.01 85.02 85.03 85.04 85.05 85.06 85.07 85.08 85.09 85.10 85.11 85.12 85.13 85.14 85.15 92 92.01 92.02 92.03 95 95.01
Name/Selection LEVEL INTEG TIME LEVEL CTRL INVERT DSCH PRS TRIP LVL PUMP SETUP UNDERLOAD FUNC ROD TORQUE 1 ROD SPEED 1 ROD TORQUE 2 ROD SPEED 2 ROD TORQUE 3 ROD SPEED 3 U-LOAD ACT TIME THERM PROT FUNC TEMP FDBK TYPE KLIXON DI SEL PUMP PT100 AI SEL ALARM TEMP FAULT TEMP ADAPT PROG CTRL ADAPT PROG CMD EDIT COMMAND EDIT BLOCK TIMELEVEL SEL PASSCODE ADAPTIVE PROGRAM STATUS FAULTED PAR BLOCK1 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 OUTPUT OUTPUT USER CONSTANTS CONSTANT1 CONSTANT2 CONSTANT3 CONSTANT4 CONSTANT5 CONSTANT6 CONSTANT7 CONSTANT8 CONSTANT9 CONSTANT10 STRING1 STRING2 STRING3 STRING4 STRING5 FIELDBUS OUTPUT DATASET2 OUTPUT1 DATASET2 OUTPUT2 DATASET2 OUTPUT3 HARDWARE SPECIFIC FAN SPD CTRL MODE
FACTORY (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) EDIT NO 0 100 ms 0
PCP 10.00 s INVERT_PI 300.00 psi NO 15.00 lbft 1000.00 rpm 15.00 lbft 1000.00 rpm 15.00 lbft 1000.00 rpm 10.00 s NO KLIXON XT DI2 NOT SELECT 100.00 C 120.00 C EDIT NO 0 100 ms 0
ESP 10.00 s INVERT_PI 300.00 psi NO 15.00 lbft 1000.00 rpm 15.00 lbft 1000.00 rpm 15.00 lbft 1000.00 rpm 10.00 s NO KLIXON XT DI2 NOT SELECT 100.00 C 120.00 C EDIT NO 0 100 ms 0
PB 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1771 1772 1773 1825
NO 0 0 0 0
NO 0 0 0 0
NO 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 801 102 107 controlled
143
Index 95.05 95.06 95.07 95.08 95.09 95.10 98 98.01 98.02 98.03 98.04 98.06 98.07 98.09 98.10 98.11 98.12 98.13 99 99.01 99.02 99.03 99.04 99.05 99.06 99.07 99.08 99.09 99.10 99.11
Name/Selection ENA INC SW FREQ LCU Q POW REF LCU DC REF [V] LCU PAR 1 SEL LCU PAR 2 SEL TEMP INV AMBIENT OPTION MODULES ENCODER MODULE COMM MODULE DI/O EXT MODULE 1 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 AI/O EXT MODULE 1 AI/O EXT MODULE 2 DI DEBOUNCE FILT AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC AI/O EXT AI3 FUNC AI/O EXT AI4 FUNC START-UP DATA LANGUAGE APPLICATION MACRO APPLIC RESTORE MOTOR CTRL MODE MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE MOTOR NOM CURRENT MOTOR NOM FREQ MOTOR NOM SPEED MOTOR NOM PROWER MOTOR ID RUN CALC MOTOR TORQUE
FACTORY 0 0 0 106 110 40 oC NO NO NO NO NO NO 50 UNIPOL XTAI1 UNIPOL XTAI2 UNIPOL XTAI3 UNIPOL XTAI4 ENGLISH FACTORY NO DTC 0 0 50 0 0 NO (calculated)
PCP 0 0 0 106 110 40 oC NO NO NO NO NO N/A 50 UNIPOL XTAI1 UNIPOL XTAI2 UNIPOL XTAI3 UNIPOL XTAI4 ENGLISH PCP NO DTC 0 0 50 0 0 NO (calculated)
ESP 0 0 0 106 110 40 oC NO NO NO NO NO NO 50 UNIPOL XTAI1 UNIPOL XTAI2 UNIPOL XTAI3 UNIPOL XTAI4 ENGLISH ESP NO SCALAR 0 0 50 0 0 NO (calculated)
PB 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1901 1902 1903 1904 1906 1907 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1926 1927 1928 1930 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936
* Indicates parameters that are visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE.
144
145
Appendix A: Software One-Line Diagrams

Figure A-1 SPD/TQ Chain
146
ABB Oy AC Drives P.O. Box 184 FI-00381 HELSINKi FINLAND Telephone +358 10 22 211 Telefax +358 10 22 22681 Internet www.abb.com
ABB Inc. Automation Technologies Drives & Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin, WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785-3200 800-HELP-365 Fax 262 780-5135
ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd. No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing, P.R. China, 100015 Telephone +86 10 5821 7788 Fax +86 10 5821 7618 Internet www.abb.com
3AUA0000005224 / 3AFE68609259 Rev B / EN EFFECTIVE: 04/14/2008

VFD Documents

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

VFD Documents

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GEOIL&GAS ELAP110kVAACTIVEFRONTENDVFDPROJECT JOBINFORMATIONPACKAGE SERVTECH,INC JOB#11615 12/10/12 TableofContents 1.TitlePage 2.ElectricalSchematic 3.EnclosureDetail 4.SubpanelLayout 5.VFDDimensions 6.VFDRatingsChart(SelectionHighlighted) 7.ABBACS800U31HardwareManual 8.

L9 #14 THHN CP1 CP2

L4 #2/0 DLO X21 1 VREF 2 GND 3 AI1+

Marathon #EPBAD74 Distribution Block TB #2

+ Out 1 - Analog + Out 2

120 VAC TO 120 VAC CONTROL CIRCUIT

12A 14A 16A 17A

Citel #DS42-120 Surge Suppresion

C1A C1B #6 AWG

Citel #DS210-24DC Surge Suppresion Marathon #EPBAD71 Distribution Block

N IDEC PS5R-SC24 24 VDC Power Supply L1

ELAP Pump 110 kVA VFD 480VAC 3 PHASE POWER

Job No. 11615 A

FUSED DISCONNECT HANDLE

13.24" 19.75" 19.75"

<-- GRAIN -->

17.56" 1.75" 1.75 3.63"

3-PT. DOOR HARDWARE

3-PT. DOOR HARDWARE

<-- GRAIN -->

ELAP Pump 110 kVA VFD NEMA 3 Enclosure Detail

Servtech, Inc. Job No. 11615 A AAA

SUBPANEL FRONT VIEW 19.94" 18.25"

ABB Fused Disconnect #OS200J03

Marathon Dist Block #EPBAD71

Marathon Dist Block #EPBAD74

ABB VFD ACS800-U31-0120-5

Citel Surge Suppression #DS43-480

Hammond 750VA CPT

TB#1 120VAC Terminal Blocks

Marathon Dist Block #EPBAD71

ELAP Pump 110 kVA Subpanel Layout

TB#2 24VDC Terminal Blocks

TCI Capacitor #KCAP10A6B Cap hangs behind Line Reactor

Servtech, Inc. Job No. 11615 A AAA

Frame size R6 (IP21, UL type 1)

Low voltage AC drives

ABB industrial drives ACS800, single drives 0.55 to 5600 kW Catalog

Wall-mounted low harmonic drives ACS800-31, up to 110 kW

18 ABB industrial drives ACS800 single drives | Catalog

Ratings, types and voltages ACS800-31

Catalog | ABB industrial drives ACS800 single drives 19

ACS800 Single Drive Manuals

3AFE68599954 Rev A EN EFFECTIVE: 14.10.2005

2005 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

NEW (page 6): Safety / Installation and maintenance work

NEW (page 10): Safety / Operation

NEW (page 20): Contents

CHANGED (page 22): Installation and commissioning flowchart

NEW (page 31): Type code

NEW (page 49): Emergency stop

NEW (page 51): Safe torque off

NEW (page 111): ASTO-11C

NEW (page 111): Ambient conditions

To which products this chapter applies

Use of warnings and notes

Installation and maintenance work

Permanent magnet motor

About this manual

Common chapters for several products

Categorization according to the frame size

Categorization according to the plus code

About this manual

About this manual